SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

Product Reviews for my new Shopify Store – Is it too soon?

by Sam Landsberg @ WebFly

Nothing is more exciting than when customers begin to purchase goods from your new Shopify store. Receiving that first order can be an exhilarating experience! An important aspect of e-commerce is engaging with customers and learning how they use your products and what they like and dislike about it. Allowing customers to leave product reviews […]

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook ads effectively for your business? Do you want to get results without spending a lot of money? By selecting a well-targeted audience with your Facebook ads, you can reach your goals without breaking the bank. In this article I'll show you how to set up your Facebook ads to generate big results on a small budget. Listen to this article: Set Proper Goals Before you spend any money on Facebook ads, think about the objectives for your ad campaign. Once you've set your goals, you can better determine your budget. The four most popular Facebook campaign goals for businesses are building a targeted fan base, promoting owned content, generating conversions and promoting a local business. Here's a look at what you can do with a budget of 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars per day. #1: Build a Targeted Fan Base When you get started with Facebook advertising, growing the audience for your Facebook page is the logical first step. Fans are more likely to opt into your list, read your content and buy from you than non-fans. In other words, when highly targeted people like your page, it's an indication that they want to see your content. There are many ways to target Facebook ads to grow your audience. To get the most from a small budget, focus first on attracting the people who know you best. This audience has already invested in you and is likely to convert at a higher rate and lower cost than any other group. Target Your Email List If you want to create a custom audience based on your customer email list, go to Audiences in your Facebook Ads Manager. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Create Audience and select Custom Audience from the drop-down menu. Then click Customer List in the Create a Custom Audience dialog box. To create your custom audience, upload a .CSV file with your customers' email addresses. Facebook then populates the audience and gets it ready for you to target with your ads. Target Website Visitors One of the most powerful Facebook ad types is the website custom audience. The people who visit your website already know you and are more likely to respond positively to your ads. After you've targeted a custom audience for your email list (as described above), move on to promoting your page to website visitors. To create a website custom audience, you need to install a custom audience pixel in the header of your website. Facebook lets you create an audience based on traffic in the last 30, 60, 90 and 180 days. Set up an audience for each option. You might target this audience for people who have visited your site, but aren't yet fans of your page. Target a Lookalike Audience Depending on your website traffic, it's likely that you'll always have an audience to target. But if you want to expand your options, consider lookalike audiences. You can create lookalike audiences based on your custom audience of email subscribers or website visitors. Facebook will match your database within a 1% similarity, giving you a narrower audience to target. Access Audiences from the Ads Manager and then create a lookalike audience for the location you want to target. Target Interests If you're a new business with a small customer list and limited website traffic, you may be wondering how to target your Facebook ads. Interest targeting can be effective if you do it right, but overall it's generally less effective than the options above. The reason for this is that when you target a page or interest, Facebook gives you an audience that includes people who've expressed an interest or liked pages associated with your audience. If you ask Facebook to optimize your ads, they will show your ads to the people most likely to take action. Split-Test Your Audiences After you've set up your audiences, it's a good idea to test each one over a 72-hour time period. A good rule of thumb is to spend 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars...

Facebook Ads: Creative Application to Help Your Marketing

Facebook Ads: Creative Application to Help Your Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you been pondering using Facebook ads to promote your business? Did you know you can target your website visitors with Facebook ads? To learn how you can use Facebook ads to market your business, I interview Rick Mulready for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Rick Mulready, who is the host of the Inside Social Media Podcast—a show where he interviews successful social media marketers. Rick also teaches courses on Facebook ads. Rick shares creative and inexpensive ways to use Facebook ads to market your business. You'll discover useful ways to use remarketing, how to add the remarketing pixel to your website and tools to help manage your Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ads Creative ways businesses can use Facebook ads Rick shares that the common assumption that businesses have to spend a lot of money to run successful Facebook ad campaigns is a myth. He says businesses can be successful even if they spend as little as $5 or $10 a day. As examples, Rick mentions using Facebook ads to guide people into a giveaway to build your email list, or to geographically target people to let locals know about a discount, offer or promotion. You'll hear why Rick personally likes to use Facebook ads to promote his webinars. As marketers, we have to be aware that people aren't on Facebook to be sold to. Listen to the show to discover what type of freebie you should include in your offer. How remarketing works on Facebook Facebook came out this year with Website Custom Audiences, which are another form of retargeting or remarketing. Rick explains that you use these audiences by placing a Website Custom Audience (or remarketing) pixel on your website. The pixel tracks website visitors who are also Facebook users and builds an audience from them, so you can serve ads to them on Facebook. This is great. It lets you serve ads to warmer leads because they're already familiar with your business. Listen to the show to hear Rick's thoughts on using Facebook ads to grow page likes. About boosted posts If you boost a post, you're stuck with the preset levels for the ad spend and limited targeting. Rick says if you want more people to see a specific post, you're better off turning the post into a page post ad. To do that, you have to use the Ads Creator or Power Editor, but you'll have better control of your ad spend budget and deeper targeting options. Listen to the show to hear why Rick recommends that you don't boost posts. Exciting things businesses can do with Facebook ad targeting When most people think of targeting on Facebook, they think of interest targeting—for example, targeting people who like pages similar to your business page. Rick believes the really exciting stuff is Website Custom Audiences or uploading your email list to Facebook to create a custom audience that lets you target those people with your Facebook ads. You can take it a step further and create a lookalike audience of Facebook users from your own custom audience. These types of audiences are made up of Facebook users who share attributes similar to those in a custom audience you designate. Listen to the show to learn how including custom elements in your ad copy leads to a higher conversion rate.  Why pay Facebook to reach your email subscribers Rick explains this concept is the same as remarketing to your website visitors on Facebook.

How to Use Social Media to Improve Your Organic Search Engine Ranking

How to Use Social Media to Improve Your Organic Search Engine Ranking


Inc.com

Everyone knows the value of ranking number one for a keyword. But could social media be the one thing you are missing out on?

Selling With Video: YouTube and Facebook Video Marketing

Selling With Video: YouTube and Facebook Video Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to create a sales video that converts? Looking for expert tips about building rapport with your prospects? To explore how to sell with video on YouTube and Facebook, I interview Jeremy Vest. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jeremy Vest, founder of Vidpow, the YouTube-certified agency for big brands and channels including Hewlett-Packard, Funimation, and ServiceMaster. He also created Adobe TV, a video training site for Adobe, and he's the host of the TubeTalk podcast. Jeremy explains how to hook your viewing audience and introduce them to your product. You'll discover why remarketing is essential to improving conversions from your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Selling With Video Jeremy's Story Jeremy has been designing websites and marketing products online since 1998. He also loved teaching college-level web design, graphic design, and marketing classes. When Internet bandwidth increased enough to do online videos and courses, Jeremy realized he could teach many more people via video so he created xTrain, a video-based training company. Then, when YouTube came out in 2005, Jeremy started getting into it immediately. About four years ago, Jeremy launched Vidpow, which helps brands with strategy for creating videos. In his work for Vidpow, Jeremy combines his love for design with his interest in marketing, especially analyzing what improves conversion rates. Vidpow helps brands understand the universe of video and how to navigate it. Over four years, Vidpow has helped clients get more than a billion organic views. Listen to the show to find out how many websites Jeremy has created since 1998. Misconceptions About Selling With Video After Jeremy helps a client create an awesome ad or video strategy, the first thing the client often asks is, "Why aren't we getting massive sales?" Jeremy has to explain that there's no magic pill to sell stuff. It just takes time. Before people take their relationship with your brand to the next level, they need to see your brand 7 to 20 times, whether it's an email, your website, or social media ads. Even the most viral videos and the best sales videos don't produce that result. Instead, someone who has watched your video lands on your web page and gets put into your company's remarketing process. Jeremy believes that video is better than images for selling online. If a picture is worth a thousand words, what's a video worth? Text and pictures are great, but video has the highest capacity to show emotion. Showing your product or service with a video helps it sell better than any type marketing, other than connecting in person. Another misconception is that lots of views mean that your video is a success. However, if you're reaching the wrong people, they won't watch your video for very long. Because the YouTube algorithm prioritizes how long people watch your content, lots of short view times can harm your marketing. Listen to the show to hear me discuss a problem with an Instagram apps article that received lots of views. Traits of Successful Sales Videos Whether your video is on Facebook, YouTube, or Instagram, the first five seconds of your video have to be weird. Seth Godin calls this concept the purple cow. Even if you have a good or great video, odds are most people won't even watch it. The average view duration of Facebook video is six seconds so you have only a few seconds to engage someone and tell their brain to keep watching. One of Jeremy's favorites is the video created by Derral Eves and the Harmon Brothers for Squatty Potty.

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you spend too much time adding customer data to spreadsheets? Looking for ways to automate some of your marketing tasks? If you're creating content for a target audience, automated tools can free up your time to engage as a human when and where it matters most. In this article you'll discover four ways to integrate automated tools into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Search for Prospects You can use Twitter's search engine to pull together a list of leads, but the process can be time-consuming. For example, suppose you're looking for U.S. residents between the ages of 18 and 35 who are interested in Lincoln cars. Rather than do a Twitter search, let an automated tool like Audiense (formerly SocialBro) do the work for you. Once the search is complete, you'll need to check the results manually. If you added the word "Lincoln" to your search query, you want to follow leads who are interested in the car, not users quoting Abraham Lincoln in their profile. In other cases, you'll need to vet your leads. What are potential customers and audience members talking about in their tweets? Before you use automated tools to interact with users, you need to make sure that they're the users you're looking for. If you're looking for high-profile prospects, you can also use tools like BuzzSumo or Babbly to find profiles based on people's interests, past shares, and bios. For example, use the Amplification tab in BuzzSumo to search for influencers by topic. You can sort by the type of influencers you're looking for, such as bloggers, companies, or journalists. The results show each influencer's page authority, domain authority, follower count, retweet ratio, reply ratio, and average retweets. This allows you to separate and search through the list by goals and objectives. Then you can export those influencers to an Excel document and use it to target them with your marketing. #2: Segment Your Audience It's hard to remember life before Google Analytics and the days before beautiful dashboards of data existed on social media platforms. Now, you can mine most social media networks for insights and analytics data to help you understand who comprises your audience. For example, to find the demographics and locations of your Facebook fans, go to your page's Facebook Insights. Click the People tab to see a breakdown of the age and gender of your fans, where they live, and the languages they speak. Tools like Facebook Insights will provide data about your audience, but it's up to you to answer "so what?" and "why?" based on the segments represented in those numbers. #3: Engage With Leads Engagement is new territory in the world of automated tools. New tools allow you to connect with leads with strategic auto-interactions, which are a great icebreaker. Once you initiate a conversation, human interaction is essential. Your customer or audience wants to know that there are real people behind your business. Use a tool like Socedo to automate engagement with potential customers or initial engagements on Twitter. Socedo will ask you to specify who you're trying to connect with, what you hope to achieve, and what your message is. You'll also need to tell Socedo what actions to take on Twitter when you approve a lead. You'll need to approve or decline potential leads found by Socedo. Socedo will then take care of the rest based on the actions you specified. Some tools allow you to use auto-reply features based on phrases or words used in an inquiry. However, there's a margin of error that your response won't really answer the question asked. At that point, it's up to you to make sure your customers feel like they're being heard and want to continue engaging with your business. #4: Plan and Schedule Content Publishing content in real time isn't always possible when you have meetings to attend or work in a different time zone than your clients.

166. Boldly Go

166. Boldly Go

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week's show: Paul shares 10 ways to put your content in front of more people, Emily reviews Bubble Timer and we discuss the role of gender in design.

How to Increase the Facebook Visibility of Your Local Business

How to Increase the Facebook Visibility of Your Local Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have a Facebook page for your local business? Are you looking for ways to reach your customers on Facebook? Because your audience is naturally limited by the area you serve, local marketing on Facebook can be challenging. In this article you'll discover nine ways to use Facebook to get more local exposure for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Use Local Videos and Images Facebook native video is more visible and gets more reach in the news feed, so it's a good idea to have a Facebook video strategy for your local business. Really tailor your videos to appeal to local users. Add a fun video about a local event, share a quick tip or even cross-promote another business. Your video doesn't have to be professionally done to get results. This local video about elk in Estes Park received over 220,000 views, and led to at least one direct booking. Local images are also very shareable. If your business doesn't have regular images to post, take pictures occasionally when you're out and about in your town to share in the future. When your local clients recognize the area, they're more likely to visit your page and your business. #2: Feature Your Customers and Fans Share photos of happy customers on your Facebook business page. Personal photos help your visibility with the friends of your customers. Encourage people to tag themselves in your photos. Remember, a page cannot tag a fan unless the admin is a personal friend of that person. Only people can tag other people or people can tag themselves. Also, thank your customers from time to time. Post an image and tell your community how much you appreciate them. When you have a post such as a photograph that people can easily like, you increase your chances of being seen by those people in the future, because they have already interacted with your page. #3: Collaborate With Other Local Businesses One of the best ways to connect with your community is through other local pages. Interact regularly as your page with other local pages: share their posts, tag them, comment on their posts and show them a little love. This will make you more visible to their audience. A side benefit of promoting other pages in your community is they're likely to promote you too. Create a formal cross-promotion plan or just give other pages a shout-out from time to time to create goodwill. #4: Use Reviews Social proof and recommendations can benefit your business in a major way, so use the Reviews capability on Facebook for your local business. Reviews show up prominently on mobile phones especially. To enable reviews, make sure you set Local Business as your category and have a physical address. You also need to check the Show Map box on the About tab. For further details, see #6 of our Frequently Asked Facebook Questions post. Be sure to respond to all reviews (good and bad). If you have negative reviews, try to correct the issue. You may even want to consider giving your best customers a little incentive to leave a (hopefully positive) review about your product or service. #5: Build Your Email List One thing that many local businesses don't do often enough is build their email list. Once you have a list, you're able to email your customers to promote something new, share a contest and so on. Like with reviews, offer something good as an incentive to get people to opt into your list. #6: Create Local Awareness Ads Reach people who are near your business with a local awareness ad, either because they live nearby or because they’re in your area with their mobile device. Create a different call to action, such as Get Directions, for each ad. A local awareness ad is also the perfect way to attract someone to your business for the first time with a coupon. #7: Join Local Groups If your business focuses on B2B, then a networking group could be a great place to reach other business owners,

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more ways to use LinkedIn for your business? Have you considered showcase pages? LinkedIn showcase pages enable you to promote certain products or services to specific customer segments. In this article you'll discover how to use LinkedIn showcase pages for your business. Listen to this article: What Are Showcase Pages? Showcase pages are an extension of your LinkedIn company page and allow you to highlight a particular product line or brand. Although you need to have a company page to create showcase pages, they're somewhat of a standalone feature. Each showcase page has its own followers, status updates and functionality, sort of like a mini LinkedIn company page. Any showcase pages you've created for your business are listed in the right column of your company page. For example, IBM has a number of showcase pages, including IBM Cloud, IBM Analytics, IBM Security, IBM with MSPs, IBM Social Business and IBM Watson. Here's how to set up showcase pages for your business's products and services. #1: Choose a Page Name First, you need to choose a page name. To take advantage of showcase pages for SEO, include your target SEO keywords as part of the page-naming process. For example, because I provide search engine optimization training, I claimed, created and optimized the showcase page with the same name: Search Engine Optimization Training. The URL for the showcase page I claimed is http://www.linkedin.com/company/search-engine-optimization-training. As you can see from the URL, showcase pages are not directly linked to your LinkedIn company page. The URL just says .../company/..., and only the name of the showcase page is included in the URL. This means no one else can claim a LinkedIn showcase page with that same name. It's sort of like registering and claiming a really cool .com URL and making it yours. #2: Create a Showcase Page To create a showcase page, log into your LinkedIn company page, hover or click on the down-pointing arrow next to Edit and select Create a Showcase Page from the drop-down menu. You can claim up to 10 showcase pages for your company. If you need additional pages, reach out to LinkedIn’s support team and request them. #3: Optimize the Page for Search Without a doubt, Google loves LinkedIn company pages, and frequently ranks them high in search results if they're properly optimized. The same principle applies to showcase pages. The more followers you have and the more actively those followers engage with your showcase page, the better. There are a number of ways you can optimize your showcase pages for search. You get more SEO juice by including target SEO keywords in the showcase page name (as described earlier) and in the description. You can use up to 200 characters to draft an engaging and compelling product or service description, so make good use of this real estate. In the Website area of your page, make sure you include a link to the corresponding service or product page on your website. Also add your logo and a header image to your showcase page. For the header image, you can upload an image in the PNG, JPEG or GIF format. The maximum file size for the image is 2MB, and it must be 974 x 330 pixels or larger. Be sure to invite people to follow your showcase page and encourage them to engage with your posts. When you post status updates on the page, keep them focused and include your target SEO keywords. Companies Using Showcase Pages Here's a look at how three well-known companies use showcase pages to promote their products and services. Adobe Creative Cloud The Adobe Creative Cloud showcase page has more than 15,700 followers and features an excellent and relevant header image. The Adobe company page encourages visitors to follow all of their LinkedIn showcase pages. Intel IT Center The Intel IT Center showcase page, which has more than 47,200 followers,

32. In-house vs. outsourcing

32. In-house vs. outsourcing

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

The decision of whether to develop your website in house (by taking on additional staff) or outsource it to the third party web design company can be a tricky. This week Paul and Marcus look at the pros and cons of both approaches as well as throwing in some additional options for good measure.

Facebook Mobile Apps: A Guide for Marketers

Facebook Mobile Apps: A Guide for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage your Facebook marketing on the go? Are you looking for mobile apps to help you? Facebook mobile apps make it easier than ever for marketers to manage their pages and respond to customers in real time from their mobile device. In this article, you'll discover the key things marketers need to know about using Facebook mobile apps. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Your Page With the Pages Manager App Rather than use the native Facebook mobile app to manage your page, use Facebook's Pages Manager app. The app lets you manage up to 50 pages from your smartphone or tablet, and it's available for both iOS and Android. Manage Admins Facebook lets you assign five different types of admins: Editor, Moderator, Analyst, Advertiser, or another Admin (full access). To use the app to assign an admin role to someone, tap Page Settings and then Edit Page Roles. Next, tap Add Person to Page at the top of the screen and type in the person's name. Then select a page role for that person and tap Add. If you want to change someone's role, tap the pencil icon to the right of his or her name (as shown above). Then select a new role and tap Save to save your changes. Create Posts, Schedule, or Save Drafts Sometimes Facebook business users get confused about whether they're posting and commenting as themselves or their page. There is no confusion when using Pages Manager, because you need to sign directly into the app as your page. Even if you have your post attribution set to your profile by default, in Pages Manager, your default will be the page. Similar to the regular Facebook mobile app, you can create and publish all types of posts: status update, photo, video, share a link, or create an event. Plus, what many page admins might not realize when using the Pages Manager app is that you can schedule posts or save as a draft to come back and complete later. Just tap the three little dots in the lower right once you've created your post. These same features are available on desktop. Add Comments and/or Private Message One of the coolest new functions for Facebook pages in general is that you can respond to comments on your page, reply via direct message, or both. It used to be you had to wait for someone to direct message your page before you could reply via direct message. Now, you can message a user directly in response to a comment on your page. The message will come through as your page, whether you send the message via the regular Facebook mobile app or the Pages Manager app. This new feature is especially helpful for pages that receive comments of a particularly sensitive or negative nature at times. Being able to private message the person who made the comment can quickly defuse the situation and take it offline. I recommend also that you leave a comment so anyone viewing the comment thread can see you've clearly taken matters offline with a private discussion. Reply to Messages The ability to private message a page is optional. However, I strongly recommend that you have this feature enabled. Facebook wants Messenger for business to be the new 1-800 number. In fact, disabling the Message feature on your page is like publishing your phone number and then unplugging your phone. Facebook is moving towards a more integrated ecommerce and customer service experience with Messenger for Business. The more prompt and thorough your responses to private messages, the more you'll be able to set your business apart from the competition. Facebook encourages page owners to respond to all messages as promptly as possible, usually within five minutes, which can certainly be a challenge for busy business owners. To access your page messages through Pages Manager, tap the message icon at the bottom of the screen. You can view and reply to private messages as your page. You can also access the Saved Replies feature,

Facebook Mobile for Business: What You Need to Know

Facebook Mobile for Business: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you take Facebook with you on your mobile device? Turns out 543 million people access Facebook while out and about! To explore the marketing implications of mobile Facebook users, I interview Mari Smith for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this premier episode, I interview Mari Smith, author of The New Relationship Marketing and co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. Mari shares insights into Facebook mobile and the opportunities this new mobile environment gives businesses today. You'll learn about how to get your Facebook content seen by the large mobile audience and you'll also discover the best Facebook advertising options. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Mobile for Business What are the mobile marketing opportunities? Businesses need to understand why mobile users are important on Facebook. 543 million people use Facebook mobile each month 300 million photos are uploaded to Facebook each month Mobile is critical on Facebook because of the number of users and also because mobile users are twice as active on Facebook. Listen to the show to learn about the opportunities Facebook mobile users offer businesses and discover how mobile marketing has become an integral part of their social experience. How can Instagram and the Camera app on Facebook give you more options? Mari shares how Facebook is now positioned to take advantage of this mobile opportunity after acquiring the solely mobile app Instagram. She also brings up the possibility of Facebook rolling out Instagram.com profiles and the rumors of Facebook entering the hardware market and coming out with a phone. Mari also gives you a quick review of mobile apps and how they work. Listen to the show to learn more about what to expect in the future mobile environment. How should you adapt your marketing for mobile Facebook users? Mobile users consume content mainly through their Facebook news feed. With this in mind, here are some marketing tips for businesses to ensure visibility in these mobile news feeds: Post succinct content of 160 characters or fewer Make use of photos Ask short-and-sweet questions Be humorous and entertaining if appropriate Add calls to action Facebook Offers are popular with local businesses from a mobile standpoint. But if you don't use Offers, take advantage of your updates and post something like: "Are you on a mobile phone? Come in and get a free coffee." Listen to the show to understand how to adapt your marketing to reach mobile Facebook users.  What are the best paid advertising options on Facebook? Since going public, Facebook has made changes in the reach of content posted on Facebook and their advertising options. Many businesses are frustrated with Facebook now asking them to pay to get higher visibility for their content. Some businesses are finding value with Promoted Posts. Mari advises businesses to take the time to test Promoted Posts when their page has a low number of fans or has plateaued with a low engagement rate. Also, given the nature of the Facebook mobile app, Promoted Posts will get more visibility on mobile Facebook apps. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1f7G4bVVqO0 Listen to the show to discover other tactics to get your content in front of a larger portion of your audience. Survival Tip: Critical Blog Plugin A while ago, I experienced a nightmare blogging scenario. This is why I use the two WordPress security plugins Secure WP and WSD Security.

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

How to Easily Analyze the Social Activities of Your Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to freshen up your social media marketing? Have you thought about looking at other accounts for inspiration? Checking out what other companies are doing on social media can help you brainstorm your own content tactics. In this article you'll discover how to analyze your competitors' social accounts to inspire new marketing ideas. Listen to this article: Why Look at the Competition? Researching your competitors on social media not only provides an overview of your industry, but it also gives you insight into the current habits of the audiences you're targeting. By answering a few key questions, you'll see what kinds of posts are effective for the people you want to reach. #1: Analyze Facebook Pages If you want to gain insight into a company's Facebook page, here are some questions to consider: How many followers do they have? What are they posting about? Are their posts mostly internal (company-based) news, blog posts and articles; mostly external news, blog posts and articles; or a mix of both? What's their brand voice? How often do they post? How many likes/comments/shares do they get per post? Do they run any polls, contests or fun games with their brand? The Facebook page for Powell’s Books, a famous independent bookstore, is worth checking out as inspiration if you're a local business hoping to make a national footprint. One of the first things you'll notice is that Powell's takes the time to create their own graphics, which often include quotes from authors. It's a great twist on a sharable meme for a bookstore. They post photos of customers at individual stores and events, so you can assume their staff participates in social sharing (a great idea for local businesses). They also share interactive posts and comment on national conversation topics to keep the feed relevant to non-local fans. Interestingly, one of the biggest buzz-generators for Powell's Facebook page is when they share posts on books and publishing from other media, such as The New Yorker. Remember that sometimes social media successes can come from other sources. Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar brand can serve both local and national audiences with the right mix of photos and interactive content. #2: Look at Twitter Accounts If you're analyzing a company's Twitter account, here are some questions to answer to gain insight into their activities: How many followers do they have? How many accounts are they following? A good rule of thumb: An account with 50,000 followers that's following 500 users probably has more influence than an account with 50,000 followers that's following 49,000 users, unless they bought followers. What do they tweet about? Are they mostly mirroring their Facebook content, or is their content unique to the channel? Are their posts mostly internal, external or a mix of both? How many favorites/replies/retweets do they average per post? Does one engagement stand out over the others? Have they created lists? What hashtags do they use? Do they run any Twitter chats? Do they use Twitter cards for lead generation, email signups, etc.? If you look at the Twitter account for Moz, you'll notice that they use a photo in almost every Twitter post. Their photos all follow the brand's style and color scheme, and they've created a template for their Twitter images to accompany guest posts. Brand-wise, it's interesting that the "owner" of the Moz account is a robot named Roger. Choosing an on-brand character to run social accounts is a way the Moz brand stands out as playful in the generally more serious SEO industry. Key takeaway: Templates and a social media character can help a large brand stay consistent in social, even if multiple people are behind the account. #3: Examine Instagram Accounts Answer these questions to evaluate a company's Instagram account: How many followers do they have?

SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Bing fact checking, Google mobile tips & Bing agency awards appeared first on Search Engine Land.

150. User Manipulation

150. User Manipulation

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week's show Liz Danzico introduces us to user research, we learn 10 techniques for an effective call to action and discover how one button cost a company $300 million.

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for new ways to increase your Snapchat visibility? Have you thought about using Snapchat geofilters? When applied creatively, Snapchat geofilters can help you increase brand awareness, engage your community, and reach new audiences. In this article, you'll discover five unique ways to use Snapchat geofilters for business. Listen to this article: Why Geofilters? Snapchat's rise has been meteoric. Over 100 million users watch 10 billion video clips daily. The platform has transformed video storytelling, and its native tools have incredible social media marketing value. Now, you can create your own specific geofilters and use them to advertise to your audience. Snapchat geofilters are the perfect way to harness your audience's attention, because they're already digesting your content. Geofilters make it easier for your audience to engage and promote your product or brand organically. Here are some ways to use Snapchat geofilters for your business. #1: Announce New Product Launches When launching a new product, you want to encourage your community to find out more about it and ultimately make a purchase. By using a Snapchat geofilter, you're showing your audience that your products are important and worthy of branded filters. You're also adding a marketing element that connects the audience emotionally to the brand. Everlane's Elevate Summer used branded geofilters for its summer collection. The company also partnered with magazine editors for Snapchat takeovers. On the Everlane Snapchat account, the editors gave their opinions on collection favorites. With this approach, you can showcase the importance of a new product line and give real-time insights to your community on what products to check out. When you want to catch the eye of your audience for new products, create a Snapchat geofilter. #2: Share Company Culture To promote company culture and your business offerings, you can create a Snapchat geofilter for your office. Employees could become your biggest digital advocates as they use the geofilter to share with their communities. You can encourage employees to share behind-the-scenes events at your company or interview colleagues about their favorite parts of their job. This one-to-many sharing can impact your company in a positive way and your reach will be exponential. Sharing your company's strengths to a larger audience will encourage top talent to want to join the team. For Partner Day, HubSpot created a special geofilter using their signature orange hue. Employees and partners used the geofilter to highlight the best moments of the day. To encourage sharing, design a geofilter as a digital name tag that will allow users to insert text about who they are and what they do. Empower your employees to engage on Snapchat with a branded geofilter. It will help boost company morale and audience reach. #3: Promote Charity Events Using geofilters for live events creates an inclusive element that bonds the community. For charity events, they can help build awareness for a cause. Creating Snapchat geofilters for events will add an element of surprise and delight for your guests and will allow people to share the event in real time. They can also increase visibility and messaging in a fun and effective way. Imprint.City, a non-profit focusing on cultivating community through art, hosted a masquerade charity event to raise awareness. Because the attendees were already going to use social media at the event, organizers created a Snapchat filter to make the event more digitally accessible. Many community influencers used the filter, which helped spread the word about the organization and its cause. You can also use the snaps taken by your guests for future marketing materials. Promote them on other social networks or in pamphlets for fundraising efforts. #4: Support Your Presence at Trade Shows Getting prospects to your booth at trade shows can be a str...

What Drives the Most Phone Calls to Automotive Dealerships: Desktop or Mobile?

by Blair Symes @ DialogTech

In the past two years the automotive industry has experienced a pronounced and well-publicized shift from desktop to mobile shopping. Studies show that most shoppers run searches for vehicles and visit automotive websites on their mobile devices. Automotive manufacturers and dealers have responded by shifting the majority of their digital ad spend from targeting desktops and laptops to targeting mobile […]

The post What Drives the Most Phone Calls to Automotive Dealerships: Desktop or Mobile? appeared first on DialogTech.

10 ways to make the design process smoother

10 ways to make the design process smoother

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld Show we look at why the design process is often so painful and how to make things better.

How to Pawn Jewelry

How to Pawn Jewelry

by @ How to of the Day

Pawning jewelry for money is not typically an ideal situation since pawn shops offer high interest rates and price jewelry at a fraction of its true value. However, if you need a quick loan, pawning jewelry might be your only option. By taking the time to have your jewelry appraised, shopping around for the best loan deals, and getting your loan paid back on time, you can safely get the money you need and still get your jewelry back!

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

4 Ways to Increase Your Pinterest Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more visibility from your Pinterest marketing? Are you looking for ways to get your pins and boards seen by more people? There are some quick and easy tactics you can use to help more of the right people find and share your content on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover how to increase the visibility of your content on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Understand Who Uses Pinterest It's important to approach each social media platform as a unique entity. Although many networks have similarities, Facebook is different from Twitter, Pinterest is different from Instagram, and so on. One big difference among social platforms is your audience. Here's a look at Pinterest's overall demographics: Pinterest has 100 million daily active users, with over 500 billion Pinterest pins. 80% of Pinterest's users are female and 90% of all pins are created or shared by women. 13% of adult men who are online use Pinterest, with a 120% growth in male users in 2015. Millennials are using Pinterest as much as Instagram. 67% of Pinterest users are under the age of 40. 60% of Pinterest users are from the U.S. If you have a business account, you can get a picture of your unique audience demographics with Pinterest analytics. You can see whom you're connecting (and not connecting) with. To access Pinterest analytics, click the Analytics tab in the top-left corner of the screen and select Audience. View the Demographics tab to see pertinent information about your audience, including where people are from, their gender and the languages they speak. Once you have a good understanding of who your Pinterest audience is, you'll be able to create relevant content for them. #2: Appeal to Users Preferences It's important to find out what your specific audience's interests are so you can better tailor your content to them. Check out your Pinterest analytics to see your best-performing pins and boards and discover their other interests. Identify Top Content Choose Analytics > Profile to view engagement metrics for your Pinterest content. You'll see your top pins and boards from the past 30 days and how many impressions, clicks, repins, likes and either pin type or numbers of pins on the board. This data provides insights into which pins and boards are resonating with your Pinterest audience. Look at Audience Interests You can also review your analytics to see insights about the interests of your Pinterest audience. Choose Analytics > Audience and click the Interests tab to see images and labels describing common interests your audience members share. Some interests are generic, like Quotes, and others are more specific, like Casual Outfits. Try to find ways to incorporate your audience's other interests into your content. For example, if you run a cooking website but notice that a large percentage of your audience is also interested in camping, you can create pins like "10 Best Recipes to Make While Camping" or "Snacks for the Campfire." The more you adapt your content to appeal to your target audience on Pinterest, the better you'll be able to connect with them. #3: Write Search-Friendly Descriptions Though Pinterest users will often scroll through their main feed or the feeds of selected topics (such Women's Fashion, Cars and Motorcycles or Geek), they'll also frequently use Pinterest as a search engine to find content they're interested in. Because of this, it's important to add relevant tags and keywords to your pins. Strategically place keywords in the descriptions of your pins and in your boards to help users find your content when they're searching or browsing through feeds of a related category. For example, if your keyword is "campfire recipes," make sure you highlight it in your board description. Though not as prevalent as on Instagram and Twitter, hashtags make a frequent appearance on Pinterest.

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you noticed that social networks seem to change every week? How can anyone possibly keep up, right? We have a great new (and free) solution for you--the busy marketer. I'm excited to announce the new Social Media Marketing Talk Show audio podcast. Each week your friends at Social Media Examiner bring you: #1 News: Our news team breaks down the critical social updates of the week. #2 Commentary: We bring on industry experts to talk about what the news means. #3 Tips: You'll discover actionable insight that could give you an advantage. Social Media Marketing Talk Show In each episode, we cover the top 10 to 20 major announcements from Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, and Snapchat for the last week. On this week's Social Media Marketing Talk Show with Michael Stelzner, we explore Facebook's latest growth with Mari Smith; Amazon's social network, Spark, with Jeff Sieh; LinkedIn's new Web Demographics tool with Viveka von Rosen; and other breaking social media marketing news of the week! Your Action Plan Step 1: Click here now to SUBSCRIBE in iTunes/Apple Podcasts app (scroll down for other options). Step 2: Click the Subscribe button. Step 3: Download the episodes. Step 4: Sit back and enjoy the content, knowing you'll never miss important social media marketing news. Step 5: If you like Social Media Examiner, we'd love a review. Confused? Watch this video to discover how to subscribe on your iPhone. Here are some quick links to the new show on all major platforms: iTunes/Apple Podcast | Android | Google Play | Stitcher | RSS Hear More About the New Show To learn more about this new show, listen to this special episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast below...

Twitter Quality Score for Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

Twitter Quality Score for Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Twitter ads? Do you want a better return on your investment? Twitter uses its ads quality score to determine how your ads are displayed, and how much you pay if people engage with them. In this article I'll share how to create Twitter content that raises your Twitter ads quality to maximize the ROI on your Twitter ads. Listen to this article: Why Your Twitter Ads Quality Score Matters The Google AdWords’ quality score rewards advertisers who create engaging ads with much lower cost per click and more prominent ad placement. This year, Facebook introduced a quality score of its own, called relevance score, which determines your ad cost and placement on that social network. Now Twitter has jumped on board with a similar algorithm to reward the most engaging ads and penalize low-performing ads on their platform. Although there was no formal announcement, Twitter recently confirmed in a new section in the Twitter Ads Help documentation that they use it. (A few months ago, this section of the guide didn't exist.) So what does Twitter ads quality score actually do and how do you find out if your quality scores are any good? For starters, you can't actually see your quality adjusted bid in your Twitter Ads Manager. It remains a hidden internal metric for now. Regardless, Twitter's quality adjusted bids algorithm isn't some arbitrary metric you can ignore. As with Google AdWords, increasing the quality score on your Twitter ads actually earns you a huge click discount. In fact, on average, when you gain one point in the engagement rates on your ads, you see a 5% decrease in cost per engagement. Therefore, regarding Twitter ads campaigns, if you can get engagement rates up to 60% or so, the cost per engagement becomes one cent. If you can get it to 36%, it's two cents. On the other hand, if your engagement rate (and therefore your quality score) falls to 7%, the cost per click will go up to about eight cents per click. That's an 800% increase. Plus, really low engagement gets even worse (meaning more costly). If your engagement is something like 0.14%, you will end up paying a whopping $2.50 per engagement. That's more than 250 times more expensive than promoting a high-engagement ad. It's unnecessary to overpay for your ads like that when you can just as easily boost your Twitter quality scores and get substantially better rates. Here's how to master the Twitter ads quality score algorithm to get better engagement and rates on your Twitter ad campaigns. #1: Keep Twitter Ads Fresh to Retain High Impressions Twitter wants to show users the freshest content, so tweet new material regularly. No matter how good the ad, the number of impressions per day declines over time. And, as time goes on, Twitter is less likely to show older tweets. The solution is to create different variations of each ad. It will be much more effective, and have much higher visibility and engagement, than running the same ads for lengthy periods of time. #2: Build on Existing Engagement to Pay Less Rather than paying more than $2 per click to promote low-engagement (and poor) content, promote tweets that are already doing well. For example, the tweet below got 1,500 retweets. Plus, that piece of content received 100,000 visits referred from Twitter. And all for $250. When you pay to promote high-engagement tweets, it will often give your organic performance a boost. People will want to share popular tweets they see on their own networks. Besides, you don't pay for those additional retweets and engagement. Remember, though, if you promote content no one wants to engage with or share, you pay more for each click. Furthermore, you will see little (if any) free organic engagement. My strategy is not to promote every tweet. I only promote the top 1% to 3% of status updates with 15% or greater engagement rates. When I do,

17 Tips for Successful Facebook Contests

17 Tips for Successful Facebook Contests

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you planning a Facebook contest? Want to make sure it's a success? An easy-to-follow checklist of tips and best practices will help you launch Facebook contests your audience will love. In this article I'll share 17 tips to make your Facebook contest a success. Listen to this article: #1: Review Facebook's Terms of Service Facebook periodically changes its rules and regulations about contests and other promotions. Be sure to check the Facebook Guidelines page before you launch your contest. #2: Set a S.M.A.R.T. Goal A S.M.A.R.T. goal is one that's specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely. Make sure you clearly define your contest's goals before you start planning. Do you want to promote a new product? Grow your email list? Perhaps you're looking to gather a bunch of user-generated content such as photos and videos. To set your Facebook contest up for success, focus on one or two attainable goals. #3: Choose the Contest Type Consider running caption, photo-vote, video-vote, and sweepstakes contests, which are always popular on Facebook. Sweepstakes are the easiest to enter and the key to driving lots of entries is to pick the right prize. Del Mar Fans & Lighting's straightforward Facebook giveaway requires entrants to simply vote on which lighting product they prefer. Once they vote, they're entered. When the contest ends, a company rep will choose a winner at random. Remember, you need to develop a contest that will help you reach your goals. Try a photo- or video-vote contest if your goal is to collect user-generated content. #4: Select the Right Software Figure out what software you need to run and manage your contest. Look for software with built-in voter verification features, so everything is on the up and up. If you want to collect email addresses or other contact information, use third-party software that will help you organize all of the data you collect. If you'd like to increase engagement, run a Facebook timeline contest. Choose a comment/like importer tool that allows you to collect a Facebook user ID number and name from everyone who engages with your post. Whatever type of contest you choose, remember you can use the information you collect for future marketing efforts.  #5: Set a Time Frame Decide how long your contest will run and let your audience know. Companies offering valuable prizes, like a trip to Paris for two, tend to let contests run for longer periods of time than those offering smaller or local prizes, like a meal or a one-night stay in a hotel. Some companies even do a weekly or monthly giveaway. Palmer's Canada recently ran a "Celebrate the New Year Giveaway," during the month of January. At the top of the rules document, the contest period is listed, right down to the time zone. How long your contest runs is up to you. Just make sure you share the time frame in all of your promotions. #6: Create Rules Write a description of how the winner will be chosen, such as randomly or by community vote. For example, BroadStreet Publishing hosted a 21 Days of Love Valentine's Day giveaway. In the rules they state that "a winner will be chosen at random," among other considerations. Consider including a rule that says voting is only part of the process, and a judge or panel of judges will determine the final winner. Make sure to include a line stating that if you suspect fraud, you have the right to determine the winner. #7: Determine Who Can Enter Are you a local business hoping to increase foot traffic to your store or restaurant? Consider limiting entries to people who live within a 50-mile radius of your business. You can also specify age ranges and even gender in your contest rules. KLIM, a company that makes technical outdoor apparel, is looking for women to model its clothing. In the contest rules, they specify that they want family-friendly images and "No duck face selfies."

33. Creating a great search facility

33. Creating a great search facility

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

In their 33rd podcast Paul and Marcus look at how to create the most effective in-site search facility, the differences between RGB, CMYK, Pantone and HEX, and the importance of keeping up-to-date with web development techniques.

7 Biggest PPC Nightmares Sinking Your ROI

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

PPC advertising should be straightforward. You buy an ad. Your ad appears on Google. That ad gets clicked. You spend a little dough per click, and voila – you’re a marketing genius. Traffic is booming and you’re appearing in all the right places. Except that’s not always how it works. And for some strange reason, […]

5 Basic Tips to Improve Organic Search Rankings

5 Basic Tips to Improve Organic Search Rankings


Performance-Based Online Marketing Agency

Every business wants to show up on the top of search results when consumers are searching for product or service that they sell. Every single day millions

Email and Social Media: Why Marketers Need Both

Email and Social Media: Why Marketers Need Both

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use email marketing for your business? Are you wondering how email and social can work well together? To learn how email marketing can integrate with social media, I interview DJ Waldow for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview DJ Waldow, co-author of The Rebel's Guide to Email Marketing. He's also the founder of Waldow Social, where he consults with businesses that want to improve their email marketing. DJ also co-hosts The Work Talk Show podcast. DJ shares why you should focus on email marketing and work it into your social media activities. You'll learn how to grow your email list using social media and get your blog readers to take action. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Email Marketing and Social Media Marketing Why social media marketers should focus on email marketing DJ tells a story of when he heard Jeff Pulver talk about his famous quote, "You live and die by your database." DJ explains how it's a phrase that he probably says at least once a week. The reason it's so important is because when it comes to marketing, email is your database. You have a virtual database of social media followers, but your database is your email contacts. Email is the glue that binds everything together. DJ doesn't discount social media, and he uses it a lot. But he explains that if Facebook decided to change their terms of service, then the connection with your friends and followers could disappear. Email addresses stick with you. With Facebook, there are over 100 different email notifications. Even if you turn off most of the notifications, Facebook still messages you through email and Twitter does the same. You'll discover how all social networks use email marketing. Listen to the show to find out why DJ encourages people to log out of Facebook or Twitter and go back to these sites for the first time. Why social media marketers should work email into their social media activities DJ explains how he has heard "social media folks" talking more about email. You'll hear examples of how Chris Brogan and Amy Porterfield focus on how to grow their email lists. You can take the loyal followers you have on social networks and bring them over to your email list. You'll find out the advantages of bringing your social media connections over to your email list and why it's easier to sell via the email channel versus the social channel. Listen to the show to find out how at Social Media Examiner, we have about 500 new people every day come to our content. Where email is heading in the future DJ shares how a lot happens with email behind the scenes that the average person doesn't necessarily see. There has been innovation around filters impacting email deliverability. From a consumer standpoint, there is a new app called Mailbox that helps you manage all of your marketing messages in one place. DJ has started to see a lot more integration of email into social and can see it play out in a couple of different ways. One of his favorite plugins for Chrome and Gmail is Rapportive. It sits on the side of Gmail and as you hover over somebody's email address, if that email address is used publicly to tie to different social networks, it will pull in all that information. You'll hear an example of what information it will show about that person and how salespeople can use it. DJ explains that the advantage of this plugin is that it shows a little bit more about wher...

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish long-form content? Are you wondering if the new LinkedIn publishing platform can help your business? To learn about the LinkedIn publishing platform and why you may want to consider it, I interview Stephanie Sammons for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stephanie Sammons, who is a LinkedIn marketing expert and CEO of Wired Advisor, a digital marketing platform that helps financial advisors create and publish content. She blogs at Build Online Influence. Stephanie shares how marketers can make the most out of the LinkedIn publishing platform. You'll discover what type of content works best, when to schedule posts and how you can use the platform to grow a following. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Publishing Platform What is the LinkedIn publishing platform? Stephanie explains that the LinkedIn publishing platform was first made available to around 500 LinkedIn influencers. These individuals were chosen by LinkedIn to be a part of the initial rollout. More recently LinkedIn has opened up the publishing platform to all 277 million+ members. It will be rolled out over time, allowing every single person the opportunity to publish his or her own content on the LinkedIn platform. Listen to the show to find out why this new addition is great for publishing long-form content. Does the LinkedIn platform support images and multimedia? Stephanie says that you can embed content from SlideShare, which is owned by LinkedIn. It's a network where you can publish PowerPoint presentations, Keynote presentations, PDFs, white papers, infographics and embed videos from YouTube. In addition, you can embed images in the posts that you publish to LinkedIn. The formatting capabilities are very similar to a basic blogging platform. It's a little bit easier to use than WordPress, although you don't have the ability within the editor to categorize or tag your posts. You can use headers, bullets, numbered lists, bold, italics and hyperlink text as well. Listen to the show to find out why it's really important to double-check your post before you hit Publish. Marketers and business owners should consider posting content on LinkedIn You have to remember that LinkedIn is your professional identity online and this not only gives you an opportunity to demonstrate and illustrate your expertise, but also to get in front of a very active and engaged audience. You'll discover why you now have the ability to grow a following on LinkedIn—even with people who aren't in your LinkedIn network—and how this can be a huge benefit to your business. It's still important to have your own platform that's away from all of the other social networks. One of the real advantages of when you use the LinkedIn publishing platform is that you can grow an audience very fast. My friend Dave Kerpen, the founder of Likeable Media, is a great example. Although he has mostly written for traditional print and didn't really have a huge platform online, he was able join the original LinkedIn influencer network. Since then, he has seen amazing growth as a result of the articles he has published on the platform. You'll hear about an article that Dave wrote on the LinkedIn publishing platform about 10 Marketing Podcasts That You Ought to Listen to and how this affected the podcasts mentioned in a phenomenal way. When you put your content together,

Why you aren’t getting the best digital staff and what you can do about it

Why you aren’t getting the best digital staff and what you can do about it

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

The chances are you are making mistakes in how you recruit digital staff. The result is you aren't getting the best people possible.

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter marketing working? Do you want more engagement for your tweets? Knowing how to write your tweets and when to publish them can increase visibility, boost engagement and drive traffic to your site. In this article you'll discover eight tips to deliver better tweets. Listen to this article: #1: Tweet Without Links Research shows that tweets without links get more engagement. Remember that not everything you tweet has to have a link. If you limit the number of links you share on Twitter, you'll add value to the ones you do. For example, I tweeted this same quote with and without a link. The one without the link got more engagement. Twitter is an excellent platform to build your brand and create trust, so spend time developing relationships with your followers rather than just sharing a lot of links. Plus, when you tweet fewer links, the people who trust you know whatever links you choose to share are likely worth clicking. #2: Use the Right Hashtags If you want to get noticed, add hashtags that give your tweets context. It's important not to overdo it with hashtags, however. Handy tools like Hashtagify and RiteTag can help you find the right hashtags to use. Find Hashtags With Hashtagify Hashtagify allows you to search for a hashtag you want to use. In the Search box, type in your hashtag (socialmedia, for example) and press Enter. The results let you see the most popular related hashtags. By default, you see the results in Basic Mode view, which looks like a mind map. Click the Table Mode button to see the related hashtags ranked in order of popularity. You can use any of these alternative hashtags or combine several of them for each tweet. Check Hashtag Relevance With RiteTag Once you determine what hashtags you want to use, use a tool like RiteTag to find out how relevant they are. Go to RiteTag and sign in with (and authorize) your Twitter account. Then click the New button at the top of the page. In the Compose New Tweet box, type in your tweet. You'll notice that when you add hashtags, RiteTag gives you a color-coded rating for each hashtag in real time. Green is good, blue is cool and red is overused. RiteTag also has a Chrome extension that shows the tool's codes and analytics for your tweets whenever you use Twitter, Buffer, Hootsuite or another platform to compose or schedule a tweet. Using Hashtagify and RiteTag together is a great way to find effective hashtags for your tweets to get the most visibility and reach. Use these tools to do research and then build a library of hashtags for your future tweets. #3: Add Images for Shared Links It's no surprise that tweets with images stand out and get more engagement than tweets without images. Fortunately, there are a variety of tools you can use to find the right images to use in your tweets. Twitshot is an online tool you can use in any browser that makes it easy to find images to use when you share links. It's also available as a Chrome extension and iOS app. Compose your tweet in the Twitshot tweet box and paste in the URL you want to share. Twitshot then searches for and lets you see all possible images that go with that link. Select one of the available images or upload your own image. Everyone knows that tweets with images stand out, but not everyone takes the time to add them. Consistently incorporating images will improve your engagement. #4: Tweet With the Proper Format To compose a tweet in the proper format, you need to have all of the individual elements in the correct order. Start your tweet with text and then add a link. Make sure to include the attribution with @mentions if applicable. Then add hashtags and insert your image. Now that you know the rules for composing a tweet, you can break them for effect. Come up with multiple ways to tweet the same information to add variety to your Twitter stream.

144. Scale

144. Scale

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week’s show Paul talks to Joe Stump from Digg about scalable websites, we review the best apps for web designers and investigate services for sending bulk emails.

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Facebook? Are you wondering how a small business can benefit from Facebook marketing? To learn about the opportunities for small businesses, I interview Ramon Ray for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ramon Ray, the author of The Facebook Guide to Small Business Marketing. He's also the founder of Small Biz Technology and the guy behind a great event called Small Business Summit. Ramon shares his tips and techniques when it comes to Facebook marketing. You'll learn how to grow a larger following on Facebook and turn Facebook engagement into sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The marketing opportunity for small businesses When it comes to business, although Facebook is a great networking tool, Ramon believes that the most important thing any small business should do is start with a website and focus on email marketing. Facebook is the biggest social network out there and it's where your prospects, customers, friends and family are. Not only will Facebook help you find specific people, it also allows you to target these people. Ramon explains how Facebook having access to so much rich information makes it very simple for them to approach you and ask whom you want to advertise to. They are able to narrow it down. With Facebook, you can do this with a good degree of granularity, which works well for many people. Listen to the show to find out how marketing has changed from 10 years ago and how it's a lot more economical now. Some ways to grow a larger following for small business owners on Facebook Ramon lists three things that small businesses should do to grow a larger following on Facebook. Be consistent with your posting Be relevant Be excited about it Remember people aren't necessarily on Facebook to buy, per se. They're there to have fun. Many small business owners on Facebook don't realize the interconnectedness among people. You'll hear an example of how interaction can lead to more of your fans being drawn to your Facebook Page. Ramon believes that there is no other platform that allows you to create deeper engagement than Facebook does. When it comes to advertising a post, there are so many different ways to do it. Small business owners use Facebook as an engagement platform. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook can help you connect not only to individuals but their networks as well. How Facebook groups differ from LinkedIn groups Ramon states that although LinkedIn has some big, powerful groups, he believes the advantage that Facebook has goes back to friends of friends. This is where Facebook might have the edge. For example, with regards to LinkedIn groups, marketers talk about how to build the group and how you get the LinkedIn alerts. However, when you create a group on Facebook, you can make it private or public. In Ramon's opinion, what's nice is that overall, you are still operating in the realm of Facebook. The main differentiator when deciding whether to create a Facebook group or a LinkedIn group is, "What is your audience using?" When it comes to Facebook groups, you have to keep in mind that some are public and some are private. And Facebook has a very powerful search feature. Ramon talks about the rules of engagement for Facebook groups when it comes to business owners looking for opportunities. Don't dive in there and start selling your products.

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is fear holding you back in your business? Are you wondering what you can do to face your fears? To learn about the kinds of fears we deal with as marketers, I interview two small businesses owners for this 52nd episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, it's a panel discussion with Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income, and John Lee Dumas, the host of Entrepreneur on Fire. Both Pat and John share the fears that could have held them back in their businesses. You'll learn about the common fears marketers face and practical steps you need to implement. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Overcoming Fear John, what were some of your doubts when you had the idea of starting a podcast? John says that he had many doubts and fears when he had the idea for his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. The idea for the podcast came about when he was on a commute to work as a commercial real estate agent. He liked to listen to podcasts and soon ran out of content to listen to. At the time, Pat Flynn had his Smart Passive Income podcast, for which he released one episode every two weeks. John soon realized that if he was running out of content, then so were others. He had the idea to start Entrepreneur on Fire as a 7-day-a-week podcast featuring interviews with today's most inspiring and successful entrepreneurs. In the beginning, John approached Jamie Tardy, The Eventual Millionaire, for mentoring. She agreed but thought he was crazy to commit to 7 days a week. Jamie thought it would be too much for his listeners to consume. John also joined Cliff Ravencraft's Podcast Mastermind and was told the exact same thing. You'll hear what John did with the advice from mentors and people already in that space. Listen to the show to hear the fears and doubts John had, and still has today. Pat, in the early days what were some of your fears? Pat shares the fears he faced when he first started out. One of the them was that the work wouldn't be appreciated or seen and whether it was the right thing to do. One of the biggest was the fear of failure and looking bad. When he was first let go from his job, he had the fear of not being able to provide for his family. He wanted to go down the path that was good for his and his family's future. You'll discover the kind of support Pat received from his wife, family and mentors. It helped him face the fear, doubt and resistance he encountered and got him to take action. When he wrote his first ebook in 2008, which was aimed at the architecture industry, he feared that nobody would buy it. This is one of the things that could have easily stopped him from writing the ebook. The take-home message is that you may not know John, Pat or me, but one thing is certain: We have all dealt with significant fear. We have all overcome it and gone on to do some pretty exciting things. Listen to the show to hear my story of when I put my idea for a social media blog out to some extremely influential people. My idea became Social Media Examiner. What about the fear of missing out? John believes the fear of missing out is prevalent. As entrepreneurs, it's the bright, shiny object syndrome. You see all these amazing platforms that you want to try. With all this going on around him, John always tries to remain focused. His passion is for podcasting and interviewing entrepreneurs. So his focus is to follow one course until he succeeds and it has stood him well.

10 ways the weather is more than a marketing channel

10 ways the weather is more than a marketing channel

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Visual Storytelling: How to Use Visuals, Videos and Social Media to Market Your Business

Visual Storytelling: How to Use Visuals, Videos and Social Media to Market Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals to market your business? Are you wondering how you can tell a story with visuals? To learn how your business can benefit from visual storytelling, I interview Ekaterina Walter for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ekaterina Walter, chief marketing officer at Branderati and author of Think Like Zuck. Her newest book is called The Power of Visual Storytelling. Ekaterina shares why storytelling is important for your business. You'll discover how to get started, the type of visuals that work and brands that do it well. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Storytelling How did you fall into visual storytelling? Ekaterina explains how her job at Intel for the last 5 years was building social business, and it was during her final 3 years there that she started to notice the perfect shift to visual storytelling. So for her, visual storytelling was a natural progression. Several years ago, she started to look at the data and usage of visuals versus the usage of just text and links. This led to her first blog post on Fast Company, called The Rise of Visual Social Media. You'll hear why this particular article led Ekaterina to write more on this subject. Ekaterina believes that the reason why visuals are so well-received is that we are moving into a world that is inundated with information. There are filters that allow us to stand out from the noise. One of them, in Ekaterina's view, is visual marketing and visual storytelling. Listen to the show to find out what term Ekaterina uses for the world we are moving into. What is visual storytelling and why should marketers consider it for their business? The way that visual storytelling is defined in Ekaterina's new book, The Power of Visual Storytelling, is the use of images, video, infographics and potentially presentations and other visuals in social media. The use of visuals on social media platforms can help you craft a graphic story around your brand's key values and offerings. It helps show who you are as a brand and makes consumers want to connect with you. With the rise of millennials (digital natives and the younger generation), it's essential that they not only know what you offer or how useful a product is, but also how they can be part of the movement and fit within that tribe. It's what visual storytelling allows you to do. It's how you reach that emotional connection with your customers. Recently, Jason Miller of LinkedIn created a widely shared infographic titled, A Well-Balanced Blog. The reason why this type of content works is that it's simple thinking. Our brains process visuals 60,000 times faster than text. About 93% of all communication is nonverbal. You'll hear an example of how you can gather a story from an image, rather than a word on its own. The emotional connection is critical. Studies show that blog posts with visuals drive up to 180% more engagement than those without. This means that a visual image can allow people to digest your content, then decide if they want to continue to read the article. The amount of information that is produced every 48 hours is the same amount that was produced from the beginning of time up until 2003. Every year, our attention span becomes shorter. Now it's about 3-8 seconds. Therefore you need to grab people's attention immediately. Sephora is a great example of a brand that uses images very well.

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a social media plan? Are you wondering how to build a social media strategy for your business? To learn about the importance of a social media strategy, I interview Neal Schaffer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of Maximizing LinkedIn for Sales and Social Media Marketing. He's a social media consultant and coach. His newest book is Maximize Your Social: A One-Stop Guide to Building a Social Media Strategy for Marketing and Business Success. Neal shares the unique insights he gained while working overseas with companies that had to build their sales organizations from scratch. You'll learn the core elements your social strategy needs to be successful and sustainable. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Marketing Plan Many marketers are solely focused on the 'how' rather than the 'why' of social media Neal states that you should operate with a plan. The most precious resource for a marketer is time. Social media can drain your time, especially with the emergence of new platforms. You need to have a plan—and more importantly, an objective—and be able to measure what you are doing. For a small business it's one thing, but if you are doing it on behalf of a client or a brand/company, they want to know what they will get out of their social media budget. As social media becomes a mass skill, Neal thinks we'll see a lot more corporate oversight into what people do in social media. If you concentrate on the tactics alone, then the value of a Facebook like is meaningless. It might be a secondary metric, but at the end of the day, you need to know how it affects your business objectives. If you just look at the tactics, you completely miss the whole business picture. As a small business owner, it's easy to get caught up in the numbers. There is more focus on the 'how,' because you can be too concerned about trying to keep up with everyone else. You'll hear Neal give an example of a hotel client's Facebook strategy and how it's not all about the number of likes you have compared to your competitors. Likes are important to companies that want to get brand recognition in the marketplace—although it's not a business objective, it's more brand awareness. Listen to the show to find out why the number of likes is only one indicator in comparing yourself to your competition. How working abroad helped Neal in the new world of social media After graduating from college, Neal moved to Japan, where he helped three companies in the high-tech industry. Neal says it provided him with a lot of extremely holistic business experience. He had to launch their sales organizations from scratch and had to figure out how to get brand recognition across different countries in markets where they weren't known. These jobs included sales and marketing, attending conferences, hiring people, dealing with legal issues and offering customer support. All of these roles led Neal to a very holistic view of social media in terms of not just using it for marketing but throughout the enterprise. You'll hear why storytelling helped strengthen these Chinese brands and Japanese technology. Neal gained unique insights while working with these companies and it has given him a way to look at things in a practical, rational and actionable way. Listen to the show to find out about the analogy of thinking about a social network like a country.

Starting a Podcast: What You Need to Know to Succeed

Starting a Podcast: What You Need to Know to Succeed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you listen to podcasts? Are you interested in starting your own podcast? To learn why you should start a podcast and what you need to know to get started, I interview Cliff Ravenscraft for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cliff Ravenscraft, the world's leading evangelist on podcasting and founder of Podcast Answer Man. Cliff shares his knowledge and experience of hosting many different podcasts. You'll learn practical tips and advice you can use to start your very own podcast. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting Your Own Podcast Why is now a good time to start a podcast? Cliff believes that now is a great time to start a podcast. Recently, CNet reported that Apple is going to end up selling 1 billion iOS devices by 2015 and already 410 million of these devices have been sold. You'll learn about Apple's official Podcasts app and how this has had a very dramatic and positive impact on those podcasts that are listed in iTunes. And in September, CNet reported that 500 million Android devices have already been activated. Cliff shares why it's easy to get people hooked on podcasts. It only takes 5 to 10 minutes to install a free podcast app on a smartphone and it's easy to subscribe to your first podcast. You'll also learn some interesting numbers to note. For instance, 30 million people have a gym or a fitness club membership, and 97 million people in the USA drive to and from work every day alone in their car, with an average commute time of 26.2 minutes. Cliff believes podcasting is different than when it first came out because of the smartphone. The smartphone makes it easy for anybody to subscribe from their device. You don't have to be technically savvy anymore. Every time people go into their app, your latest episode is going to be there for them. Listen to the show to find out more reasons to start a podcast. What are the different types of show formats? Cliff believes there is no limit to the type of podcasts that can be created. Cliff  started podcasting as a hobby in the entertainment genre. He started out with the TV show Lost as a podcast, followed by fan podcasts covering the TV shows Heroes, Dr. Who, The Hunger Games, Twilight Saga and a soon-to-be-launched The Lord of the Rings podcast. These are podcasts that bring fans of existing shows together where they can share their interests with one another. You'll discover why Cliff loves this podcast format. Not only does Cliff do TV show–related podcasts; he and his wife also host one called Family From the Heart. It's a weekly show about behind the scenes with the Ravenscrafts. It's an authentic, real-life audio show. This type of show makes Cliff feel really nervous, but people love it. As for the Podcast Answer Man show, it's a show that stands out on its own. This is his brand where he teaches people about podcasting based on his experiences. Cliff has devoted more than 20,000 hours to podcasting in new media. This is double the number of hours required to become an expert, as referred to by Malcolm Gladwell. There are two shows that exist outside of Cliff's GSPN.TV "network": the Podcast Answer Man and the Virtual Assistant, which is similar to Podcast Answer Man in that it's Cliff sharing his experience and knowledge about becoming an expert in a field. Other show formats are: Solo Co-hosted Panel hosted Interview "Sound scene tours"

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

4 Ways to Use Facebook and Twitter Analytics to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you overwhelmed by the amount of analytic data found on social media platforms? Want to know which metrics to follow? Knowing what to measure and how to apply the data makes it easier to modify your marketing for better reach, engagement, and visibility. In this article, you'll discover four ways social media insights can improve your marketing on Facebook and Twitter. Listen to this article: Measure What Matters Like any data set, social analytics have their share of vanity metrics that provide very little value. Paying attention to these vanity metrics can distract you from watching the metrics that help you take action and make decisions. For example, a sudden growth in likes or followers might make you feel great about your efforts, but by itself, it's a vanity metric that doesn't really tell you anything to help you adjust your marketing. Instead, focus on the analytics that are important to your strategy and goals, then review other data for trouble signs or trends that can impact your efforts. For example, if growing your engagement is a target goal in your strategy, then you need to zero in on per-post engagement levels to see what works and what doesn't. #1: Adjust Your Content Mix Twitter and Facebook both offer data on how well individual posts perform with your audience, including their reach and engagement. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > Post Types to review the engagement by the type of content you posted (post, link, image, video). On Twitter, you can see a snapshot of each post you've made by going to Settings > Analytics > Tweets. Pay close attention to this data, because it paints a clear picture about the type of content your audience is most interested in. You can review this data to see how your audience responds to the use of links, images, and video. For example, link shares might not do well overall by the numbers. Looking closer, you could discover that your audience may be less inclined to engage with curated links, but their heads turn when you post links to your own blog. Monitoring the data on engagement and reach vs. post type can help you tweak your approach to sharing content so that you're leveraging the types of content your audience prefers to digest and share. #2: Fine-tune Your Posting Schedule The majority of your audience may be up during the day, but that doesn't mean they're checking their social accounts at the same time. When they check, and on which days, can vary greatly from one audience to another. Your social metrics can tell you exactly when your audience is most likely to engage with your content. On Facebook, go to Insights > Posts > When Your Fans Are Online. For Twitter, you can use a tool such a Tweriod to find out when the bulk of your followers are online. This data is very important when you consider the limited real estate you get in social feeds. Getting the timing right on your content can make a huge difference. If you make a post early in the morning, but the bulk of your audience typically engages with your content in the afternoon, then that early morning post is likely to get buried, seen by only a small portion of your audience. Check your insights and analytics for peak engagement times. Experiment with different times and days to see when your audience is most likely to respond. Zeroing in on when they're most active will greatly improve your reach and engagement. #3: Inform Your Messaging Both Twitter and Facebook sit on a wealth of user data, including behavior, location, demographics, interests, lifestyle, employment, and more. Facebook arguably provides the most diverse data set, while Twitter also provides helpful audience information. Similar audience data is available in a variety of ways depending on the platform you're using. On Facebook, open the Ads Manager and go to Audience Insights. On Twitter, you can check your audience data by going to Settings > Twitter Ads > Analytics ...

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

Live Video: Tips and Techniques for Creating Great Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast live video? Want to learn how to create an engaged following? To discover what he's learned from broadcasting over 1,000 live streams over the last two years, I interview Alex Khan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Alex Khan, the founder of Attractive Media, a German social media agency that helps businesses with live video. You can find him online at alexkhan.tv. Alex shares his formula for beginning and ending live video. You'll discover how Alex makes his live videos look more professional. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Alex's Story Alex started his first website in the late 1990s, back when email open rates were incredibly high. In 2005, he became managing director of Attractive People, a social network. In that role, Alex discovered what builds trust and how people behave on social networks. In 2012, Alex founded Germany's first mobile marketplace for fashion, which another company later acquired. Alex continued working behind the scenes in social media until 2015, when Twitter acquired Periscope for $100 million. After a company acquired his own app, Alex says he was curious about what a $100 million app could do. In March 2015 on the first day Periscope became available, Alex downloaded it and it immediately blew him away. Alex knew that driving engagement builds trust and increased visibility; however, creating engaging content was (and is) a challenge. Periscope helped Alex solve the engagement challenge because he could start a one-to-many conversation from anywhere at any time. Alex says it's still fascinating that you can reach so many people for free. In the beginning, Alex directed his live videos with his employee as the Periscope star. They created fun content such as jumping in a pool, which had nothing to do with Alex's area of expertise. After a few weeks, Alex's business partners shared their concern that this fun content wasn't professional, especially because Alex was COO of the company. Alex agreed that their point was valid, so he decided to change his subject matter. With 10 years of experience in social media, Alex knew people would have questions about how to use this new platform. He decided to use his expertise to help people understand how to build their audience with live video. I ask Alex to share a snapshot of his audience today. Alex says that in only two years, he's built his audience from nothing to 230,000 followers and 55 million hearts on Periscope. Through cross-promotion, Alex has attracted a total of 400,000 followers on social media. To build that audience, Alex says his experience working in social media, building companies, and training people gave him the necessary expertise, but live video technology was also a critical gateway. Listen to the show to learn about Alex's first live broadcast on Periscope. Advice for Going Live Alex says that even after doing more than 1,000 Periscope broadcasts, he still gets nervous. For Alex, three questions spin around in his head when he thinks about going live: "Who are the people watching me? Will they like me? What will I tell them?" Alex has found that his viewers are regular people who are early live video adopters and curious about what he has to say. When you provide something that's valuable, Alex believes people will like you. He says the key is to educate, inspire, or entertain viewers. As far as what to tell viewers, Alex believes people watching live video are always interested in five topics:

What’s New At The HOTH in September 2017

by hothadmin @ The HOTH

Over the last few months we’ve been cranking faster than ever so we wanted to share a few things you may have missed @ The HOTH! Let’s get into it: 1) Private Vault: Expanded Catalog, Moves Into Dashboard If you’re looking for high quality links, Private Vault has a wide variety of niche placements for […]

The post What’s New At The HOTH in September 2017 appeared first on The HOTH.

SEO, overload and bugs

SEO, overload and bugs

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this weeks show, Bug hunting, dealing with too much work and more on SEO.

How to Use 360-Degree Video in Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use 360-Degree Video in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using video on your social channels? Have you thought about 360-degree videos? 360 videos produce more engagement and message retention than normal videos. In this article you'll discover how to create a 360 video and use it for your business. What Is 360-Degree Video? 360 videos (also known as VR or virtual reality) are clips displaying a spherical scenario where the camera has recorded all possible angles of the environment. Listen to this article: When watching 360 videos, you can interact and choose the content you're viewing. On a computer, you can view 360 videos with Chrome, Opera or Firefox. Click and drag the mouse on the video to see different angles. You get an even better viewing experience on mobile. Simply move your smartphone around to see different angles. You can enhance the mobile experience by watching the video in a Cardboard viewer, which allows a 3D-interactive experience of the video. 360 videos are not new to social media, as YouTube introduced them in March 2015 and made them available for video ads a few months later. Since then, a few companies have embraced the new technology, producing videos that leave viewers amazed. More recently, Facebook has also made this technology available, which is likely to contribute to starting a new social media trend. How to Create 360 Videos Creating a 360 video is easier than you may think. The software provided with your camera and the social network where you host the video manage most of the process. You don't need any advanced knowledge of editing software. To create a 360 video, follow these steps: Get a 360 Camera Creating 360 videos requires a special camera with lenses that cover all of the angles around the camera. It's also possible to create these videos by using six cameras recording simultaneously in a cube configuration. However, this process is usually more complex and requires advanced editing. Some of the camera models currently on the market are Ricoh Theta, IC Real Tech, 360Cam, Nokia Ozo and Bublcam. Record in 360 Mode To record a 360 video, you need to change your mindset for a whole new technology, remembering that you'll be recording everything around the camera. With traditional video, you might have props hidden outside of the frame to help you with your video, such as a teleprompter, other people, etc. All of this would be seen in a 360 video. Preview the Video A 360 video uses the same file format as any other video, and can't be visualized in spherical mode without using specific software (or a social media network). All of the cameras provide their own apps to preview your videos, which gives you an idea of the final result. However, remember these applications are just viewers. The video file is not converted into any special format. Edit the Video Before publishing 360 videos online, you can edit them with most editing software to include titles and buttons, adjust color, merge clips, add background music, and so on. When editing, you'll be working with a strange image format that is just a flat-stretched representation of a spherical recording, as shown here. This view can make the editing process a bit challenging in the beginning. But in reality, editing a 360 video is no more complex than editing any other video. Upload the Video Finally, the most important and easy step of all is to upload your video. The process is as simple as uploading any other video. Both Facebook and YouTube will automatically recognize the clip as a 360 video, and prepare it to be viewed. Nothing else is needed. Creating 360 videos is a relatively simple process. If you're ready to get started with 360 videos for your business, here are some ways to use the ideas below to boost your social media engagement. #1: Showcase Your Products Nescafé is one of the first companies to see the potential of this technology.

Website Development That Can Increase ROI

by Convergent1 @ Convergent1

Want to find out how professional website development can increase your ROI? Call Convergent1 and get the marketing solutions you need at (713) 690-0707.

The post Website Development That Can Increase ROI appeared first on Convergent1.

SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study

by Amy Gesenhues @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on Search Engine Land and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: SEO content audits, a search marketer’s view of Facebook & a link study appeared first on Search Engine Land.

What’s Your Marketing Spirit Animal? Take the Quiz to find out.

by Danna Crawford @ Danna Crawford

  Let’s face it; some of us are natural  born marketers. At least, that’s how it seems to those who fall flat on their face with marketing efforts. Some people have a knack for selling. Some don’t. But, it doesn’t mean marketing techniques are not something you can learn. It doesn’t mean you can’t embrace

The post What’s Your Marketing Spirit Animal? Take the Quiz to find out. appeared first on Danna Crawford.

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post on Pinterest? Want to shake up your strategy? To discover what, how, and when to post on Pinterest, I interview Jeff Sieh. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jeff Sieh, founder of ManlyPinterestTips.com and host of the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast. Jeff also oversees Social Media Examiner's Pinterest account. Jeff will explore proven tactics to grow your following and your website traffic with Pinterest. You'll discover what's new with Pinterest, including promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Tactics What's new with Pinterest After about a year and a half of testing, the do-it-yourself option for promoted pins (Pinterest's ad product) is now available to all small businesses in the United States. Features include a bulk editor, so you can add a lot of pins at once, and more forms of targeting. For example, there were only 30 possible interests to target when promoting a pin, and now there are 420; instead of targeting someone interested in men's clothing, you can be as specific as men's shoes. Pinterest also added keyword targeting, so you can combine interest and keyword targeting. It's a great way to find a specific audience when you promote a product or blog post. Promoted pins are just like regular pins, only you pay to have them seen by more people. They perform just as well as, if not better than, organic pins. The promoted pins in your feed are based on your interests and activity on Pinterest. They also take some off-site data, collected for Pinterest's ad partners. In your home feed, you will see suggested for you or sponsored by pins. If you don't want to see something, tap the X beside it and click on Hide this Pin. Pinterest uses that feedback to make sure you see relevant, promoted pins in the future. More people see your promoted pins. Plus, you get an extra 20% boost, because you only pay for the first click. For instance, let's say Jeff promotes a pin that points back to his website, and you click on it and repin it. Then, someone else pins it from your board to their account. Jeff does not pay for the secondary repins. He only pays for that first one. When I asked Jeff about entry level price points, he says he thinks you have to start with at least $1 a day. Jeff has seen results by spending $5 a day, and believes it's worth testing, especially with the new targeting features, to see how much traffic you can get to your website. Pinterest also has customer targeting, which allows you to upload your email addresses. This is called matching, and is currently only available to Pinterest's Developer Partners. If you have a store with a newsletter that's already driving traffic, you'll be able to upload that list to Pinterest and send promoted pins to that specific audience. They are rolling it out, along with the promoted pins, now. Listen to the show to learn when they opened up promoted pins for everyone in the United States. Social Media Examiner's Pinterest plan for third-party content Jeff explains how on Social Media Examiner he starts by finding good, third-party content (posts that we don't publish on our website) on marketing and social media to share with our audience. He uses Feedly to gather articles on Facebook's breaking news and other top websites, and goes there once a day to review the posts. When Jeff finds an interesting article, he clicks the link to make sure it's quality content and a fit for our audience. He then checks for a good, pinnable image; one that is engaging and also has a text overl...

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

7 Ways to Improve Your LinkedIn Company Page

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your business on LinkedIn? Are you using your LinkedIn company page to its full potential? LinkedIn company pages let you provide value to your audience while giving them the chance to engage with your business, effectively establishing your credibility as a trusted resource. In this article you'll discover seven ways a LinkedIn company page can help your business stand out on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: #1: Support Brand Recognition There are two primary visuals to be aware of on your LinkedIn company page: your company logo, which should be consistent on all websites and marketing materials, and the banner image on the top of your profile, which you can customize for LinkedIn and change whenever you'd like. The banner (or background) image is important to brand your company. Since you may have a different audience on LinkedIn from your other social networks, keep certain graphic elements that define your brand such as colors, fonts, and design, while adding visual variety. For example, HubSpot's LinkedIn banner image has their colors, along with the words "Academy & You," to promote the #FindYourAnd hashtag campaign for their HubSpot Academy educational program. Even though there's a place for your website link on your LinkedIn company page, I recommend that you add your URL and central phone number (if you have one) to the banner image. You don't need to include your logo, since it will be right above the image on your page. Add a call to action, tag line, or hashtag to invite some engagement from your audience. In addition to a main primary banner image, create custom background images too. This can promote upcoming events, a new content series, a product launch, a hashtag campaign, your best clients, or new hires. For instance, Ventiv Technology features their new CEO in their current background image. More than anything, your visuals should be consistent and reflect your other social media and business branding. To update your company page images, or really anything on your page profile, click Edit on the right side of your company page, then Edit Page. #2: Promote Specialized Landing Pages Your website URL is required for your company page, and it's likely you'll want to keep the main one most of the time. However, if you're launching a book or promoting something, change your website URL to point to your blog or a product or event page. Putting your website URL in the banner image gives you the freedom to change the link for your website at any time. #3: Speak Directly to Prospects In a lot of situations, the company description is someone's first impression of your business. Whether they're job seekers looking for more info about your company, vendors seeking strategic partnership, or potential customers and clients checking you out, you want to captivate them immediately. Most businesses copy and paste their About section from the company website. While that's better than nothing, there's a way to step it up a notch. Write a description that directly speaks to the people who are visiting your company page, letting them know who you are and how you can benefit them. In her description, Jeanne Bliss of CustomerBLISS tells her company's story and her background, shares the pain point of her ideal client, and then states how she can help. Plus, the image is an excellent visual representation of what she has to offer. Speak directly to the client with a description that builds your and your business's credibility. #4: Improve Visibility in Search Go to the Specialties section and add your keywords. This will make your company page a little easier to find. Your keywords are likely your specialties. Make them known, so those searching can find your company. #5: Feature Specialties Showcase pages are really subpages of your company page. You may want to use showcase pages if you have an annu...

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you been tasked with generating more awareness, more leads and more advocates? Need a plan to get you started? In this article you'll discover how your business can use social media to achieve three of the most common marketing goals. #1: Increase Brand Awareness Perhaps your brand isn't a household name and you'd like more prospective customers to know who you are. Social media can help you get there. Here are some ways to jumpstart your brand's presence through social media: Listen to this article: Establish fully fleshed-out profiles on the major social networks. Create company profiles on the big four social channels: LinkedIn, Facebook, Google+ and Twitter. Make sure your company logo and bio are consistent across all of your social sites. Decide which social network you'll spend the most time on. Depending on your market segmentation and customer research, it might make sense to spend more time on one network and less on others. For example, LinkedIn is consistently the best social outlet for B2B lead generation, and Google+ tends to attract professionals in the technology space. Consider advertising. When you first sign onto a social network, you don't have any connections because no one knows you're there. One way to make yourself known is through advertising. Each social network has intriguing ad options (like media-rich Twitter cards and Facebook sponsored posts) that help you target the prospects who will most likely click through and get to know you. Create a content schedule. Consistency is key in social media. Before you start posting, create a content schedule that allows you to develop your brand story one social post at a time. Give content creators access to the calendar so they know what to contribute and when. Make connections with others. Depending on the network, start following others in your industry who have important and insightful things to say. Obviously, you won't follow competitors, but think laterally. Bloggers, thought leaders, academics and companies in related industries might be putting out great content, and be open to socially engaging with you. And that comes with the bonus of a bigger presence for your company. Track important key performance indicators (KPIs). Only by tracking certain metrics can you know if your social efforts are paying off. Decide which metrics you'll evaluate on a regular basis, ranging from the number of likes and shares of your material, to more telling metrics like web traffic, social media conversion rates and reach. Make sure you have the right social media management tool on hand to walk you through your stats. Once you've set up a content calendar, perhaps done some advertising and are ready to track predefined KPIs, you'll have a solid foundation for spreading awareness of your brand. Your audience will then get a chance to see how your products and services can change their business practices. Perhaps they'll see the light through an interesting YouTube video or a report that speaks to a particular problem and your solution for addressing it. However you make your customers' lives better, social media puts you out there and brings your solutions to your prospects' doors. #2: Generate Leads and Engagement Now that people are starting to know you exist, it's time to turn people into leads. As in all content marketing, you'll want to develop social content that speaks to your audience. This is content that your followers will find informative, helpful and even exciting. When you've improved things just a little bit for people, they'll come back to you for more of the same, and that's your chance to qualify them as leads. Here's how to put together social content that turns followers into leads: Create content that inspires conversation. On social media, you can't depend on passive followers to convert themselves. You need to create as many opportunities to engage people as possi...

Blogger Outreach: How to Build Relationships With Bloggers

Blogger Outreach: How to Build Relationships With Bloggers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to attract more attention to your business? Are you wondering how you can build relationships with the influencers in your market? To learn why it's important to reach out to bloggers, I interview Scott Monty for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Scott Monty, the former head of social media for Ford Motor Company. He blogs at ScottMonty.com and his podcast is I Hear of Sherlock Everywhere. Scott shares how to build relationships with bloggers to raise your visibility. You'll discover the types of influencers you need to reach out to and how to engage them in a positive and productive way. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blogger Outreach Scott's definition of rented In a recent AdWeek interview where Scott discussed paid, earned and owned media, he referred to rented. He said, "Sites like Twitter, Facebook and YouTube, we don't own those. We are using other people's property." Scott explains the reason for that comment was to address the concern marketers have in the drop in organic reach with their posts on Facebook. The challenge now is you can't ignore Facebook because there are over 1.2 billion people who use it, and you have to find a way to live with it. Scott says the reason why he calls these sites rented is because they are ultimately in control. If you look at Facebook, they can change the algorithm any time they like, and marketers have to suffer the consequences, unless they are willing to pay. You need to look at your owned sites, where you do have control. Scott thinks it's best to centralize your content in a hub, then have digital outposts of rented spaces and good relationships with influencers. Then use paid media around all of that to strategically amplify your earned, owned and rented spots. Listen to the show to find out why it's not just about using paid for promoting your ads. Blogger outreach and why it's important  Scott says that blogger outreach isn't that different from media relations. You need to look at who the influencers with an audience are, and figure out if you can either invite them to special events, give them an experience with your products or let them meet with the executives of your company. Then they can go and tell a story to their audience. Any brand has a story to tell and you have to think of ways you can inspire others to tell your story. Once you have figured out who the main industry influencers and bloggers are in your industry, then you can start to reach out to them. It's important to take note of how they interact with other brands too. You'll discover the parallels and distinctions between public relations and blogger relations, and how to treat each type of influencer differently. When Scott was at Ford, they mixed the bloggers in with journalists. Some of the true journalists weren't happy about that, and didn't give bloggers full credit for what they were able to do. Listen to the show to find out how Scott and his team handled the bloggers and journalists together. The power of bloggers compared to traditional media Scott explains that most bloggers don't have the same reach or potential reach as a traditional journalist. Although there are many bloggers who have been brought under a network approach. For example, if you look at the Gawker family of sites, they each started out as a hobby. Jalopnik for automotive, Gizmodo for tech,

Why it's not always a good idea to shout about your new site.

Why it's not always a good idea to shout about your new site.

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

The Fall of Mass Marketing and the Rise of User Experience Design

The Fall of Mass Marketing and the Rise of User Experience Design

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

The Fall of Mass Marketing and the Rise of User Experience Design

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your social media audience losing interest? Do you want to tap into your followers' emotions? Using psychology to connect with your target audience is a powerful way to engage and motivate them to take action. In this article you'll discover five psychology principles you can use to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: People Prefer Stories to Stats In Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die, authors Chip and Dan Heath share research that reveals we're more likely to donate when we hear the story of an individual in need rather than data about an entire impoverished area. Even though a region's suffering has a larger impact than that of an individual, the individual's story is appealing because we have an emotional response when hearing the experiences of others, not statistics and abstract information. To apply this principle to your social media marketing, tell a story to reach your audience emotionally. Guinness does this well through their marketing campaigns. Rather than spout information or simply show a scene, this ad takes the viewer through a complicated situation that gradually unfolds to reveal the outcome. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rx0MRawkrj4 Ads like this one follow the "show, don't tell" principle. They lead audience members through a story they need to interpret for themselves based on the actions of the characters. Your social media content can impress your audience and be more memorable if you share a personal experience; whether it's your own or someone else's. By creating a journey with a resolution, you can make an emotional impact on your viewers. #2: Personal Benefits Generate Interest Expressing how people can benefit from your product or service will help you increase engagement on social media. Taco Bell's Twitter account socially engages its audience with its witty and interactive tweets. Most importantly, the people behind the account understand what makes people tick. Take a look at this popular tweet. Who wouldn't like a free meal? Imagine what people are thinking as they watch the World Series. They're likely hoping someone steals a base with the promise of free breakfast from Taco Bell. This keeps the brand at the top of its audience members' minds. Of course, you don't have to give everyone in the country a free breakfast to garner attention. There are other effective methods to let people know what you or your product can do for them. Taco Bell's strategy shows that captivating the audience begins with thinking about what they want, first and foremost. Apple famously focused on the consumer when Steve Jobs described the iPod as "1,000 songs in your pocket." Now imagine if he had described the features instead: high storage and smooth texture. People would probably be thinking, "So what? How does this apply to me?" httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6SUJNspeux8 The next time you share something about your brand on social media, explain or show why it will make a difference in people's lives. #3: Social Proof From Peers Increases Trust These days, reviews and testimonials on products and services are available at the click of a button. Consider a 2008 study that involved hanging public-service messages on residents' doors, asking them to use fans instead of air conditioning. Results found that telling a group that 77% of their neighbors were using fans was more effective than mentioning residents could save $54 a month. What our peers do, impacts our decision-making. Crate and Barrel's website invites customers to leave reviews for products and gives them the option of uploading a picture. Pictures help other potential customers visualize how the product would look in a home setting. There are a number of ways to create social proof; show Facebook likes and post testimonials to tell your audience about how popular your product is.

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach more mobile Facebook users? Wondering how Canvas ads might help? Facebook Canvas lets you create full-page, interactive mobile ads that work like landing pages for tablet and smartphone users. In this article you'll discover how to create quality Facebook Canvas ads. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Canvas? Facebook Canvas is a new tool for advertisers, built specifically for the mobile platform. Facebook users can scroll through Canvas ads to view photos, watch videos, and discover your company's story. Canvas is free to use beyond the standard Facebook advertising costs, and its drag-and-drop interface requires no coding knowledge. The ads are fully immersive, so there's nothing else on the page vying for users' attention when they're scrolling through or clicking on the content in your ads. And while interactive media is normally a concern because of loading times (long loading times drive people away in every corner of the web), Canvas ads load almost as soon as they're selected. This is because they're hosted on Facebook rather than redirected to an outside page. In fact, they can download up to 10 times faster than general mobile web pages. Here are some ways you can use Facebook Canvas to maximize the impact of video ads for your business. #1: Complement Videos With Text and Images To use Canvas effectively, you need to take advantage of everything it has to offer. The tool allows you to share much of the same content you can post on your website, such as articles, photographs, videos, and even products. You have the option to display photos in carousel format, which Facebook introduced last year. You can add up to five images with optional links in one Canvas ad. Facebook is slowly rolling out the ability to create a carousel of videos as well. While there may be an emphasis on video in Canvas ads, you should also consider using other content options to better tell your company's story, highlight your products, and pique consumer interest. A genuinely compelling multimedia Canvas ad will capture attention and engage your audience, which can translate to increased web traffic, more conversions, and more sales. You can also use your video content in a variety of ways. For example, you might create a video that highlights the core principles of your brand and then include a carousel of products. Alternatively, you might include a series of customer testimonials or behind-the-scenes highlights of your company. Tailor your video to your marketing goals, whether that's greater brand awareness or increased sales, to get the best results. Kit and Ace used this video in a Canvas ad to bring awareness to their brand and get their line of all-day technical performance apparel in front of their target market. . #2: Tell a Story With a Series of Video Clips Facebook allows a maximum of 2 minutes of video for your canvas, but you can split up the video content however you want. One tactic is to use a series of 15- or 20-second clips, as in this social media campaign for Evan Williams' Bourbon. . Not only are shorter clips more likely to hold your audience's attention than longer videos, but they also give you the freedom to explore different facets of your business or highlight individual customer experiences. This greater flexibility in storytelling allows you to truly guide your audience through the experience and direct them toward what you want them to see. #3: Draw the Viewer in With Immersive Content Videos let you harness the power of both visuals and words to tell your company's story. It's important, therefore, that you come across as genuine and sincere. Design your videos (and your entire canvas) to elicit some sort of emotion, whether it's funny, heartfelt, or exciting, and then tailor your words to that goal. Keep your language simple, but emotional. Never use business jargon or buzzwords in your video ads.

57. Afraid of Standards?

57. Afraid of Standards?

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week Paul and Marcus are joined by Ben Henick author of an excellent article about standards found on the List Apart website. Together they have a frank and open discussion about the downsides of designing with standards.

Local SEO for Small Businesses

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Local SEO for Small Businesses The organic search results are already a tough place to fight for top rankings. Local search results? Even harder. Besides traditional SEO, there are a variety of local SEO ranking factors that small businesses and even larger franchises have to worry about when jockeying for the top positions for localized […]

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Wondering if content marketing will help move the needle? To discover what it takes to build a content-driven business, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute, author of the book Epic Content Marketing and the founder of Content Marketing World, the leading conference for content marketers. Joe's latest book is Content Inc.: How Entrepreneurs Use Content to Build Massive Audiences and Create Radically Successful Businesses. Joe will explore how you can build a sustainable small business with smart content marketing. You'll discover the six steps to take to create a content business in any niche. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Business When and why Joe started the Content Marketing Institute Joe shares how he got into the content marketing industry. He was vice president of custom media (also known as content marketing) at business publishing company Penton Media until 2007. At Penton, Joe and his team helped advertisers who wanted to do something unique tell their stories. For example, if a company like Microsoft wanted to tell a story to an executive audience, Joe and his team would help them create an ongoing newsletter, a magazine, blog series or webinar series. Joe did that for seven years. Joe left Penton at the end of March 2007 and wrote his first blog post titled "Why Content Marketing?" on April 26, 2007. That led up to Joe launching Junta42, which he says was basically the eHarmony for content marketing. The idea was to match brand sites that wanted to outsource some portion of the content process (creation or distribution) with agencies that would pay for the service to get the leads. Joe explains how in 2008, with no money, no paid distribution and about 2,000 subscribers, he decided it was time to build relationships with influencers. He started a research project called The Top 100 Content Marketing Blogs. (I was on the list first for White Papers and then Social Media Examiner.) He notified everybody who was on the list, and it just took off. Fast-forward to 2009, Joe shares, the model was working and they matched up about 1,000 projects. However, they were still having trouble getting companies to pay for a subscription to the service, even though they were driving leads to them. After his best case study (they sent a $1 million+ customer to an agency, and the agency decided not to renew their subscription), it finally hit Joe that this business was not going to work. Although Joe was "in love with his product," he finally figured out the key was to fall in love with your audience and focus on their needs and pain points. His audience was asking for training, education, consulting and speaking. They weren't even ready for a matching service, because they didn't even know how to create a content marketing strategy. Joe pivoted to the education and training concept and launched Content Marketing Institute six months later. That was May 2010. "At that moment we said we were going to create the leading online destination for content marketing, the leading magazine and the leading event," Joe recalls. "And within two years we were able to do that." Listen to the show to hear how Joe and I first connected, as well as the similarities between our projects. Why now is the time to get into a content-driven business Content Inc. is Joe's fourth book. The other three are content marketing–related and f...

5 Lies You Tell Yourself About Your Analytics (And How to Fix It)

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Consulting data is good. But being a slave to data is not. There is such a thing as being too data-obsessed. Confirmation bias pops up. And you miss the good, albeit, intangible stuff that comes along with your efforts. The solution is to uncover those biases and misunderstandings that lead you astray. It’s not easy. […]

How to Make Sure Your LinkedIn Account Is Secure

How to Make Sure Your LinkedIn Account Is Secure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you on LinkedIn? Have you reviewed your security and privacy settings recently? While LinkedIn is valuable for building your professional presence, it's important to be conscious of your individual privacy and security when using the network. In this article you'll discover what you need to know to manage your security on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: How to Access Your Privacy and Security Settings It's essential to manage your LinkedIn privacy and security settings so your personal profile is secure, yet still visible on the network. By default, LinkedIn shares certain things you might want to keep private and keeps other things private that should be public. If you haven't edited your settings before, here's how to access them. Hover over your profile image at the top right of the screen. Then click Manage beside Privacy & Settings. LinkedIn has more than 40 security settings. Here are the ones that have the greatest impact on marketers. #1: Decide Whether to Share News Mentions LinkedIn's Mentioned in the News feature automatically finds and shares with your network news items that mention you. (LinkedIn purchased the Newsle app to curate more relevant content for members.) The default is to share your news mentions. To change this setting, go to Privacy Controls and click Turn On/Off Your News Mention Broadcasts. In the window that appears, uncheck the Yes! Let Them Know box and click Save Changes. Mentioned in the News is a fantastic feature for people who have a positive presence online. However, you'll want to turn this feature off if you or one of your clients is dealing with reputation management issues (for example, you're working with a client who is experiencing a personal social media crisis or getting negative press). Remember, there is no way to manage what gets shared with the Mentioned in the News feature. Your only option is to turn news mentions on or off. #2: Turn Off Share Profile Edits This privacy setting has less to do with your personal security and more to do with how your contacts view you and your activity. Since you don't necessarily want to alert your network of every minor change you make to your profile, I recommend that you turn off profile edits (previously called activity broadcasts). To do so, click Choose Whether or Not to Share Your Profile Edits. In the window that appears, uncheck the box and click Save Changes. You can also make this change from your profile. On the right side of your profile under Notify Your Network?, select No to turn off this feature. Turn these notifications back on for a short time when you have big news (you started a new job, signed a new client, got promoted or added something significant to your profile). Then turn them off again. #3: Decide Who Sees Your Activity Feed Your LinkedIn activity feed used to be your updates. Now it only refers to actions taken, such as following influencers, joining groups and so on. Your activity feed is visible to your network by default. As with profile edits, you probably don't want your minor activities to clutter your connections' feeds, so you can make your activity feed private. To change the setting to be more private, click Select Who Can See Your Activity Feed. In the window that appears, choose the Only You option and click Save Changes. Remember, public updates are visible to everyone, regardless of your activity feed setting. #4: Select What Others See on Your Profile In most cases, you want people to know when you've viewed their LinkedIn profile. It helps keep you top of mind and increases the know-like-trust factor. However, there may be times when you want to make your profile anonymous. For instance, if you're doing research on LinkedIn, and you don't want people to see you, make yourself completely private. Use this tactic when you check out competitors or view potential employers, employees or partners.

How to Hide Content or Data from the Search Engines

by @ thesitewizard.com

In response to a query from a visitor, this article deals with how you can prevent Google and Bing from indexing certain content on your website and displaying it in their results.

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to increase your audience? To learn how to create an online community using YouTube, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tim Schmoyer, the author of 30 Days to a Better YouTube Channel and The Secret to Building Your YouTube Audience. His site, videocreators.com helps people spread their message via video. Tim explores how to create a community with YouTube. You'll discover how to make videos that will engage your viewers and keep them watching. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Community Development How Tim got involved with YouTube Tim explains how one night in grad school (March 2, 2006), he was bored at home, and decided to check out YouTube. After seeing what was on there, he decided to upload his first video. It was a quick, 30-second video of him talking to the camera. He had no idea where that first experience would lead. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0sbC_K0cCUI As this was pre-Facebook, Tim says he and his girlfriend at the time made videos to show their friends and family what they were up to. They made videos of their dates, engagement and wedding, as well as when they moved, had kids and so on. Tim believes they made about 1,000 videos just sharing their story. It started as a way to communicate with family and friends. Along the way, other people started watching. Around 2009, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson, ReelSEO, and YouTube personality Kevin Nalty, and asked them why certain things did and did not work on YouTube. When they didn't know the answers, Tim decided to figure it out himself. He said he'd report back to them what he learned. Tim began having conversations with people who were trying to figure out the same things about YouTube and audience growth. That was the start of him turning YouTube into his business. A while later, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson again with constructive feedback. Tim told Mark that while he had a great website about video, there was nothing being done with online video. Tim ended up taking over Mark's YouTube channel, and trained the site's viewers how to master YouTube as a platform for audience development. After a few years, Tim started working full time for an animation studio to do audience development for their web series. A year later, after he had grown it to almost 100,000 subscribers, Tim's job was eliminated. However, they paid him full-time for six months to get his own business started. In February 2013, Tim launched his YouTube channel, called Video Creators. By the end of six months, it was his full-time income. Video Creators has three series on it. Every Tuesday, Tim talks about news in the online video industry. Wednesdays, he shares a YouTube tip. Then, on Thursdays he answers a question from his audience. The channel revolves around using online video as a platform to change lives. Without spending any money on promotion, Tim has grown his YouTube channel to over 75,000 subscribers and more than four-million views. He gets tons of interaction and engagement, including about 15,000 comments a month. Listen to the show to learn what YouTube was like in the beginning. Common mistakes with video The biggest mistake Tim sees people make with video is that they treat it like it's the same as television. People new to video (who don't watch YouTube) don't have another frame of reference for how to craft video content. Therefore, they make the same content they would create for television,

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

Facebook Marketing: Why It Is Time to Rethink Everything

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to market your business? Wondering how marketing on Facebook is evolving? To explore how marketers should adjust to Facebook's recent and future changes, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari shares why it's time for marketers to rethink how they use Facebook. You'll discover where Mari believes Facebook is headed. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The Facebook Algorithm Mari explains that the Facebook algorithm pre-filters content that users see in their news feeds. The algorithm manages the vast amount of content posted to Facebook and thus helps advertisers, while hopefully showing Facebook users the most relevant content among the thousands of posts they could see. Users can have as many as 5,000 friends, join up to 6,000 groups, and follow up to 5,000 pages. With posts coming from all of these sources, users might see as many as 15,000 posts. Mari says that the Facebook algorithm narrows down what users actually see to about 1,500 posts, and from that pool of content, narrows what users might see even further to about 300 posts. Mari says the algorithm is complex with about 100,000 weights, of which only about a half-dozen are known. For instance, Facebook favors stories from users' friends, video content, and so on. Also, when the algorithm came out in 2008, along with Facebook business pages, it made the news feed non-chronological. Mari explains that the algorithm exists because Facebook needs to keep users coming back and also offer value to advertisers. Each day, the average user logs on about 14 times (more for marketers), and is on Facebook an average of 50 cumulative minutes. That creates a huge captive audience, which is a massive amount of potential to offer advertisers. To maintain that value, the algorithm encourages user engagement. Mari notices how she loves keeping up with her friends and community via Facebook and sees an advertisement about every third post. The better the targeted ad, the more likely she is to respond. Mari also notes that by encouraging user engagement, the algorithm also encourages users to share information with Facebook. This information helps Facebook keep the users and advertisers happy. I ask what marketers should do so users see more of their content in the news feed. Mari recommends not only sharing video, but also slightly increasing the length of videos. For uploaded videos, Mari has discovered a minimum of 90 seconds makes content more visible. For a live video, Mari recommends broadcasting for at least 5 minutes. Mari says Facebook favors slightly longer video because it enables Facebook to insert mid-roll ads. These ads break in and run for about 20 seconds. At the moment, mid-roll ads are in beta and you have to sign up before they'll appear in your video. Also, Mari says these ads appear only if you have at least 2,000 followers of your profile or page and 300 concurrent viewers. Mari explains that the decline in Facebook user posts and the algorithm's preference for camera-based content are related. Facebook is moving more into the camera mode because over the past three or four years, users have been sharing fewer status updates. Typing a post is harder than snapping a picture and adding sticker or filter. Mari stresses that real-time signals are also important to the visibility of your co...

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media and search to promote your business? Are you wondering how the landscape of search and social is changing, and how to benefit from it? To learn about the key changes in search and social, and how they impact your marketing, I interview Lee Odden for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, author of the book Optimize: How to Attract and Engage More Customers by Integrating SEO, Social Media and Content Marketing. He's the CEO of TopRank Online Marketing and the editor of Marketing Blog. Plus there is a killer SlideShare tip you'll want to pay attention to. Lee shares his insights into the world of SEO and content marketing, and the elements of his strategy that have contributed to his success. You'll learn about the four categories of content that you must create for your sites, and tips for getting the most out of them. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search and Social Graph Search and what Facebook is doing Lee believes that Facebook is always going to progress towards having a more robust search engine. Right now they are collecting a lot of data, and as Graph Search continues to roll out to more people, they will refine and optimize how it works. It's not just about providing a better user experience, there is ad play too. Lee feels that this is the driver. Lee believes that Facebook will move towards providing marketers opportunities to get in front of people and offer contextual advertising in the way that Google does. Before implementation of Graph Search, when you did a search on Facebook, the results would come from Facebook's own data set such as Fan Pages, Profiles, Groups, etc. If Facebook couldn't find what you were looking for, they would provide search results from Bing. Facebook is still working with Bing, but the search result set they offer is a lot different. The filtering options are more robust. However, today when we want to find something specific, we still use Google. As a marketer, Lee feels that it's important to understand the customer's journey and experiences. Often an idea surfaces on Facebook, and to validate the idea, people go over to Google expecting to find something that they can act on. Listen to the show to find out how the Facebook search capability is similar to what they have allowed to advertisers. How Google is using Google+ to impact the results consumers see Marketers need to consider the public social content crawled by Google Bot, the integration of Google+ and authorship, and the association between Google+ profiles and associated content in search results. Lee believes that it's virtually impossible to employ a successful organic search optimization effort without robust social content or social presence. These social signals have eclipsed signals like links. When you look at simplifying SEO best practices, we are not just talking about content, keywords and links. We have to equally include the importance of social content and social signals. Marketers really need to understand the search results landscape for their key search terms, and to what degree social content competes with you. Lee gives an example of how social is impacting search results. Every search experience result could be unique because of geography, and whether you are logged in or not. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8Z9TTBxarbs As marketers, we still have to execute standard SEO best practices.

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content? Are you looking to generate more leads? To learn how to get the most from your content, I interview Jason Miller. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jason Miller, the senior manager of content and social at LinkedIn Marketing Solutions. He's the author of Welcome to the Funnel: Proven Tactics to Turn Your Social and Content Marketing Up to 11. Jason is also an excellent photographer specializing in rock bands. Jason focuses on creating sharable content that also generates leads. You'll discover how content ties into influencer relationships and how to leverage it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Leads How Jason got started in content and social Jason worked in the music industry before he decided to reinvent himself in the social space. He tried to bring social to his music label, but they weren't interested. So Jason quit, went back to school for training in SEO and digital marketing. He worked at a little startup called Market Tools, then Marketo and he's now at LinkedIn. Jason talks about his time at Marketo. He led global and content marketing and did the blog and the social channels himself when he first started. It was chaos, he recalls. Jason learned very quickly how to solve other marketers' problems and write about them, which is how he grew his blogging skills. "It was B2B marketing, which could be quite boring," Jason recalls. "I took what I call the George Costanza approach, where I do the exact opposite of what everybody else is doing." For example, if someone said to Jason that social media doesn't work in B2B, he would do the exact opposite and prove them wrong. After a tremendous amount of trial and error to find out what worked and scaling his content efforts, Jason was successful. Listen to the show to hear the backstory for Welcome to the Funnel. Build relationships that tie into content Jason believes it's essential to include influencers in your marketing strategy, especially in your content. When you first start building your presence, seek out thought leaders in the space. Figure out how to take their wisdom and feature it in your content. You'll add third-party validation and keep from talking too much about yourself. At the same time, you also get on their radar. They know you're helping them spread the word and eventually you can find mutual benefit. Listen to the show to learn how going to conferences helped Jason get into guest blogging.  How to create sharable content that generates leads Jason believes we don't need more content, we need more relevant content. He has a concept he started at Marketo and brought over to LinkedIn called, "The Big Rock." Basically you need to ask yourself what conversation you want to own, and then write the book on it. Jason suggests going from thinking like a publisher to actually publishing like a publisher. When Jason first got to LinkedIn, the question was, "How do I market on LinkedIn successfully?" Since the conversation was being owned by others, Jason decided to take it back. He wrote a 65-page book called The Sophisticated Marketer's Guide to LinkedIn. It was everything you wanted to know about marketing on LinkedIn, written very strategically. It was broad-reaching content gated for the purpose of collecting email addresses. It was great for lead generation, bringing people into the funnel, helping out fellow marketers and getting the word out. According to Jason,

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

How to Research and Locate Your Audience Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to connect with your customers on social networks? Do you know where they hang out online? To optimize your social media marketing efforts, it's important to know who your customers are and which social networks they spend their time on. In this article you'll discover how to connect with your target audience on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Your Ideal Customer One of the first questions I ask is, "Who is your ideal customer?" Some of the answers I've received include women, people who have to eat to survive, bosses, employees and people looking for work. While these answers may be true for you, too, they won't help you find your audience because they don't help you prioritize where to spend your time. John Lee Dumas has famously talked about identifying your business avatar. This means you'll want to create a fictional persona of your ideal customer, to the point of naming it, knowing how many kids it has or what it does on the weekends. The clearer your avatar is, the easier it is to find people on social media who resemble the persona. #2: Determine Your Audience Size Once you have a good sense of what your audience looks like, you can use Facebook Ads Manager to estimate the size of your audience. For example, if you want to reach women in Maine who are interested in nutrition, you can find out that 62,000 people on Facebook match that audience. This is also good business information, because if your audience is too small, you may need to change your offering to expand your audience. On the flipside, if your audience is too large, you might want to target a narrower niche to start. Of course, not everyone is on Facebook. According to recent research, almost 60% of Americans are on Facebook. That number may be more (or less) depending on where your audience lives, their age, gender and household income, but it's a good starting point. #3: Survey Your Customers If you've been in business for any length of time, you have customers you can survey. For the purposes of optimizing your social media campaigns, wisely spending your ad dollars and targeting guest blogging opportunities, you need to know where your audience hangs out online. As part of your survey, ask your current customers the following questions: What social media sites do you regularly use? What websites do you visit for information on _______ (for example, remodeling ideas, pricing strategies or whatever is appropriate for your business)? Do you listen to podcasts? If so, which ones? Do you regularly read blogs? If so, which ones? What people do you follow or pay attention to online? You can also use free tools like SurveyMonkey or Google Forms to collect your answers. In this video, Steve Dotto walks you through how to create your own forms with Google Forms. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wwf72lwPLVY Google Forms is a great way to collect feedback on live events, for example, because it graphically displays your audience's feedback. Go to your form results and select Form > Show Summary of Responses from the drop-down menu. #4: Research Online Behavior What do you do if you're just starting out, your customer base is too small for meaningful results or you're expanding into a new category? In cases like these, or simply to supplement your surveys, you can research online behavior. The Pew Research Center has an excellent breakdown of where your audience spends their time online. It's not difficult to find studies and infographics that provide information on specific platforms or other countries. For example, check out this chart from MarketingCharts to see a makeup of the top social media channels based on gender, age, education and more. #5: Find and Connect With Your Customer Once you get the results from your survey and have reviewed the demographics of the available research, it's time to put that knowledge to work across different so...

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Want to get more from your marketing efforts? Improving your Instagram content and boosting engagement can be as simple as adding a few tactics and tools to your marketing routine. In this article you'll discover nine tips and tools to improve your Instagram marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor Images to Your Audience On your Instagram account, post the kinds of photos that your audience is already sharing and liking. For example, take a picture that shows the inside of your office, the team heading out to lunch or you holding up your favorite afternoon snack. MaybellineAU took a cue from the fashion bloggers dominating Instagram with their facial close-ups and instructional pictures. In this post the brand shows one aspect of a woman's makeup routine: defining the eyebrows. The style and focus on the eyebrow in this photo contributed to a 2.4x increase in sales of Maybelline's Brow Drama mascara. #2: Enhance Your Photos You'll get the most out of every photo you share if they are the best they can be. Here are some quick and easy ways to improve even the most basic photo. Make use of an app like VSCO Cam (available for iOS and Android) to brighten and enhance your photos. The app offers editing tools and preset filters to make your photos more visually appealing and interesting. Although Instagram now supports non-square photos, the square shape still performs best. When you use the tool InstaSize (available for iOS and Android), you can choose a photo and scale it exactly how you want within the square shape. The app adds a white or colored border around the edges of your photo so that it keeps its original shape in the square box. #3: Use Text Overlays on Images Sharing generic content that doesn't connect to your brand is a missed opportunity on Instagram. Many marketers opt for generic content because their product or service isn't inherently visual. How many photos can you really share of your team sitting around a conference table? Not many. Instead, create messages, graphics and designs that tell users something valuable. This could be a quote connected to your brand, or an announcement about a new product, contest or sale. For example, the Huffington Post Instagram account uses graphics to share a quote from a story or to start a conversation. In this example, the graphic asks an engaging question and promotes a hashtag. The question started a long conversation in the comments and led to broader use of the hashtag. There's no need to reinvent the wheel with every graphic either. Consistency wins on Instagram. Keep your template and change the text or background to share a new graphic each week. #4: Tell a Story With the Caption Yes, Instagram is a photo-sharing app, but writing is also a key component to your success. The most engaging brands on Instagram use microblogging to tell a story in the caption. As a result, they see stronger engagement and create deeper connections with their audience. This leads to more sharing, commenting and loyalty. Hey, Sweet Pea writes long stories that are like personal letters to their audience. In fact, they use them to tease what users can expect from attending their classes. Then they plug the classes in the caption and with a link in their profile. Use an app like Hemingway to help you improve your caption writing. This tool marks adverbs, passive voice, overly long sentences and more. Paste your text in the editor to make sure that your writing is active and easy to read before you hit publish. #5: Leverage Trending Hashtags Make your brand known and your voice heard in the top (and relevant) Instagram conversations of the day. With the right hashtag and location tags, you can extend the reach of your content and brand. Instagram's Search and Explore feature shows you the trending hashtags of the day.

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to get more out of your Twitter marketing? To learn how to successfully market your business using Twitter, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, the author of The Tao of Twitter, Return on Influence and co-author of Born to Blog. He's a college educator, blogger, consultant and speaker. This is his third appearance on this show! Mark explores what you need to know about using Twitter for your business. You'll discover the path to Twitter success, how to utilize everything Twitter has to offer to market your business, and manage your followers and lists. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Mark got started with Twitter  Mark believes that you really need to immerse yourself in the social web in order to truly understand it, or be successful as a consultant or teacher. Mark immersed himself in Twitter 7 years ago, when he started his own consulting business and started to teach. Mark admits that he was not an early fan of Twitter. It took him months to figure out that this platform was more than just the advertising, technology, mentions or hashtags. Once he understood the powerful human aspect behind Twitter, it changed his life and he wanted others to understand it too. Mark calls Twitter the greatest networking tool ever created. Many of the connections he's made around the world would not have been possible without Twitter and his blog. Listen to the show to discover more about Twitter's powerful ability to connect you with potential clients and opportunities.  The three elements of the Tao of Twitter Mark identifies tao as the Chinese word meaning path. He explains that there is a certain path to success. Behind every Twitter success story, perhaps behind every social media success story, there are 3 essential elements to this path: meaningful content, a targeted audience, and authentic helpfulness. You'll hear Mark discuss each of these three elements in detail and how they work to create meaningful connections for your business when you use Twitter. According to Mark, there is no better way across any social media platform to create an audience than Twitter. It offers so many ways to find the right people for your business. Listen to the show to discover how these three elements work together to lead to success on Twitter.  How businesses can use Twitter  In The Tao of Twitter, there is a chapter called "25 Ideas to Toast Your Competition". Mark offers a few examples of this in the show. He thinks that Twitter is under utilized by businesses today, yet it has the power to transform your business. For instance, Twitter search can be the most powerful source of marketing research available to you. It offers users the ability to target an audience down to a specific zip code, sentiment, or keyword. Twitter's Advanced Search allows you to find potential clients, conduct competitive research, track trends, or provide customer service, all in real-time. Mark explores the benefits of paid promotions and ads on Twitter. According to Mark, this is a great time to try Twitter advertising. The inventory is high and the cost is relatively inexpensive at the moment, but Mark projects that this may not be case for long, as more people learn to leverage this opportunity. Listen to the show to discover a little known trick that makes Twitter advertising especially attractive to marketers.  Broadcast content versus being helpful

How to Welcome the New Kid at School

How to Welcome the New Kid at School

by @ How to of the Day

Coming into a new school can be very difficult for anyone. You’re in a new environment with people you don’t know instead of your old friends. If you want to help a new kid feel welcome, making a good first impression is crucial. From there, you’ll want to help them get a handle on their new school and integrate themselves fully.

41. Building better forms

41. Building better forms

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on boagworld Paul and Marcus discuss how to create better forms and how to avoid damaging your search engine rankings when launching a site redesign.

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add Promoted Pins to your marketing mix? Are you wondering how to budget for a Promoted Pin campaign? You don't have to spend a lot of money on Promoted Pins for them to be effective. Because they have long-term visibility, they're a sound addition to your Pinterest marketing. In this article, I'll share how to build an effective, affordable promoted-pin campaign on Pinterest. #1: Start With Effective Pins While promoted pins are an excellent way to get the most visibility for your advertising dollar, it all starts with crafting a great social media image. Based on your business specialty or niche, create images that speak to your audience. Listen to this article: Also, use tall images to make sure your pins get noticed. They stand out better and command the attention of Pinterest users. Give yourself a selection of images and pin them ahead of time, so you have choices if you decide to test out various types of visual content using different small budgets. Once you decide what image you want to use, here's how to craft an ad for your promoted pin. Note: Promoted pins are still rolling out in the United States. If you don't have access yet, join the waitlist. #2: Choose Your Objective Go to your Pinterest profile and click the settings button next to Edit Profile to get to promoted pins in the drop-down menu. Once you click the Promote button, you'll see that Pinterest offers you two choices: Boost Engagement or Get Traffic. To get maximum benefit from your promoted pin ad campaign, choose Get Traffic to Your Website. Keep in mind this is a future strategy that does the promotion backwards. While you tell Pinterest that you want traffic to come to your website, what you really mean is that you want engagement for your pins. #3: Create the Campaign Give your campaign a name and then decide on what date or dates you want your promoted pin to be seen. Since the budget is low, you don't want to stretch it out too long. If it's your first time promoting a pin, use Saturday as your day. The more you use promoted pins, the more likely you'll find the best day for your brand. Keep fine-tuning this aspect of your campaigns. Now, decide how much money you would like to spend each day. I recommend spending $10 for one day or spread $10 over two days ($5 per day). #4: Select Keywords for Visibility The next step is to pick which pin you would like to promote. Then use keywords to tell Pinterest where you would like it to be seen. This is one of the most important things you can do to get your pin noticed. Keywords should include everything that anyone searching for what you have to offer would think of. So make sure you hit all of the right niche-specific terms for your pin. Depending on your niche, you can see an estimate of how many weekly impressions your pin may get. #5: Determine the Cost Per Click After you set your keywords, decide how much money you're willing to spend for each person who clicks on your pin to be directed to your website. This is where you may think you need a large budget to get good traffic. However, we're not after traffic right now. We want the engagement in the form of repins. Come up with a low cost-per-click (CPC) number. I usually offer 15 to 25 cents per click. A low CPC ensures you won't run out of money if people get click-happy. #6: Review Campaign Results Once your campaign is complete, review the results and wait for the resulting traffic. For example, I only spent $5 on the campaign below. It received a lot of engagement and impressions at the time, and I'm still getting traffic from it today. The point of this whole strategy is to turn small amounts of money into traffic generators for your website in the future. The 42 people who repinned this pin will show it to their followers. When their followers repin it, it opens up new reach for you on Pinterest.

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook to acquire customers for your small business? Do you struggle to measure the return on your social media marketing investment? Despite a lack of concrete proof of sales, small businesses are devoting time and dollars to Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Most Small Businesses Don't See a Return From Their Social Media Efforts In April 2015, small business directory Manta surveyed 540 small business owners for their insights on social media return on investment (ROI). Fifty-nine percent report that they did not see ROI from their social media activities. Because the vast majority of small businesses puts most, if not the entire, social media budget into Facebook, this article focuses on that channel. Of the remaining 41% reporting that they did see returns, 17% received less than $100, and 57% received less than $1,000 for their energy and budget. One-third of that 41% (63 individuals) report outearning their social media marketing spend by more than $2,000. Social Media Examiner's 2015 Social Media Marketing Industry Report findings echo those in the Manta study. When the team asked 3,720 marketers whether their Facebook marketing is effective (which we can interpret as driving return to some extent), only 45% reported that it is. (Read here about how 60% of the respondents for the report were small business owners or executives. They either worked in companies with 2 to 10 employees or self-identified as solopreneurs.) The report also reveals that just 33% of the self-employed described Facebook marketing efforts as effective. Larger businesses have a slightly higher regard for their Facebook marketing efforts, with 50% pleased with their Facebook returns. B2C marketers also have a more positive take than B2B, with 51% of B2C marketers finding Facebook effective, compared to just 36% of B2B respondents. Key Takeaways: The significant 35% of respondents who are uncertain about whether their Facebook presence helps their business is telling. With barely enough time to keep up their Facebook page, small businesses typically lack the time and resources to gather the data needed to determine whether their Facebook efforts work. Gathering data requires that either the business owner or staff member learns or understands Google Analytics and Facebook Insights. Both of these tools require time and effort. Further, as Facebook's former Global Head of SMB Marketing Chris Luo explains in his March 2015 Fast Company article, effective Facebook advertising is moving away from the simple updates and boosting that small businesses could master easily: "Facebook has also introduced new, more sophisticated, advertising tools to directly target any user on Facebook in their newsfeed, but for the most part, these tools are used by savvy direct marketers at mid-sized or larger companies and not small businesses." #2: Small Businesses Are Reluctant to Invest Money in Social Media Small business owners are indicating their suspicion of social media marketing with their dollars. The Manta study mentioned above found that 47% of respondents invest less than $100 per month, and 40% spend between $100 and $1,000 monthly. Low spending numbers like these are surprising, given the hype Facebook marketing receives in the media. In a seeming contradiction, a recent poll of 547 small- and medium-sized business owners conducted by BIA/Kelsey and reported in The Wall Street Journal claims that social media marketing gets the majority of small businesses' ad budgets at 21.4% of total dollars. Further investigation, however, reveals that small businesses don't spend very much on marketing at all. A January 2015 BrightLocal survey of 736 small businesses revealed that 70% spend $500 or less per month on marketing. Fifty percent spend less than $300 per month.

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you write content for your business? Are you looking to improve the quality of your writing and your storytelling skills? To explore why the written word matters in social media, I interview Ann Handley for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ann Handley, the co-author of Content Rules and chief content officer at MarketingProfs—providing training and education to empower both large and small business marketers. Her newest book is called Everybody Writes: Your Go-To Guide to Creating Ridiculously Good Content. Ann shares why she decided to write a book for marketers about writing. You'll discover how to improve your writing for social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Writing and Social What led Ann to write this book Ann explains that she wrote Everybody Writes because she looked for that book, and it didn't exist. She wanted a book that was part writing guide geared toward marketers, part handbook on good sportsmanship in content marketing and part reliable desk companion for people creating content on behalf of brands and companies. So she wrote it! Ann wrote her first book, Content Rules, four years ago with C.C. Chapman. That was the beginning of the conversation about content marketing. These days, she explains, being able to write well is a necessity. Everybody Writes came out of Ann’s love for good writing and her desire to see marketers do a better job with their content. Listen to the show to learn more about Ann's first book, Content Rules. Why the written word is so important to marketers Ann explains that since we're all publishers in this age of technology, our words become our ambassadors. Our writing conveys a lot of things about us. It can make us seem warm, fun, competent and trustworthy. But it can also make us seem boring, humdrum and confused. Choosing the right words to tell our story is really important, especially when you want to connect with your customers. In a world where we all have a platform, whether it's a blog or a website, words matter now more than ever. Listen to the show to hear what people said to Ann when she told them she was writing a book on writing. What non-writers need to know about writing Ann believes we are all writers. If you have a website, work in marketing or post on social media, you're a writer. To learn to craft better content, just develop the necessary writing muscles. Ann talks about a story she tells in the book. As a non-athlete, she could never do a pull-up or a push-up. About a year ago, Ann started working with a personal trainer and then four months ago, she did a push-up. It's just like writing. If you want to get better at writing, or at push-ups, you just need practice. Everyone is capable of becoming a better writer. Listen to the show to learn what keeps people from believing they can write. How to develop writing muscles To get better at writing, you need to make it a priority. One tip Ann emphasizes is to give yourself permission to write badly and then fix what you've written. The main thing with writing content is to start somewhere. Write anything, and then edit it well. Listen to the show to discover what voice-to-text tools you can use to create early drafts of your content. Why stories are important and how to tell good ones All humans like a good story. The way you can tell if your story is good, Ann says, is as soon as you get into telling it,

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to create and promote videos? Are you wondering how to make videos that go viral? To learn about the creative process of coming up with video ideas and making them happen, I interview Mark Malkoff for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Malkoff, a comedian and filmmaker. Mark shares his love and passion for creating videos and several amazing stories behind his viral videos. You'll learn about his process for creating video and how to get traction. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Creation and Promotion Mark has created several viral videos and has been featured on many television shows. You'll hear about the stories behind these videos and what he accomplished to get this media attention. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CwYxuV2dVzw Mark shares how he grew up in love with comedy, the path he took before he started making videos and how he started making viral videos. Mark describes himself as a comedian at heart and the biggest comedy nerd. He feels that his love for comedy shines through in his work. The stories behind Mark's videos You'll hear the story behind Mark's first very successful video: the 171 Starbucks mentioned above. This is when he visited and consumed purchases at all 171 Starbucks locations in Manhattan in less than 24 hours. Just after this 171 Starbucks story, Mark approached IKEA with a project of living and working in an IKEA store for a week. And after 2 months of being persistent, they agreed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9q0sB_Xp6A Mark's IKEA story brought the most publicity in the USA in the history of IKEA as a company. And IKEA ended up winning the PR Week of the Year Award for the campaign. But to Mark, it was all about the video content and his videos on this project got 1.8 million views. Listen to the show to discover the secrets behind his success. The goals behind Mark's videos You'll learn how Mark's goal is simply to do things that make him laugh and challenge him. Sometimes brands are involved and sometimes they aren't. Mark tells the story of when he got carried across New York City by 155 individuals, 9.4 miles in 11-degree weather. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gi4ClspNrNs The aim of this video was to prove to the world that New Yorkers are nice. The video was a success. Sometimes brands come to him and other times he has to knock on their doors. Listen to the show to find out why Ford Motor Company was one of the best brands Mark has worked with.  The process of creating a viral video Mark shares his process to come up with ideas for the videos he makes. You'll learn how he goes from the ideas to creating a video project. And you'll probably be surprised by the amount of research and training involved behind the scenes for Mark's videos. Mark shares his experience of having hours of video and trying to tell the story in a short video for YouTube. Listen to the show to find out how he tests his videos. The story in the video Mark explains how it's his own curiosity that resonates with his audience. The story behind the Apple Store Challenge was to see what he could get away with in the Apple store. The video got over 1 million views on YouTube. Parts of the challenge included taking a goat into the store, ordering a pizza to be delivered there, dressing up as Darth Vader to get his iPhone repaired and a date night for him and his wife.

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to find new customers for your business? Have you considered searching for them on Twitter? Thanks to public updates, searchable bios and a plethora of third-party tools, you can find customers on Twitter easier than you can on any other network. In this article I'll show you how to find your current and future customers on Twitter, without advertising. #1: Start With a Strong Profile Before you start looking for potential customers on Twitter, you need to make sure that any potential customers who visit your profile know who you are and what you do. Listen to this article: Start by visiting your Twitter profile and reading your bio. Make sure that any products, services and qualifications are clearly listed in your bio, along with your website link and location. If they're not, click Edit Profile and add them. Once you're finished, save your changes. To complete your profile, make sure that you pin a tweet at the top that highlights your business, products, services, free ebook, top case study or anything else you want to promote to potential customers. You can create a new tweet for this or use one you've recently tweeted. Click on the three dots beneath your tweet to pin it to the top of your profile. Pinning the tweet ensures that potential customers don't miss the message you're trying to send them. Once your profile is set, you can start searching for potential customers on Twitter. #2: Search for Potential Customers Using Their Bios Can you identify potential customers by keywords they use to define themselves and by their location? If so, you can use Followerwonk to discover them. This Twitter search engine allows you to search for people using the criteria shown here. You then get the following search results. As a free user of Followerwonk, you need to click through to the person's profile to follow or add him or her to a Twitter list. If you want to do the latter, start by going to your Twitter profile and clicking on the Lists tab (to the left of the Edit Profile button). Scroll down to find the Create New List button. Give your list a name that you'll recognize, add a description and set the list to Private. If it's set to Public, each user you add to this list will be notified. When you visit the profile of a potential customer, you can follow that person and/or add him or her to your newly created list. To add someone to a list, click the Settings wheel icon to the left of the Follow button. Now go to your Twitter list and see the news feed of updates from the potential customers you've added to your list. Use this list to start engaging with your potential customers. #3: Get Specific Tweets Delivered to Your Inbox Do you know your potential customers' needs or pain points? Do they share them on Twitter? If they do, you can get potential customers, primed to buy, delivered directly to your inbox. Start by using Twitter search to query a few things you think your potential customers might talk about on Twitter in relation to your products or services. For example, if you have a web hosting company, you might want to search for recommend web hosting ? -http -link to find people looking for recommendations for web hosting. The -http -link­ part will remove a majority of the results that contain links, which usually won't be tweets from potential customers. Once you find a few good searches, head over to IFTTT, sign up for a free account and create a new recipe. Start by selecting Twitter as the trigger channel. Next, choose New Tweet from Search as the trigger. Paste in your Twitter keyword search that generated some potential customers. Then select your choice of an instant email, email digest or Gmail notification as the action. The best option is an instant email or Gmail, as you want to be the first person to respond. Now customize the email you want to receive.

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

5 Twitter Tools to Boost Your Productivity

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep up with your Twitter activities? Interested in tools to improve productivity? Managing your Twitter account doesn't have to consume all your time. There are tools that can make the work easier. In this article you'll discover five Twitter tools to boost your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Content via Tweet Jukebox Tweet Jukebox is a free scheduling tool that allows you to load a "jukebox" with content, schedule when you want tweets to go out and then sit back and let it do the job for you. You can create more than one jukebox, load it with thousands of tweets and then send out as many as 100 tweets per day. Your account comes preloaded with two jukeboxes, one with photo content and one with quotes, to get you started. You have the option to tweet jukebox content once, regularly or until a specific date. Tweet Jukebox allows you to set schedules for different times on different days of the week. When it runs out of content, it automatically starts tweeting again from the beginning. The scheduling engine is very flexible. Set a scheduled tweet once a year on a specific date (think holidays and annual events), or choose to tweet by frequency. You can also set a time for each tweet to go out, depending on user engagement. Tweet Jukebox also lets you track who has mentioned you. This can be visualized by the tweets themselves, or shown in a graph format. Choose from mentions in the last 7 days, 30 days, month or previous month. The Jukebox Store allows you to download preloaded jukeboxes with content from other high-profile users. Another handy feature is the ability to thank up to 50 users every Friday. #2: Create Text Overlay for Images Using Spruce Spruce is a free, easy-to-use tool that allows you to quickly create images with custom text for Twitter (and Facebook). Choose an image from the library, add your text, preview your post and publish it. It's as simple as that. Spruce allows you to upload your own images and download completed images for later use. You can check the post and add text before publishing it. Keep in mind that you don't have to tweet using the service, so you can create and add them to your scheduler, too. #3: Manage Followers With ManageFlitter ManageFlitter is a highly useful tool for managing your followers and posts. The functionality of the free account is pretty good. Or you can choose from two levels of paid accounts to get more features, including analytics. In the left column of the main dashboard, find out more about your followers by exploring different views, such as Not Following Back, No Profile Image, Inactive, Fake (Spam), Influence and Muted Users. This allows you to easily unfollow accounts that don't offer any benefit, identify spam followers and more. For example, suppose you want to find people you're following but who aren't following you back. Choose the Not Following Back option to see a list of users to check out and unfollow if necessary. Hover over a user's name to bring up details about that person, including his or her bio, location, language and average number of tweets per day. You can use ManageFlitter to post using the PowerPost feature, which tells you the best times to post based on users' activity. Additionally, you can post suggested content that's based on your niche, add an RSS feed to find further content (although you can't post it directly to Twitter) and view your queued content so you know what's scheduled. You can also connect your Google+ account so that it posts straight to Twitter for you. #4: Manage Relationships Using Commun.it Commun.it is a Twitter relationship management tool. There are three paid plans to choose from, depending on the features you need. You can also access and use the free account, with limited functionality. The dashboard is full of useful information.

Content Marketing Success: Why Answering Questions Sells

Content Marketing Success: Why Answering Questions Sells

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want more sales? Is content marketing a part of your strategy? To explore how to create content that sells, I interview Marcus Sheridan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, a blogger, podcaster, and keynote speaker who specializes in content and inbound marketing. He's known as "The Sales Lion," and is the author of the brand-new book, They Ask You Answer: A Revolutionary Approach to Inbound Sales, Content Marketing, and Today's Digital Consumer. Marcus explores how to market and sell with content. You'll discover how the right content can overcome buyers' fears. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing Success Marcus' Story Marcus began learning about content marketing during the 2008 market crash. Within 48 hours, his swimming pool business, River Pools, lost a quarter of a million dollars after five clients pulled their deposits. By January 2009, three consultants had suggested filing for bankruptcy. However, if Marcus filed, he and his partners would lose their homes and their 16 employees would lose their jobs. Marcus knew he had to generate more trust, traffic, leads, and sales than ever, and he had no money to do it. So he looked at the Internet. Marcus read all about inbound marketing, content, and blogging. He learned that addressing his prospects' questions, issues, fears, worries, and concerns on the business website could help the business be successful. In March 2009, Marcus told his two business partners that the company needed to live by a new philosophy: "They Ask. You Answer." Marcus brainstormed all of the questions he'd ever been asked and found that the major questions were often ones businesses don't like to answer online. Committed to the new philosophy, however, Marcus began writing blog posts about customers' questions, including the good, the bad, and the ugly. The company became committed to answering questions more consistently and transparently than anybody in their space. Listen to the show to discover how this new approach transformed the website's traffic, leads, and sales. Online Content Overload Now that many websites have taken the same approach to content that Marcus did, I ask Marcus what advice he would give to any business owner concerned that approaches to website content have changed. Marcus says he's really bothered when businesses assume they shouldn't share their philosophies or content because they think everything has already been said. Those businesses are letting other people in their industry create the content. Business leaders also think they shouldn't share content because their content isn't amazing. Marcus disagrees and notes that initially his writing and video content were bad. However, he kept going and now his content is good. Listen to the show to hear what false idea Marcus says everyone believes. The Five Subjects That Make a Difference In any industry, Marcus says buyers want to discuss five subjects as they research a company, product, or service online, and addressing these subjects on your website will help you reach your marketing goals. Cost questions Problems questions (what the drawbacks and issues are) Comparisons (your product versus another) Best of (for example, the best marketing automation software) Reviews However, Marcus finds that businesses don't like to talk about these topics on their websites. As a result, they lose customers. Most people research cost online before they buy and get frustrated when they can't find that informa...

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

16 Writing Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create copy for social media posts? Do you want some tools to help you improve the quality of your posts? Whether you work on your own or with a team, there are tools that make it more likely your social media posts will publish without errors and with correct word counts. In this article you'll discover 16 writing tools for social media marketers. Listen to this article: #1: WriteRack Do you frequently post tweets that are longer than the maximum 140 characters? If so, you'll need to send a "tweetstorm," or a series of tweets one right after the next. Doing this manually can be time-consuming. Instead of writing out each tweet, sign up for WriteRack and put your entire long tweet into the tool. It then divides it up, numbers it, and posts all of your tweets at once. Done and done! #2: Slick Write Slick Write is a user-friendly website that lets you copy and paste your social content directly into an analysis window. Slick Write analyzes your writing to find grammatical, spelling, and punctuation errors. Depending on the level of editing you want, settings can even be adjusted to catch mistakes like biased language and gender-specific pronouns. #3: Help.PlagTracker Originality is one of the most important components of any social media post. If you have a lot of competitors active on social media, you'll want to stand out as a unique brand. Run all of your posts through the Help.PlagTracker website before you publish them. This helps you to ensure originality and avoid the pitfalls of plagiarism. #4: Polish My Writing Polish My Writing (also known as After the Deadline) is a user-friendly grammar correction website that goes a step further. You can use it to get style suggestions for your content. The words to be corrected are simply underlined in red, blue, or green (depending on the correction), so the writing isn't cluttered or crowded as you edit. #5: Ulysses Ulysses is an app for anyone who does a lot of writing. The app lets you write no matter where you are, and will organize all of your writing in one place (including texts, new content, email, and writing projects). If you're in charge of managing a social media account, it can save you a lot of time by allowing you to access and organize your content at any time. The app costs $24.99. #6: Writefull Have you ever toggled back and forth between your word processor and Google trying to figure out if the phrases you want to use are correct or accurate? This works, but it's also intrusive and leads to distraction. Writefull is an app that integrates with your word processor to take over the role of Google. You can find out on the spot whether your phrases make sense. #7: Word Counter If you're planning to send out a lot of tweets about an upcoming product launch or a new promotion, you'll need to word them perfectly to make the most use of Twitter's 140-character limit. You can achieve this easily by using Word Counter. #8: Grammar Monster Grammar Monster won't correct your writing, but it will help prevent mistakes in the first place. Grammar Monster is an educational site where you'll find grammar and writing lessons, quizzes, grammar tips of the day, and a huge selection of grammar rules divided into categories. #9: Spellchecker Pretty much as you would expect, Spellchecker is a website that will quickly and accurately check your writing for spelling errors. #10: Grammar Check Grammar Check lets you copy and paste your content into its editing software. The site will then correct everything from dangling modifiers to unnecessary ellipses. #11: Papers Gear Editor Papers Gear is a professional custom writing service. You can hire an editing team to proofread and check grammar on your blog, articles, website copy, social media content, and any other important documents for your business. You can also get assistance with formatting your content. #12: Hemingway App

216. Thanks for all the fish

216. Thanks for all the fish

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on Boagworld: Chris Coyier talks CSS and more, we say goodbye to the boagworld podcast and ask what can you listen to now?

5 Mobile SEO Mistakes That Are Sabotaging Your Mobile Marketing Efforts

by Harsh Agrawal @ ShoutMeLoud

SEO remains one of the most popular topics on the internet. Why? Because webmasters are always fighting to get search traffic – the better your pages are optimized for search engines, the more chances you have to rank your content, and the more traffic you’ll drive to your site. That’s not all; it equally means […]

5 Mobile SEO Mistakes That Are Sabotaging Your Mobile Marketing Efforts is a post from ShoutMeLoud - Shouters Who Inspires

Blogging for Business: How Content Can Improve Your Sales

Blogging for Business: How Content Can Improve Your Sales

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how a blog can help your business? Are you trying to figure out how content can improve your sales? To learn more about the connection of blogging and content marketing, I interview Marcus Sheridan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, founder of The Sales Lion and author of the ebook Inbound and Content Marketing Made Easy. Marcus shares insights into the struggles marketers have to get results from business blogging. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that will work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing for Business What blogging is today Marcus explains why blogging is essentially about teaching the people in your industry. He shares why it's important for your business to be better at teaching than anyone else in the world. You'll hear why social media is not in your control and why you need to have your content on your own blog. Marcus shares how your blog helps you to communicate with your prospects and existing customers and the different ways you can use your content for your business. Listen to the show to find out the power of producing your own content. How to use content marketing for your blog The expression content marketing has exploded in popularity over the last 18 months and Marcus thinks that it's going to become a more common marketing approach within the next 12-18 months. Marcus shares how content marketing helped River Pools & Spas become #1 on Google and how a single article made his company $1.2 million in sales. Learn why content is the greatest sales tool in the world when used properly and how it can shorten the sales cycle. Listen to the show to find out the rewards behind the principle of communication and great teaching. How to produce great content You'll learn why it's important to talk to the reader in your voice and how to deepen their trust in you and your business. You'll also pick up some useful tips to create great content: Speak in your own voice. Eliminate the marketing message from your content. Make your blog your education center to answer all of the questions your prospects and clients ask. Offer more articles for readers to look at examples. Add a call to action to help your readers learn more. Listen to the show to discover the benefits of using your own voice and keeping it real. How to connect blogging to business results Marcus shares why it's so important for your business to be aware of how your content performs in communicating with your prospects. You'll discover why he believes every salesperson should participate in the company blog. And Marcus shares his hottest blogging and content marketing tips for businesses today: Approach content marketing as a teacher. Discover your content marketing tipping points that impact your business results. He says, "If you hang around the barbershop long enough, you're going to get your hair cut." If people spend enough time on your site, they will become customers. You have got to put the content out there and make it valuable, and you've got to be a teacher. When you do, you'll start to see amazing benefits. Listen to the show to hear how your business can benefit from blogging and content marketing. Survival Tip: Social Sharing The secret to getting the results you want from the content you create is to embed social share triggers in key strategic locations withi...

Illyes & Mueller Files and Google Updates – Episode 268

Illyes & Mueller Files and Google Updates – Episode 268

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

Listeners know we have had the Mueller Files for a while now, well… it’s time for the Illyes Files to make its presence known. This is because Gary Illyes of Google was the bearer of a ton of news at this year’s PubCon. That news includes Google Search Switching to Mobile First Index from Desktop […]

The post Illyes & Mueller Files and Google Updates – Episode 268 appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

10 ways to improve Google keyword ranking - The Garage

10 ways to improve Google keyword ranking - The Garage


Garage

From backlinks to image optimization, learn how to improve Google keyword ranking for your small business website.

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to do more with your Facebook cover image? Wondering how other businesses are using Facebook cover images? Your cover image is the perfect space to tell visitors more about your brand or products or drive home a call to action. In this article, you'll discover 12 creative ways to use your Facebook cover image for business. Listen to this article: #1: Inspire a Purchase You hear a lot about using video to show how people use a product or service. The same opportunities exist with photos. When you show off your product in your Facebook cover image, you're planting ideas with your customers that can inspire them to engage with you. In this cover image, Edible Arrangements puts its product front and center with a "Happy Birthday" message in the background. It's subtle, but you can use this tactic to paint your product in a way that says, "this is something special." It's a clever way to position the colorful display, because we all know someone with a birthday coming up. #2: Share Your Value Proposition Could you define your business in a single second? One of the best and simplest ways to spice up your Facebook cover photo is to challenge yourself to find creative ways to one-line your value proposition and present directly to the people who find your brand on Facebook. That's exactly what EYStudios did with a recent cover photo: a sharp and impactful one-liner that expresses who they are and what they can do. Lee Odden's team at TopRank Marketing shoots for the same impact. #3: Express Your Personality Any kind of visual content is a huge part of marketing, and it's one of the best avenues to show off who you are and the personality behind your business. Your cover photo is a great spot to showcase content that aligns with how you present your brand in other places online. MailChimp uses its cover photo to show off the company's personality, along with some clever use of negative space to fix your attention. #4: Appeal to the Senses Any business in the food industry (restaurants, catering, etc.) has a stellar opportunity to grab attention using enticing photos of their mouth-watering offerings. With seasonal changes that bring about new dishes and menu updates, you can swap out Facebook cover photos to showcase what's new on the menu, along with new promotions. It can be effective to have a call to action to help describe a product and get visitors moving. However, sometimes it doesn't hurt to let the product image speak for itself. Little Caesars takes that route by showing off a close-up of their new stuffed crust deep-dish pizza. In the same vein, Papa John's shows off its product to cater to people who love the look of a mouth-watering pizza. In addition, they saved space to promote a key relationship with Major League Baseball. When customers love a specific thing about your business, especially a certain product, you can leverage that connection in your Facebook cover photo. Olive Garden is confident that their customers are addicted to endless breadsticks and massive salads. So, customer favorites are featured in a zoomed-in shot, which makes you feel like you're sitting right at the table. It's cruel, but effective. #5: Speak to a Niche Audience For product-based businesses, the Facebook cover photo is a perfect way to feature new or seasonal products, along with your newest and grandest promotions. To maximize impact, include compelling copy and information about the products along with release dates and calls to action. Logitech G, a company known for computer accessories, used their cover photo to promote a specific line of products. They've highlighted an affiliation with the ESL (Electronic Sports League) to promote products for gamers. Like the Papa John's cover, this kind of affiliation can improve a business's position with specific customers. #6: Inspire Creativity

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you amazed at how much social media has changed over the last few years? Want to discover what's next? To explore the evolution of social media, I interview Brian Solis. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Solis, a principal analyst at the Altimeter Group. He's written eight books, including Engage and What's the Future of Business? His newest book is called X: The Experience When Business Meets Design. Brian will explore how social media has changed and how it continues to evolve. You'll discover how marketers can use moments of truth to engage their customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Evolution From Engage until now Brian recalls that in the late 90s and early 2000s, he helped with development around what became social media and realized that two-way digital marketing aspect was going to be phenomenal. He says his book Engage was the culmination of all that work put into a book designed to help anyone in marketing or business really understand how to become social. After Engage, Brian says, the world started to change and technology started to accelerate. This is something he studies as both an analyst and an anthropologist. Brian has continued to write books, do research and speak on how to bridge the world of brand or business with technology and people. He says social has become part of that process, as has mobile and digital transformation, wearables, etc. When asked about major changes in social media that have taken place between his first book and today, Brian talks about creating an infographic called The Wheel of Disruption while he was writing What's the Future of Business? The infographic showed all of the things that were disrupting industries, with an emphasis on brand, marketing and engagement. He explains that then and now, the three things Fred Wilson once called The Golden Triangle are at the core of everything. Brian goes on to discuss how wearables, augmented reality and services like Uber, Instacart, Postmates, Amazon, Drone Delivery and Google Express are creating disruption not only on technology fronts, but also on behavioral and expectation fronts at a human level. Listen to the show to hear Brian explain how the disruption happening today has grand implications for every business in every industry. The importance of experience Brian shares that while many marketers, brand strategists and executives say experience is one of the most important things to deliver, that means different things to different people. From great customer service to great product design, it's all over the map. Brian believes that everything that happens when you buy, use, shop for or have a problem with something are moments that contribute to the overall experience. Brian shares why he thinks we should be able to define and design experiences as part of business and branding to build better relationships, and why he believes experience is the next competitive advantage. He says that while some savvy organizations have introduced efforts to define a brand experience (BX), a customer experience (CX) and a user experience (UX), all of these efforts are disparate. Thus, by default or by design, the experience is disconnected. Listen to the show to hear why Brian wants to bring all experiences under one banner of X, where everything works together. Businesses doing a great job with experience Brian explains that he chose the companies he talks about in his book not because they are examples of holistic experiences,

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

Tools to Optimize Your Social Scheduling When You Need a Break

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Ever want to take a day off from posting on social media? Have you considered scheduling posts for weekends and holidays, or when you just can’t respond? Posting to Facebook and Twitter when many businesses are silent helps you stay top of mind with your followers. In this article you'll discover how to keep your social media accounts stocked with content when you’re on break. Why Post on Weekends? Some non-workdays are perfect times to be active on social media for certain types of businesses (think special offers for ecommerce sites during the holidays, for example). Simply greeting your followers on a holiday is a great way to build genuine likes and interactions. Listen to this article: Contrary to popular belief, social media posting on weekends is essential for your brand presence growth. The following studies show Saturday and Sunday posts can increase your interactions: Weekend posts on Facebook get more engagement than workweek posts. Weekend and Wednesday tweets are believed to be the best days for B2C companies. Weekend and afternoon tweets show the highest click-through rates. While posting on weekends and holidays can make sense for your business, the desire to take a well-deserved day off is understandable. Read on for some tips to keep your accounts active on those days. #1: Schedule Content Effectively If you'll be taking a weekend or holiday vacation, scheduling some updates for that time is a smart strategy. I recommend that you schedule updates with a tool like MavSocial because it's free and supports top social media networks. You can use the Post Manager feature to schedule your social media updates and check the Campaign Planner calendar to make sure you post each day of your vacation. Don't overschedule for holidays (especially if you are into ecommerce). Holidays can be risky: Customers wait longer for orders, and customer service is swamped. Downtime also tends to happen on holidays because hosting companies are understaffed. So it's not the best time for multiple social media updates. One timely update congratulating customers on the holidays is enough. Don't overschedule for time slots you won't be available to interact; one or two updates per day will be enough to maintain a consistent presence. I suggest a daily schedule like the one below for weekends or holiday absences: Schedule one Facebook page post: The purpose of this update is mostly to generate organic interactions rather than to convert, so post something entertaining and timely like a meme on a trending topic. You can also consider a post that acknowledges the holiday, a funny weekend picture or video, a joke or a visual quote. Schedule two to three tweets: Avoid asking questions, posting mini-contests or publishing tweets that may prompt questions or interactions you'll need to quickly react to. Instead, use this time to re-share important updates from the weekdays such as a special offer or an upcoming event reminder. #2: Tools to Improve Your Weekend Posting Although consistency is important to your success in social media marketing, so is including variety in what you share. Select an image from the MavSocial gallery to diversify your weekend and holiday social media updates on Twitter and Facebook. Unlike many other scheduling tools out there, the MavSocial Post Manager feature actually uploads your visual content to each network. To scale your entertaining content on Twitter for holidays, weekends or vacation time, use Tweet Jukebox to auto-post from a cool pre-built box you fill. I have a box of interesting quotes I use only for weekends. Simply register a free account and enable the box from My Jukeboxes. Sometimes updating your social media accounts in real time is unavoidable, which is why I like the idea of DrumUp so much. DrumUp has a great free mobile app for Android that you can use to make this process easier from your smartphone.

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

Facebook Professional Services: How Your Local Business Can Rank

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have a local business page on Facebook? Want to reach more local customers? Facebook recently launched Professional Services, a directory that helps consumers find the best local businesses and services to fit their needs. In this article I'll share how to use the Facebook Professional Services feature to boost visibility with local customers. Listen to this article: What Is Facebook Professional Services? Facebook Professional Services is a directory inside Facebook for local businesses. The goal is to help customers find local businesses with the best Facebook reviews and ratings. Facebook expert Mari Smith doesn't see it as making "... a huge dent in Yelp... at first." But, she continues, "Over time, as more and more businesses become savvy with their Facebook marketing, and really promote their page activity, the Services Directory and Places could be more of a first choice for consumers." Customers can use the search box to find businesses in the area based on keywords specific to the products or services they need. They can also browse the top local business categories. Within search results or specific category selections, customers see basic details about local businesses, such as their description, address, phone number and ratings. One of the nice parts about Facebook Professional Services is that it's not limited to the United States. People can search for local businesses worldwide. While there are no specific guidelines as to how the Facebook algorithm determines which local businesses to show, after several searches, you can determine it's based on the following: Where the local business is located Matching keywords in the local business page's name, description and category The overall average star rating of the local business The number of ratings the local business has received The recency of the latest review The number of check-ins for the local business Previous interactions between the local business page and the customer Connections between customers and people who check in, rate and review the local business Mobile users can access Facebook Professional Services from their device's browser. The search works the same, but the categories presented are much more limited. Inside the Facebook app, Nearby Places is the best alternative. iPhone users will find this under the More menu. There, they can search for businesses based on location and category. Search results and category pages will show similar information as presented in Facebook Professional Services on the desktop. Based on Facebook's tendency to create individual apps for different features, one could assume that if Facebook Professional Services takes off, it will become a stand-alone app similar to what Yelp offers. But Facebook Professional Services is still in its earliest stages, so only time will tell. Now that you know what Facebook Professional Services is and a little bit about how it works, here are some tips to help you boost your local business's visibility in the new local directory. #1: Choose the Correct Category and Subcategories for Your Local Business Page To ensure that customers find your local business in search or a category listing page, be sure that you've selected the appropriate category and subcategories for your local business. To start, search for the keywords or categories that customers would use to find you and see what Facebook suggests. Then go to your local business Facebook page and enter them in Page Info on the About tab. #2: Enter Your Business Details All of these fields (found in Page Info on the About tab of your local business Facebook page) appear in search results on Facebook Professional Services. Hence, you'll want to be sure the short description, contact info and business hours fields are filled in on your local business Facebook page.

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a new product or service? Want to create buzz and get the word out to the right people? Facebook is a great way to promote the launch of a product or service and generate excitement. To be successful, you need to plan your content, write your posts and make good use of the tools Facebook has to offer. In this article you'll discover how to launch a product or service using Facebook. #1: Before Pre-launch: Start Planning Early You'll want to map out your launch strategy at least two months ahead, and most likely even earlier than that. Plan what types of launch material you'll have available to share on social media to get the buzz going. You may also need to start designing some of these materials. Listen to this article: If you have an online product, you can use some great freebies to help get people onto your list. Some examples of great freebies or launch materials include: Images and infographics: Think about designing several versions of your images so they're size-optimized for each social site. Also, if you'll be using them in a Facebook ad, make sure the images are 1200 x 628 pixels and comply with the 20% text rule. Free ebooks, reports or white papers: These freebies could be part of your final product or something valuable that will promote the final product. Free webinar or other educational content: If you're launching an online product, you may want to host a webinar, telesummit or some other type of live event. Plan when that event will occur and when you'll start promoting it. Sale or discount period: If you're offering an introductory price, figure out how long that will last and how many posts you might have around that promotion. Facebook contests: If you're having a contest to promote the launch or new product, plan the timing and determine what type of contest will work best for you. When launching a course, for example, you might plan all of the content and decide when you'll communicate about it to people on your email list and in your social media posts. If affiliates or promotion partners will be helping you get the word out about your product or service, start assembling that team and putting together resources for the team to use. Be sure to make it easy for affiliates to build buzz on Facebook and other social media channels. Write a variety of Facebook posts and tweets so they can either cut and paste them or have a great starting place to add their own wording. Social Media Examiner provided a variety of images to their affiliates to help promote Social Media Marketing World. Some of the images were appropriate for Facebook ads, while others were useful for tweets or blog posts. They also provided a variety of tweets and Facebook updates that were ready to use, and people just had to add their affiliate link. #2: Pre-launch: Build Buzz To start building buzz and generating excitement around your product or service, post teasers about it. If appropriate, use both your Facebook page and profile to let your Facebook fans and personal friends know that something is coming. Using video on Facebook to promote your launch will go further in the news feed. Make sure you're creating a variety of content. You can see that this video post reached nearly 39,000 people and had over 8,000 views. You can also give people a sneak peek into your process. Bathers Beach House in Australia started posting about their restaurant months before it opened. They shared the building process, gained the interest of potential diners and grew to over 4,000 fans before they even opened their doors. This led to a successful opening of their restaurant, and they continue to have high engagement and interaction. If you have affiliates or promotional partners, consider co-creating material to launch the product, such as a webinar or live Q&A session. Gena Shingle Jaffe launched a legal course for entrepreneurs,

Is digital transformation in danger of crushing your I.T. team?

Is digital transformation in danger of crushing your I.T. team?

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

Many I.T. departments are under impossible pressure. With ever more demanding needs and years of legacy and new tech, I.T. teams are looking for ways to keep up.

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how a master marketer thinks about books and the launch process? To explore book marketing, blogging and podcasts, I interview Seth Godin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I'll interview Seth Godin, author of 17 books, including Purple Cow, Permission Marketing and Tribes. He blogs every day on topics related to marketing, leadership and more. He also has an excellent podcast mini-series called Seth Godin's Startup School. Seth and I explore his latest book along with his thoughts on publishing and marketing books. You'll discover Seth's philosophy on writing, the importance he puts on blogging and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Book Marketing Seth's new book Seth's latest book is called, What to Do When It's Your Turn (and It's Always Your Turn). He explains that he usually comes up with the title early in the process, and then writes the book to go with it. However, in this case, the title came second to last. The book exists because when his son was heading off to college, he asked Seth to write down his advice. A letter to his son turned into a book for everyone. It's a heavily illustrated book about fear, bravery and doing work that matters. Seth's background is in publishing and he was a book packager for 12 years, during which time he and his team wrote 120 books. These included almanacs, books on gardening, business and everything in between. In 1999, he started writing books as a solo author. One person with a point of view. That's when things shifted for him, he says. "I didn’t say, 'What book do I need to write next, because I need to pay the bills?' I said, 'What do I care enough about saying to put myself through all the pain and suffering it takes to bring a book into the world?' Seth's first "real book" was Permission Marketing which has his picture on the cover. Listen to the show to discover why Seth believes all of his books are marketing books. How Seth decides what to write when it comes to his books Seth doesn’t think he has much say in what he chooses to write about. While he is very strategic in most elements of his life, his best writing is not strategic at all. "I start with an itch and the writing is my scratching of the itch," Seth reveals. He starts a new book every few days, and some of them only last a paragraph or two, which is why it’s great to have a blog. If a book won’t go away, then he has to write it. Seth believes most people shouldn’t look at the book business as a way to make a living. The book business is an organized hobby, and a fabulous way to bring ideas into the world and a great thing to leave behind. For those who want to write a book to become a paid, professional author, Seth says, don't. Instead, think about using books as a generous way to spread ideas and earn trust. Listen to the show to learn why Seth doesn’t discuss upcoming projects with his peers. Why Seth decided to publish and distribute this book on his own Since most people don't finish the books on their Kindle, Seth wanted What to Do When It's Your Turn to be only available on paper. He also didn't want people to buy just one copy of the book. "If you buy 1 copy, I send you 2. If you buy 3 copies, I send you 5. If you buy 8 copies, I send you 12," he explains. "If you get an extra copy of a book, you have to give it away." Since ideas are now spreading person to person and not top down, Seth wanted this book to be his experiment with horizontal publishing.

How to Pin Your Facebook Carousel Ad as a Page Post

How to Pin Your Facebook Carousel Ad as a Page Post

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more organic traffic from Facebook? Have you considered pinning your ads as Facebook page posts? In this article you'll discover how to drive organic traffic and conversions by pinning a Facebook carousel ad to your page as a post. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Your Facebook Carousel Ad First, you need to create your Facebook carousel ad. Click the green Create Ad button and select Send People to Your Website as the objective. Next, enter a URL. This is the final URL visitors click through to at the end of your carousel, so you may want to choose your main website for this one, depending on the point of your carousel. Now, name your campaign something that you can easily recognize later so you can refer back to the carousels you’ve created. Then click the Set Audience & Budget button. Next, choose your ad audience. Note that if you want to run this as an ad, you’ll want to get specific about your ad targeting. If you don’t want to run this as an ad, you don’t have to; thus, you don’t need to do anything at this point. Now set your ad budget. In case you forget, set the lifetime budget as low as $25 so that even if your ad does run, you won’t spend that much. Then click Choose Ad Creative. #2: Design Your Carousel Ad Now, you’ll design your carousel ad. First, select Multiple Images in One Ad. Next, connect your page so the ad will be shown in the desktop news feed. This is extremely important. Remove all other placements except the Desktop News Feed, as they’re unnecessary. Configure one to five images, links, and calls to action for your carousel ad using the following specifications. Note that for each carousel image, you can have different website URLs (even from different domains) and different call-to-action buttons. Once you’re finished, your preview should look like this. Be sure to click through your carousel images one more time to ensure that the images, ad copy, and URLs are correct. You can click the Review Order button to get a quick glance at all of your settings. Then click the Place Order button to place the ad into Facebook’s review queue. #3: Pin Your Carousel Ad to Your Facebook Page as a Post At this point, you will be taken to your Ads Manager dashboard. In the box to the right, you’ll see a See Post link. Click on the See Post link to go to your carousel ad post. Click on the Share link to share the post and use the drop-down menu to choose the Share on a Page You Manage option. Select your page and remove the via tag that appears in the Say Something About This area. Then add your own descriptive comment. Now post it to your page. You should see a confirmation of success. Now use the arrow at the top right to pin it to the top of your page wall. At this point, you can either let your ad campaign run or go back to your Ads Manager dashboard and toggle the ad and the campaign off. The choice is yours and won’t affect your pinned post. 8 Ways to Use Pinned Carousel Ad Posts to Drive Traffic Now that you know how to create carousel ads and share them to your Facebook page, how should you use them? In my example, I chose to feature five random blog posts at the top of my Facebook page wall. Here are some other ways you can choose to use yours: Feature your top three to five products or services. Be sure to link each to its corresponding landing page. Use the Download or Shop Now call-to-action button for products and the Book Now, Contact Us, or Sign Up call-to-action buttons for services, as applicable. Showcase the top three to five features or benefits of your products or services. Be sure to link each to its corresponding landing page. Use the Learn More or Watch More call-to-action buttons, as applicable. Display the top three to five lead magnets you have to offer to capture new subscribers to your email list.

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do people review your business online? Ever receive negative or fraudulent reviews? To discover what to do when you receive a review that's not what you were expecting, I interview Dan Lemin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Daniel Lemin, the founder of One Good Brand. He is also a strategist for Convince & Convert, and author of the brand-new book, Manipurated. Dan will explore online reviews and how to deal with bad and fraudulent reviews. You'll discover why online reviews are so important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews Dan's backstory Dan started his online career with Google's corporate marketing team and saw the emergence of black hat SEO (search engine optimization). He explains the distinction between white hat (good) and black hat (bad) SEO, and talks about link farms as an example of black hat tactics. Google came to love Yelp's fresh content and Dan says that's how the rating and review platforms attracted shadowy SEO characters. They saw the opportunity to continue "tricking" consumers through new platforms. Listen to the show to discover why the owners of small- and medium-sized businesses need to know the dynamics of the SEO industry. Why reviews are important Dan shares that nearly 90% of consumers say they trust reviews as much as they trust their friends and family. Since so many people make decisions based on online reviews, the vast majority of a business's prospective customers are filtering through review sites. Since Google favors this type of content, reviews are a new SEO tactic, and that's why site owners are adding some type of rating and review component. For instance, a lot of hospitality businesses like Starwood Hotels have added reviews to their websites. He says one review will not necessarily make or break a business, but cautions that the presence of the review industry can make or break small businesses, because they don't have all the tools and techniques a large company like Chipotle might have. When asked which review sites matter most, Dan explains his research found it really depends on the business category. For example, Gondola Adventures in Newport Beach, which is in a super-specialized industry, says Yelp matters, but TripAdvisor is even more important. Dan says companies can track reviews manually by going to each review site, but it's very time-consuming. To help, there's a whole cottage industry of companies such as ReviewTrackers and ReviewPush that do review tracking for businesses. Listen to the show to learn how much traffic Yelp gets from Google. The purpose of fake reviews Dan shares that there are different layers to the purpose of fake reviews. He first discusses fake positive reviews and says that several weeks ago, Amazon filed an unprecedented lawsuit against 1,100 people. They accused anonymous people on Fiverr of selling reviews for profit on Amazon. For his book, Dan interviewed a young lady who writes reviews for a living, and says it's very difficult to distinguish her reviews from legitimate ones. Dan discusses fake reviews that are created to injure the reputation of a business. Dan also shares an example of another type of fake review, a scam that targeted wedding photographers in the Bay Area. After responding to what looked like a legitimate inquiry from their websites, the photographers would get an email saying "I decided not to hire you" or "we changed the date." The email would go on to say, "I work in the online reputation business,

Don’t lose perspective for the sake of good search engine placement

Don’t lose perspective for the sake of good search engine placement


Boagworld - User Experience Advice

Admit it, you want to be number one on Google. We all do. However, if you let it become an obsession it can ruin your site.

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

How to Boost Your Facebook Ad Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads to promote your business? Are you struggling to connect with your audience? By fine-tuning your Facebook ads, you can capture the attention of both customers and prospects. In this article you'll discover how to boost the visibility of your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Use a Clutter-Free Image With Minimal Text The image you choose for your ad depends on what business you're in and whom you're targeting. If you're a personal brand, you may want to choose a picture of yourself, because a friendly face can improve the performance of your ad. It's also possible to get good results with images that show a product or something else that's relevant to what you're advertising. When choosing an image, make sure that it isn't too busy or cluttered. And avoid using an image that has Facebook's shade of blue because people may dismiss your ad, thinking it has something to do with Facebook. It's also helpful to add a border around your image. Keep images text-free, or use a very small amount of text. Facebook has implemented a 20% rule for text in an ad image, which means text can cover no more than 20% of the image. In a tiny ad on the sidebar of a page, a lot of text on an image wouldn't be legible anyway. #2: Write Short, Attention-Grabbing Copy Your ad copy should be short and enticing and grab the user's attention immediately. Spend some time coming up with your ad copy. Facebook suggests you include a timeframe and a price (when appropriate) and stick to one call to action. You can create multiple ads with different text. Then test them to see which gets the most engagement. There are two distinct components to the ad copy: the headline and the text. In the news feed, the ad's headline (which is clickable) appears under the picture, and in the sidebar, it appears before the text copy. Try to keep the headline to a single line in the ad. The text copy sits above the image in the news feed or under the headline in the sidebar. Keep the text short enough that the person viewing the ad won't have to click the See More button. #3: Explore Audience Targeting When you're targeting an audience for your ad, don't just type in male/female, 30 to 40 years old, in a certain city and hope for the best. It's important to know who your customers are so you can drill down and segment accordingly. Target the people you want to be connected to you and your brand. For example, if you're advertising something that people can buy, you might want to target those who have bought from you before or expressed an interest in buying at some time. When creating your ad, always choose the location, age, gender and interests you're targeting. Most people won't list their job title or very personal details on their Facebook profile, so you can leave these details out. Target interests by specifying the pages that your ideal customer likes. You can target your direct competitors' pages. For example, if you're a photographer in Toronto, target the followers of the page of a competing photographer in the area. You might also want to target the pages of businesses whose products and services are complementary to yours. These people likely have the same customers as you. For example, if you're a web designer, target people who like the pages of a particular copywriter. Look at the profiles of people who like your page and see what other pages they like. You'll probably find common likes among your fans. Make sure that you target the actual pages, which show up in Interests, rather than the interests themselves. Note that there seems to be no real rhyme or reason to the pages that Facebook pulls up in the Interests section. You may enter the name of a page that has over 20,000 likes, and Facebook won't find it, but one with 2,000 likes may show up if you search for it. This is something you'll have to test for yourself when choosing page...

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

Blogging: A Business Model for Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you blog for business? Are you wondering how the blogging can help your business? To learn how a blog can be the center of your entire marketing program and explode your business's growth, I interview Joe Pulizzi for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and co-author of Get Content, Get Customers and Managing Content Marketing. Joe shares his blogging story and how sharing free content grew his business. You'll learn how blogs can grow your email list, why multi-author blogs may be worth exploration and how to widen your professional network. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing What is content marketing? Joe tells us that people think content marketing is a buzzword. He says that 2013 is the year for content marketing to become part of the vernacular used by more marketing folks and business owners. It's important to realize that content marketing has been around for a long time. Joe looks at the example of John Deere creating The Furrow magazine back in the late 1800s. The company published the magazine because they wanted to create a true resource and educational component for farmers to be more successful business owners. The only way to do that back then was to have a magazine. They didn't have blogs, webinars or in-person events. It's the first representation of what is now content marketing. Joe explains that today, we're all basically media companies and publishers. It's really the essence of what content marketing is and because there are no technology barriers; everybody is doing it. The idea is that companies create or curate valuable, compelling and relevant content on a consistent basis. Usually it's to maintain or change behavior, and attract or retain a customer. If you're a traditional media company, you create content to get revenue in one of two ways: 1) getting your content sponsored in some way and 2) selling your content. This is how a traditional publisher goes to market. That's the business model. However, if you're a small business, you're creating content because you ultimately want to sell something. You're not necessarily making money directly from the content, but sales are coming in a later form or you're growing relationships with people who are then more likely to buy from you at a later date. Listen to the show to find out why the barriers to entry are very low and why consumers are more accepting of content in different forms than they have ever been. Joe's blogging story Joe describes the term blog as being a very important tool. He started out in the content marketing industry in 2000, with a company called Penton Media. Penton still is the largest independent business publisher in North America. They publish magazines mainly in industries like heating and air conditioning,  major manufacturing or food service. Joe ran the custom content division for all of these properties, which meant that if someone didn't want to advertise in a magazine, the publisher sent them over to Joe. It was his job to find a different way to make money from these people because he couldn't sell them ads. Joe tried to figure out how to help these companies tell better stories: "How were companies going to get attention if they didn't have a compelling story to tell?" Joe shares examples of the market share of the most popular television shows.

Interview with Loren M. Smith, CEO of Blue Valley Capital

by globalwebdesign @ Global Web Design

When we first met Loren M. Smith, he had a website that was in need of an overhaul and was interested in marketing his website to the search engines.  We began our journey by making some minor adjustments to his existing website, but within a month or so we began a complete redesign.  Our design…

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to improve your social media contests? Want to know what works for other businesses? Whether you want to build an email list or grow your follower base, social media contests are a great way to engage your audience and significantly boost conversions. In this article you'll discover how three businesses ran successful social media contests and learn how to incorporate their tactics into your own contests. Listen to this article: 3 Successful Social Media Contests for Inspiration The Prepared Pantry, an Idaho-based specialty grocery store, sells baking mixes, kitchen tools, and gourmet foods. The store ran a smart sweepstakes contest, enticing fans to enter its social media contest by offering a top-of-the-line panini maker. To enter, fans simply had to give their name and email, like the company's Facebook page, and share and tweet out the contest. The Prepared Pantry's campaign received 4,392 impressions and captured 1,972 entries. That's a conversion rate of 44.8%! A conversion rate over 40% is excellent. After this one campaign, the company now has almost 2,000 new email subscribers. TopmaQ is a New Zealand–based company that sells tools, construction equipment, and building products. Fans were offered a chance to win a wheelbarrow full of tools - what a creative incentive! For a chance to win, fans entered their email and liked and shared TopmaQ's Facebook page. TopmaQ's creative giveaway resulted in 8,798 impressions, captured 2,296 email addresses, and finished with a conversion rate of 26%. With the extensive reach and high number of entries, TopmaQ clearly picked a prize that resonated with their target audience. Core Entertainment, an Ontario-based entertainment company, holds over 400 events each year. One lucky winner was offered a private suite for an upcoming concert featuring country music star Garth Brooks. To enter, fans supplied their email and liked and shared the campaign for a chance to win. This social media contest was seen by 3,549 people, captured 1,062 email entries, and resulted in a conversion rate of 29.9%. With impressive reach and over 1,000 new email subscribers, Core Entertainment certainly knocked it out of the park with this campaign. Replicate the Success of These Social Contests for Your Business You've just seen three examples of highly successful social media marketing contests spanning the grocery, hardware, and entertainment industries. Hopefully, you're already considering what prize you might give away for your next social contest, or how you might promote it to your audience. Now here comes the best part. Each of the preceding contests did the same five things to set their campaign up for success. Read on to learn what these steps are and how you can replicate them for your next contest. #1: Make Your Contest Mobile-Friendly Mobile is a must for a successful social contest. Facebook boasts 1.04 billion daily active users, with 934 million of those on mobile. This is a big number, but should come as no surprise. In fact, according to Mary Meeker's 2015 Internet Trends Report, U.S. adults now spend more time every day browsing the Internet from mobile phones than they do from computers. If your social contest isn't mobile-friendly, you're missing out on over half of your potential entries. #2: Promote With Linkshare Posts Creating social contests is great, but how will they help you capture new leads if they can't be found? Promote your contest via email marketing, sharing on social networks, writing a blog post, or even word-of-mouth marketing. Additionally, share your campaign in a linkshare post on Facebook. To promote your campaign in a linkshare post, paste the direct link of your campaign in a Facebook status. As you do, you'll notice that Facebook automatically renders a preview of your campaign, including an image (just like the post for the Prepared Pantry above).

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you consider yourself a thought leader? Want to know what it takes to become a guest on a major podcast or a speaker at large events? In this episode I go behind the scenes at Social Media Examiner with Phil Mershon. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Phil Mershon, director of events at Social Media Examiner. This show is the official third anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Phil and I will explore how we pick the thought leaders in our industry for our conferences and podcast. You'll discover how to become a thought leader in any industry. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership What thought leadership means Phil talks about the two parts that go into being a thought leader. First, there's the "thought" element. It starts with people who have excellent forward thinking, stay on the cutting edge and push boundaries, understand deeply how things work and are able to articulate it. And second, they must be a "leader," someone whom others listen to and follow. A thought leader does those things over time, consistently producing material that people will listen to month in and month out. Before I started Social Media Examiner, I was called one of the leading authorities in the white paper world. To earn that, I constantly wrote articles, started a blog, did training, wrote a book, summarized industry research and had a monthly newsletter. Establishing yourself as a thought leader is a lot of work. Even harder is maintaining it. Mari Smith is an excellent example of someone who chose to own her title of "Facebook Expert," and is having great results. Listen to the show to discover how long Phil and I have been working together and what we did before Social Media Examiner. How we decide who should be on the podcast and on our stages When deciding on our content, we ask two questions: "What should people speak about?" and "Who should speak about those subjects?" To determine what people will speak about, we look very carefully at the data, Phil explains. We study our annual Social Media Marketing Industry Report, which is based on the subjects our readers tell us they do and do not care about. It influences decisions about the kinds of speakers we need to find, which sometimes means we need to seek out experts we don't know yet. If you want to pitch yourself to a conference or podcast, it's important to first study it. Look at the organization's typical lineup to see what kinds of things people are speaking about, and determine if you're a fit. Not every thought leader is appropriate for every situation. We get inquires all the time from people who pitch us things that aren't appropriate. Listen to the show to hear how booking speakers is like programming for television. What we look for in our speakers Phil and I share the four criteria we look for in a speaker. 1. Are they a great communicator? We're not just looking for inspirational communicators, we are looking for people who can explain or teach at a very deep level how to use the different social media platforms. A lot of people think they're great communicators, but a lot of people also think they're good drivers. I share how when Sally Hogshead was keynoting at Social Media Marketing World, she said "Raise your hand if you think you are a good driver." About 95% of the hands went up in the room. Then she says, "Interestingly enough, research shows that only 55% of people are good drivers, so that means that about 40% of you are kidding your...

Launch Strategy: A Case Study in How to Move People to Action

Launch Strategy: A Case Study in How to Move People to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to release a book, podcast, or other product? Want to make your launch a success? To discover how he launched his latest bestselling book, I interview Michael Hyatt. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt, author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward. He's also the host of the This Is Your Life podcast and he blogs at MichaelHyatt.com. In his prior life, Michael was the CEO and chairman of book publisher Thomas Nelson. Michael explores how he launched his latest Wall Street Journal and USA Today bestseller, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. You'll discover how to create a launch plan for any project. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launch Strategy Why write a physical book in the digital age? Michael has Living Forward available as an audio book, an ebook, and a print book. Since everyone talks about digital books, you'd think physical books are obsolete, Michael says. The truth is ebooks are only 25% of the market; the other 75% are physical books. Publishing only in digital format would mean missing the vast majority of the potential market. Furthermore, as of now, you don't really have a chance to reach any of the major bestsellers lists unless you publish a traditional book, he adds. The New York Times has an ebook bestsellers list, but those are really only for digital editions of physical books. You also don't have much chance of getting any major media unless you publish a physical book, because most of the gatekeepers in traditional media want to see a print book. Finally, an ebook doesn't have the same cultural authority as a traditional hardcover book. There are a lot of reasons to write a book, but Michael doesn't know of anything that can give you more authority in your niche than having a published book. An ebook is better than nothing, but it's not as good as a traditionally published hardcover book, he says. There are other benefits to being a bestselling author. If you're a speaker, you can be introduced with that moniker. It also enables you to increase the prices of whatever you're selling and helps with distribution. There's a limited amount of shelf space in conventional bookstores. They are risk-averse in what they order, because they get stuck with books they can't sell. Even though they can return unsold books to the publisher, it's just a hassle, he says. Once your book gets on the bestsellers list, the retailers that didn't initially order your book have to have it all of a sudden. Listen to the show to learn more about Michael's 35-year background in publishing. About Living Forward Michael says Living Forward is about creating a life plan. Michael wanted to help people stop drifting through life, become intentional, and start designing the outcomes they want. He learned these things when he started working with an executive coach around 2000. After he became a divisional manager at Thomas Nelson, Michael and his team were working like crazy to build up the division. They got to number one in 18 months, but the cost was life balance. When Michael told his friend, author John Maxwell, that he was looking for a coach, John introduced him to Daniel Harkavy, the CEO of Building Champions. Daniel became his coach for a decade, as well as a good friend. One of the first things Daniel taught Michael was how to create a written life plan. His life plan was so transformational that Michael began to write about it on his blog. A while later,

5 Checks to Ensure Your Facebook Page Is Up to Date

5 Checks to Ensure Your Facebook Page Is Up to Date

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using a Facebook page for marketing? Have you checked to make sure it's up to date? Facebook regularly provides marketers and business owners with new ways to update their presence on Facebook. In this article you'll discover five checks to ensure your Facebook page is up to date. Listen to this article: #1: Review Your About Box One of the big differences between pages in the Local Business category versus the other categories has been the About box in the page's left sidebar. Pages in the Local Business category would show the business's address and phone number, while pages in all other categories have the page's short description displayed. Now, some pages in other categories, such as Company, display the address and phone number in the About box, instead of the short description. Pages that have not yet added their address and phone number, like the one for Gucci, show "Ask for" links to visitors. It's important for marketers who have a Facebook page in a category other than Local Business to visit it to make sure it shows their short description, as opposed to a missing address and phone number. If your page is missing information, you either need to update your address and phone number (which you can do by clicking on what needs to be changed) or switch your page to a different category. To edit your page category, go to your About tab and edit it under Page Info. The updated category will appear beneath your Facebook page name, so choose something highly relevant for your page. #2: Add a Call to Action for Different Devices The Call-to-Action button allows you to display a specific call to action next to your page's Like button. This drives traffic to your website or mobile app, and ensures people who like your page will be presented with the most options to follow your page. Here are two examples of Facebook pages in a similar industry: Due.com and Hiveage. Due's Facebook page does not use the Call-to-Action button. When someone likes the page, the options to Get Notifications from the page and have the page's posts show up first in the news feed are separated under two drop-downs. On the other hand, Hiveage's Facebook page uses the Call-to-Action button. When someone likes the page, the options to Get Notifications from the page and have the page's posts show up first in the news feed are under the Liked drop-down. This is where new fans are more likely to hover. If you don't have a Call-to-Action button on your Facebook page, you can easily add one. Go to your page and click Create Call to Action. Next, you will find options to set your Call-to-Action button for website visitors (from a computer), as well as for iPhone and Android users. Click the drop-down under Choose a Button to see your call-to-action options. Next, enter a relevant website URL in the website field. Alternately, switch No to Yes under Set up a Link to an App and then choose a specific app for iPhone or Android users. When you've finished the setup, click the Create button to test your Call-to-Action button. You want to make sure it directs Facebook page visitors to the right web page or app. #3: Choose a Featured Video Video on Facebook is a hot commodity. Add a Featured Video to your Facebook page. It will appear at the top of your About box, as shown on the Facebook page of Subaru. To include a Featured Video on your page, start by uploading a video to the Videos tab. Afterward, you get the option to add it as a Featured Video. Simply select a video from your uploads to add as your Featured Video. Once you do that, you can click the pencil icon at the top right of the Featured Video on the Videos tab to add a description to your video, change it or remove it. It is particularly important to add a description to your Featured Video, since anyone who clicks to watch the video will see it.

SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google EU appeal, goodbye fetch as Google for apps & award list appeared first on Search Engine Land.

The lessons I learnt doubling my mailing list subscribers

The lessons I learnt doubling my mailing list subscribers

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

Email mailing lists are a valuable marketing tool. However, getting users to signup, let alone open and click on emails can be incredibly challenging.

SearchCap: Google iOS app trends, difficult clients & content SEO

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google iOS app trends, difficult clients & content SEO appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Is SEO really evil? A discussion with Andy Kinsey

Is SEO really evil? A discussion with Andy Kinsey

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld show we talk with Andy Kinsey about the changing face of search engine optimisation.

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your social media marketing mix? Looking for tips to get started with video? Making the right decisions in three key areas will help you create videos that engage people. In this article you'll discover three steps to add video to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Video Type The great thing about social media is that you can create many different types of videos to keep your publishing schedule interesting and your followers engaged. Eighty-eight percent of businesses say that video is an important part of their marketing strategy. However, the biggest struggles are to stop recycling old content and choose the right type of video content. Here are five ways that you can include video in your social media marketing. Grab Attention With Pre-roll Video Pre-roll video ads are short 15- to 30-second videos that grab the viewer's interest in a product or service. You can use them on social media sites such as YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. The secret to a successful pre-roll video is to gain the viewer's attention quickly, as most people naturally gravitate towards the Skip button or scroll past videos on their news feed. This pre-roll video from Geico pulls the viewer in by showing a runaway vacuum. Use humorous tactics like this to make your video stand out in the news feed and compel viewers to watch the whole thing. (Editorial Note: This video was removed from public view after this article published.) httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xmzm1JCOqtU Show Viewers How to Do Something One way to produce highly targeted content is to teach your audience how to do something. This helps you improve shares and attract new followers. Fitness trainer Kayla Itsines regularly produces videos that teach her target audience how to do various fitness moves. Content like this has helped her become an influencer in the fitness industry, gaining her 4.4 million followers on Instagram. Her videos are easy to follow and they feature content that people would normally expect to pay money to see. http://www.instagram.com/p/_XYsJfACNp/ "How to" video searches on YouTube are up to 70%, with over 100 million hours watched on the platform. Problem-solving content is valuable and video is one of the best ways to offer it. Capitalize on Trending Topics Marketers are always hoping to create the next viral video, but with so much competition, it's not as easy as it sounds. That's why it's important to take advantage of the trending topics across social platforms. The Trending Topics sections on both Twitter and Facebook are popular sources of news content for social users. If you create a video related to a trending topic, you can potentially tap into a huge market. Jimmy Fallon created an a cappella video to celebrate the new Star Wars movie. Creating content around a popular event helped this video to secure millions of shares across social media. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZTLAx3VDX7g Take a look at the events likely to create a buzz during the calendar year and incorporate these into your video marketing strategy. Go Behind the Scenes Showing people what goes on behind the scenes at your company is a great way to connect with your audience on a personal level. It helps close the gap between brand and customer, which is important in the world of marketing. In this video, Ben and Jerry's introduces one of their Flavor Gurus and gives viewers a brief look at what goes into creating their products and what it's like to work for the company. http://www.instagram.com/p/39m2aMRkLn/ Showcase Products When it comes to video content, 76% of consumers say that they would share a video if it's entertaining. When you incorporate a product video into your social strategy, it's important to strike a balance between promoting your product and keeping the tone light, fun and informal.

Instagram Strategy: How to Grow a Loyal Following With Instagram

Instagram Strategy: How to Grow a Loyal Following With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Instagram? Want to develop an engaged following? To discover how to create an Instagram strategy for your business, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Nathan Chan, the publisher of Foundr magazine, a digital publication designed to help entrepreneurs succeed. He's also host of the Foundr podcast. Nathan is also crushing it on Instagram with nearly 400,000 followers. Nathan will explore how he built a massive following on Instagram. You'll discover techniques you can employ right now for your Instagram strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Strategy Why Nathan started Foundr Nathan launched Foundr on March 5, 2013, because he wanted to become an entrepreneur and didn't know where to start. He realized there weren't any magazines targeting aspiring or novice entrepreneurs, only magazines aimed at established businesses. Foundr is a monthly publication, available on iOS and Android mobile devices. Download the app and explore the interactive magazine, which is subscription-based. Once you get inside, Nathan says, it's like a flipbook, where you click and explore. Nathan explains why Foundr differs from a traditional print magazine. Because some people prefer to read and others like to listen, Nathan added a Foundr podcast to the mix after he left his day job. He wanted to share several amazing interviews he'd recorded on Skype. For example, the issue with Tony Robbins on the cover includes a feature article with exclusive material, as well as the audio interview embedded inside the magazine. Listen to the show to hear how long it took Nathan to leave his job and what he was doing when he started Foundr. Foundr and Instagram Foundr has been on Instagram since November 2014, and has more than 400,000 followers. A year and a half ago, Nathan tried Instagram and was having no success. He shares how a reader from Melbourne who had an entrepreneur page on Instagram with 20,000 followers contacted him. The reader thought if he posted Foundr's Richard Branson cover, he would get Foundr more readers. Nathan shares why the tactic didn't work and what he learned he should have done instead. Last November, Nathan revisited Instagram. He'd already got about 500 followers organically, since Foundr had 20 or 30 images posted. When Nathan did a couple of posts on the Foundr Instagram page, he saw their magazine sales spike on Google Analytics. By this time, the guy from Melbourne was up to 80,000 followers, so Nathan reconnected with him and they started battle-testing different combinations on Instagram to see what would get more followers, encourage people to click on his bio and build his email list. Foundr's email list has since grown considerably, due to traffic from Instagram. Last November, it was around 2,000. Now it's just about to hit 100,000. Nathan explains how to use lead magnets on Instagram to get people on your email newsletter list. Listen to the show to discover why Nathan gave Instagram another try. Nathan's Instagram strategy Nathan says his strategy is to create viral-type content that resonates with Foundr's target audience and provide it on a consistent basis. The goal of the Instagram account is to build community, raise awareness of the brand and build the email newsletter database. To get more email subscribers, Foundr currently links to an ebook as a lead magnet in the bio. The link pushes people to a landing page where they can get the "How to Get Your First 10,

Anchor Text Ratios & Best Practices For Faster Rankings

by Adam White @ The HOTH

This article was contributed to our SEO community blog by Adam White of SEO Jet For the last 5 years there has been a common practice among SEOs both established and new, it’s what I call the shotgun approach to link building (more on that in a minute). Once Google made all of their anchor […]

The post Anchor Text Ratios & Best Practices For Faster Rankings appeared first on The HOTH.

How To Get Started With Affiliate Marketing

by hothadmin @ The HOTH

This article was contributed to our SEO community blog by Doug Cunnington from Niche Site Project. He’s also been featured or mentioned on Social Triggers, NeilPatel.com, and Ahrefs. Did you know you can make money online… Without ever creating any products? The affiliate business model works like this: The affiliate refers someone to seller of […]

The post How To Get Started With Affiliate Marketing appeared first on The HOTH.

How To Design a Website for Better Search Engine Ranking

by Dan King @ Fistbump Media, LLC

I’m asked about this quite frequently. It’s this question about how to design a website and ensure it’s set up for the best possible search engine ranking. Because being found on search engines can make or break your online success. So it’s not just a question about ranking high for a certain keyword. It’s about ranking […]

The post How To Design a Website for Better Search Engine Ranking appeared first on Fistbump Media, LLC.

The Brexit Episode

The Brexit Episode

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld show we talk Brexit, technology choices, co-creation and more.

Twitter Ads: How to Advertise With Twitter

Twitter Ads: How to Advertise With Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you curious about Twitter ads? Want to discover the benefits of Twitter advertising? To explore what you need to know to get started with Twitter ads, I interview Neal Schaffer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of Maximize Your Social and co-founder of the Social Tools Summit. Neal also runs PDCA Social, a social media agency. Neal explores Twitter ads and what marketers need to know. You'll discover some of the differences between Twitter and Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Ads Why You Should Consider Twitter Ads Neal says that like many social media marketers, he's advertised on a number of different social networks, including Facebook and Twitter. When creating a social media strategy, Neal explains that marketers generally look to a consumer-facing platform. Most often this means Facebook, but could also include Instagram, Pinterest, or Snapchat. However, Twitter can go either way. It has a community of a few hundred million passionate people and is the place to connect with the media. Neal explains how he did A/B testing for a client with Facebook and Twitter ads that revealed it's more difficult to grow organically on Facebook than on Twitter. A majority of the budget was spent growing their Facebook community, while a smaller portion was dedicated to building a smaller Twitter community. After a few months, the Twitter audience had grown 30% to 40% (with no additional budget), but the Facebook audience wasn't growing because of the way EdgeRank works. Neal discusses the two different types of social networks for businesses: networks such as Facebook and LinkedIn where you can't engage with others as your business, and networks like Twitter, Instagram, and Snapchat that let you engage as your business. On the latter type, your company can do a lot more organically than it can from your Facebook or LinkedIn company page. If you've been putting all of your advertising eggs into one social media platform basket, Neal suggests doing A/B testing to explore other possibilities. Twitter has a lot of benefits, one of which is connecting with mass media and journalists since it's where people go to find news. Neal says that after three and a half months of primarily advertising and marketing on Twitter, The Dr. Oz Show reached out to feature his client. Listen to the show to hear more about the power of Twitter for live events. The Difference Between Twitter and Facebook Ads With both Twitter and Facebook, you advertise on the networks' real estate. On Facebook, ads appear in the news feed, and on desktop in the right-hand frame. Based on his and other Facebook marketers' experience, Neal thinks placing ads in the timeline is best. Comparatively, ads on the right-hand side don't seem as effective. On Twitter, ads only appear in the timeline, just like on Facebook mobile, and "Promoted" appears in the tweet box. Neal shares two things he finds interesting about Twitter advertising. First, since advertising space on Facebook and the newer networks is in high demand, there's less supply. That means it's more expensive to advertise on these networks. Because Twitter has a lot more ad inventory available to promote products and services, Neal believes it's a little more cost-effective. Second, Neal finds Facebook ads are always changing, and the interface can be very complex. In comparison, the Twitter dashboard and ad interface make it easy to create ads. There's one screen and you know where you are at a...

How to Run an Instagram Influencer Campaign

How to Run an Instagram Influencer Campaign

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to generate leads from Instagram? Have you considered reaching out to influencers? An influencer campaign is an effective way to promote your business and generate leads by leveraging the audience of another Instagram account. In this article you'll discover how to run an influencer campaign on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Reach Out to the Right Influencers The first thing to do is to identify potential Instagram influencers and reach out to them. Identify Influencers Take your time exploring Instagram pages that are related to your business and whose followers align with your target audience. You can simply go to the Explore tab and search by keyword to find potential candidates. Once you've found an interesting account, look at the suggested accounts that appear next to the account's Follow button. Make a list of at least 10 accounts you want to target, focusing on ones with more than 100,000 followers. The more substantial the account's follower base, the more successful your campaign is likely to be. However, don't look only at the number of followers that an account has, because that doesn't tell the whole story. Look at the posts' engagement (the number of likes and comments) and make sure there's a good balance. Contact Influencers After you've compiled a list of influencers, it's time to reach out to them. You want to ask if they would consider adding a link to your landing page to their bio. Instagram pages that are open to advertising opportunities typically make it easy for you to contact them. In their bios they will provide an email address and often a Kik contact name as well. (Kik is a messaging app commonly used by the Instagram community.) Once you have their contact information, it's time to craft the message you're going to send to influencers. Explain that you're looking to promote your Instagram account and business, and want to know if they're open to advertising opportunities. If they are, you'd like them to send you a quote. You'll get different types of quotes, based on the number of followers for the account, its engagement and the industry. Prices may also vary depending on whether the account is personal or branded. Try to negotiate on pricing. You're not dealing with Instagram directly, so pricing can be tailored based on your profile and situation. Some Instagram accounts earn over $10,000 a month, so don't be shy about negotiating on prices. Keep in mind that if you're a small business, you may want to reach out to smaller accounts first. Then if you see a nice return, you can move on to larger accounts for future influencer campaigns. If you contact a personal Instagram account with over 500,000 followers, the account owner might not be the one who replies to you. Instead, you may hear from an agency or a manager who is acting on their behalf. #2: Set Up a Landing Page After you have a list of influencers who've agreed to work with you, you need to create a landing page for your campaign. The landing page should be a simple web page and include an opt-in form. You want to drive traffic from Instagram to your landing page and invite visitors to provide their contact information. To do that, you'll need to provide a free offer to incentivize them. The offer can be a free guide, report, lesson, ebook or webinar in exchange for something from users. Because you want to generate leads, ask your visitors to provide their email address. Remember that the more valuable the information you offer, the more likely people will appreciate and remember your business. The goal of your landing page is not to sell but to attract new leads. To catch the attention of Instagram users, the page needs to be clear, concise and engaging. It's also important that the page is responsive since most of your traffic will come from mobile devices. #3: Launch Your Campaign After you choose an influencer,

High dwell time is not always a good thing

High dwell time is not always a good thing

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Top Martech Influencer Tamara McCleary Explains Why Marketers Cannot Afford to Ignore Phone Calls

by Christie Huber @ DialogTech

The following post is part of the DialogTech “Expert Voices” series where leading marketing experts share insights and best practices and recommend technologies. This post is authored by Tamara McCleary, CEO of Thulium, an agency specializing in B2B and Enterprise marketing. Tamara was named #1 Most Influential Woman in Martech by B2B Marketing.  I speak extensively on the power of AI, machine learning, […]

The post Top Martech Influencer Tamara McCleary Explains Why Marketers Cannot Afford to Ignore Phone Calls appeared first on DialogTech.

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your Twitter account? Have you thought about applying SEO tactics to your Twitter marketing? With a few simple techniques, you can increase the chances that your Twitter account shows up in both Twitter and Google search. In this article you'll discover how to improve the visibility of your Twitter account with SEO. Listen to this article: Start With Relevant Keywords Keywords that you're already using in the metadata of your website are a good place to start. Your website keywords might not translate perfectly to Twitter, but if you combine them with popular hashtags and topics that work well in your content, you'll have a good group to test. You'll know which keywords are working best by monitoring your engagement, link clicks and reach. Any spikes in those metrics will show you which tweets have effective keywords in them. Then you can use those keywords more in your tweets and profile. You can also expand your keyword list by including the names of events that your company is always involved with. Make the list as big as you like as long as every word is relevant to your brand. Most importantly, keep this list updated. With your keywords in hand, here are some ways to boost your visibility for both Twitter and Google search. #1: Optimize Your Account for Twitter Search Tweets get the main stage on Google right now, but optimizing your account for search on Twitter will allow you to have long-term searchability. Handle and Username Make sure your handle and username match your website and brand name. Consistent branding across all of your channels is your best bet for being found by the audience you want. Your handle and username don't have to match each other, but they should be related. Your handle is also included in your unique Twitter URL (for example, https://twitter.com/SMExaminer). Your username shows up next to your profile photo for all of your tweets. You can change your username easily. But changing your handle is trickier, and you'll lose your verification badge if you have one. Changing your username or handle may also confuse your followers and cause people to unfollow you. If you're going to change either one, try to do it only once. Don't use a lot of numbers in your username either because Google may flag it as spam. Bio, Photo and Link Your bio, photo and link are the places to make changes and updates to promote campaigns or events. Twitter indexes your bio regularly, so any changes affect your relevancy score in search. You can use up to 160 characters in your bio section, so make the most of them. The bio's main purpose is to explain to potential followers what you usually tweet about and why they should follow you. Update your bio regularly to match the type of content you're currently tweeting about. If you have a campaign or event you're involved with, make sure you include relevant keywords and hashtags in your bio. This will help you show up more on both Twitter and Google when people search for those keywords and hashtags. The profile photo also has some SEO weight. Before you upload the photo, add relevant keywords, separated by dashes, to the filename of your photo (for example, social-media-examiner.jpeg). This won't make you shoot to the top of results on its own, but SEO tactics are most successful when the different pieces are working together. Also make sure your photo is exactly 200 x 200 pixels for optimal loading speed. Your link is the biggest call to action for your Twitter account. Many brands shorten their URL to make it more trackable and user-friendly. If you want to shorten your URL, get a branded link shortener because some link shorteners can be flagged as spam. Also think carefully about which page your bio link is sending your Twitter followers to. The safest option is to use the main page of your brand's website because it usually has the best SEO authority.

User Interface Design: 10 Principles Learned from Painful Mistakes

User Interface Design: 10 Principles Learned from Painful Mistakes

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

When it comes to user interface design, often the best way to learn is to analyse the mistakes of sites you hate using.

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

Why there isn't more video on content heavy websites

Why there isn't more video on content heavy websites

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Webinars: Growing Leads and Sales With Live Online Events

Webinars: Growing Leads and Sales With Live Online Events

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use webinars in your marketing? Are you looking for new ways to generate sales and leads? To explore the art of using webinars to generate leads and ultimately sell, I interview Lewis Howes for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lewis Howes, author of The Ultimate Webinar Marketing Guide and host of the School of Greatness Podcast, where he focuses on leadership and personal development. Lewis is also an athlete and he's on the USA Men's National Handball Team. Lewis shares why webinars are the most effective way to connect with your audience. You'll discover how to use webinars to generate leads and ultimately sell. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Successful Webinars Why marketers should take a closer look at webinars Lewis believes that webinars are the ultimate way to convert your audience into customers. Companies of all sizes, as well as entrepreneurs, use them because they generate more sales than any other online marketing strategy. Social media helps you get your information out there, connect with your audience, get feedback, build relationships and more. However, tweets and Facebook posts don't usually result in a huge number of instant sales. A webinar, however, gets you in front of a captive audience that's interested in learning what you have to share for an extended period of time. It's more than just a quick message, post, article, picture or video. It's an interactive way to connect, build trust and make sales sooner rather than later. Most webinars are free. Then at the end, you can refer them to your solution, product, coaching or live event. You can convert in a more effective way than by just using social. Listen to the show to discover how webinar tools have changed. What tech you need Lewis recommends GoToWebinar, because he feels it's the most consistent. Plus, it's the standard format most marketers are used to. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MMbufbv1f2c Other platforms to explore include Adobe Connect, Google Hangouts, Ustream, Livestream and WebinarJam. Listen to the show to hear about the webinar tools we use at Social Media Examiner: GoToWebinar and WebEx. How to get people to register for a webinar Lewis suggests you start by promoting your webinar to your email list, and then encourage those who register to promote it for you. For example, on the post-registration thank-you page, put up a video or some text and ask registrants to share it on Facebook or Twitter. To make this easier, there are tools you can use such as the WP Sharely plugin or create a pre-populated Tweet button through ClicktoTweet.com. Another way to generate leads is to partner with others. Lewis talks about how he does affiliate webinars where people in a similar marketing space promote his information to their audience. He'll do a webinar with free content, offer his product or service and then give a 50% commission to that affiliate. You're paying someone to generate leads for you. Listen to the show to hear the results of a successful affiliate marketing webinar. Optimizing the registration process Lewis likes to use LeadPages templates for his webinar registrations. He'll create three different registration templates: one with a simple image, a headline and opt-in; another that's more in-depth, including a compelling headline and a list of benefits; and a third that's a hybrid with a video and bullet points.

Franchise SEO: How to Apply Local SEO to Multiple Locations

by Avinash Nair @ Unamo Blog

From creating different landing pages to finding niche, relevant keywords, a lot of franchisors (and their SEO vendors) are neck deep in their search for the Holy Grail of franchise SEO. And that’s only the beginning. As a franchisor, you’re aware by now of the many pitfalls of attempting to unify information without duplicating it. […]

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to see your Instagram content? Are you using Instagram hashtags? Using the right hashtags makes it easier for people to find your Instagram posts and grows your reach. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram hashtags to connect with new people on Instagram. Why Hashtags Matter on Instagram Instagram is a powerful social channel. With over 400 million users, an average of 80 million photos posted each day and 3.5 billion likes on any given day, it's a valuable platform to include in your social media marketing mix. But how can you get some of those 3.5 billion likes for your business? That's simple: Use hashtags. Listen to this article: Instagram is a social channel where hashtags are particularly valuable. According to Buffer, accounts with fewer than 1,000 followers that use 11 hashtags with their photos get an average of 77.66 interactions per post. With hashtags, you can reach a wider audience and increase your followers. You can also do market research on your competitors and connect with people who have specific interests. Now that it's clear hashtags are an important part of any Instagram strategy, here are some ways to use them for your business. #1: Leverage Established Trends Popular (or trending) hashtags are a great way to develop an Instagram presence and build brand awareness. There are many popular hashtags you can use, including: #photooftheday: Choose a behind-the-scenes photo of your company and share it as your photo of the day. #selfie: Take a selfie while you're working (or have your employees do it) and share the selfie on your Instagram account. #instalike: Don't just use this hashtag, also go through other posts that use it and interact with those users. #2: Tap Into a Popular Theme Themes can be a lot of fun, and Instagram has some popular themed hashtags that you can use with your Instagram posts. Here are a few to consider for your business: #TBT or #throwbackthursday: Throwback Thursday is a great way to reminisce about your company. On Thursdays, share your first dollar made or photos from a special event. You can even include cute or hilarious high school photos. #motivationalmonday: Add some positivity to your feed by participating in Motivational Monday. Share quotes or life lessons from your professional life. #followfriday: Showcase photos from other users and encourage your followers to follow them with this hashtag. You might even get a reciprocal #followfriday tag from those users. This is also a great way to say thank you to your client base. #3: Share an Inspirational Quote Quotes are a great way to get traction and interaction for visual content, and they work as well on Instagram as on your other social channels. Use image tools like Canva to create high-quality image quotes to share. Here are some hashtags to use with them: #instaquote: Use this hashtag with your quote posts. Also look through other tagged posts to boost your client engagement and share something interesting with other users. #quoteoftheday: Whether you use #quoteoftheday or #qotd, you can get some traction from other Instagram users. Consider creating an editorial calendar and plan quotes to share throughout the week using this hashtag. Share quotes from authors and industry leaders, as well as from your blog posts. Quotes that reflect your brand and goal are typically good choices. #4: Tell People What You're Doing Now Telling people what you're doing now is a great way to make your Instagram account fresh and inspiring to users. Plus, balancing business with fun is a great way to create a following on Instagram. Try these hashtags: #amreading: Are you reading an interesting book about your industry? Or the latest Stephen King bestseller? Share it with your audience to spark conversation and make new connections. #amwriting: Whether you're an author or simply writing a blog post,

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create better engagement with your fans and followers? Wondering how your business can come across as more human? Engaging on social media with authenticity helps you turn online connections into customers who feel like they know you. In this article, you'll discover four ways to humanize your engagement on social media. Listen to this article: Why Humanize Social Media Content? Setting up social media accounts and gathering faceless followers who never interact with your brand isn't enough in today's competitive marketplace. What you really need are followers that engage with your brand, form emotional connections, and become an audience of loyal customers. Unfortunately, many businesses treat their social media accounts more like advertising channels than vehicles to create lasting and honest relationships with customers. In response, people have learned to tune out promotional messages and accounts that talk only about themselves and focus on the features of their products, not the needs of their customers. If this describes your company, your messages may not be reaching your ideal audience. If you treat your followers like friends, it can make all the difference when it comes to your social media strategy. Pause for a second and think about your own personal social media accounts. Do you interact with people who constantly self-promote or post run-of-the-mill status updates? The answer is probably no. You likely interact with people who are real. People who emotionally uplift you, make you laugh, or have legitimate questions or recommendations you feel you can be a part of. The same approach should be taken in business social media marketing. Once that happens, your connections can then become brand ambassadors who significantly boost engagement and your bottom line. Here's how: #1: Use a Personable Voice Corporate-speak and lifeless posts can make a company come across as boring and unfeeling. Thankfully, what's acceptable for a business voice has changed a lot over the years. While old rules forbid contractions, first-person, and slang, the new tone of business language is very different. Now you have the freedom to talk in a much more personal and friendly voice. Try creating posts and tweets that speak to your audience in a conversational voice. You'll likely find it's easier for people to converse with you. Bon Appétit, an over 50-year-old gourmet food publication, does a great job injecting just enough personality into their posts. Even insurance companies (traditionally not the most fun-loving and carefree type of business) are learning that a little personality goes a long way. Check out the GEICO Gecko's account, the mascot of the GEICO insurance company. The account, which boasts over 20,000 followers, features quirky drawings and quips, while salesy and promotional posts are noticeably absent. Try This in Your Business Talk like a real person and don't shy away from humor, emojis, and a little informality when it comes to punctuation and grammar. Try tagging along on special days and trending hashtags. Find a way to inject your company (like the image of the GEICO Gecko in the above picture). As long as you have clear standards for what's appropriate to post on social media, you shouldn't have any problem using a conversational tone, and your audience will appreciate the personal touch. #2: Stop the Me, Me, Me Posts When friends or relatives post something monumental on social media (a finished art project, a life event, a huge accomplishment), what do you do? Chances are you share it and take the time to congratulate them and point out to others what a great job they did. Brands that have mastered social media engagement know they can do that with their social media audience as well. Whenever it's appropriate, point out something that an audience member did particularly well.

11. Commercial blogging

11. Commercial blogging

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week we look at blogging. Is it just a cheap form of therapy for those who feel a need to unburden their emotional problems, or is it a powerful marketing tool for increasing your businesses exposure.

Improving site search

Improving site search

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach new audiences on Facebook? Have you considered targeting niche audiences? Targeting niche groups of people on Facebook, in addition to your primary audience, will help you create new channels of traffic and revenue. In this article, you'll discover how to find and reach niche audiences on Facebook. Listen to this article: Uncover Your Niche Audience Sometimes, all it takes is a little brainstorming to yield an immediate option for a secondary audience. Think of your product or service as if you initially created it for people other than your primary audience to identify new shades of its features that will interest additional customer segments. For example if Dollar Shave Club's primary audience is men who use razors, it's easy to see how they would choose women who use razors as a great secondary target. Alternatively, you can go deep into Facebook's Audience Insights to learn more about your primary audience's quirks. Use any shared similarities you find to identify secondary groups of people who might qualify as a viable audience for you. Target Your Niche Audience When you've decided which audience group you want to target on Facebook, you can take advantage of Audience Optimization to ensure your post will be seen by users who are most likely to engage with it. Now that you know how to find and reach your niche audience, here are three tips to help you make the most of that exposure and visibility. #1: Speak Their Language Many niche groups use specific words, slang, or non-typical word expressions that differentiate them from others. Whether you're trying to connect with introverts, hipsters, or healthy lifestyle fans, it's important to speak the same language they do. To examine the specific language of a group, you can use Google to query phrases such as 'hipster slang.' A large gym that wants to attract a niche audience of CrossFit enthusiasts can search Google for slang that audience might use. You can also use Online Slang Dictionary or Urban Dictionary to learn the meaning of words that are unfamiliar to you. Make a list of the words used by the group you want to target and use them to construct Facebook posts that reflect a particular mood and style that will appeal to the social group you're targeting. After you publish your posts, you can increase the rate of engagement and conversion by responding to comments and questions with the same words your visitors use. #2: Reinforce Their Mood and Interests Posting pictures and quotes that appeal to the unique mindset of your niche audience can be especially effective because they're attractive and shareable. To mitigate the risk of alienating your primary audience with this tactic, make sure the images and quotes you use are relevant to your existing audience as well. Otherwise, you may not get any engagement at all. For example, this post by Nike could easily attract the notice of people interested in philology but stays faithful to the interests of their primary audience of athletes and healthy lifestyle fans. Even if you don't directly address a Facebook post to a specific niche audience, you can appeal to their interests indirectly. For example, this Walt Disney World post is equally interesting for three distinct and possibly overlapping audiences: those who are interested in Disney, in Star Wars or in food. You can take this a step further by including a question that helps your niche audience understand their opinion is important to you, thereby increasing your chances of engaging members of that audience in a conversation. #3: Support Their Social Stance If your business openly aligns with a niche audience on an issue or controversial subject, you can publish posts that make a clear statement to signify your support. For example, this post could be shared to appeal to and attract people who are interested in and support strong female role m...

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media accounts secure? Interested in ways to prevent security breaches? There are tools you can use to protect your social and online accounts, and prevent them from being compromised. In this article you'll discover five tools to keep your company's social media safe. Listen to this article: #1: Get Alerts on Suspicious Activity One way to keep tabs on access to your social accounts is to install an intrusion detection system on your mobile devices. This type of app will detect suspicious activity and unauthorized access to your online accounts. One app you may want to try is LogDog (currently available only for Android), which takes on the role of a 24-hour-a-day watchdog. It can serve as your own personal mobile security system for your company's online accounts. The application closely monitors your online accounts, continuously scanning for a variety of unauthorized-access indicators. If a hacker attempts to gain access to any of your accounts, you'll receive an alert that there is unauthorized access, allowing you to take back control of your accounts as soon as possible. The app currently will monitor Facebook, Gmail, Evernote, Yahoo and Dropbox accounts, but the company plans to add more social platforms in the future. #2: Login Securely With a Password Manager Your company's social media account passwords are what stand between you and unscrupulous hackers. If your social accounts get hacked, your business's reputation may be harmed, so be sure to create strong profile passwords and modify them often. A tool like LastPass or 1Password makes it easier to protect your passwords, and store them in an encrypted vault. LastPass takes the hassle out of continuously logging in, while simultaneously ensuring online security of your accounts. It also provides a random password generator that helps you create strong, secure passwords when signing up for access to new sites. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_lJd3SnL5U LastPass is available to install as an app on Android and iOS devices, or you can download a browser extension to access your passwords on Windows or Mac OS. 1Password is available for both Windows or Mac OS, and Android or iOS devices. #3: Control Access to Your Social Accounts The more people who have access to your company's social accounts, the greater the chance those accounts may be compromised. If you want to minimize the risk to multiple accounts, there are tools you can use to manage access to your company's social accounts. With a social media management system like Hootsuite or SproutSocial, you can grant your employees access to your social accounts without disclosing sensitive account information to them. Access to your company's social accounts should be managed primarily by your IT staff. They can beef up security by making sure that account passwords are changed on a regular basis. If you don't change your account passwords frequently, you may not have any idea how many current or former employees have access to your company's social accounts. Keep in mind, too, that you should avoid using a work email address when signing up for company social media accounts. Your work email address may be accessible to outside parties on your organization's contact page or advertisements, which could make it easier for someone to hack your account. Another tool to make use of is the Login Approval feature. Specific to Facebook, this feature will help control employee access to your Facebook page. When you turn on the Login Approval feature, it will prompt your Facebook page admins to enter a special security code each time they access your Facebook page from a new computer, device or browser. #4: Manage Account Privacy Settings It's essential that you learn about and use the privacy and security settings on Facebook or any other social networks you use. These settings help you securely manage your online experience,

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

5 Unusual Tips to Improve Your SEO With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to rank higher in search engines? Interested in ways to use your social accounts to improve your SEO? Social media has a significant impact on your search results, and a strong social presence can boost your search rankings. In this article you'll discover five ways to use social media to improve your search rankings. Listen to this article: #1: Build Links With Your Social Channels Google used to put a high value on link building in their search rankings, no matter what quality of links you were building. When people figured this out and started manipulating rankings with fake or low-quality links to their site, Google started to focus on higher-quality links. Links on social media are often considered higher-quality links, because social sites have a high web authority from the get-go. Even if your Facebook page is new, it's likely to rank highly (and maybe even surpass your website) thanks to Facebook's overall high authority. It may sound obvious, but make sure that you include a working link to your website not only in your content, but also in every social profile you have. In addition to increasing traffic to your site, it's also highly valuable for link building. When it comes to link building within content, post content like new products or blog posts to your social profiles to encourage sharing. For example, you could create a relevant YouTube video for each blog post and embed it in the post, capitalizing on the high web authority to send traffic to your site and increase search rankings. #2: Grow Your Follower Base Pages with a lot of high-quality followers rank better in searches. High-quality followers are real followers on your social channels, and a large percentage of them engage or interact with you in some form. This interaction might be repinning pins, retweeting your content or sending you a tweet, placing reviews on Google+ or engaging with your posts on Facebook. Social signals are a very real factor when it comes to SEO. Search engines look at social signals to find out how often you're posting to your social media accounts, how many people interact with you and if there are social-sharing elements available to visitors to your site. There's no point in trying to outsmart the algorithms with fake likes on Facebook. Low-quality followers are not good for you. Not only will Facebook penalize you for fake likes, search engines like Google will punish you with lower rankings, too. So, make sure you're steadily gaining a solid base of followers that are interacting with you and your content, and encourage them to share, engage and interact with you. #3: Make Your Content Searchable and Sharable Pinterest is a great example of a social platform that makes your content both searchable and sharable. Pinterest encourages sharing to a great extent. Users post pins they like to their boards, and share them with other Pinterest users. Many social accounts give you the option of keeping your content private, or relatively so. On YouTube, you can have unlisted videos, and only people who have links to the videos can watch them. Pinterest allows secret boards, and Twitter gives you the option to have a private profile. When it comes to your business, you want all of your social accounts to be public, and you want all of your content to be searchable. For example, for your Facebook profile, you have the option to make your posts searchable in search engines. To do this, go to your Facebook privacy settings and enable the option Do You Want Other Search Engines to Link to Your Timeline?, shown here. The more people who see your posts, the more people who might share it. Encouraging sharing (including through methods like Facebook contests) is a great way to increase your search rankings. #4: Use Keywords in Your Posts Keywords are important for your website, blog and paid ad campaigns,

User experience design: How far will you go?

User experience design: How far will you go?

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

Shaping a better user experience will involve touching every part of your business. Is that something you are willing to face?

9 Visual Tools to Create Awesome Social Media Images

9 Visual Tools to Create Awesome Social Media Images

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create professional-grade social media visuals? Are you looking for budget-friendly tools to help? Visual content can increase your visibility on social media and support your branding. In this article, you'll discover nine free tools to help you create beautiful visual content for your social media profiles. Listen to this article: #1: Start With a High-Quality, Royalty-Free Image There are now dozens of free image resources out there. Pexels and Unsplash both offer thousands of high-resolution images for free and without the need for attribution. Unsplash focuses more on landscapes, while Pexels focuses on business and technology collections. With Pexels, you get access to a massive library of high-resolution images, which are perfect for a blog article, header, slide deck, or social media post. You can download and post any Pexels image for free. Pexels is also a compilation site, so they collect free images from other free image providers. This makes it a great one-stop resource. #2: Discover the Perfect Color Scheme Adobe Color CC (formerly Adobe Kuler) is Adobe's free color-scheme finder, which helps you determine complementary colors for your visual content. In other words, Adobe Color CC takes the guesswork out of picking colors. To start, paste the hex code of a desired color into one of the five color boxes below the color wheel. Next, select Complementary or Triad from the Color Rule drop-down menu at the upper left to quickly find the colors that will look best with that color. Adobe Color CC also allows you to drop in an image and it will automatically identify its four primary colors. This helps with choosing font colors, contrasting overlays, and icons within your post. #3: Take Advantage of Pre-made Icons With Flaticon, you get free access to over 144,130 (and counting) PNG icons. Looking for an email icon for a Facebook ad or Twitter image? You can choose from over 1,300 email icons and customize both color and size. Looking to create an infographic, cartoony advertisement, or Twitter image? Choose from over 1,800 "Avatar" icons. Flaticon's library is most useful when you need to create a visual post dedicated to an upcoming webinar, podcast, conference, and so on. #4: Reveal Optimal Contrasting Color ColorZilla is a Google Chrome plugin that allows you to see the hex, RGB code, official name, and gradients for any color within a browser window. Use the Color Picker function to find the best contrasting color for a call-to-action button or to emulate a peer's designs. The tool automatically copies the hex code of any "picked" color to your clipboard, making your visual design more efficient. Used in conjunction with Flaticon, you can quickly grab your "Brand Blue" and drop it into the color selector, ensuring you're downloading an icon that's the same color as your website logo. #5: Find Perfect Font Combinations Luckily, you don't have to be an expert in fonts. With Femmebot, you can access 25 of the top font combinations from font experts and see how these combinations look with graphics and images, as well as formatting. Femmebot's font recommendations are a great place to start with visual content. Once you get rolling, you'll quickly find the font combinations that appeal to you (and your audience) the most. #6: Put It All Together in a Visual Content Tool Now that you have your visual tools, you need a platform to actually create the content; one that helps you create something that looks like it came from a professional graphic designer. Below is a simple example of a great-looking social media post from Buffer. Let's see if we can't recreate it using free visual content creation platforms: Canva, Google Drawings, and PicMonkey. Get All of the Help You Need With Canva Canva was built for creating visual social media content. As such, it's a tool that gives you a great result fast.

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

3 Instagram Analytics Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business ready for Instagram's algorithm? Looking for tools to analyze your Instagram engagement? Tracking engagement will help you serve quality content that keeps you at the top of the Instagram feed. In this article you'll discover three tools to track and evaluate how people respond to your content on Instagram. Listen to this article: Instagram's Feed Algorithm Last week, Instagram announced that they'll be releasing an algorithm that will prioritize what's shown in users' feeds. This algorithm will determine what content Instagram believes people will be most interested in and then show the most relevant posts at the top of the feed, regardless of how many accounts users follow or what time zone they're in. If you do content marketing on Facebook, you know how important it is to make sure you're ranked highly within a social media platform's algorithm. Algorithms that prioritize content in a user's feed can (and will) inevitably affect your business on those platforms. When the Instagram algorithm kicks in, maintaining high levels of engagement will help keep your content on top, whether you're a small company or a large one. Why You Need Instagram Analytics Tools As the algorithm launch approaches, it's important to use analytics tools to see which portion of your Instagram audience is interacting with what content, what content is performing best, and which audience segments you may be missing. As you learn from these analytics, you can create stronger and more relevant content that your audience will be more receptive to. Though Instagram shares the same ad platform as Facebook, the platform does not yet have an analytics tool like Facebook's Insights and Audience Insights. Fortunately, there are a number of third-party Instagram analytics tools available for businesses and marketers to measure their marketing efforts. The following three tools will help you to track and evaluate the success of your content and overall marketing efforts on Instagram. #1: Simply Measured Simply Measured advertises its analytics tool as being the "end-to-end analysis of all your social media networks," and this includes Instagram. It can be a great tool for marketers. Simply Measured offers a variety of reports and analyses, some of which are free and some are available only with a paid plan. When you first visit the site, you can get a free user report on any Instagram account (with up to 25,000 followers) in exchange for following the company on Twitter. This user report provides an in-depth analysis of the past two months, including your top post, best days and hours for engagement, top photo tags, top filters, and the amount and types of engagement you've received on your posts. Additional analytics tools come with pricing plans starting at $500 a month, and include features like cross-platform analysis, social brand and hashtag monitoring, and the ability to add unlimited users to the account at no additional charge. #2: Iconosquare Iconosquare is a go-to tool for anything Instagram, including contests, management tools, and so on. It's also true for analytics. Iconosquare's analytics allow you to track important metrics like follower growth and losses, best times to post for maximum engagement, engagement rates, and engagement growth. It also shows your best performing content, both in terms of likes and comments. Iconosquare offers a 7-day free trial, during which you can access the analytics information to see if the tool is right for you and for your business's needs. The plus plan is currently $28.80 a year and includes features like daily email reports, comment trackers, and analytics on the key Instagram metrics discussed above. #3: Sprout Social Sprout Social is a popular tool that many businesses already use, and it offers detailed reporting on a profile's Instagram activity. You can find analytics under the Reports section.

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Is there a new product you want to create? To discover how to improve your chances for success, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Pat Flynn, the host of the Smart Passive Income Podcast, who blogs at smartpassiveincome.com and helps hundreds of thousands of entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs build their dream businesses. His latest book is called Will it Fly? How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money. Pat will explore how to increase the likelihood that your next product idea is successful. You'll discover ways to test and validate your ideas. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Business Ideas That Succeed How Pat's architect background has helped him in business When Pat started in online business, he taught architects how to take the lead exam. He shares that people reached out to him and thanked him for helping them in their careers, and he says that feeling was different from anything he experienced in the world of architecture. Pat talks about what he did and didn't like about working as an architect, and how the long-term process of breaking a giant project down into chunks helped him when he started in entrepreneurship. He says the process of working hard on a building, planning ahead, and not knowing what it will be like until people are actually using it all translate to building and launching product. Architects and entrepreneurs go through similar processes, Pat says. Each of them are building a solution for a client's problem. As you build it, you make changes, you pivot and you learn as you go. To be successful in any business you need to learn how to adapt and solve other people's problems. Listen to the show to learn what software skill Pat used in architecture that he still uses in business. Why Pat wrote a book about the pre-launch phase In addition to Pat's weekly Smart Passive Income podcast, he does a show called AskPat, during which he answers a voice mail question submitted from his audience via SpeakPipe. One of the most common questions asked is "How do I know if this idea I am working on is worth spending the time?" He tried to answer this question on both shows and found there wasn't enough time for him to cover the topic. The topic was validated through an audience survey (Pat uses SurveyMonkey) in early 2015, when he segmented the people who said they had yet to start a business. By far, their number one concern was not wanting to waste time on something that might not be successful. That's when Pat decided he needed to write a book to people with amazing ideas, that might be life-changing products or services, move forward. Listen to the show to hear the reason behind the title of Pat's new book. Making mistakes Assumptions are great because they are ideas, Pat explains. However, if you act on those assumptions without knowing whether it's something people would actually pay for, that's when you have an issue. Pat shares how a couple of WordPress plugin ideas he had turned into a $15,000 mistake. He didn't discuss the ideas with anybody because it was such a good idea, he didn't want to share it. Plus, he wanted to keep it a secret in order to have an awesome reveal on launch day. Had he simply discussed these ideas with his target audience and people in his mastermind groups, it would have been clear that the idea was merely a starting point. He could have gotten feedback and turned it into something that would actually wo...

4 Tips To Increase Advertising Agency Search Engine Placement - Convergent1

4 Tips To Increase Advertising Agency Search Engine Placement - Convergent1


Convergent1

Increasing your online visibility is key to generating sales and …

Sub-contractors, briefs and resumes

Sub-contractors, briefs and resumes

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on our little web design podcast, hiring sub contractors, writing a good brief and what to put in your resume.

30 Ways To Grow Your List

by Danna Crawford @ Danna Crawford

 List building is an ongoing part of growing a business. Many of these tips I will share are part of the building processes. These tips should be a daily part of doing business. 1. Back to basics with a paper sign up – it works! Paper sign up forms are convenient for things like trade-shows or at

The post 30 Ways To Grow Your List appeared first on Danna Crawford.

Integrate Google Search Console With Unamo SEO

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Now you can integrate your Google Search Console properties with your Unamo SEO Campaign with GSC data storage for up to 2 years! ​​ You’ll have all of your relevant SEO data on one platform to expedite your analytics and decision making processes. ​ The integration will pull all of your data from GSC into […]

Google Penguin 4.0, Google My Business – Episode 267

Google Penguin 4.0, Google My Business – Episode 267

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

No Changes Needed in Tactics Due to Google Penguin 4.0, plus Google’s Gary Illyes said on my public Facebook post that the new Penguin algorithm “managed to devalue spam instead of demoting. Also, Ross and John discuss a Google AMP Bug, Google My Business API and answer listener questions. This Sept 29 SEO 101 podcast […]

The post Google Penguin 4.0, Google My Business – Episode 267 appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to give existing content new life and greater visibility? Looking for a way to publish more often without much extra work? Use LinkedIn Publisher to consistently provide useful content for your audience, gain visibility and build your professional identity without writing anything new! In this article you’ll discover three ways to give existing content new life using LinkedIn Publisher. Listen to this article: #1: Republish Blog Posts One of the fastest ways to get started on LinkedIn is to copy and paste your complete content posts from other blogs. If you decide to go this route, there are a couple of things to keep in mind. It's important to understand how Google views duplicate content. You should wait at least two weeks after the post publishes before you republish it to LinkedIn. That gives the bots from search engines enough time to index and understand which post is the original, and rank it higher than republished content. Barry Feldman posted an article on LinkedIn a month after it originally appeared on his blog. To let readers know where to find the original post, include a sentence at the beginning or end that directs readers to the original version. This is especially important when you republish your guest post from another company's blog and it's a nice rule of thumb to adopt when you republish your own content. Readers will know where they can find more of your articles. Plus, they'll see you're honest about republishing your post. Take the time to craft a headline that's a little different and specific to the LinkedIn platform. For example, when Guillaume Decugis republishes content on LinkedIn, Medium and other syndication sites, he changes the title of each post to distinguish and optimize it. Then readers who search for the keyword will see multiple versions of the headline on the first page of search engine results. Remember, treat LinkedIn Publisher as a distribution channel, where the goal is to increase visibility and grow your audience. Send people back to your blog, so they can get to know more about you and your business. #2: Repurpose Long-Form Content Do you have robust ebooks, case studies and speeches that are too long for LinkedIn? No worries. It's easy to optimize your existing long-form blog content for LinkedIn Publisher. Take your long-form blog posts or ebooks and break them down into multiple individual posts. Include additional images and subheads too. You can even take old speeches and write them as LinkedIn posts. For example, Ann Handley (who does an excellent job of mixing new content and repurposed content into her LinkedIn Publisher posts) recently reimagined a speech published on her blog in 2013 for a LinkedIn Publisher post in 2015. #3: Use Previous Content to Inspire New Posts If you don't want to republish the same content (or even parts of it) from your blog, there are a few other options to avoid starting completely from scratch. Take a look at the analytics from your published content to see which articles performed best. Look at traffic, social media shares and any other metrics you monitor for performance. Then try to figure out what made that content so successful. One way to do this is to ask yourself questions about each post. Once you determine the source of that success, write a new article for LinkedIn that's similar. You can also go through your blog and find articles with similar themes. Then pick the big ideas from each post and turn it into a list post on LinkedIn. Include a summary paragraph or two from each post, as well as a link back to the original. Tips for LinkedIn Publisher Engagement and Visibility Whether you republish existing content verbatim or revise it, there are a few things to do to optimize it for LinkedIn. OkDork analyzed 3,000 of the most successful LinkedIn Publishing posts to come up with these helpful takeaways:

Negative Yelp Reviews, Beware you could get sued!

by submit @ Submit Express

You ate at a fancy restaurant but were not satisfied with the service. So you decided to write a negative customer review on Yelp, and fib just a little to make the review seem more believable. Harmless, right? Wrong! You could get sued for parts of the review. And this is exactly what happened to […]

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your Instagram marketing? Are you interested in the latest tips and tools for Instagram? Instagram is a fast-growing platform and businesses are eager to establish a presence and encourage engagement on the network. We asked social media experts to share their hottest Instagram tips. Here’s what they had to say. Listen to this article: #1: Shoot Square Your Instagram feed is only as good as your photographs, so starting with high-quality photos makes your Instagram marketing more effective. One of the best ways to save time and compose better photos for Instagram is to shoot square photos. Many digital cameras and smartphones have this in their settings so it’s really easy to do. This lets you save time on cropping and ensures that the essential elements in the photo won't be cropped out later. Because shooting photos inside the Instagram app can be limiting, I like to use Camera Awesome by the SmugMug team on my iPhone (also available for Android users). Using this app, you can take fantastic photos using the grid to follow the rule of thirds. Peg Fitzpatrick is a speaker, social media strategist and co-author of The Art of Social Media. #2: Use a Customized Link Shortener to Track Traffic One of the most important things marketers need to know is how well their Instagram account is driving traffic and leads back to their website. Unfortunately, Google Analytics can’t accurately track this traffic when users visit your website from your mobile Instagram account. To monitor accurate click rates, I recommend businesses use a customized bit.ly link (or a link from another shortener) exclusively for the URL in their Instagram bio. Then you can check your bit.ly data to document how many clicks your Instagram account is actually sending to your website. Create a different bit.ly link each time you change the link for a new landing page, campaign or default page to continuously track successful traffic leads. Jenn Herman is a social media trainer, blogger and Instagram advocate. #3: Be Strategic With Your Bio Link For personal use, Instagram is fun and spontaneous. But if you want to use it as a marketing tool, you have to be a little more calculating with it. I suspect the businesses that are really killing it on Instagram (like Nordstrom, Starbucks, Nike and others) plan their posts well in advance. If you’re a smaller brand or a one-man show, you can still develop a great presence on Instagram. Use the link in your bio to connect to a landing page that holds the same posts you put on Instagram, and allows you to collect leads, promote your ecommerce site, gain subscribers to your blog, collect entries for a giveaway, etc. Jim Belosic is the CEO of ShortStack. #4: Cross-Promote Your Partners Cross-promote whenever you can! The trend on Instagram now is to share the love, so to speak, by tagging others or even by outright promoting other companies, products and services. Locally we have restaurants that serve beer from the many craft brewers in the area. Both the brewers and the restaurants take full advantage of Instagram by tagging each other. The brewers also support one another with tap takeovers, which are rich grounds for Instagram photos and tags. The results are threefold: higher recognition for everyone involved, increased followers (who in turn tag the businesses during visits) and increased traffic and sales for the local businesses. Lisa Karl is a partner and founder at Savvy Digital Business. #5: Take Advantage of Trending Hashtags Users can now use Instagram's Explore feature to find posts related to trending hashtags such as #LoveWins, #CanadaDay and #FullMoon. If these trending tags are relevant to your brand, include them in timely posts to aid discovery. On the topic of search, Instagram also introduced the ability to search by emoji.

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use social media to sell your products? Looking for tools to simplify the process? The right tools make it easier to build relationships with people who are interested in what you offer. In this article you'll discover four tools to simplify your social selling. Listen to this article: #1: Find Shared Connections With Discover.ly A key part of selling via social media is making first contact with users who are primed to buy. When the users you're reaching out to happen to be influencers on social networks, the dividends are potentially higher. A big challenge, however, is breaking the ice and initiating a conversation. This is where Discover.ly comes in. It's a social plugin for your browser that maps out the friends or followers you have in common with a potential connection. When you browse social networks with the Discover.ly browser extension active, you can see all of the friends you have in common with an influencer. You can then ask your shared connections for an introduction and get a leg up on converting the influencer to a customer. Discover.ly also offers social data about people, such as their latest tweets or recent pictures posted to Instagram. With this information, you can reach out to influencers in a way that creates a familiar bond, which (if nurtured) might eventually lead to real-world sales. #2: Tap Online Interest With Talkwalker Tracking what your target audience is saying about your brand is important. This information helps you be more knowledgeable when communicating with people and targeting potential customers. Talkwalker is a great way to take the pulse of your audience. Using it, you see detailed insights about who's talking about your brand, what their interests are and what they like or dislike about you. If you want to identify posts that express intent to purchase, use advanced search queries such as "I am looking for (your product)," "can anyone recommend a good (your service)" or "I want to buy (your product)." Talkwalker also benchmarks your brand against the competition and shows you where you fall short and where you succeed. The alert system ensures you'll receive notifications about online mentions of your brand, products and competitors. This information puts you in a position to act in a timely manner. #3: Showcase Product Images With Pablo If you take a cursory glance at the top social media networks, you'll realize that excepting LinkedIn, every platform has a strong visual component to it. There's a reason for that. According to an Ethos3 infographic, 90% of the information that our brains process is in visual form. Of all of the content that your target audience consumes, they actually retain 80% of the visual content, but only 20% of text-based content. If you're selling a product, showing an attractive image of it is four times more effective from a retention perspective. What's more, visual content gets shared on social media 40 times more often than plain text-based content. So if you produce an engaging image or infographic, potential buyers on social media are likely to spread the word on your behalf. Pablo by Buffer is a great tool for creating original and shareworthy images to highlight your products and services. You can also add a text overlay to your image. Imagine a product shot with a clever tagline and a price attached to it. Add a logo too if you want to ensure your brand doesn't get lost in the conversation. #4: Respond to Customer Inquiries With IFTTT Marketers today have a critical opportunity that previous generations lacked: the ability to respond in real time to user actions. You might already track visitors and offer personalized content and responses when they're on your site. But what about social media? How do you respond to a statement like "Can't wait to see what the new Windows 10 looks like. Gotta try it!"? You can respond quickly to user activity on social media with I...

How to Pay Attention in a Dull Class

How to Pay Attention in a Dull Class

by @ How to of the Day

Dull or boring classes can be a challenge to endure, especially if you’re trying to earn a top grade. Every student experiences a dull class once in a while, but the good news is that there are easy ways to keep yourself engaged while avoiding distractions. Coming to class prepared, striving to participate, and removing distractions like your cell phone and snacks are all strategies you can use to make it easier to pay attention.

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

Content Creation Hacks: How to Quickly Produce Valuable Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Looking for an easier way to make your content work for you? Discover easy ways to create and repurpose your content, courtesy of Nick Westergaard. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Nick Westergaard, host of the On Brand Podcast and chief brand strategist at social and content agency Brand Driven Digital. Nick is also the author of Get Scrappy: Smart Digital Marketing for Businesses Big and Small. Nick explores easy ways to create quality content. You'll also discover how to repurpose recent and historical material. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Creation Hacks Nick's story Westergaard Advertising began 35 years ago in Iowa when Nick's father and now business partner started what was a small, general, traditional advertising agency. Nick had worked with brands in the early days of online marketing, specifically for educational publishing companies when digital really started to grow. About 10 years ago, Nick started moonlighting as a freelancer for the family business. Eventually he would come in as a partner. In addition to changing the kind of work Westergaard Advertising specialized in, they morphed into brand-driven digital to help organizations build better brands online through social media and content marketing. Nick's book, Get Scrappy, came from a phrase he found himself saying often. Nick does a lot of public speaking, and says it was one of those experiences where he quickly dashed off a title for a new speech. Then when it came time to write it, the topic took root and excited him. Plus, he was able to draw on work he did with clients of all shapes and sizes. "Get Scrappy" was a common thread. Whether it's an entrepreneurial startup, solo small business, medium-sized business, or a larger marketing team, everybody's looking to get scrappy – to do more with less. For instance, Nick talks about working with nostalgic brand Schwinn Bikes, and how it's easy to think of them as a big brand, but they're really a small, scrappy team at the headquarters in Madison, Wisconsin. Nick talked with them about this idea of getting scrappy. Schwinn's social media manager Samantha Hersil summed it up best. "We could all use a few people and a few dollars more," Hersil said. That's really at the heart of the book. Listen to the show to discover how Nick's business has changed over the last 10 years. Why marketers object to creating content Content is a tricky animal, Nick explains, so it takes a content marketing mindset. Some of the obstacles marketers encounter are from lack of a sound content strategy. The Content Marketing Institute reports that many people fly blind when it comes to content strategy. It's both an obstacle and an internal objection, because companies are just jumping on the content marketing bandwagon. Both in terms of social channels and content, Nick thinks it's easy to fall into the trap of what he calls "checklist marketing." Marketers do everything they hear about: they have a presence on every network, create every form of content, and so forth. Nick thinks if people instead develop a strategy with a business objective, their content will be better aligned with their business. Content used to be driven by the written word, Nick explains. As people scoot up to that podcasting microphone and hit the Record button with video, they get scared. There's a ripple effect, as well. Subject matter experts may feel like they're not interesting enough, or else they believe they have interesting stor...

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

Podcasting Renaissance: Is Podcasting Making a Comeback?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a podcast? Do you believe podcasts are making a comeback? Do you find yourself listening to more podcasts lately? To explore why podcasting may be entering a renaissance period, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of Six Pixels of Separation and founder of the Six Pixels of Separation podcast. Mitch shares his experiences from when he first started podcasting in 2006 to now. You'll learn why now is a great time to start a podcast and pick up some useful podcasting tips. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting Then and Now Stories from the beginning of podcasting Mitch talks about the people who inspired him back in 2006 when he first started podcasting. He explains how C.C. Chapman was one of the early adopters of podcasting and introduced Mitch to CastBlaster. You'll hear how people consumed audio back then and why podcasting started. What really made podcasting was the subscription model. You could now download 5-6 hours of rich content specific to your niche. People looked forward to podcasts to make their commutes useful by listening to relevant content. Mitch explains how many of the early adopters got fatigued quickly and what you can learn from this if you're interested in podcasting. You'll find out the questions to ask yourself before you start a podcast. Mitch talks about persistence and consistency being paramount to success in any social media channel. To produce the best content, you need to have an appetite to constantly hunt for interesting stories to tell. Listen to the show to find out what you should ask yourself before you start a podcast. The meaning behind the word "podcasting" Did podcasting ever die? Mitch explains the possible reasons why people thought podcasting had declined. He compares podcasting to other social media platforms and the different speeds in evolution. Is the word "podcast" still valid today?  Mitch thinks podcasting is part of the zeitgeist now. Mitch talks about how podcasting is more serialized and scheduled than online radio, which is streaming and more like regular radio. Listen to the show to hear more about what "podcasting" means today. The resurrection of podcasting Mitch shares the time when he realized that there could possibly be a resurrection for podcasts. He thinks the resurrection of podcasting is due to quality in terms of technology and delivery rather than podcast production. With today's technology, smart devices and LTE in the palm of our hand, we can more easily access audio than ever before. We now have the ability to consume this content when we want and the audience is there in a major way. As more and more people adopt these devices, there are going to be more people who are naturally inclined to get better content. Listen to the show to hear the podcasts that made Mitch realize the possibility of a resurrection. Podcasting tips from Mitch Mitch explains how his podcast format has changed since when he first started, compared to today. You'll discover the different formats of podcasts people are doing today. Mitch opens his podcast show with the question "Who are you and what do you do?" He explains why he does this and how this question enables the people he's interviewing to present themselves to his audience. Listen to the show to hear more about the meaning behind the question.

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

Instagram Algorithm: How Marketers Should Alter Their Strategy

Instagram Algorithm: How Marketers Should Alter Their Strategy

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram to showcase your business? Have you heard about the new algorithm and other changes? Sue B. Zimmerman joins us to explore the latest Instagram updates. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Sue B. Zimmerman, the Instagram Gal. She's the author of the ebook, Instagram Basics for Your Business, and has taught Instagram marketing for small businesses on CreativeLive. Sue helps businesses leverage the power of Instagram. Sue explores the latest Instagram features, and you'll discover how marketers should respond to the Instagram algorithm changes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Algorithm How Sue got started with Instagram Sue is an artist at heart and says she's wired for visuals. She discovered the power of Instagram at her Cape Cod retail store, which she ran for six years. After she started using Instagram, her sales increased significantly, and she realized she needed to teach other business owners how to have that kind of success. Last summer, she closed the store to focus on growing her online business. Sue first discovered Instagram through her twin daughters. They were scrolling through Instagram one day and not paying attention to her, so she asked what they were up to. They said, "Mom, we're on Instagram. Don't get on it, because then you're going to start teaching it." Pay attention to your teenagers, Sue adds, because they're setting the next mobile trend. Instagram is growing very quickly. At the time of this recording, it has 400 million users and Sue believes they'll soon announce they're at 500 million active users. They project it to be one billion in three years. Listen to the show to learn more about Sue's retail store on Cape Cod. What's new with Instagram Sue explains several new Instagram features. First, you can now send direct messages from an Instagram comment via mobile. When you open up Instagram and see a post you want to send privately to your team, just click on the arrow to the left of the comment and send it as a direct message. All you have to do is @mention the person you want to see it. Direct messaging is one of the most underutilized features of Instagram, Sue believes. A lot of people don't use direct messaging for their business. For example, when you see something that reminds you of a client or someone you want to collaborate with, you can easily send it to them as an idea without having to publicly post on that feed. In addition, the desktop has had a lot of great updates. Looking at the desktop version of Instagram, you'll see three icons on the right-hand side. Click on the explore button that looks like a compass, and Instagram suggests people for you to discover, based on your activity. In the middle, click on the heart icon to see notifications. The icon on the far right goes to your profile. Plus you can now comment from the desktop, which is something people have wanted to do for a very long time. On the far left, clicking on "Instagram" takes you to the home feed, so you can easily scroll through it on your desktop. Sue says she doesn't use the desktop much, unless she's using Iconosquare. Additionally, she notes that you can't upload photos from your desktop unless you use an app like Later. Sue also shares a couple of things people need to know about video. First, video on Instagram is now up to 60 seconds, which is great for people who really want to give demonstrations, do behind-the-scenes content, or announce their podcasts with video teasers.

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to promote your business? Want to increase your exposure? Making a few simple tweaks to your Instagram marketing can generate more engagement and increase the visibility of your content. In this article you'll discover how to get more exposure for your brand on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Embrace the Hashtag Descriptive hashtags on Instagram will help expose your content to more people. This will lead to more engagement and ultimately grow your followers. For anyone who doesn't already know, hashtags are short, descriptive keywords, preceded by the hash sign (#), which enable users to find content they're looking for with a simple click. Relevant hashtags in posts help create a dialogue between your business and other users. There are a number of things you can do with hashtags to get the ball rolling on Instagram. First of all, add hashtags relevant to your industry or niche to every post your business makes on Instagram. Remember, you can use as many hashtags as you want, which will help you attract a wider audience. Note: Research has found even small accounts that use 11 or more hashtags receive an average of 77.6 interactions. So if you're an online retailer specializing in women's clothes, include the hashtag #womensfashion, among others, in your photo description. This will help users find inspiration, as well as help you land more followers, improve brand awareness and increase sales. Plus, spend some time commenting on relevant photos from other Instagram users with a hashtag you're targeting. Your brand will be exposed to users who are already interested in that specific hashtag, which will also help increase followers and engagement. There are a few more things you can do to get the most out of hashtags. First, be as specific as possible when choosing your hashtags. This will help your brand connect with other like-minded users on Instagram. You'll have a much better chance of converting them, since they're highly targeted prospects. Also, be relevant. Make sure you use applicable hashtags on your posts, so people who are interested in what you do are able to find you. Finally, keep your eyes open. Pay attention to which hashtags other users are including on their photos. You may find a new, popular hashtag that will help you reach more people. #2: Engage With Your Community To make the most of your efforts on Instagram, it's vital to spend time engaging with your community and other users on the platform. See what photos and hashtags attract the most comments and likes, and jump on the bandwagon. You can also re-post exceptional images from your followers. Also, determine where people from your target demographic hang out. Find out which accounts they follow and then engage with them. Comment on their photos and like their posts. Remember to add value with your comments and don't be spammy. If you've done your research and interact with the right people, these users are likely to engage with your brand and follow your account. Your brand will also start to show up on their followers' radar. #3: Launch a Contest The prospect of getting something for nothing has always been alluring in the world of marketing. Use the reach and popularity of your Instagram account to host competitions and attract more followers. An Instagram contest is a great way to drum up excitement and get people talking about your brand. Whether you go with a tag, hashtag, like to win, share or other type of promotion, your Instagram contest will certainly be a hit. #4: Build Awareness of Your Instagram Handle Even though this is fairly obvious and straightforward, it's still worth mentioning. The first step in Instagram marketing is to promote your handle to your customers. Then they'll know you have a presence on Instagram and where to find you. There are various ways to spread the word that your business is on Instagram.

How to Optimize the Product Pages of Your Ecommerce Website

by Joydeep Bhattacharya @ Unamo Blog

Someone may perform a Google search for an item in your store, but unless that product’s page is optimized correctly, they may not be able to find it easily in the search results. So, unless you wish to miss out on potential visitors, you should make sure your product pages are optimized. The recommendations below […]

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready to face the technological and sociological changes that are happening right now? To learn why you need to consider rebooting the way you market in this rapidly changing world, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of the book Six Pixels of Separation and the podcast with the same name. His newest book is Ctrl Alt Delete: Reboot Your Business. Reboot Your Life. Your Future Depends on It. Mitch shares how technology will change the way we market our businesses in the future. You'll learn the most important trends and how they will impact your marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Reboot What's the business world going to look like for our young children, when they enter the workforce? Mitch shares how the iPad has only been around for the last three and a half years, and so for us to even think about what life will be like in a decade is unfathomable. He believes that in current business, with the catalyst of technology, we've gone through exponential growth. Mitch says that as human beings we find it difficult to understand this dramatic shift. Since the iPad has come along, it has imploded the PC market. Our children will know nothing but technology. It's changing the lives of people and the state of business. Listen to the show to find out why Mitch questions why anyone would download content and keep it on a hard drive. Why we need a reboot In the preface to Mitch's new book, Ctrl Alt Delete, he says, "during this state of purgatory, many businesses will die and many jobs will disappear, but in the same breadth many businesses will thrive, many new businesses will be created, and many new jobs will be invented." Mitch shares his story of when his agency, Twist Image, first started out in 2000. The idea was to create a modern marketing agency focused on technology and connectivity. You'll discover what type of people they now hire compared to back then and see how the acceleration has kicked in over the last 5 years. As far as education goes, Mitch feels that we're not educating young people properly. He believes that we're not setting up an infrastructure for the world as it exists. As a professional marketer, you'll need to look at how we connect with things, engage with brands and engage in our lives. Mitch explains what he means by reboot and how marketing professionals are not grasping it. They tend to still hold onto the old ways in which they buy, sell, create and engage with media. You'll discover why Mitch believes the book is a wake-up call and why it's not forward-looking. Listen to the show to hear the five movements that have already happened that have shaped business and changed the way we work. How has the seemingly ubiquitous adoption of social media led to the need for businesses and marketers to change? Mitch feels the most important element is the intrinsic connection we now have. For example, when you see two young people shopping in a mall, they aren't just two good prospects for your store—they're more like 1,002 prospects. Young people today have about 500 connections on Facebook, where they chat, share and text. They create a connected society that we've never had before. Mitch feels that social media, a platform of connectivity, has been a major factor. The adoption has been so intense that he's not sure if marketers or even the peopl...

First Impressions, Ad Blocking, and Phone Calls: It’s All About Customer Experience

by Karl Meyer @ DialogTech

It’s highly likely that at some point in your life you’ve been told that first impressions count. It’s such a popular maxim that most of us accept it as truth and apply it to our professional and personal lives regularly. But what about brands? Shouldn’t a brand be concerned about the first impression it makes on a consumer? Google recently […]

The post First Impressions, Ad Blocking, and Phone Calls: It’s All About Customer Experience appeared first on DialogTech.

Attorneys Online™, Inc. Helping Out Austin Pets Alive! Through Pull Ups for Pups

by Attorneys Online, Inc. @ Attorneys Online, Inc.

A member of the Attorneys Online™, Inc. (AOI) family, Monty Hamilton, is taking part in the True Athlete Games (TAG) and participating in Pull Ups for Pups. The True Athlete Games is a fitness competition that features several qualifying events held throughout the year and culminates in a championship event held at the end of the year. TAG competitions consist of a series of standardized fitness tests, such as deadlift, bench press, broad jump and pull ups. This year, True Athlete Games, Austin Pets Alive! and Barks and Barbells are teaming up to host a fundraiser called Pull Ups for Pups. Pull Ups for Pups will enable True Athlete competitors to collect pledges leading up to TAG. Those who donate to Pull Ups for Pups will base their pledges on how many pull ups the TAG competitor does. For example, let’s say a person pledges to give $1 per pull...
Read More »

The post Attorneys Online™, Inc. Helping Out Austin Pets Alive! Through Pull Ups for Pups appeared first on Attorneys Online, Inc..

7 Pinterest Tools for Marketers

7 Pinterest Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest for your business? Looking for time-saving tools? Many tools and services can streamline the way you find and pin content to Pinterest. In this article I'll share seven Pinterest tools for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Trigger Pin Posting With IFTTT IFTTT (If This Then That) is a free service that lets you automate tasks between two different platforms (apps, tools, social networks, etc.) by creating recipes. Use Pinterest to trigger tasks based on when you like any pin on Pinterest from your profile or when you post a pin to your profile. Plus, set up triggers from other channels that will lead to pinning an image to a specified board on Pinterest. For example, set up a recipe to take any image you add to your Instagram profile and pin it to a specific board on your Pinterest profile. Another option is to set up a recipe that automatically shares new pins or pins you like to other social networks, such as your Facebook page. IFTTT has more than 200 channels. Look for those that are image-centric to see which ones you can combine with some smart automations for Pinterest. #2: Pin on the Go With the Pinterest App The Pinterest mobile app for iOS and Android devices allows you to add images to your Pinterest boards from anywhere at any time. Also use the app to share photos you take with your smartphone to your Pinterest boards. With the Pinterest app, you don't have to wait until you get back to your computer to pin something you find online or see in real life. #3: Schedule Pins With Buffer Do you schedule social media updates through Buffer? Now you can use it to schedule pins to your Pinterest boards as well. Connect your Pinterest account, and then create a schedule for when you would like pins to be published on your Pinterest profile. Then you can find and add pins to share to your Pinterest profile through your Buffer dashboard. There's also a Google Chrome extension for Buffer. Buffer will fetch the images from the URL you want to share, so you can quickly schedule the right image to pin to your Pinterest board. Buffer starts at $10 per month for 12 social profiles, 200 scheduled posts and 2 team members. #4: Find Inspiring Pins With ViralTag If you like the functionality of Buffer-style scheduling and queuing of posts, but you need some inspiration for things to share, try ViralTag. This platform connects with Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram and Tumblr. Unlike Buffer, ViralTag allows you to create one sharing schedule for all connected accounts as opposed to creating a schedule for each connected account. ViralTag separates itself from Buffer in its ability to import feeds, allowing you to check other image-centric networks for inspiration, presented in thumbnail format. Another unique feature is that you can select multiple images from your feed sources and bulk-schedule them to your Pinterest and other connected accounts all at once. Schedule to more than one Pinterest board, as well. ViralTag starts at $29 per month for 10 connected accounts, visual content discovery and up to five RSS feeds for inspiration. #5: Automate Pin Publishing With Sendible If you want to automate publishing pins to Pinterest, you may want to try Sendible. Sendible allows you to connect RSS feeds to your account and automatically publish news feed items to more than 20 social networks, blogging platforms and bookmarking sites simultaneously. Choose to publish the pins immediately or add them to a queue to publish at times you specify. Sendible will automatically select the image from the URL selected, so there are no additional steps to take. Sendible starts at $39 per month for 15 connected accounts, RSS automation and brand monitoring. Note that RSS feeds also count as a connection. #6: Create and Schedule Pins With Tailwind

Google Analytics: How to Analyze the Behavior of Your Site Visitors

Google Analytics: How to Analyze the Behavior of Your Site Visitors

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to learn more about how people use your website? Wondering how the Behavior reports in Google Analytics can help? To explore how to navigate the Behavior section of Google Analytics, I interview Andy Crestodina. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andy Crestodina, author of Content Chemistry and co-founder of Orbit Media. Andy specializes in content marketing and Google Analytics. Andy explains how to analyze the behavior of your website visitors. You'll discover a few Google Analytics tricks to employ immediately. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics Why Marketers Should Care About the Behavior Category In Google Analytics, the Behavior category is one of five main categories that you find on the left-hand sidebar. Andy says the categories are organized from the top of the funnel down to the bottom. The first category is Real-Time, or people on your website at the moment. Real-Time is followed by Audience (who those people are), Acquisition (where they came from), Behavior (what they did), and Conversions (who took which successful profitable action). People dedicate a lot of time to the Behavior category because the reports show what's happening on each URL and how people flow through your website. Andy says you can see where people go, how much time they spend on pages, bounce rate, percentage of people who leave after seeing just one page, number of pages per visit, and so on. The Behavior category is the core of Google Analytics reporting. What you find through Behavior reports is often surprising, Andy continues. Although a website is designed to encourage visitors to navigate through it in certain ways, the Behavior reports show how visitors actually move through your site. Listen to the show to hear an explanation of the value of behavior analytics with a restaurant analogy. Behavior Flow Report Andy believes Behavior Flow is an interesting and sometimes confusing report because it mashes up data from other reports. The Behavior Flow report looks almost like an infographic. It shows how many people are on your website, where they move as they navigate from page to page, and the page where they leave your site. After the starting page, the next column is first interaction, the column after that is second interaction, and so on. Behavior Flow shows the most popular path through your website, which is important. Knowing the most common path helps you prioritize changes to your website. For example, if you have only 10 minutes to work on your website this week, you need to spend that time on the pages people visit most often. Even if your website has thousands of pages, a small percentage of those pages receive the most traction and traffic. Therefore, when you have a great piece of content such as a beautiful testimonial or a compelling visual, you want to put it where people are more likely to see it. If your website was a city with a highway flowing through it, you'd put your billboards on the highways, not on little backstreets. In the Behavior Flow report, the first column is the Landing Page option, which reflects where your website traffic comes from. You can change the default Landing Page option to see the website traffic from a specific source. For example, you can select social options to see how people coming from different social networks move through your site. Next, you see the Starting Pages column. Andy says this column lists only the top pages. (For analysis of a specific page,

Why fixing how you use digital tools will not be enough

Why fixing how you use digital tools will not be enough

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

There is a lot of buzz around making better use of the digital tools at our disposal (the web, social media and mobile). That is not going to be enough to secure the future of your organisation.

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to connect with people on social media? Are you wondering how to be human with your social marketing? To learn why so many marketers struggle connecting with people via social media and what you can do to fix it, I interview Bryan Kramer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Bryan Kramer, a social business strategist, CEO of PureMatter and host of the From the Author's Point of View podcast. His new book is called Human to Human. Bryan shares what it takes for marketers to connect on a human level online. You'll discover the techniques that work best and examples you can use in your social marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Connecting With People Why so many marketers struggle to connect with people via social media Bryan explains that marketers have always learned how to communicate, but never how to be social. Brands used to be able to push out one-way communication to their audience, and it was seen as acceptable. However, since social came about, human-to-human interaction has changed. Marketers now struggle to connect with people via social media because of fear. With the mass adoption of social media, it has enabled global and public conversations. Brands are now under a magnifying glass and are struggling to find their voice. Bryan expresses that there's still a lot of fear in the business community because of social. In his new book, Human to Human, he has divided the fears into three distinct categories. You'll hear an example for each category. Fear of not being on social media. Fear of saying the wrong thing. Fear of what engaging means for your company. Lady Gaga is a great example of someone who engages with fans in a more intimate setting, which is away from Facebook and Twitter. It's within this network that fans help her create content. This idea is perfect for brands that are afraid to dialogue with millions of people. They can instead measure it down to a group of people with whom they want to actually engage. For businesses to overcome their fears, they need to educate their audience and their employees. You need to help these people understand how to conduct a dialogue and how to be human online. Bryan explains that part of it is to understand the different senses, in the way you can interact with people and then teach it to them. With the sensory marketing that is available right now, there is something for everyone. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to start with one sense at a time. Explain what you mean by "In social, content is important, but context is HUGE." Bryan says that with the convergence of social, mobile and digital technology, it has changed the way we communicate with each other. It's become a floodgate of communication without context. This is where the problem lies. Over 90% of human communication is conveyed through video language queues. This means that if 90% of what you talk about in person has to be visual communication, then it leaves only 10% non-visual communication online. You'll hear what Matt Clark at Tweet Pages creates for prospects, and why it's a great example of human-to-human communication. This has led Matt to become a speaker for Social Media Marketing World 2014. It shows you how powerful the use of context is. Bryan shares why it's going the way it is now because of all of the social tools that are available to us.

Giving Our Clients The Best Deal In Mobile

Giving Our Clients The Best Deal In Mobile

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

Are we cheating our clients when it comes to mobile? More precisely, are we allowing our desire for mobile work to get in the way of providing our clients with the best solution for their business needs? This is the uncomfortable question we asked ourselves recently when redesigning our agency’s website, and we want to discuss it with the broader Web community: You, dear reader.

Flex Skin Gets Big Videos and More in Version 1.3

by Chris Pearson @ The Thesis Statement

Now featuring big video support on the Front Page template, the Flex Skin is ready to help you deliver a rich multimedia experience for your visitors. This new video support is a nice complement to the big image + action button that has made Flex so popular since we first introduced it. Other significant enhancements […]

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your fans and followers? Want to improve the quality? Today, Roberto Blake is with us to explore how quality videos are produced. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Roberto Blake, a visual and video marketing expert, has a popular YouTube channel where he teaches YouTube marketing and video editing. You can find out more at RobertoBlake.com. Roberto explores the ins and outs of producing quality videos. You'll discover tools you need for video production. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Production Roberto's Story Like many kids, Roberto grew up watching Disney and was fascinated by all the behind-the-scenes information about the animators, storytellers, and moviemakers. He says animation wasn't in the cards, so at about 14 or 15 years old he switched to video and was producing online video as a hobby for about six years before YouTube existed. Rob says he didn't join the YouTube craze when it first launched, and shares that changed around the time he left corporate life for entrepreneurship.He'd already been running a blog to help creative professionals (designers, artists, web design), and found it was easier to answer questions and provide tutorials with video than it was to write and re-write the same email replies or blog comments over and over again. Roberto notes that if business people use video to address commonly expressed customer pain points, they're essentially buying back some of their time; it makes things easier on everyone. How did Roberto decide to turn video into a business? He'd been making ad revenue on the blog side and wanted to scale his existing freelance business. As he focused more on teaching web and graphic design, rather than social media marketing, he decided producing video content was faster than organizing his thoughts around screen captures and stills. Plus, Roberto believes that, if he's going to teach someone how to use Adobe Premiere Pro, a full-screen video tutorial like the one below is more helpful than still images and walls of text. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AxkXrPzEGtI Listen to the show to learn more about Roberto's early experience working with a wedding videographer. Why Video is so important today Roberto explains that one of the easiest and most practical ways for people to learn is through video, because they can see a process. Even when the video isn't based on a demonstration, like with software tutorials, there's value in seeing another human being; reading that person's micro-expressions and mannerisms can help cut the learning curve. Roberto remembers growing up watching Bob Ross, Reading Rainbow, and VideoSmarts, a program in the 1980s that helped children with memorization games, learning concepts, and reading. He notes that if individuals and businesses take advantage of educating via video, and make it engaging, fun, and informative, they'll find their content resonates with people. Listen to the show to discover my personal connection to early training DVDs. What to Do Before Recording Whether you're using a smartphone or a DSLR camera, one thing Roberto recommends before recording is to check the environment. Look for and remove any distractions from the background. For example, if there's noise from cars driving by you can change your location. If there's a part of your office that needs to be cleaned, you can tidy up. He also says you should think about the context of your background. For instance, when Roberto does personal vlogs as motivation for creatives and entrepreneurs who might be thin...

Why Segmentation is Vital to Your Marketing Success

by Sherice Jacob @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

When I say “segmentation” with regards to marketing, what comes to mind for you? Chances are, you immediately think of email segmentation. Segmenting your emails is crucial to improving your customer engagement and conversion rate. But although emails are the most widely talked about segmentation type, there are countless others. Unfortunately, it’s a process that’s […]

Split Testing: How to Improve Your Site Conversions

Split Testing: How to Improve Your Site Conversions

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you split test the opt-ins on your website? Want to get better results? To learn how to create effective split tests, I interview conversion expert Joanna Wiebe. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joanna Wiebe, a copywriter, conversion expert and founder of CopyHackers.com--a website designed to help you improve your conversions. She's the author of the Copy Hackers ebook series. Today Joanna will explore how split testing can help improve your email opt-ins and much more. You'll discover how to alter your headlines and buttons to improve your website opt-ins, as well as what tools to use to analyze results. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Split Testing What led Joanna to copywriting and conversions Joanna says she fell into the field of copywriting. After leaving law school, she was looking for her next opportunity. When a friend who worked at an agency said they were looking for a writer, Joanna got the position, along with the title creative writer. (She thought copywriter sounded too boring.) A couple years later, Joanna went over to Intuit (makers of Turbo Tax) as senior copywriter. Once there, she says she finally figured out what copywriting was ... and understood that it was not boring! Joanna explains the difference between a creative writer and a copywriter. A creative writer is a person who is more likely to come up with tag lines and concepts for ads and campaigns. It's someone who abstracts a message from insights. On the other hand, from Joanna's experience a copywriter is more of a scientific writer. Copywriting is not about you. It's about listening to people who are potentially nothing like you to find the right message, she says. According to Joanna, split testing became more readily available eight or nine years ago, and testing tools, like Optimizely, VWO and Omniture (before it was acquired by Adobe), were starting to pop up. So the company started split testing different approaches to solving problems. They would test them using actual data: website visitors or email subscribers helped them test by voting with their clicks or their credit cards. This led Joanna to start Copy Hackers about three years ago. Listen to the show to discover how creativity stifled Joanna in her first position as a writer. The ad at the bottom of Copy Hackers To capture email addresses Joanna uses a solution called Bounce Exchange. They have been experimenting with ways to get people's attention. There’s a little guy in the corner of the website and it says “Click here to get a free guide.” It appears as you’re scrolling down the page. Once you click on it, it gives you the opt-in box. Bounce Exchange is software presented with a service, Joanna explains. For best results, you work with their creative team and they come up with variations. They split tested different content and "The Free 2015 Persuasion Guide" got the best response. Now they are testing different messaging for the guide, as well as ways to get people to opt-in. Listen to the show to learn what other content Joanna tested against the persuasion guide. The exit intent popup Exit intent means when the mouse moves up into a certain range to indicate someone is leaving your website. In this case, when the Copy Hackers' exit intent box appears, readers are given the choice. “Yes, get the free guide” or “No, I reject the persuasion guide.” Joanna says this king of messaging is about having your audience make a decision between a choice and a consequence.

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to build a pipeline of quality leads? Wondering how LinkedIn can help? With the right forms of targeting, pitching, and engagement, you can use your LinkedIn profile to secure warm leads for your business. In this article, you'll discover how to create an effective lead generation process with your LinkedIn profile. Listen to this article: #1: Use LinkedIn Search to Identify Prospects While getting more likes and followers for your company page is important, it doesn't necessarily generate leads. For lead generation, you need to connect with the right audience. Start by narrowing down the job roles you want to target; focus on the people who are most likely to understand the technical benefits of your product and have the authority to make a buying decision. You should consider talking to CMOs, CEOs, CTOs, COOs, or other heads of departments your product or service fits into. For example, if your product is a social listening tool that helps companies with brand mentions, crisis prevention, and other monitoring opportunities on the web, you would search for and connect with heads of marketing or digital marketing. After you connect with relevant people, pitch them with a soft sell. Introduce yourself and your company in a soft tone. Instead of trying to tell your new connection how amazing your company is with 500 words, ask to schedule a 10-minute call. It's also important to follow up on your pitch if you don't hear back. Follow up after a week and again after two weeks. Use Google Sheets and a good CRM to maintain the flow of leads and track each lead's stage in terms of conversion. #2: Connect With Website Visitors on LinkedIn When you add the following code to your website, you can see everyone who visits your website in the Who's Viewed Your Profile section on LinkedIn: These people are validated warm leads because they've shown some level of interest in your company. As you find people who fit your ideal lead, you can follow up with them via a LinkedIn InMail or an email from your personal business account. For example, your message could read something like this: Hi NAME, Hope you are doing well. My name is NAME and I am the DESIGNATION at COMPANY NAME. I just took a deeper look at your website and understand that your company might be looking for PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. At YOUR COMPANY NAME, we are SHORT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. FEATURE 1/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY FEATURE 2/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY The companies that have been working with us for a long time include CLIENT 1 and CLIENT 2. I was wondering if we could schedule a call sometime this week to discuss this further? Regards, YOUR NAME DESIGNATION PHONE COMPANY NAME #3: Make Your LinkedIn Profile a Resource If you follow the lead generation process thoroughly, you'll form a significant number of connections over a short period of time. You'll need to engage your growing audience by sharing educational material that can help them. For example, if your product is solving problems in the hospitality industry and your leads are upper management of hotels, it's best to share content from your profile that talks about that topic. You should also consider publishing similar content on Pulse. The point here is to share valuable content that will help you build credibility with your target leads. To streamline this process, you can use tools like Hootsuite or Buffer to schedule content from your LinkedIn profile. #4: Share Advice in LinkedIn Groups One of the best ways to gain credibility, and by extension the notice of prospects, is to share your knowledge and insight with the very people you want to work with. LinkedIn groups offer a way for you to find these people and warm them up. If, for example, your company sells products or services related to the human resources industry,

DC Law Firm Regan Zambri Long Chooses Attorneys Online™

by Attorneys Online, Inc. @ Attorneys Online, Inc.

The names Pat Regan, Sal Zambri and Victor Long carry a lot of weight in the legal circles of Washington DC. Why, you might ask? It could be their DC law firm’s record of multi-million dollar verdicts for medical malpractice, Metro accidents and catastrophic personal injury. And now, Attorneys Online™, Inc. is going to help them share that service with more people all across the DC Metro area and beyond. We are proud to announce that the Regan Zambri Long has signed on with Attorneys Online™, Inc.! We handle the marketing and design needs of law firms in the fast paced and connected digital world of today, and we’ve been recognized for our quality services. Recently, Attorneys Online™, Inc. was declared the Best Full Service Legal Marketing Consultants in the USA by TMT News. We keep up with the media trends and marketing solutions law firms need, and that’s how...
Read More »

The post DC Law Firm Regan Zambri Long Chooses Attorneys Online™ appeared first on Attorneys Online, Inc..

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you seen the new Facebook reactions? Wondering how they'll affect your Facebook page? Facebook reactions let Facebook users go beyond liking a post by allowing them to choose from six emojis that show different emotions. In this article I'll explore how Facebook reactions work, and how your Facebook page can get the most from them. Listen to this article: Facebook Reactions for Fans The new Facebook reactions work pretty easily for users. When users hover over a post's Like button in the Facebook news feed, a personal profile timeline, or a Facebook page timeline, they will be able to choose from one of the new six Facebook reactions. Everyone can breathe a sigh of relief that Facebook reactions do not include a Dislike button. Hence, people cannot dislike your latest post (product, service, content, etc.). These reactions will simply allow expressions of like, love, laugh, wowed, saddened, or angered by your post. The feature will work similarly for mobile users, but users will hold down the Like button instead of hovering over it. Some mobile app users have noted that you must restart or update your app to get the new feature to work. Others have had to log out of their account and log back in again. Facebook Reactions for Pages From a Facebook page admin perspective, a few things will change. For starters, you'll see in your notifications that people are reacting to your posts instead of just liking them. On the posts themselves, you'll see an array of icons representing the different reactions that people have left on the post. On older posts, you'll see the new icon that represents likes, and on newer posts, you'll see all of the newer icons representing the different reactions that people have. People can also go back to older posts and add new reactions. You can click on the link to see the breakdown of which fans had specific reactions so you can see who likes, loves, and has other feelings about your post. Since page posts are public, it's important to understand that everyone can see the breakdowns of Facebook reactions, including people who are not admins and not even fans of the page. This means that you can go to other pages and see the breakdowns of reactions on their posts as well. This can be useful for competitor research as you can get a good feel for how people will react to specific types of content, status updates, and announcements – especially since you can get a quick summary of the reactions right at the top without having to scroll through the entire list. Note that only Facebook page admins will see the Liked / Invite buttons. If you are not a page admin, you only see Add Friend / Follow buttons next to people's names. So far, Facebook reactions only work on the Like button for the main posts themselves, but not on comments. So don't expect to react to comments anytime soon. In terms of your Facebook page's Insights, you can see the full breakdown of reactions for each of your posts by finding the post and clicking on it. There, you can see the full post details, including the new Facebook reactions counts. From an Insights perspective, Facebook reactions do not count as negative feedback. In other words, an angry reaction isn't categorized in the same area as a Hide Post, Report as Spam, Hide All Post, or Unlike Page. Hence, any reaction can be considered a good one. Now that you know how Facebook reactions work for your fans and for your page, here are some ways to get the most from them. #1: Encourage Fans to Use Reactions People love trying new things. Simply invite your fans to test out the new reactions on your page today. Not only will it teach your fans how to use this feature, but it will also boost your page's overall engagement and organic reach. For example, I initially planned to boost my post to test Facebook reactions, but I ended up canceling the promotion.

The Top 6 Mobile Apps Of 2016… So Far

by Convergent1 @ Convergent1

As people’s lives and work have become increasingly intertwined with, and in some cases dependent on, their mobile smart devices, like smartphones and tablets, more efficient, easy to use, and fun productivity of social apps are also becoming increasingly popular. As a result, mobile apps are a dime a dozen in 2016. However, there is [...]

The post The Top 6 Mobile Apps Of 2016… So Far appeared first on Convergent1.

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you develop multiple pieces of content at one time? Looking for a better way to organize and manage your content? Whether you’re working solo or with a team that manages content for clients, it's essential to have a system in place to ensure that everything you publish is managed properly from ideation through promotion. In this article, you'll discover how to manage your content with Trello. Listen to this article: #1: Create a Trello Account To get started, you need to create a free Trello account. Fortunately, the free account offers all of the features you’ll need for content management. #2: Understand How to Structure Your Trello Once you log in, you can create the following as a free account holder. You can create an unlimited number of teams to keep specific groups of projects organized. For example, in terms of content management, you may want the following: If you have a large company, create multiple teams so that each team has its own set of boards to manage its own blogs, such as the sales team blog, the marketing team blog, the development team blog, the support team blog, etc. If you have an agency, create multiple teams so that one team represents your agency’s blog, and the rest of the teams represent your clients’ blogs. If it’s just you as a small business owner, create one team for your own personal blog and one team for your business blog. You can add an unlimited number of members to your account under the teams you’ve created. You can also create an unlimited number of boards. Boards can be visible to specific members, specific teams, or publicly to anyone with a link. Members with access to a board can subscribe to that board and get notified about any changes to the board. Within each board, you can have an unlimited number of lists. Members with access to the board can subscribe to specific lists to get notified when anything in the list has been updated. Within each list, you can have an unlimited number of cards and assign them to members. Cards can have due dates, multiple labels, and a main description. They can also contain a discussion thread in which you can mention specific members, include multiple attachments and checklists with task items that can be dated, and be linked to specific members. As you can see, Trello has a lot of options for organizing a content management system, from simple to highly complex. The last two screenshots come from example content management boards for Trello’s own Editorial Calendar. You can also peruse public examples of ReadWrite’s Editorial Calendar, The Changelog Weekly Newsletter, WP Curve’s Guest Writer Management, and Buffer’s Blog Post Ideas. Now, here are some ways to use Trello for your own content management. #3: Create a Simple Idea and Process Board If it’s just you or a team of people who need to manage ideas, use Trello to create an idea management board. To do this, click on the + icon next to your profile photo to add a new board. Then name your board and (optionally) link it to a team. Inside your board, you can add as many lists as you want based on how you plan to organize your content. For example, if you have content ideas for blog posts, ebooks, videos, and podcasts, create a list for each type of content. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. You can use your lists to represent where content is in the process and use color labels. For example, use green for blog posts, yellow for ebooks, orange for videos, and red for podcasts. Or you can use your lists as topic categories and your cards as specific ideas. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. The point is there are no rules. It’s just a matter of what setup is easiest for you and your team to understand and manage. Remember that as your cards and lists grow,

12 Social Media Marketing Trends for Small Business

12 Social Media Marketing Trends for Small Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Curious about how other small businesses are using social media to get more sales? Wondering which platforms work best for small businesses? Social Media Examiner's seventh annual Social Media Marketing Industry Report, a survey of 3,720 marketers, business owners and solopreneurs from the U.S. and overseas, reveals some trends gaining momentum, as well as some surprising stalls. Listen to this article: The majority of the study's participants were either small business owners or marketers working for small businesses. Specifically: Thirty-seven percent of the survey's respondents were involved with businesses involving 2 to 10 people Twenty-three percent were solopreneurs Eighty-two percent were involved with businesses having 100 employees or fewer Get ideas from their experiences and future plans to help you shape your social marketing strategy when you download the report. Social media beginners and experienced users both will find helpful information here about: Whether social media is working for small businesses How much time other small businesses spend on social media marketing What types of content small businesses use Where small business owners and their marketing staff buy the most ads #1: Social Media Critical for Small Business First, 96% of survey participants use social media marketing, and 92% of those agree or strongly agree with the phrase, "Social media marketing is important for my business." Keep in mind that participants self-selected from a pool of over 300,000, and therefore are probably more interested in social media marketing than people who did not respond. #2: Facebook Dominates Small Business Social Media Marketing The majority of respondents carry out social media marketing on Facebook. The chart below shows that 93% use Facebook, ahead of Twitter at 79%. In the coming year, 62% of respondents plan to increase their use of Facebook for marketing purposes. Sixty-six percent will increase Twitter, YouTube and LinkedIn activity. Twitter is gaining on Facebook, however, and with its new advertising opportunities, will be an interesting property to watch over the next year or so. It's much the same story for Instagram and Pinterest, both of which doubled their traffic from 2014 to 2015. YouTube is more commonly used by larger businesses. Specifically, 71% of businesses with 100+ employees use YouTube, compared to 38% of the self-employed. #3: B2B Small Businesses Use Social Differently Than B2C Breaking down Social Media Marketing Industry Report averages is useful. B2B respondents for this survey report that LinkedIn is their number-one choice for social networking. B2C companies, on the other hand, go to Facebook first and in larger numbers. This makes sense because B2B businesses are looking for the marketing people, facilities managers, buyers and others who rely on LinkedIn for industry connections and news. Facebook is comprised of nearly every consumer on the planet. Seventy-one percent of B2B marketers want to learn more about LinkedIn this year. This said, just 18% of B2B marketers are using LinkedIn ads. These same marketers are using Facebook ads at a rate of 75%. #4: Most Small Business Marketers Don't Know if Facebook Efforts Are Working Despite the fact that 92% of small businesses agree that social media is important for their business AND that the majority use Facebook for their social media marketing, most also report that they don't know whether their Facebook outreach is "working." "Working" may mean building brand awareness and relationships with customers. It could also mean bringing in more leads and sales. The bottom line is that the majority of small businesses either don't know if Facebook achieves the goals they've set or it does NOT achieve those goals. It could also mean they have no goals or they haven't bothered to measure their progress toward goals. Shockingly,

A rant about email marketing.

A rant about email marketing.

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Better Search Engine Placement Using Latent Semantic Indexing

Better Search Engine Placement Using Latent Semantic Indexing


Stealth Creative

Latent Semantic Indexing is a tool that can be used for better search engine placement. LSI, as a tool helps us to be as relevant as possible in our writing.

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a purpose beyond making money? Want to discover how shifting your business priorities can make a huge difference? To learn how focusing on purpose and people leads to powerful marketing, I interview Dale Partridge. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dale Partridge, the founder of Sevenly (a company that couples t-shirts and causes) and a start-up expert. He blogs over at TheDailyPositive.com, founded StartupCamp.com and he has a podcast by the same name. Dale's latest book is People Over Profit: Break the System, Live With Purpose, Be More Successful. In this episode we'll explore how Dale combines purpose and social to create success. You'll discover the business system you need to break in order to be more successful, as well as social media tips to drive traffic for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Purpose Dale's story Dale always thought he was going to be a professional baseball player. When he broke his arm the summer between high school and college, his dreams fell apart. As a baseball pitcher, Dale felt pitchers know how to lead the team, so he decided to create a business. Dale started a fitness company, which grew rapidly but was unsatisfying. So he sold the business. After that he worked in the stock market for a while, before raising money and opening a rock-climbing gym. Dale thought things were going well until he got pulled into the yoga room by one of his business partners and was fired from his own company for being a "horrible leader." Dale changed. He explains how for a few years he went on a frenzy starting companies before hitting a wall. Dale realized chasing profits wasn't putting meaning in his soul. He wanted to figure out how to blend purpose and profit, and this was the beginning of Sevenly. He was 25. "I said, 'let's create a company where every week, we partner with a new charity,'" Dale recalls. "We would create products like shirts and hats and beanies and jackets, and any time somebody bought one of our products, we would give $7 to the charity that week. So if we sold 1,000 products, we'd give that charity $7,000." Sevenly sold 800 products the first week. A few months later, they grew to 10 employees, then 20 employees, and two years later, 45 employees. Sevenly launched on June 13, 2013. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=neHwgakQcGI Dale explains that seeing money not as the primary goal, but as a byproduct of helping a million people, was the shift. He got lost in something that was so much fun and literally changing the world. Sevenly has raised $4.2 million in $7 donations. Listen to the show to learn about the "aha" moment that set Dale on this path. The system businesses need to break Dale explains the cycle of companies. They often start with a cycle of honesty and move into an era of efficiency. When companies get big, they go from people over profit to people and profit, and become addicted to more. They start confusing being bigger with being better, he adds. What often comes after the efficient era is what Dale calls the deceptive era. This is when businesspeople start to lose their soul and forget why they started the company. At that point they either go out of business, or those who stick around enter the final apologetic era. That's where they earn back consumers' trust, and go back into the honest cycle. For example, Domino's Pizza was one of the worst companies in the world in the 1990s. They released a documentary called The Pizza Turnaround in...

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

How to Create More Exposure Using LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how your business can get more out of LinkedIn? Want to make sure you’re maximizing your LinkedIn presence? LinkedIn has a number of features that will work together to promote your business and its products. In this article you'll discover how to create an integrated LinkedIn marketing presence for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Get on the Map With Company and Showcase Pages If you want to spread awareness for a new product line, create a content hub for company news, publish employee success stories or distribute hiring resources to attract new talent, LinkedIn company and showcase pages can help you align your efforts. Create a Company Page The first step to establishing a LinkedIn presence for your business is to create a company page. Talk to key stakeholders within your company and gather the following materials and information: A high-resolution company logo and cover banner (no larger than 2 MB and 646 x 220 pixels) An approved written company description (up to 2,000 characters) A list of relevant keywords for the company specialty section General company information (industry type, organization size, URL, etc.) You're now ready to set up your company page. On LinkedIn, hover over the Interests tab and select Companies from the drop-down menu. On the right side of the page, look for the Create a Company Page section and click the yellow Create button. You're prompted to enter your name and company email address. LinkedIn will send you a verification email to ensure you're an official representative of your company. After you verify your email address, upload your company logo, cover banner image, company description and other details about your business. When you're finished, click the Publish button. Request Access to an Existing Page If your company already has a company page, you'll want to contact your page administrators to ask for LinkedIn account privileges. If you aren't sure who is responsible for your LinkedIn assets, make sure you've added your work email address to your personal profile. Then go to your company page and look for the Want to Help Manage This Page? section on the right. From here, you can contact page administrators and request moderator privileges. Set Up a Showcase Page Once you've set up your company page, you'll want to create other sections within it to market different company assets. LinkedIn allows you to do this with a feature called Showcase Pages. A showcase page is an extension of your company page and allows you to highlight other business lines, products or services, brands or even upcoming events that your company is hosting. Although showcase pages are directly connected to your company page, think of them as unique entities. They contain their own content, attract their own followers and have exclusive functionality, similar to how you'd share distinct assets on your website. To create a showcase page, go to your company profile, mouse over the Edit drop-down menu and select Create a Showcase Page. You'll then see options to get started. Creating a showcase page is similar to building a company page. However, you can provide more detailed information about a specific area of your business and bolster the visual aspects of your brand with the larger cover photo area. Rather than use your business name as the title, select a page name that both summarizes and sets the expectations for the content you'll publish on your showcase page. Keep in mind that the words you choose for your page name can influence how well your page is discovered through LinkedIn search. Distribute Content on Your Pages After creating a company page and affiliated showcase pages, you're ready to begin promoting and distributing content through these channels. Generally speaking, this is an opportunity to: Share your company branded content. Use white papers,

How to successfully encourage newsletter signup with good design

How to successfully encourage newsletter signup with good design

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

Many seem to be ever more desperate to get people to sign up to their newsletters and mailing lists. In this post I want to show you how you can get subscribers without resorting to Intrusive overlays.

Engagement: How to Create a Loyal Audience That Loves You

Engagement: How to Create a Loyal Audience That Loves You

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is audience loyalty important to your business? Are you wondering how you can increase your audience loyalty through engagement? To learn the importance of engagement, I interview Danny Iny for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Danny Iny, author of Engagement from Scratch! He is also the founder of Firepole Marketing (now Mirasee) and host of the Connect, Engage, Inspire podcast (now the Business Reimagined podcast) . Danny shares his techniques for increasing engagement, which engenders loyalty in his audience. You'll find out how to define engagement in your business, the benefits of it and how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Engagement From a writer to someone who specializes in engaging audiences Danny shares that he has been writing since childhood, and started a copywriting business when he was young. In 2006, he wrote his first book, Ordinary Miracles: Harness the Power of Writing to Get Your Point Across! In the book, he discusses his ideas about writing and how to write well. Although it's a great book, Danny didn't get the response he was looking for. The lesson he learned is that when you write copy, it's not actually about the words. You need to understand the people you want to connect with, and understand what matters to them. Danny's copywriting practice evolved over time into a marketing and strategy consultancy. You'll hear what happened when he attended local networking sessions that made him want to create a training program. Danny soon discovered that people who didn't have an audience wanted to know more about engagement; and therefore, he wanted to help them. He started to reach out to all of the experts who had built an engaged audience from nothing. With their input and perspectives, his new book, Engagement from Scratch! was created. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be sensitive to other people's needs. Definition of engagement Since his latest book was published, Danny says that he has developed the insight that engagement is about the deep emotional investment that people have in what you are doing. If you think about Apple's customers, they are members of the Apple tribe. The fact that they use Apple's products actually says something about who that person is. It's a piece of their identity. Not only are these customers incredibly engaged, they are also invested in what Apple does. If the company were to betray the values they stand for, the response would be dramatic. They would feel like a friend had betrayed them. Danny says that the best model for conceptualizing engagement is by increasing the feeling of commitment through rewards over time. When someone discovers you for the first time, there is no connection, relationship or engagement. You have to give them something to keep them coming back. Make sure you give people an opportunity to provide you with their name and email address. Once they commit, you can reward them. You'll find out another great way to get people to invest some of their time and attention, which will help you build a relationship with them. It's important to stand out from the competition, and one way to do this is to answer emails personally. This puts you in a whole different category. To be a good email marketer, you need to have a double opt-in, a one-click Unsubscribe button and a high content-to-pitch ratio.

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

How to Use LinkedIn to Connect With Prospects

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn to find business opportunities? Are you looking for tips to reach new leads? LinkedIn has a number of features that make it easy to develop relationships with the right prospects for your business. In this article, you'll discover four ways to use LinkedIn for business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Warm Prospects With over 420 million global members, LinkedIn is the best social media platform for businesses to find and connect with potential prospects. It provides an effective way to bypass gatekeepers and directly access your ideal clients. Finding and connecting directly with these decision-makers will not only save you time and energy, but will also make you more successful in your prospecting activities. The best place to start is with warm prospects, and here's where to look for them. Who's Viewed Your Posts If you post on LinkedIn Publisher, you can find warm prospects on the Who's Viewed Your Posts page. Look below the graph and demographics for each post, and you'll see a list of every person who has interacted with the post. You can view them by Likes, Comments, and Shares, and you can even see what they said in their comment or share. Not only are these people familiar with you, but they've also had a positive interaction with your content. If you find someone who matches your target client, send a personalized connection request mentioning their comment or share. Followers Look at the top of your followers list to see the people you're not connected to. These people like your content and posts so much they've chosen to follow you and receive notifications about you, even though you're not connected to them. Be sure to do a little research and look for a good reason to connect when you send a personalized connection request to them. Updates On your Updates page, you'll find every piece of content you've interacted with, whether you posted it or just engaged with it. Scroll through your most recent interactions. In each post, look at the people who posted or commented. If you hover over their name, you'll be able to see if you're connected with them. If you aren't connected and would like to be, go to their profile page and send a connection request that references the post. Who's Viewed Your Profile The people listed on the Who's Viewed Your Profile page are people who have visited your profile. If you have a free account, you can look below the graph at the top to see the last five people who've viewed your profile. If you have a premium account, you'll have access to the entire list for the last 90 days. If you see anyone you're not connected to and connecting would be a benefit, consider sending a connection request. When personalizing it, find another reason he or she would find value from connecting; not just saying, "I saw you viewed my profile." If seeing your profile was a good enough reason to connect, that person would have already sent you a connection request. #2: Create Trust It doesn't help you to simply "collect connections." Once you've found and connected with potential prospects or partners, it's important to build a relationship with your connections. There are a number of ways that you can strengthen your relationships and stay top of mind. Comment and Share An easy way to interact and get on the radar of your connections is to comment on or share their status updates and Publisher posts. Ensure that you tag them when appropriate, as this both alerts them to your share or comment and also gives them exposure to your network. In the case of both comments and sharing, always make sure that your engagement with your connection makes sense and doesn't come across as spammy or unprofessional, and that you only post content that will be of real benefit or interest to your network. Make Introductions Few things leave as strong an impression as when someone gives witho...

Is it time to take tech more seriously?

Is it time to take tech more seriously?

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld Show we have talks on best practice in web development and the impact of technology on design.

LinkedIn Group Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Group Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you active on LinkedIn? Wondering about the recent changes to groups? LinkedIn groups have been redesigned to make interactions more seamless and valuable for members. In this article you'll discover how marketers can find, join and use the new LinkedIn groups. What the Changes Mean LinkedIn completely overhauled its groups interface, so the desktop and app versions are the same. The Groups app is available on iOS, and the Android version is coming soon. Listen to this article: While both the website and app are user-friendly, the functionality on desktop has decreased. One of the most noticeable changes is that there are no more open groups. The two new group choices are limited to standard and unlisted. Standard groups are "request to join" or a member or admin can invite you to join, and are findable by group search. Unlisted groups are "invite to join" by the group admin only, and are not findable in search. Another big change is the loss of member search. Individuals can no longer search a group's membership by name or keyword, so it's probably not worth it to join a group just to get access to prospects. And because member search (at this time) no longer functions, private-messaging other members is more difficult to do in a strategic way. (This is on the heels of LinkedIn limiting private messaging in groups to 15 messages a month.) Although it will be more difficult to use groups for prospecting and lead generation, people can still use groups for content marketing. LinkedIn has also removed the Promotions tab on groups, which means any promotional messages will likely just go into spam. The upside is there will be a lot fewer pitches and less spam in groups. The downside is it may be difficult to discern what is and is not promotional content, so valuable information could get lost in people's inbox. It also could mean a lot more work for group moderators. The LinkedIn group changes will force marketers to step up their game. They will have to be more conscientious about the content they create and share, so it's of higher value to group members. Let's take a closer look at the changes to LinkedIn groups. #1: All Groups Are Private All LinkedIn groups are now standard or unlisted, and are both private. This means that conversations shared in a group are no longer public. Standard Groups Standard groups have similar functionality and purpose to the previous version of groups, in terms of posting and sharing information with fellow members. Group content is hidden, however, unless you're a member of the group. One change you'll notice is a Highlights page, which lists the most engaging posts in your groups. Go to Interests and Groups to get to your group homepage. Any member of a standard group (not just an admin) can invite people to join, and any user can request to become a member of the group. To save time, ask a friend who is already a member to add you. You're able to use standard groups for marketing, but you have to be smarter about it. Engage more and share better content to meet fellow group members. These relationships could translate into new business down the line. Unlisted Groups You can't find unlisted groups through a LinkedIn search, and only a group admin can invite new members. The good news is that extraneous groups that limit access will no longer bog down search results. The unlisted category is ideal for internal groups within your company. Your content will be completely private, since there's no chance for outsiders to gain access. There are plenty of reasons to start an unlisted group. For example, you can create user groups to beta test new products and concepts, use groups as customer service support for clients or start internal groups for employees. Remember that unlisted groups are strictly for content, not marketing, so they're valuable for communicating with designated people.

The best solution for mobile devices when a rebuild is out of the question

The best solution for mobile devices when a rebuild is out of the question

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Why performance is the best way to improve the user experience

Why performance is the best way to improve the user experience

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

Many things shape the experience of users. However, nothing is more likely to drive users away than a poorly performing website.

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos to promote your business? Have you considered starting a regular video blog? To explore vlogging, I interview Amy Schmittauer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, an online video expert. She founded Vlog Boss Studios and regularly produces awesome content for her YouTube channel, Savvy Sexy Social. She's also the author of the brand-new book, Vlog Like a Boss: How to Kill It Online with Video Blogging. Amy explores how video blogging can help your business. You'll discover what you need to start your own video blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Vlog Like a Boss What Is Vlogging? The term vlog builds off the word blog, and a vlog is simply a blog in video form. In a vlog, you can share anything you might do in a blog post, such as a tutorial or a story from your life. Consistency is best for vlogging. If you post a vlog here and there, you won't gain much traction. Amy says most vlogs that do well have a regular schedule. I ask Amy about how using YouTube for vlogging is different from the other ways people use YouTube. Amy says the purpose of a vlog is to help people discover you. Videos that may be suitable for YouTube but that don't help people discover you, such as a product commercial or an introduction to your company, don't make great vlog posts. To be discovered, think of the users who are searching for a concern, a specialty, or the answer to a question. Think about what a potential customer or audience member might want to know, create a video about the topic, and upload it to YouTube. Listen to the show to discover Amy's thoughts about vlogging on mobile apps like Snapchat and Instagram, which have video and social. Amy's Vlog When Amy launched Savvy Sexy Social, she was just getting started as a social media marketer. She thought teaching people the best way to do things on social media would to attract an audience and potential clients. She wanted her vlog to be informative and fun. She didn't want social media to feel like a chore. To juggle her content marketing with her client work, Amy says she scheduled her vlog posts to appear three days a week but she created the week's videos all in one day. She would pick three topics (which could be an app, a product, or a general social media tip), record the videos sitting in front of her bookshelf, and then edit and schedule them for the rest of the week. Amy emphasizes that people didn't have to know who she was to find her videos via search. They just needed to have a question about a topic in her videos. For instance, Amy created a video about a hack to make tweets a little longer. She thought the topic was something new that people didn't know much about, and the video became one of her popular vlog posts. The video's headline focused on the Twitter tip but the video also introduced viewers to Amy. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OJRp22IXqXY Amy shares the simple vlog format she used for a long time. She introduced her topic, delivered information about the topic that her viewers would value, and gave an actionable item that would give them results right away. Then she wrapped up with, "By the way, I'm Amy. Hope you can subscribe and stay tuned." In the last year, Amy says she's been having fun with her format so her community could get to know her a little more personally. For instance, throughout January, she documented the journey of launching a book. This approach was more of a lifecasting vlog, but her audience was learning through Amy's experience.

Education is a two way street

Education is a two way street

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

In our desire to educate clients and colleagues about digital best practice, we often forget that we have as much if not more to learn from them.

Solar Eclipse Blacks Out Inbound Phone Calls to US Businesses

by Blair Symes @ DialogTech

Yesterday millions of Americans looked up in wonder as the moon blotted out the sun in the first total solar eclipse to cross the US in nearly 100 years. It is considered to be the most-watched and most-photographed eclipse in history. For brief moments during the day Monday, the sky over the US plunged into darkness and temperatures dropped by […]

The post Solar Eclipse Blacks Out Inbound Phone Calls to US Businesses appeared first on DialogTech.

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use StumbleUpon for your business? Are you wondering how you can use StumbleUpon to drive more traffic to your content? To learn how your business can benefit from StumbleUpon, I interview Nick Robinson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nick Robinson, co-author of StumbleUpon for Dummies. He's also the social media channel manager for SAP Americas. Nick shares how StumbleUpon works and why it's different from other platforms. You'll learn how to use StumbleUpon to discover shareable content and the type of content that works best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: StumbleUpon Marketing  What makes StumbleUpon different from other social networks Nick explains how StumbleUpon is a content discovery engine. It's a search engine and bookmarking site all in one. It's great if you want to bring exposure to your online content, which can include your website, blog post, video or infographic. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F8DtI9e4xZ8 Nick believes that the key differentiator with StumbleUpon is the Stumble button. It takes you directly to a piece of content on another website that you are interested in. You can tell StumbleUpon what your interests are in several ways. When you set up your profile, you can specify your interests, the interests of people you follow and what pieces of content you have given a thumbs-up to on that particular website. When you click the Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down button, it tells StumbleUpon's algorithm if it should or shouldn't serve that type of content to you in the future. Each person's StumbleUpon experience is personalized. It allows you to curate content, promote your content and connect with communities with all types of interests. Listen to the show to find out how you can create content that's relevant to an audience within an Interest category. StumbleUpon for B2B and B2C Nick believes that any business in B2B or B2C can use the platform. It all depends on the type of content you produce. The content needs to entertain, be informative and connect with your audience. To be successful, you need to test and measure, based on the changes you learn. StumbleUpon launched their new design and a new mobile app, which has increased its mobile stumbles by 25% over a one-year period. However, the majority of StumbleUpon activity is still primarily desktop, at over 60%. Since these changes were made, around 40% of their activity comes from mobile. In the next couple of years, Nick thinks it will easily overtake desktop. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to consider with these figures in mind. According to Alexa, StumbleUpon is one of the top 149 websites in the world and Quantcast estimated that 23.4 million people in the last month in the U.S. alone have used it. As of June 2013, when the StumbleUpon for Dummies book was published, StumbleUpon had 25 million registered users. They have indexed over 100 million–plus web pages. Listen to the show to find out how much the average user "stumbles" per month and the time spent on the platform. Companies who use StumbleUpon well  Nick says that two companies come to mind, which are both primarily content publishers. The first is Forbes. They do a great job, which is primarily attributable to their company page. They use it to acquire followers and as a content feed. Unfortunately StumbleUpon has closed off access to these pages to the general ...

Value Creation vs. Revenue Extraction: Which Kind of Business Are You?

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

There’s a problem in business. Okay, fine, there are plenty of problems in the wide world of business. Obviously, there are tons of good things in business brought about by new innovations, advances in technology, and improvements in customer engagement. But for all the new changes, old habits sure do die hard. Specifically, there are […]

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

9 Ways to Use Facebook Groups for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you participating in Facebook groups? Want to start one to support your business? Facebook groups help businesses promote products, support customers and much more. In this article I'll share nine ways Facebook groups can benefit your business. Listen to this article: #1: Sell Products As an alternative or addition to selling products or digital goods on your website, you're now able to sell in Facebook groups. Once you create a For Sale group, you'll see an option to "sell something" in your Facebook update. If you don't yet see this option in your Facebook group, take the opportunity to learn how selling works. Also nominate your group for this feature. #2: Supplement Video Training Courses If your business sells a video training course, give customers who purchase it access to a private Facebook group as part of the package. They can ask questions and get supplementary material, as well as forge a bond with other customers. It's a win-win situation for everyone. The customer can get help and additional resources for the product they purchased. Plus, it gives your business the opportunity to forge deeper connections with their customers and promote other courses and services. #3: Promote Chats Those who run a regular Twitter or online chat, or even have a running discussion on their Facebook page, may want to separate it from their business. They can do so through a Facebook group. It's a great way to promote upcoming chats and guests. Plus, you can keep the conversations focused. MediaChat uses their public group to share more information about chat guests, offer member deals and give shout-outs. Remember to let participants know about your Facebook group and page (if applicable) during your chat. This way you can continue to build up your group and online presence. #4: Establish Expertise One of the easiest ways to use Facebook groups for business is to become a resource in your field. Create a group or contribute your knowledge to one that already exists. For example, members of the Internet Marketing Super Friends group, numbering more than 13,000, pride themselves on helping other Internet marketers. Members can ask questions about SEO, get recommendations for designers and tools and more. The key thing about this type of group is to be a resource without self-promotion. (Most groups like this do not tolerate promoting content of any kind.) Use Facebook groups to be helpful and give freely of yourself. You'll be rewarded in spades as the word gets out from other members. #5: Collect Feedback Want to test out new ideas on some of your existing customers? One way to do that is to start a Facebook group to use as a think-tank for your business. Create a secret Facebook group, invite some of your best customers and openly discuss new ideas you're thinking about implementing in your business. Then gather feedback from them. This type of group provides a way to build stronger relationships with customers, while helping business owners collect honest feedback on what their customers might like. #6: Provide Customer Service Every business needs to provide a way for customers to get help. While this could be through a contact form on your website or through your Facebook page, a secret Facebook group is another option. The reason to start a secret group, instead of a closed or public one, is because secret groups can't be located in search or accessed via URL. Instead, members have to be invited. This gives you better control over adding new members. Plus, it protects your business in case you have disgruntled customers. (They won't be able to access the group unless you've invited them.) If you want to make your customer service Facebook group easy to find, create a closed group. However, be sure to state whom this group is for in the description. This will give you better control over approving and rejecting new members.

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ Hangouts? Interested in ways to use them for your business? Google+ Hangouts are a great way to hold group meetings, interact with customers, interview people and share your expertise. In this article you'll discover eight ways to use Google+ Hangouts for your business. Listen to this article: A Quick Introduction to Google+ Hangouts Before getting into ways to use Google+ Hangouts, here's a quick look at the types available. For public Google+ Hangouts, you'll want to choose Google+ Hangouts on Air. Google+ Hangouts on Air allow you to have up to 10 hosts in a live hangout that is publicly accessible on Google+, your YouTube channel and your website. You can record hangouts directly to your YouTube channel for future use. For private Google+ Hangouts, choose Google+ Video Hangouts, which allow you to have up to 10 participants in a video chat that is accessible only to the people invited. You can run Google+ Hangouts from your desktop browser or by using the recommended Google apps. Try running a private Google+ Hangout with yourself and a select group of people to start with, so you can install the proper browser software and test out the controls before you go live with a hangout. Google+ Hangout Controls & Apps At the top of a Google+ Hangout, you see controls that (from left to right) allow you to invite people to the hangout, mute your microphone, turn off your webcam, adjust your bandwidth settings, configure your video and sound settings and end the hangout. In the left sidebar you'll find apps that allow you to do specific things during the hangout, some of which are available only in hangouts on air, not in the video hangouts. These apps may also be ordered differently depending on which ones you choose to use or have used in the past. Starting at the top in the above image, you find the Group Chat app icon, which opens a chat box on the right side of your hangout. This is a great way to invite a person to interact during the hangout, even if he or she isn't one of the 10 people in the video with you. Next, you have the Screen Share app icon. This allows you to share your screen to show slides, live software demos and other information on your desktop. The Tag icon allows you to showcase links from websites of your choosing on the right side of the hangout. These can be links to your website, social profiles, landing pages and other items that your hangout attendees and viewers would need. The Q & A icon allows you to specifically start a Q&A in the hangout. The Camera icon enables you to take a screenshot of the hangout while it's live. You can use this feature at a specific point during the hangout to create a thumbnail image to use for your YouTube video preview. You can also use it anywhere you're planning to promote the hangout replay. The Video Camera icon allows you to control who is being shown during the hangout and how guests will appear when they join the hangout. Use the UberConference app icon to create a conference call number that people can use to call in to the hangout if they're unable to access the live video stream. The Control Room app icon allows you to quickly control which participants in the hangout are seen and heard. You can also use it to kick people out of the hangout if needed. The Hangout Toolbox app icon triggers a box of features you can use to further enhance your hangout. In the example below, you can see how to add a lower-third banner with your name tagline or a custom overlay image so every person on the hangout is identified when they're on video. The Effects app icon toggles special effects you can use on your video during the hangout. These are more for personal use than business use. Finally, there's a YouTube app icon that allows you to choose a YouTube video to stream live during your hangout.

SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Yelp hits Google again, link building & SMX East preview appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Boost Your Business with Better Search Engine Placement

Boost Your Business with Better Search Engine Placement


Provaro Marketing

better search engine placement. Build Quality Backlinks when you take the time to create and add on to your website, blog, and social media content...

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

Top Brands Rediscovering YouTube: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your marketing mix? Wondering if YouTube is still relevant? In the past year YouTube has enjoyed a sudden surge of interest from both advertisers and young consumers, largely fueled by mobile-device use. In this article you'll discover recent findings on how brands, consumers and marketers are using YouTube today. Listen to this article: #1: YouTube Video-Viewing Time Is Surging A spring 2015 study from comScore and UBS (as reported in eMarketer) found that U.S. consumers increased their video-viewing time on YouTube by 17% over 2014. For a platform that's 10 years old, that's quite a leap. The chart below shows that the biggest year-over-year gain came from mobile users, who increased time spent on YouTube's app by 31%. With desktop-viewing hours declining 30% in 2014 and 9% in 2015, clearly YouTube captured the mobile opportunity. Google's own numbers also indicate a surge even greater than what was noted in the comScore/UBS report. In the search giant's Q2 July 2015 earnings call, CFO Ruth Porat reported that consumer watch time on YouTube had risen 60% from July 2014. That's the fastest growth YouTube has experienced in two years. Porat also shared that mobile watch time alone had doubled. In the above chart Facebook's video usage increase of 852% in 2014 may impress, but remember that it started from almost nothing, so the multiple will be large. The bottom line remains that total time spent viewing video via YouTube amounts to 34 billion hours in 2015. On the other hand, time spent consuming video via Facebook (at 14.3 billion hours) is less than half of YouTube's amount. Still, viewing video on Facebook only began rising in fall 2014, and there could be far greater upside as more consumers pick up the habit of viewing video via Facebook. The article Facebook to Overtake YouTube: Five New Research Findings covers how in a 2014 survey of 180,000 videos across 20,000 Facebook pages, Socialbakers found that direct video uploads to Facebook were increasing rapidly. More content going up means more viewing time will result. Key Takeaway: Because the biggest leap in viewer time spent on YouTube is from mobile devices, you have to credit the user-centric upgrades that YouTube made to its mobile app over the last two years. The authors of the eMarketer study YouTube Advertising: Why Google's Platform Will Stay on Top explain that the new mobile app redesign delivers only the most relevant and personalized content. Further, YouTube instituted TrueView ads that allow users to skip ads at the beginning of videos within seconds. With the power to skip away from the ads, users feel more in control of the experience. #2: Ad Revenue Is Expected to Keep Rising With viewers rediscovering YouTube as a worthwhile channel to spend time on, it only makes sense that advertisers have followed them there. A Look at the Numbers The YouTube advertising study from eMarketer also predicts the platform will remain the top digital video player until 2017 and most likely beyond, despite Facebook's incursion into video. YouTube is expected to earn $1.55 billion in advertising revenue in 2015, and that number should rise to $2 billion by 2017, according to the study's authors. This is still less than the approximately $4 billion Facebook made in ad revenue just in Q2 2015 (extrapolated to a potential $16 billion per year). But given the competition YouTube will encounter from Facebook and others, analysts are impressed with the $2 billion number. In early 2015, digital video advertising agency Mixpo surveyed 125 U.S. agency, brand and publisher executives about plans to use video advertising on Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and more. In 2014, 63% of the respondents ran video ads on Facebook, while 77.8% ran them on YouTube. In 2015, these executives shifted their plans. Eighty-seven percent were planning to run a video ad on Facebook in the coming year,

Are Your Facebook Ads Driving the Right Phone Conversions?

by Christie Huber @ DialogTech

The following post is part of the DialogTech “Expert Voices” series where leading marketing experts share insights and best practices and recommend technologies. This post is authored by Pam Moore, CEO and Founder of Marketing Nutz, a training and consulting agency specializing in social media, branding, and digital marketing. Pam is ranked by Forbes as a Top 10 Social Media Power Influencer, […]

The post Are Your Facebook Ads Driving the Right Phone Conversions? appeared first on DialogTech.

How to Map Behavioral Metrics Into Your Key Business Drivers

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Digital marketing is a blessing to marketers because of the wealth of data it provides. Online marketers can analyze and dissect innumerable elements to gain a deeper understanding of the habits and preferences of their customers. As a result, they can effectively put themselves in their customers’ shoes and optimize the entire experience. This allows […]

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does social media marketing contribute to your bottom line? Are you looking for tools to boost your ROI? As social media changes from an engagement-driven environment to a conversion-driven one, new tools are emerging to help you market more effectively. In this article you'll discover four tools to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Locally With Pointro When we think of local marketing, a narrow set of marketing choices comes to mind, such as offline marketing in local communities through events, sampling at stores, posters and fliers handed out by high-schoolers and the like. Alternately, local marketing also refers to local SEO and how to get visitors who are searching for what you offer online to walk into your store. Pointro is a relatively new social media tool that allows local business owners to connect with patrons in real time and offer them excellent service at the point where it matters most. You get a notification each time a customer checks into your restaurant or store. You can then listen to the conversation and chime in where you're needed. You also get instant access to photos taken by customers at your location and shared with their networks on social channels. Use this user-generated content to showcase customer loyalty to your brand and to enhance your credibility with future customers. Keep in mind that according to a HubSpot survey, 73% of users are likely to buy from a brand that responds to them on social media. Using Pointro to tap into that preference will build a relationship that leads to a conversion. #2: Focus on Loyal Advocates With ManageFlitter Managing relationships with social media brand advocates is a huge part of a successful social media program. Brand advocates are satisfied customers who directly impact the perceptions of other followers towards your business on social media. They also help spread a good word about your business far beyond your immediate network. In other words, cultivating brand advocates can be a huge win for converting undecided users. To be able to focus your energies on brand advocates, you need to know who matters and who doesn't. ManageFlitter is a tool that allows you to pare down your Twitter follower lists to only those users who truly like and engage with your brand on social media. By weeding out accounts that are dormant or have unfollowed you, you're freeing up your time and not wasting your marketing budget on fans that exist in name only. ManageFlitter also gives you the best times of day to publish posts for the best response, which is particularly helpful if you have a business or brand that operates across multiple time zones. #3: Reward Purchase Sharing With AddShoppers As previously discussed, brand advocates hold immense power in convincing other users to convert to your brand. A few years ago, Nielsen’s Global Trust in Advertising study revealed that 92% of customers trust recommendations from friends and family when making a purchase decision. This means the friends and families of your existing customers have the potential to turn into easy conversion targets. All you need to do is reach them at the right time with the right message. AddShoppers is a suite of tools that allows you to do that. One of AddShoppers' key features is the purchase-sharing auto-prompt that appears as soon as users complete their purchase. This feature allows users to share the details of their purchase (product descriptions, website URL, pricing and more) on social media. The tool also allows you to offer rewards (future purchase discounts, free shipping, etc.) to customers for sharing their purchases on social media. AddShoppers works well with ecommerce sites built on nearly every platform, including (but not limited to) WordPress, Shopify, Magento and PrestaShop. #4: Deliver Relevant Content With Tweet Jukebox Social media automation is a lot more than just sc...

A User Experience Designer Might Not Be What You Think

A User Experience Designer Might Not Be What You Think

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

A user experience designer is not the same as a user interface designer. Their tools are collaboration, research and design thinking. Not Sketch or Photoshop.

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to develop relationships that will lead to business? Are you wondering how you can use social media to build valuable connections? To learn about the importance of relationships in business, I interview Ted Rubin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ted Rubin, co-author of Return on Relationship. He's also the former chief social marketing officer for Collective Bias and OpenSky. Prior to that, Ted was the CMO for e.l.f. Cosmetics. Ted shares the best ways to start to grow your online connections via social media. You'll learn what you need to include in your profile and why return on relationship is the most important thing for a business or brand. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing Recently I attended New Media Expo (NMX) in Las Vegas, where I was not only embraced by fellow podcasters, I was overwhelmed by the number of people who came up to me to thank me for this show. I'd like to take this opportunity to thank each and every one of you. Since I had a mission for this conference, I didn't announce that I would be attending. My hope is that you will be inspired by the story of why I did this, and that you will try it for yourself. How to build relationships in person, that often start online In my second book, Launch, I talk about the power of other people. I coined the phrase "Elevation Principle," which consists of great content plus other people minus marketing messages equals growth. For podcasters, the "other people" include listeners—a segment of whom I call "power users," or people with extreme influence. Without them, it's really hard to grow your business. I went to NMX with two purposes. I wanted to build relationships with the podcasting community and the parenting community, since I'm a newbie in both of these spaces. You'll discover why I only attended a few sessions, and made it a priority to hang around at the end of each session. One of the best places to meet the speakers is out in the halls, or where the speakers gather to network with each other. They don't seem to attend any sessions other than their own. It's an opportunity to have amazing conversations with influential people. You'll hear the types of questions I asked to get people engaged, which can develop into real relationships. This is one of the secrets to the success of my business, and it can be for you too. My take-home lesson is to get involved in real life through face-to-face encounters. One of the best places to do this is at a conference. Our upcoming conference, Social Media Marketing World, is a great place to start. Are relationships still important AND achievable with social media? Ted Rubin likes to say that "relationships are the new currency." With all of the different social media channels available, you can reach the world 24/7, without ever leaving your home. It used to be that you had to wait until you were at a company meeting or an event to meet people. The problem today is that when people click your name or check a box to follow you, they immediately think they have a real relationship with you or your brand. A lot of brands believe that they need to get as many likes and followers as possible so they can broadcast to them. It's not about broadcasting, though—it's about building relationships. Listen to the show to find out why building a relationship online is no different to a regular relationship offline.

Conversion Tracking Developments and the Value of Google’s New Call Bid Adjustments

by Karl Meyer @ DialogTech

In the beginning, there was the conversion. And it was pretty simple — but not for long. In the 1990s, when digital advertising was born, conversions fell into one of two categories — either they were online purchases or actions such as completing web forms or requesting quotes. Using the data captured from these sources, optimization platforms were able to […]

The post Conversion Tracking Developments and the Value of Google’s New Call Bid Adjustments appeared first on DialogTech.

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how your business can benefit from Pinterest? To learn some creative ways to use Pinterest to help your business, I interview Cynthia Sanchez for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cynthia Sanchez, host of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast. She freely admits that she's addicted to Pinterest. It's changed her life in a major way and now she helps other businesses figure out how to tap into this growing network. Cynthia shares how you can use Pinterest for market research and how to get your content seen by more people. You'll learn about some of the most popular trends on Pinterest and how to create attention-grabbing images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Business How did Pinterest grab you? When Cynthia was practicing as an oncology nurse, part of her work was to develop a program called Navigation. The role involved a lot of teaching and reaching out. At the end of 2011, she joined Pinterest to find information not only for herself, but also her patients. It started to take over her life unlike any other social media platform. She had the entrepreneurial spirit, but in the medical world, the opportunities are very limited. In February 2012, Cynthia launched her blog Oh So Pinteresting. It evolved from personal use to more business use. A local company noticed she knew a lot about Pinterest and approached her for help. The business grew from there and she said goodbye to the nursing world. The reason Cynthia started with a blog first was because it seemed less technologically daunting. She used WordPress for her self-hosted site. The podcast started a year later when the time seemed right. You'll discover what type of people Cynthia interviews for her podcast and the areas discussed, with Pinterest being such a visual platform. Listen to the show to find out the reaction to Cynthia's blog at the New Media Expo. How people use Pinterest for market research Cynthia says there are a lot of ways you can use Pinterest for market research. If you already have a presence on Pinterest, take a look at the people who follow your account. You can click on the number of followers you have to see a list pop up with all of the people who follow you. From this, you'll see if you have a predominant age group or gender following you. You have to remember that Pinterest is an international type of service. When you click through your followers, you can see the other boards they're following. You'll find out what you can learn when you click through and how this can help you with some ideas for your business. There are a few other things to look out for within a Pinterest account, which include people's location and if they link up to their other social networks. You'll learn what benefits there are to people having their Twitter account linked to their Pinterest account. Cynthia shares the benefits of a free analytic service called PinLeague. The difference with PinLeague and Pinterest's own analytics service is that you can see who your most influential followers are. You'll learn what you can gain when you dig deep into their accounts. Listen to the show to find out other ways you can check out your competitors and how it can help guide your Pinterest activity. Some of the more popular trends on Pinterest Cynthia believes that the most important thing overall,

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you creating a fan base on Facebook? Want to discover how to engage your audience via pages and groups? To explore how to nurture a community on Facebook, I interview Holly Homer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Holly Homer, a professional blogger whose Kids Activities Blog helps parents discover fun things to do with their kids. Her Facebook page (Quirky Momma) has more than 3 million fans. Holly shares how she's cultivated a thriving community using Facebook. You'll discover how Holly uses Facebook Insights to develop her content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Community Development The Importance of Community Community is the key to performing well in the algorithm-driven world of Facebook. To serve the community of Kids Activities Blog and the Quirky Momma Facebook page, all of the content focuses on the people who make up that community. Those people are mostly moms (plus the occasional dad, grandparent, or teacher) who are looking for something to do with their small children and survive the day. Whether that content is a video, picture, or saying, it needs to help the community and bring people closer together. When Holly began blogging 10 years ago, the community developed via comments on her personal blog, June Cleaver Nirvana, as well as comments she made on her friends' blogs. A popular blog post might attract 300 visitors and 150 comments. Holly recalls that commenting made this community visible and close-knit. When social networks came along, Holly says she had to relearn how to establish community, so she steered the conversation from comments onto Facebook because that's where comments and engagement were happening. She had to tell her community where she would be engaging and eventually turned off the comments on her blog. Facebook Live changed Holly's community again. She says she can now talk directly to her fans, but Facebook Live allows her to have more of a two-way conversation and be a participant rather than the center of her community. Listen to the show to hear Holly's advice for maintaining a community as social media changes. Facebook Insights Holly is a bit of an analytics geek and uses Facebook Insights learn about her community and what they like. With Facebook Insights, Holly can learn what common traits her community shares (they're typically moms with small children), where they live (mostly the United States and Australia), when they're online, and what they do online. Holly says she can also see what types of content her community likes (such as photos, links, or videos) and even what kinds of links or videos attract the most engagement. What Holly learns in Facebook Insights helps her decide what type of content brings her community together. In Facebook Insights, Holly says she mostly focuses on the magical orange bar. This bar shows each post's reach in comparison to other content for that day or other content on the page. (You find the orange bar by clicking More under the list of posts to get a whole page of posts and then looking in the fifth column.) Holly says her team knows that if the orange bar is short, don't repeat that content. If the orange bar is long, try to figure out how to repeat the performance of that successful content. For Holly, a short orange bar doesn't mean that the proverbial algorithms didn't like some content. It means her fans didn't like the content. She says every single interaction on your page is a vote for more of that content.

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

Google AMP: What Bloggers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Google AMP? Want to know how it will impact your blog? To discover more about Google AMP and the future of blogging, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Leslie Samuel, who runs BecomeABlogger.com, where he teaches people how to blog with purpose. He's also host of the Learning With Leslie podcast and head of training for Social Media Examiner's Social Media Marketing Society. Leslie will explore Google's Accelerated Mobile Pages (AMP) project and what it means for bloggers. You'll discover how to install Google AMP and related plugins on your WordPress blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google AMP What is Google AMP Google AMP stands for Accelerated Mobile Pages, and is a collaboration with a number of tech companies. Its goal is to improve the performance of websites on mobile devices, which in turn improves user experience. Kissmetrics did a study, which found that 40% of mobile users leave a page if it doesn't load in three seconds. When that happens, these users don't see the publisher's ads, products, services, or events. AMP pages load 10 times faster and use 10 times less data. Plus, when people view a website on a mobile device, pop ups (such as ads and opt-in boxes) take up the entire page. There's such a small amount of real estate on a smartphone, the pop-ups really inhibit the user experience. Google has already started placing Google AMP pages above non-Google AMP pages to mobile users in search. If you do a search for any popular topic, like politics, on your smartphone, only sites that have accelerated mobile pages enabled will show up in the top stories section. This is just the beginning. In the future AMP will be even more wide-spread. Listen to the show to learn how the Facebook Instant Articles feature is similar to Google AMP. Pros and cons of AMP In addition to the benefit of preferential treatment in search, AMP's faster load times should decrease website abandonment and increase content consumption. Before discussing the cons, Leslie noted one thing in terms of how AMP is set up. When someone clicks on an AMP enabled article on their mobile device, "/amp" is added to the URL, essentially creating a second link. (For example, a Social Media Examiner article with AMP would have the URL socialmediaexaminer.com/ARTICLE-TITLE/amp.) There are now two links: the original link from the desktop article and the second from mobile (with /amp at the end), which is what Google will show above the initial version. The AMP project is able to speed up websites because it strips away a lot of the unique elements, such as style sheets and JavaScript, that make a website look and function in a specific way. AMP sites have specific standard dimensions, and elements such as sidebars, headers and comments are gone. However, there is still a lot you can do with design, Leslie explains. For instance, you can change fonts and colors, add a logo, and more. It just will not be as extensive as what you have on your website. Articles with AMP show a single column that holds both text and images, so people won't see anything you promote in the masthead and sidebar on your regular, desktop website. Leslie says while the AP version of some sites may not be as advanced as the desktop experience, they still look pretty nice. For example, The Washington Post has a simple top with their logo. Then, when you scroll down, you see other posts, social media links, and so on.

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Have you tried split testing? To explore different ways to split test your Facebook ads so you can refine your ad campaigns, I interview Andrea Vahl. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, a Facebook marketing expert. She's co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and co-founder of the Social Media Manager School. In addition, Andrea is a regular contributor to Social Media Examiner. Andrea explores Facebook split testing and how best to optimize your Facebook ads. You'll discover which elements to split test first. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Split Testing How Andrea Became Involved With Facebook In 2006, Andrea started using social media to promote her side business (in-home wine tasting). She says that as she was learning how to use Facebook and Twitter, she didn't see a lot of articles that were entertaining and explained things step by step. So Andrea decided to use one of her improv comedy characters to make an entertaining, fun, and useful blog. She chose Grandma Mary, and dubbed her a "social media edutainer." According to Andrea, Grandma Mary gets a little cranky about social media. The character is the voice of people who are frustrated with having to learn social media. Grandma Mary explains social media in an endearing, engaging, and understandable way. Andrea started her blog about nine years ago, and when the parent company of the wine business folded, she made the blog her side gig. It grew substantially (she had a lot of Twitter followers and Facebook fans), which led to the book deal for her to co-author of the Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies series with Phyllis Khare and Amy Porterfield. Today, Andrea still blogs about Facebook, does Facebook consulting, runs ad campaigns for clients, and more. It's her full-time business and she gets to speak and train on Facebook all over the world. Listen to the show to discover which two loves Andrea combined when she created Grandma Mary. What You Can Split Test Andrea explains that the concept of split testing Facebook ads involves keeping things constant, while changing one thing about the ad at a time. That way, you'll easily be able to tell which variable contributed to the better-performing Facebook ad results. Then you can stop the ads that aren't performing, continue running the ones that are, and hopefully get your click price and cost lower and lower. For example, if you split test an ad to 1,000 people, 500 would see one version and 500 would see another. Then you compare the results. The hope is that you learn what works and what doesn't so larger audiences can be reached. First of all, Andrea says, you can split test all kinds of keywords, which go into the Interests area. For instance, if someone lists jogging as an interest in a profile, and you use that keyword in the Interest area of your Facebook ad, your ad will get shown to that person. Your ad could also be shown to people who have liked pages that are related to jogging, such as types of jogging clothing or shoes. You can also test all kinds of demographics. For example, say you want to reach people who are 35 to 55, live in a certain city, like certain things, and maybe own a home. There are all kinds of demographics targeting you can put in your ads to reach your perfect prospect. For Interests, Andrea suggests using general keywords like "jogging" and "running," versus specific pages like Runner's World or Nike shoes.

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

26 Creative Tips and Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Do you want better tools and tips to simplify your job? Looking for ways to increase your visibility or productivity? In this article you’ll discover the best tips and tools shared on the Social Media Marketing podcast so far this year. Listen to this article: #1: The Great Suspender If you use Google Chrome a lot and jump from tab to tab, you'll notice it can hog resources from your system. The Great Suspender is a Google Chrome extension that keeps some of those tabs from running; it suspends them. Activate the extension and you can set it up with different variables. For example, you can set it to suspend your tabs after 20 seconds, you can specify to not suspend pinned tabs or set it to auto-suspend if you're on battery. (It's kind of like TripMode, discussed in a previous podcast, that manages which programs use your data when you're connected to WiFi.) You can also set it to auto-unsuspend tabs or require a click to unsuspend. The Great Suspender is a free Google Chrome plugin. #2: Goofy App Goofy, an unofficial Facebook Messenger client for Mac, lets you use Facebook Messenger without having to go to Facebook. Using the app, you can message people on Facebook without getting into the time suck that is Facebook when you have other things to do. Keep the app in the dock. Then when you need to send a message, just open it up. It’s much less distracting than going into Facebook on desktop or checking it on your phone. Goofy is a free app. #3: TripMode TripMode is a Mac laptop tool that will give you freedom to decide which apps are able to connect to the Internet using the data on a mobile device. Perfect for when you  sync your iPhone to your laptop and use it as a mobile hotspot. After you install TripMode, an icon will appear in the menu bar that allows you to choose to launch TripMode automatically when you connect to a mobile hotspot or turn TripMode on manually. You can also see data usage for each app and manage them individually. For example, you can check or uncheck Dropbox, Google Chrome, Mail, etc. TripMode offers free and paid versions. #4: Soovle.com Soovle.com is a great tool to use when you're looking for interesting keywords to use in your blog posts or advertising. It's also an excellent way to see how different search results look across social channels and search engines. Go to Soovle, type in a phrase or keyword and you'll see what comes up on Google, YouTube, Bing, Yahoo!, Wikipedia, Answers.com, eBay, Weather Channel, Netflix and more. For example, I entered "native video." On Google, I got native video advertising examples, native video and native video advertising. On YouTube, I got Native American music and Native American flute. On Yahoo!, I got Native Americans and on Bing I got Native foods. Soovle is a free service. #5: HiddenMe HiddenMe is a Mac tool that will hide all of the icons on your desktop when you launch it. If you're about to do a screenshare or a presentation, instead of putting everything on your desktop away, you can hide it. It's the equivalent of throwing everything in the closet when you have guests coming over. HiddenMe is a free app. #6: Noisli Noisli is more than a white noise generator, it's a sound environment creator available through your web browser or the iOS app. When you need to cancel out the noise in a loud location or add noise to a quiet one, Noisli lets you choose from a variety of sounds such as rain, white noise, different oscillating fans, café sounds, library sounds and more. You can even use a single sound or a combination, and change sound environments whenever you want. Now you won't feel like you're sitting in your office all day when you're working on your projects. Noisli is a free service. #7: Facebook Paper If you don't want to install Messenger for whatever reason,

130. Air

130. Air

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week's show; Paul talks about better understanding disabled users. We have a tip from Jeremy about problem solving and Jonathan Snook introduces us to Adobe Air.

4 Tips To Build Customer Trust With Phone Calls

by Guest Blogger @ DialogTech

Do you remember the last time you called a business and were directed to the wrong person, ended up in voice mailbox, or, worse, never received a call back after leaving a message? Like most consumers today, you are part of the experience economy and truly value your time and experience with brands. In fact, 84% of callers will not […]

The post 4 Tips To Build Customer Trust With Phone Calls appeared first on DialogTech.

How Marketing Consultants Can Help Your Company Grow

by Convergent1 @ Convergent1

Marketing your business plays a vital role in establishing the brand of your business. The use of proper marketing strategies will allow your company to leave an unforgettable brand imprint on the hearts and minds of potential customers. Doing this will ensure that the prospects will choose to do business with you whenever they are [...]

The post How Marketing Consultants Can Help Your Company Grow appeared first on Convergent1.

How to Use the Pinterest Bulk Editor to Create Promoted Pins

How to Use the Pinterest Bulk Editor to Create Promoted Pins

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for a faster way to create promoted pins on Pinterest? Have you tried the Pinterest bulk editor tool? Pinterest's bulk editor tool makes it easier to create and edit promoted pins and optimize multiple promoted pins at one time. In this article you'll discover how to create promoted pins in less time with Pinterest's bulk editor tool. Listen to this article: What Is the Promoted Pins Bulk Editor? Pinterest's promoted pins have rolled out to almost everyone, giving all businesses the chance to use the valuable paid advertising platform. It can take a little time to create the pins, though. There's no way to replicate a campaign, and if you want to edit a set of promoted pins, you need to go into each one and manually make changes. Cue the bulk editor. Pinterest's bulk editor is designed to make it easier to create or edit many pins at once. It also allows you to upload images in bulk that you can use for promoted pins later. The bulk editor is similar to Facebook's Power Editor; however, while Power Editor is an actual online interface, Pinterest's bulk editor works by downloading, filling out, and reuploading relatively long .CSV templates. The best uses for this tool include bulk editing and image uploads, along with split testing. Creating a large number of unique pins can take time because there are so many fields to fill out in the .CSV template, but the more you do it, the faster you'll get. Practice makes perfect, after all. #1: Get Started With the Bulk Editor To access Pinterest's promoted pins bulk editor, click on the Ads drop-down menu in the top-left corner. Below the options for ads overview and creation, click Bulk Editor. When you first open the bulk editor, you get two options. You can either create pins in bulk via a .CSV template and upload new pin images (optional), or you can edit current campaigns. To edit current campaigns, you download your existing promoted pins, make changes to them, and reupload them to the platform. Both options happen in a .CSV format, and are shown below. #2: Create New Promoted Pins To create new pins with the bulk editor, first you need to download the .CSV template. To do this, click on the option to create new pins, and then click on the CSV Template link, which downloads the template to your computer. The template is enormous, and there are a ton of fields to fill out. It starts with "Existing Campaign ID" in column A, and goes all the way to "Max Bid" in column U. You'll need to fill in each column for each campaign. Though clunky, this is a great way to create blocks of ads for split testing. You can copy and paste most of the content, and replace only what you need to. If you have any questions, the cell underneath each heading tells you exactly what information to enter. The first task, for example, is to enter the existing campaign ID, and the cell below tells you where to find it and how to format it. Once you've added your new campaigns, save the template and then upload it to Pinterest. You'll be able to review your new pins. If you have any errors, Pinterest will flag them. To use the bulk editor to upload pin images, either click Browse to navigate to the files on your computer or drag and drop the images onto the screen. The images must be in .JPG or .PNG format. #3: Edit Promoted Pins If you want to edit your promoted pins, first you'll need to download your existing promoted pins data. To do this, click on the Download link shown in the image below. The bulk edit template is separate from the bulk pin creation template. You need to download the data for your existing pins to edit them. Make sure you download the template each time to stay up to date. The template is similar to the bulk pin creation template, though my editing template had far fewer fields. It only went to column R instead of column U. Like the bulk creation template,

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

How to Encourage Employees to Share Your Content on LinkedIn

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your employees on LinkedIn? Do they share your company's content with their networks? Asking your employees to promote your company content on LinkedIn is a great way to reach more prospects and increase visibility. In this article I'll explain how to help your employees share your content on LinkedIn. #1: Promote the Program The first step to starting a LinkedIn employee engagement program is to find and appoint a leader. Look for someone from marketing who's enthusiastic about LinkedIn and excited about this program. You'll want to choose a passionate leader who can motivate your employees and get them excited to participate. Listen to this article: Once you've established a leader, get a couple of employees on board before rolling out the program to the rest of your staff. Later on, after you work out the bugs and streamline the processes, these employees can promote the program and encourage others to participate. Now you're ready to launch the program to everyone. #2: Communicate the Goal First, explain and outline your company's current digital marketing efforts and what it takes to get followers for your social media channels. Then, make it clear that the program's overarching goal is for all employees to attract new followers and customers by representing the company as a cohesive team. Finally, create a short but powerful mission statement that will engage employees in helping you to achieve the goal of your LinkedIn Employee Engagement Program. #3: Highlight Participant Benefits To get your employees' buy-in, share why their participation can benefit them personally and professionally. For example, the program can increase exposure to potential customers, drive more leads and increase sales, possibly resulting in higher bonuses or profit-sharing. Additionally, participating in the program can enhance your employees' personal profiles, activities and visibility on LinkedIn, and they'll be seen as industry professionals. And it may even improve their reputation within the industry your company serves. #4: Outline Profile and Engagement Expectations Spend some time going over what you expect from employees who take part in the program. Keep in mind that you don't want to overload them with too much extra work. Here are some tasks you might want to ask them to do: Optimize Personal Profiles It's important that employees have a complete and professional-looking LinkedIn profile. Ask them to update their profile with a company and job description (which may come from marketing). You'll probably need to walk employees through how to optimize their LinkedIn profiles. Show them how to: Claim a vanity URL. Add or change their profile picture. A professional-looking profile image goes a long way toward making the right first impression on LinkedIn. Set the correct industry description. Update the Summary section and add rich media (especially if your company produces high-quality videos and other rich media). Update the Experience section. Link their current position to the LinkedIn company page (thus increasing your company's LinkedIn page rank in organic searches on Google). Update and optimize their contact information. Expand Personal Networks Share how together as a team you'll be able to reach hundreds or thousands of people who may be interested in reading and engaging with the company's content. The larger their personal networks, the better. Provide instructions on how and why your staff should connect with fellow employees, customers, partners, prospects and so on. Explain how this will help expand the reach of your company's content on LinkedIn. You might share an example like the following: "Say that 20 employees in the program have 200 connections. This means that potentially 4,000 people could see and engage with our content if we shared and promoted it. Even if only a small percentage of these 4,

How to Make Better Facebook Video Ads

How to Make Better Facebook Video Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you tried Facebook video ads? Looking for better ways to connect with your Facebook audience? Small adjustments to the way you design and target your Facebook video ads can increase your engagement and conversions. In this article you'll discover seven tips to improve your Facebook video ads. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor to Audience Preferences Rather than create content that targets a wide audience, focus on creating videos that target a specific audience segment. These videos are more likely to get clicks to your website, shares, comments and likes. For example, if your website offers several services or products, create a video for one specific product or service rather than your business in general. General videos are good for branding but not for businesses focused on direct response. You can use Facebook Audience Insights to find out who your audience is, if you aren't sure already. To access Audience Insights, log into your Facebook Ads account, click Tools and select Audience Insights from the drop-down menu. Choose the audience you want to know more about (for example, people who like your page). Analyze people who like your page, people in a remarketing list and people who are in an email list you uploaded to Facebook. Based on the data you collect about your target group, you'll get a clearer idea of the type of video to create. In the bottom left, select your Facebook page to see information on that page. From here you can explore demographics, such as age, gender, lifestyle, relationship status, education level and job title. You'll also see page likes (what pages your audience likes), where your target audience is located, how active they are on Facebook, composition of their household and more. Combine the data on each tab, and you can create a full target audience profile. For example, households with an income of $250K+ are more likely to buy luxury items, and households with many family members are more likely to purchase in bulk. #2: Capture Attention Quickly Successful videos get to the point right away. You need to catch the attention of your audience in the first 5 seconds. Here are a few ways to achieve this goal: Grab attention with a catchy start, like in this Friskies "Dear Kitten" ad. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G4Sn91t1V4g Tell people that you can solve their specific need. Hint at what you're going to talk about. Most videos are muted unless the user clicks on the audio button. This means that you need to complement the audio with a supporting visual so the first 5 seconds help you achieve good performance. Keep in mind, too, that Facebook is a social platform, so viewers are likely to skip videos that are too commercial. #3: Create Ads That Don't Look Like Ads When users visit Facebook, they're typically taking a break or finding out what their friends are up to. They're not surfing to buy. To attract the attention of Facebook users, your ad needs to deliver its message through something unusual such as insightful information, funny content or news. This isn't easy to do, but it's the best way to create videos that achieve your goals. Depending on where your ad appears, what customers consider valuable will differ. Always' #LikeAGirl Campaign does a great job of appealing to their target audience: women. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XjJQBjWYDTs #4: Keep Runtime and the Message in Mind Lengthy videos aren't as effective as shorter ones because people are more likely to stop watching them. Many online advertisers recommend that you create videos that are about 30 seconds long. If your video is particularly entertaining and builds value for users, you might be able to go up to 2 minutes long. There are a few cases where long videos might work. For example, users already know your brand and like your content. Also, if the video is useful or entertaining,

How to Include Recipes in WordPress Posts

by Keith Lock @ Tips and Tricks HQ

In this video tutorial, you will learn: How to install and activate the JetPack plugin. How to activate JetPack’s Recipes shortcode. How to find the Image URLs from the WordPress Media Library to be used within your recipe. How to use the Recipes Shortcode to easily add search engine friendly Rich Recipes with Print Buttons […]

Top 10 Search Engines In The World

Top 10 Search Engines In The World


reliablesoft.net

Which are the 10 best and most popular search engines in the World? Besides Google and Bing there are other search engines that many not be so well known but still serve millions of search queries per day. It may be a shocking surprise for many people but Google is not the only search engine available today on the Internet! In fact, there are a number of search engines that try to take Google's throne but none of them is ready (yet) to even pose a threat. Nevertheless, there are search engines that are worth considering and the top 10 are

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business serve a specialized customer base? Wondering how to reach specific niche audiences with Facebook ads? To explore a strategy for retargeting specialized audiences using Google ads in combination with Facebook ads, I interview Shane Sams. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Shane Sams, the co-host of the Flipped Lifestyle podcast, a show focused on helping families make money online. He describes himself as a normal guy from Kentucky who loves helping others. He's also the founder of the Flip Your Life Community. Shane explains how to use website traffic generated by Google ads to retarget Facebook users. You'll discover how highly focused keywords help manage your marketing costs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search to Social Ads Shane's Story Shane and his wife Jocelyn met at the University of Kentucky. After graduation, Jocelyn initially worked a corporate job and Shane coached football. They then decided to become schoolteachers, which they did for about 10 years. Shane taught social studies and continued to coach, while Jocelyn was an elementary school librarian. After some bad experiences at work, Shane realized he had traded control of his life for job security. He started looking for other things to do because he knew there had to be a better way. This was in 2012. One day, as Shane and his wife were driving around town, Shane said, "I wonder if I can get 100 people to send me $50." She asked what he was talking about and Shane said that out of the 7 billion people on the planet, surely 100 would give him $50. If they all did that in a month, it would be $5,000, and for 12 months in a row, it would be $60,000. If they could do that every month, they could quit teaching. Shane didn't know how he was going to make this money but he was determined to figure it out. He began seeking information about business. One day while mowing the grass, Shane decided to look up business podcasts. An image of a guy looking at the podcast art with his eyeballs caught Shane's attention. It was Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn. In the podcast, Pat talked about how he sold a study guide and would email it to people. Shane decided he and Jocelyn could sell PDFs of information. After trying different things online, they were finally able to figure it out. They sold lesson plans to teachers and football playbooks to coaches. A year later, Shane and Jocelyn replaced their income. As soon as they quit their jobs (which they did on September 27, 2013), people started asking questions. For example, Lindsay, a friend of Jocelyn's, quit her job to be a stay-at-home mom and wanted advice on making money online. They helped Lindsay create digital products and she made $1,000 on the Internet in a month. This money enabled Lindsay to be at home with her daughter every day. After Shane and Jocelyn realized their experience and knowledge could change the lives of others, they started Flipped Lifestyle. It has helped a lot of people. People ask why it's called Flipped Lifestyle. Shane explains that everybody flipped out after Jocelyn and he left their jobs, where they had tenure and insurance. Shane recalls how his mom cornered him and said, "Shane Sams, you have babies. You have lost your mind. You have flipped out. And I do not approve of this decision." Hence, Flipped Lifestyle. Listen to the show to hear Shane recall how much sharing online business skills meant to his friends. Why Combine Google Ads With Facebook? Early on, Shane and Jocelyn discovered a lot of the marketing advice available online didn't work for ...

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

Saving your users sanity

Saving your users sanity

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

Our mission as user experience champions is to save people from death by a thousand cuts. Small, but significant irritants that add up to be something more serious.

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products using Instagram? Looking for tools to make it easier for customers to buy from you? The right Instagram tools help you maximize your revenue. In this article you'll discover six tools to help you sell products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Shoppable Content With a Hashtag Hashtags are a big part of how you connect with users on Instagram, and Inselly makes good use of them. Like other platforms on this list, Inselly lets you use the profile-link-to-storefront method of selling. It comes with the added bonus of the Inselly hashtag. Add the hashtag #inselly to your description, as well as any other relevant tags that might put you in front of your target audience. Not only does this hashtag make it easier for users to search for buyable content, but it also flags your content as being buyable if users stumble across it somewhere else. Sellers can process purchases through PayPal, and buyers can contact sellers through a message either on the app or the Inselly website. Buyers need to have Inselly installed and integrated with Instagram, but it's free for them to do so. It's also free for sellers to use, with no commissions or fees, although you can choose to purchase "coins" (the international currency Inselly utilizes) to promote your content. [Editor's note: Inselly recently updated. Buyers don't need to install or integrate the software with Instagram, and it's free for them to use.] #2: Sync Inventory Across Your Online Stores Shopseen is a multichannel listing interface that allows you to upload and list your products and have them automatically uploaded to a variety of ecommerce stores like Shopify, Etsy, eBay and Woo. Shopseen will then update your inventory, continually and automatically, across all of these sales channels. They also have a straightforward Instagram selling tool that's easy to use for both ecommerce businesses and customers. Shopseen will create a storefront using your profile link, similar to other services you'll see in this article. Once you've linked your Instagram to Shopseen, upload images of your products to Instagram, and add a price to the description. Shopsheen will then upload the product to your Shopseen page (which is off of Instagram). Ask followers to click to your store through your profile link and you can collect payment from a credit card. They don't have to set up their own Shopseen account, which is a strong benefit. This is particularly helpful for ecommerce businesses that feature their products on a wide variety of storefronts. Pricing is based on the amount of sales you make per month and the number of stores you have. You start with a free plan that allows you to have one store and Shopseen takes a 10% fee on Instagram sales. #3: Sell Through Comments Soldsie allows users to purchase directly from a seller's Instagram news feed without ever leaving the app. As an added bonus, this selling tool works for Facebook, too. Both buyers and sellers have to install and integrate the software with Instagram after registering with Soldsie, which uses "comment selling" as its method of making sales. Upload your products through your selling dashboard to turn the product images into shoppable Instagram posts. Then you include specific buying information and product details, such as "100% cotton, comes in blue and white" on each Instagram product post. Ask your buyers to make purchases by commenting "sold" directly on the post and including any necessary size/color/selection information. Once buyers comment with this information, Soldsie emails them an invoice so you can collect payment via PayPal or credit card. Soldsie has a variety of pricing plans based on the needs of your store, starting with a basic plan that costs $49 per month, with a 5.9% commission fee on all sales. #4: Connect To a Shoppable Storefront Have2Have.

The in-house vs outsource debate

The in-house vs outsource debate

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld show we ask whether the digital agency is on the decline as more organisations build their own in-house teams.

Video SEO: Factors for Ranking in the Top 10 on Google

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

What does it take to rank your video in the top 10 results on Google? And on YouTube? Well, these are two very different enterprises entirely. A recent study found that 64% of all YouTube videos appearing in Google search results had a different rank hierarchy when searched on YouTube. In other words, videos ranking […]

Are You Wasting The Time of Your Users to Save Yourself?

Are You Wasting The Time of Your Users to Save Yourself?

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

Whatever our role in a company, we are all under considerable pressure to do one thing: deliver. But we all face challenges that make those goals difficult. Problems that make us more and more desperate. That leads us to do whatever it takes to deliver, even if that compromises the user experience.

10 Simple Tips To Optimize Your WordPress Website For Better Search Engine Ranking

10 Simple Tips To Optimize Your WordPress Website For Better Search Engine Ranking


Graph Paper Press

10 SEO tips for WordPress includes writing quality content, exchange linkbacks, use keywords in image files and titles, create xml sitemaps, highlight keywords, avoid flash

5 Excellent Websites for Checking Google Keyword Rankings

5 Excellent Websites for Checking Google Keyword Rankings


ShoutMeLoud

One of the essential elements of SEO is picking the right keyword, making them rank & track the keyword position in search. It is absolutely necessary for a blogger or SEO professional to check their Google keyword ranking for target keywords. One of the most common mistakes bloggers and website administrators make is that they write and publish articles …

Warnings for Google My Business & AMP Users – Episode 269

Warnings for Google My Business & AMP Users – Episode 269

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

Hacking and phishing took an abnormally significant portion of this show. In addition, John & Ross discussed SEO budgets, determining SEO value, and a couple of great questions from the SEO 101 community. This October 27 SEO 101 podcast is available now: listen or Download (right click and save). Tune in to SEO 101 LIVE […]

The post Warnings for Google My Business & AMP Users – Episode 269 appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

HUGE SEO Ask-Me-Anything Live Stream Event Wed Aug 30!

by hothadmin @ The HOTH

COME HANG OUT WITH US LIVE TOMORROW! We’re having a HUGE live stream event tomorrow (Wed Aug 31st @ 1PM EST) on YouTube! We’ll be answering questions, doing live SEO training and much more. BUT…. We need your help with what you want training on! You can ask us ANYTHING: SEO strategy Agency building Local […]

The post HUGE SEO Ask-Me-Anything Live Stream Event Wed Aug 30! appeared first on The HOTH.

6 Tips to Get Your Business Started on Social Media

6 Tips to Get Your Business Started on Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create a business presence on social media? Looking for tips to get started? Setting up a good foundation on social media can help you build visibility and connections for your business. In this article you'll discover six tips to get your business started on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Create Profiles on Multiple Social Platforms Social media-friendly businesses don't simply create a Facebook page or Twitter account and leave it at that. They target multiple platforms, including LinkedIn, Instagram, Pinterest and perhaps even Tumblr, too. From the outside, it may seem unnecessary to have an account on each of these channels, but from an SEO perspective, it absolutely is. When potential clients do a Google search for your business name, you want them to see a full list of your social media profiles in addition to your website. Chances are they'll click through to read your reviews, see how many followers you have and maybe (hopefully) even ask a question. KnowEm is a quick, easy way to find out if your business name is available on specific social networks. Enter your business name in the search box, and the tool will search for your name across different platforms. There's also a special category for business networks. #2: Fill Out Your Profiles Completely It's important to fill out your social profiles completely. Incomplete or inactive social media business profiles give visitors little reason to like or follow your business. And inactivity is likely to have the same effect. You'd be surprised how many social profiles are incomplete or inactive for months on end. When filling out your social profiles, keep these questions in mind: What will people gain by following you? Remember that people are busy, so you need to give them a reason to follow you. Do your profile summaries and descriptions include the who, what, where and why of your business? Also, make sure that your contact information is clearly visible. #3: Allow Blog Comments Commenting systems such as Facebook Comments, Livefyre and Disqus make it easy for people to interact with your content through social media. Each system has its advantages. Livefyre is ideal if you want to encourage discussion. It's used by popular websites like Hootsuite, CNET and New York Magazine. Disqus gives you strong moderation features, requiring users to create an account prior to posting comments. It's a great choice for business bloggers. Facebook Comments is the best choice if you get most of your engagement through Facebook, and it allows for direct Facebook shares. #4: Add Share Buttons to Your Blog The easier you make it for visitors to share your content, the more likely it that they'll share your content. That's why it's important for blogs to have social media sharing buttons installed. Include share buttons on your blog posts, home page, landing pages and anywhere else that provides value to visitors. For articles or other high-value content, try placing share buttons at the top, bottom and side of the page. #5: Connect With Your Followers Don't forget that social media is all about being social. If you only post about your products and services in an attempt to generate sales, you'll likely hear crickets in return. Your message won't be heard on social media unless you're actively speaking with people. It's not necessary to reply to every comment of course, but at least try to stimulate engagement by responding to questions or providing further value when and where you can. This is called proactive engagement, and it should be an important part of your business's social media plan. Follow these key guidelines when interacting with customers through social media: Show some personality. Be lighthearted and humorous, but also serious when it really matters. People buy from people, so the more you show your brand's human side,

Top 5 Visual Internet Marketing Strategies

by Convergent1 @ Convergent1

Need help developing strategies for your visual internet marketing campaign? Contact Convergent1 today.

The post Top 5 Visual Internet Marketing Strategies appeared first on Convergent1.

4 tips for better copywriting

4 tips for better copywriting

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

5 tips on marketing automation – Is your marketing automated?

by Danna Crawford @ Danna Crawford

Creating a marketing automation system will make life easier for all types of business owners. Especially those that are wearing many different hats with running a business. As a business owner myself I am always looking for solutions to simplify my system of doing things. Marketing can be a huge time suck. And it can

The post 5 tips on marketing automation – Is your marketing automated? appeared first on Danna Crawford.

How to Use Google+ Collections for Business

How to Use Google+ Collections for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you share a lot of updates on Google+? Want to make it easier for followers to pick and choose their favorite topics? Google+ Collections allows you to categorize your updates by topic, which helps your followers quickly find updates for the topics they're interested in. In this article I'll show you 11 ways to use Google+ Collections to organize updates from your personal profile or business page. Listen to this article: #1: Share Specific Tips Does your Google+ page share a lot of valuable tips? If so, organize them into collections like the Google Webmasters page does. Collections give your Google+ followers a preview of the kind of advice they can expect to see from your page. #2: Document Campaigns If you participate in specific campaigns, like nonprofits do, you can use Google+ Collections to document those campaigns. 1 Billion Acts of Peace does this with collections about their launch and individual missions. These collections show your Google+ followers what campaigns your organization runs and how they can be a part of those campaigns. #3: Organize Ideas If you share lots of great ideas, Google+ Collections can help you organize them. Brit + Co encourages their followers to be more creative through their collections of ideas. These collections help followers find ideas that fit the things they enjoy doing, whether it's crafts, hosting parties or cooking. #4: Highlight Things to Do Google+ pages for places can use collections to highlight the best things to do in a specific geographic area. The site visitlondon.com highlights things to do, times when the city is in bloom and notable landmarks to visit. These collections allow followers to quickly find updates about the things they want to do when they travel to London. #5: Categorize Freebies If your business sells products by offering related freebies, you can use Google+ Collections to categorize those freebies. Red Heart Yarns does this by offering free crochet and knitting patterns on their Google+ page, all of which are likely to lead to followers purchasing their yarn. These collections direct the company's followers to the exact freebies they want, and ultimately to purchasing the products to complete these projects. #6: Separate Promotions From Tips There's nothing wrong with promoting your business while sharing valuable content. iAuthor uses collections to separate posts about their platform from their useful tips for specific audiences. These collections guide iAuthor's followers to more information about the business or to the tips that will help them most. #7: Classify Product Offerings Does your business offer different types of products and services? ServiceWhale classifies different offerings with their Google+ collections. These collections make it easier for followers to find the specific services they need. They also lead them to testimonials received from happy customers. #8: Inspire Customers at All Stages Your business has customers at all stages: potential customers, current customers and former customers. Capri Laguna uses their collections to organize content for customers at each of these three stages. These collections give Capri Laguna's followers inspirational content to entice them to come to the beach, find things to do while they're there and reminisce after they leave. #9: Showcase Amenities If your business offers many amenities to your customers, you'll likely want to showcase them. Hyatt does this through their collections. These collections help the Google+ followers find the hotels with specific amenities they want, such as pet-friendly locations or locations with the best food. #10: Sort the News Major publications typically have dozens of posts on a daily basis, which can become overwhelming for their audience. BuzzFeed uses their Google+ collections to sort their latest news by specific topics.

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to drive more traffic to your site with Pinterest? Are you looking for ways to improve your Pinterest exposure? To explore how Pinterest can help your business I interview Pinterest expert, Vincent Ng. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Vincent Ng, host of the Pictures to Profits podcast and author of Pinterest Marketing: How to Search Optimize Your Pins and Boards for Pinterest. He's a Pinterest expert and blogs at MCNG Marketing. Vincent shares how to use Pinterest to drive more traffic to your website. You'll discover reasons why you should use Pinterest in your social media marketing, tips on images and plugins that can boost traffic to your site and provide social proof for your company and what you need to know about Pinterest's smart feed and promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Traffic How Vincent got started with Pinterest While Vincent has successfully used Twitter and Facebook for his social media clients, he found neither site could drive much traffic to his blog. Curious about Pinterest's rapid early growth, he explored the site and discovered a fair amount of traffic going to his blog from it. That is when he decided it was the site he needed to be on. Vincent has been on Pinterest since its beta stage four years ago and has witnessed how much the platform has changed and evolved since the beginning. Listen to the show to discover the major changes and trends Vincent has witnessed on Pinterest. Reasons to consider Pinterest for your marketing People are naturally drawn to attractive, magazine-quality images. Information can be processed very quickly when it's seen as an image or picture. Pinterest makes it possible to leverage beautiful, shareable images to drive more traffic to your site. You'll hear Vincent describe how to lay out your images to get the most impact and reach from Pinterest. Pinterest is also a powerful way for users to discover things they might not have expected to find. It's become a visual search engine for products and can link items together based on how they've been previously pinned or searched. Vincent shares how many people bypass Google and go directly to Pinterest to search for products and lifestyle topics because the content is curated by actual users and the results tend to be high quality. Listen to the show to find out how Pinterest's visual recognition engine links related products to be searched and discovered. The biggest mistakes people make on Pinterest The biggest mistake businesses make on Pinterest is neglecting to redirect the source of a pin back to their site. The source is the URL where you want users to be directed when they click on your pin. You could potentially get hundreds of pins and repins on your image, but you lose the opportunity to grow your blog with Pinterest if you don't link directly to your site as the source of the pin. Listen to the show to learn how to edit your image to redirect where you would like your pins to point users. The Pinterest smart feed and what marketers need to know about it The Pinterest smart feed is a new algorithm based on the quality of the pin, the quality of the pin's source (blog or website) and relevance of pins. Each factor is measured based on the number of users who link to the specific pin or the source. High-quality images and the most popular sources are given preferential treatment on Pinterest's feed. It also boosts pins from people you follow and will suggest related pins based on what's pinned...

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to connect with local customers on Pinterest? Wondering how to drive foot traffic with Pinterest? Pinterest offers local businesses a way to cultivate relationships with prospects and customers who are primed to walk through your door. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to market a local business. Listen to this article: #1: Find Out What Likely Customers Are Interested In Before you do anything on Pinterest, spend some time on the platform studying the people you want to reach. You likely have an idea of who your target audience is. Are they the same people you're hoping to reach on Pinterest? Find out what your target audience is doing on Pinterest, who they follow, and what kinds of things they're pinning. Start by browsing the categories on Pinterest. Click to the right of the search box to open the drop-down category list. Click through the categories that are most relevant to your business and check out related topics. From here, you can start to see where your content and business might fit in on Pinterest. Try searching for related words in the Pinterest search bar. Pinterest's Guided Search will show you the most commonly searched words and phrases with your search term. You can also click through to the most popular pinners and pins and boards from that search term. This is a great place to find your target customers, and learn what kind of content your target customers value and how they share it. #2: Create Keyword-Friendly Boards and Profiles Now that you've identified popular topics and keywords for your target audience, you can begin building your profile. You've likely discovered some popular topics that are related to your industry. Use the interest topics you've identified for your boards. For example, if you're a hair salon, "Hair styles DIY," "Curly hair tips," and "Prom styles" might be good boards for your business. Your Pinterest profile is a perfect place to embed your keywords. This will help you get discovered on Pinterest and also on Google. Add keywords to your profile name, profile description, board titles, and board descriptions. #3: Fill Your Boards With Informative Content People come to Pinterest looking for things to learn and to buy. Now that you know what your audience finds interesting, consider what informative content you can share on your boards. This is the type of content that will get more repins and help you reach more people. Create some boards that are related to your local community. For example, if you're a restaurant, create a board to share events that are taking place in your area. If you're a vet, you could share educational content related to health and care for animals, popular pet products, and favorite places to take pets in the surrounding area. Informative content will help you extend your reach. In addition to curating that content from others, you should also create your own content. Think about what customers need to know in order to value the service you provide. What kind of customer education is needed in your industry? Create simple graphics to explain a point or a new regulation. Even for non-designers, it's easy to create informative and engaging infographics with online tools. You might also write an explainer article or create a video to show how something gets done. Share your content on Pinterest as a vertical pin. Pins perform best at 600 x 1200 (or more) pixels. Remember to write an information-rich caption to get more engagement. #4: Drive Foot Traffic and Click-throughs With Rich Pins Pinterest rich pins allow you to embed information from your website that is updated dynamically to encourage customer conversions. Here are some rich pins that might be helpful for your local business: Use article pins if you have a blog or create blog content. When you create article pins, the headline, author, and story description will automatically be pul...

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn? Have you considered a LinkedIn Premium account? While most people start with the free version of LinkedIn, there are a number of useful paid features that make a Premium account worth the investment. In this article, you'll discover four ways LinkedIn Premium can help you improve your marketing. Listen to this article: Why Use LinkedIn Premium? LinkedIn was developed specifically for growing your business and building relationships. Marketers and business owners spend money on their businesses each month; whether it's a CRM tool (like Salesforce or Nimble), a business consultant or virtual assistant, or a tech person or service to manage their website. LinkedIn is that same type of investment, yet with social aspects. Plus, in some cases, it's easier to see the results of your efforts on LinkedIn than with other resources. LinkedIn's Business Plus features are integrated and easy to use within your LinkedIn account. (Note: There is also Sales Navigator, which is a sales prospect management tool.) Here's how LinkedIn Premium can help your business. #1: See Everyone Who's Viewed Your Profile While a free LinkedIn account shows you only the last five people who viewed your profile, a Premium account shows everyone. If more than five people a day view your profile, it's worth investing in Premium. With a free account, if you decide to be anonymous, you lose the ability to see who's viewed your profile. With a Premium account, you can remain anonymous and still see who has viewed your profile. You also have more sorting tools with a Premium account. That way you can see if people from a specific company, industry, or with a specific title have viewed your profile. The people who view your profile are usually clients, prospects, colleagues, classmates, or competitors. An additional level of detail allows you to better engage with people and be more specific in your responses and messaging. Plus, you can see which competitors look at you and find out what they're doing. From Who's Viewed Your Profile, it's easy to send a message to your first-level connections or invite new people to connect. Click on their name, and invite them to connect from their profile. This does two things: It allows you to view their profile and customize the invite. If you just click Connect from Who's Viewed Your Profile, LinkedIn will send out a default invitation. Connection Requests Always customize your connection requests. Even though they're harder to see on desktop, they pop right up in the mobile app. Because more than 50% of LinkedIn members use the mobile app over the browser, it makes sense to customize your invites. When inviting someone to connect from this area, I recommend the following text: "I noticed you viewed my profile on LinkedIn. I'd love to answer any questions you have. Let's connect to make communicating easier." When sending the connection request, choose Friend as your option for how you know someone, since people can no longer see how you know them. The designations in Who's Viewed Your Profile (such as company name, where they live, and their titles and industries) will help you see whether your profile is attracting the right people. If the people who view your profile live in another country, are in an unrelated industry, and are nowhere near your target client, you're probably not connecting and engaging with the right people. This is a red flag to update your profile, engage more with the right people, and post more relevant content. Ranking To find your ranking on LinkedIn, click on the same link to see who viewed your profile. This will show you how you rank within your connections and your company. With Premium, you also see where you rank in comparison to other professionals like you. Your LinkedIn ranking only has to do with who viewed your profile; it has no bearing on who you are as a person or in you...

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you give presentations or speak to clients? Want to illustrate your knowledge with better stories? To discover how to improve your stories, and your storytelling, I interview Michael Port. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Port, the author of NYT best seller: Book Yourself Solid. He also teaches workshops called Heroic Public Speaking, where he applies the craft of acting to public speaking. His latest book is Steal the Show: From Speeches to Job Interviews to Deal-Closing Pitches. Michael will explore how to find, use and create stories in your marketing. You'll discover tips to improve the delivery of your stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Art of Story Michael's story Michael shares how he started his career as an actor. He has a master from the graduate acting program at New York University. Michael worked professionally on the shows Sex and the City, Third Watch, All My Children, Law & Order and 100 Center Street, as well as in the films The Pelican Brief, Down to Earth and The Believer. He earned a living doing commercial voice overs for companies including AT&T, Pizza Hut, Braun, Coors Beer, MTV and others. After he left acting, Michael says he decided to talk his way into a job for which he was completely unqualified. He pitched himself, got the job and worked his way up in the fitness industry on the business side. He credits his post-acting success to being an actor, as he was able to perform during life's high-stakes situations. When the spotlight and eyes are on you, the way you perform will determine the quality of your life, Michael says. After Michael left the fitness industry, he went into consulting for businesses and started writing books, and he saw it more and more. Over the last 13 years, Michael realized he had to meld his experience and training as an actor, his experience as a professional keynoter and what he knows about the business world. That's what Steal the Show is about, Michael says. Half the book is on the techniques associated with being a great public speaker and the other half is focused on performing during life's everyday situations. Listen to the show to learn more about how Michael coaches speakers, as well as why he originally resisted helping people with their public speaking. Why people love stories People love narrative, wonder and imagination, Michael says. Stories can get us out of our own head and into another world. We turn everything into a story, he continues. Politics, religion, love, our success or our failures become stories. Sometimes the stories we tell actually get in our way and sometimes they can change the world. Michael talks about a researcher named Jonathan Gottschall, who studies the neuroscience behind stories. Jonathan says the constant firing of our neurons in response to fictional stimuli strengthens and refines the neural pathways that lead to skillful navigation of life's problems. Listen to the show to discover in what way projects are stories. How to find your stories People sometimes draw a blank when they start to work on a presentation or prepare for an upcoming meeting, because so many things have happened over the years. Those experiences and stories are not top of mind, since you are more likely thinking about today and tomorrow. There are four different prompters for the discovery part of the process. Take a piece of paper and write out four columns, one for each of these categories. Then, when you go to craft a speech or presentation for a sales pitch,

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

How to Easily Create Your Own Video Show

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to position yourself as an industry expert? Have you considered using video to increase your visibility? Using video to give your own take on news and stories that are relevant to your industry can help you build influence with peers, prospects, and customers. In this article, you'll discover how to use video to deliver value to your followers on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Gather Relevant News and Stories With the proliferation of news aggregation tools, you can easily select, filter, and digest stories, videos, and content from around the world. To collect curated content, use a news reader like Feedly (available in desktop and app versions) and add the relevant industries, brands, and blogs you want to follow. For example, if you're in the tech industry, you can add Wired, Engadget, and TechCrunch to your feed list. Once you set up your feed and find a great article on your topic, simply save it, share it, or bookmark it for later use. Additionally, you can create knowledge boards in Feedly that allow you to compile (and later share) the information in a single location. Now it's time to sort the stories you've curated. Think about your target audience when you pick out interesting articles, blogs, videos, and stories, and choose five stories that will be most meaningful to your audience. For example, if you're a small business, curate a list of the best entrepreneurial stories of the month. #2: Record Your Thoughts on Each Story in a Single Video Now it's time to record your thoughts on video. At this point, you're curating the news-gathering phase for others and telling your audience why certain content is more important than other content. For this reason, it's important to have the rationale ready for why you made each decision. Be ready to explain to your audience why each story is relevant and different. Much has been written about staging and how to create great video content. But in this case, the type of video you're creating is highly personal, so staging isn't essential. The simple webcam position is enough, and helps make your audience feel they're in a chat with you. Keep in mind that poor lighting or sound will raise red flags for viewers, so leave some time for testing and retesting your look. The actual sound bites can be as short as 30 to 45 seconds, and should explain, retell, or give an opinion on the specific piece of content you're discussing. Be ready to share a quick overview of what happened or why the story is relevant. Then, give your take on the matter. Record five short snippets (one for each story) on your webcam or phone and then send them to your favorite editing software like YouTube. If you're a novice to video editing, check out these simple video editing techniques. In building the actual video, how well you incorporate music, graphics, and images in your video will affect the quality. Regardless, even five quick audio clips of you talking can get your audience's attention. #3: Share Your Video Multiple Times Once you've completed the video, the next step is to create a post to share each relevant headline on your social channels, and include your video. By following best practices on social sharing, you should be able to use a trending hashtag to find like-minded consumers. You can also head over to Google Trends. From there you can map, chart, and study search patterns both globally and regionally. Make notes of the stories that generate a lot of activity, as well as any hashtags associated with those stories. When you share content from a written article, give the journalist or blogger who wrote the piece a shout-out. For example, tag them in a Facebook post, mention them in a tweet, and tag them in a LinkedIn update. This can encourage that person to share your take on the piece. From there, you should tweet influential people who have voiced their opinion on one of the stor...

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your business using Instagram? Are you wondering how to build a loyal following? I interview Chalene Johnson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast and explore how she amassed a following of 365,000 on Instagram. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chalene Johnson. Chalene is author of the fitness book Push, a motivational speaker and her infomercials on fitness have sold millions of DVDs. She's found great success with Instagram and now teaches other small businesses how to do the same with her Instagram Impact course, and has a new podcast called Build Your Tribe. Chalene shares how she creatively used Instagram to grow her business. You'll discover how to take your Instagram marketing to the next level. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Success How and why Chalene started on social media Chalene says she started with YouTube in 2006 and Twitter in 2007 or 2008. In 2009, she got the idea for writing Push. When she told her agent she wanted to pitch a book about goal-setting and focus instead of a fitness book, he told her she didn't have the social media following or the credibility to write that type of book.  She got to work and spent a year using social media to build a platform with the intention of writing the book she wanted to pitch to publishers in New York. Listen to the show to hear how Chalene used social media when she first started. What Chalene built to support her book pitch Chalene shares that she had a ton of followers on YouTube and had just started a Facebook page when she decided to write Push. Even though she had millions of DVD customers, her agent had to remind her that publishers don't care who you know; publishers want to know if you have the ability to reach those people. To build her email list, Chalene created a 30-Day Challenge for her Facebook audience. She started with three quick videos to show how she uses her phone to organize her daily to-do list and included a simple email opt-in. Every day she delivered a 2-minute video to her email subscribers. The list grew to 100,000 in 9 months. Listen to the show to find out how Chalene collected emails from her subscribers. How Chalene got started with Instagram After successfully using Facebook to build her email list, Chalene says she was able to land the publishing deal she wanted and the book was released in December 2011. Then she noticed she wasn't getting any love on Facebook. She didn't want to learn about Facebook ads and shares that she kind of picked up her toys and stomped off the playground. That's when she began to realize her kids were all over Instagram but businesses weren't. In winter 2012, Chalene decided to become an early settler on Instagram. She started with life-casting, sharing personal images to show where she was and what she was doing during the day. Listen to the show to find out how following a favorite fashion icon drastically changed Chalene's Instagram strategy. How Instagram has changed Chalene's business Chalene shares that as a business owner and someone with a family, Instagram saves her time. She says instead of spending hours creating content, she can now spend literally 15 seconds and produce content to drive traffic to an opt-in for current or future offers. Unlike Facebook, Instagram allows her to put a call to action (CTA) in every post without affecting her engagement. Listen to the show to discover what Chalene track...

How to Do a Cartwheel

How to Do a Cartwheel

by @ How to of the Day

The cartwheel is a basic gymnastics skill that will strengthen your upper body and help you work your way up to more advanced moves. There are two basic types: the front-to-back and the side-to-side cartwheel. With the side-to-side cartwheel, you'll start and end in the same direction. Performing the front-to-back cartwheel will land you facing the opposite direction in which you began. The front-to-back is the most common type of cartwheel. To learn either type you’ll need to find a safe environment in which you can practice placing your hands and feet in a way that’ll propel you forward and upside down.

Is innovation more important thn accessibility

Is innovation more important thn accessibility

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

If its good enough for the CIA, it is good enough for you

If its good enough for the CIA, it is good enough for you

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

If the CIA can use humour on social media then so can your organisation, no matter how seriously they take themselves.

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Looking for tools that will save you time? Using the right tools to stay focused and work more efficiently will help you get more done in a day. In this article you'll discover nine productivity tools for busy marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Save Content Inspiration for Later Use Evernote to create a journal of content ideas and inspiration sources. With text, audio and image options, you can type, dictate or snap an image of whatever has caught your eye. Evernote syncs with all of your devices, so you'll have access to it wherever you are. Reach for it when you're feeling stuck for content ideas. #2: Block Distracting Websites Throughout the course of a day, we have distractions coming at us from a variety of directions. If you intend to spend just a few minutes on Pinterest, only to end up spending half a day looking at recipes, you need Cold Turkey. Use Cold Turkey to group distracting sites, such as social and news sites, and then block them off for certain time periods. Remember, if you're a social media manager who uses native websites to schedule your messages, this probably isn't the app for you. The app works great when you're putting off real work, like drafting your next blog post or newsletter or creating a report for your boss. Set it up for an hour or two and allow yourself some time to write distraction-free. #3: Create Canned Email Responses Do you get a lot of similar emails from customers, such as questions about your return policy or other support-related questions? Save yourself some time and effort with the Canned Responses add-on in Gmail. Rather than write a new response every time, you can save an email as a canned response and use it over and over again. What's great about this feature is that it's not a simple auto-responder that feels robotic and soulless. You can edit canned responses to personalize them for a particular recipient or tailor your answer to a question. To access it, go to your Gmail Inbox and click on the gear icon and select Settings. Then click on the Labs tab to find Canned Responses and select Enable. Now you can save or access your canned responses in the lower-right corner of the New Message window. #4: Secure Account Log In Credentials Do you keep a list of all of your passwords for emails, websites, social media platforms and third-party apps and tools? Is that document really safe? What if you're on the go and can't remember your password for a site? 1Password is the solution for protecting your passwords and giving you quick access to them. The app will store your passwords securely, and autofill them whenever you need them. It's available for Mac, Windows, iOS and Android and as a browser extension. #5: Automate Recurring Tasks Think about all of the repetitive and mechanical tasks you do in the course of a day. Then delegate those tasks to IFTTT and free up your time to focus on bigger things. You can choose from a huge list of social media recipes or create your own. Maybe you want to build a Twitter list for a specific hashtag or get an email notification when someone mentions your business in a tweet. #6: Find and Attribute Images Do you spend a lot of time looking for images online? Have you ever tried to hunt down one specific image? Whether you followed a dead end link or are looking for attribution information to credit an original source, TinEye can help. Use the TinEye browser extension to do a reverse image search and find the original source of any image. #7: Create Tasks From Emails We're all bombarded with emails asking us to do things and complete tasks. You're likely overwhelmed with the sheer volume of email you receive and the challenge of trying to stay on top of requests. If you're using Gmail, you can create to-do items right from your email messages. After you open a message,

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Have you thought about advertising on the platform? Instagram just began offering paid advertising opportunities through select developer partners. In the coming months the platform is expected to create a Facebook-like self-serve option for any budget. In this article you'll discover findings from studies about Instagram's current reach, and the potential to reach targeted audiences with ads. Evolution of Instagram Ads In December 2014, Instagram reported its user base hit 300 million, 64.2 million from the U.S. alone. More exciting to brands and marketers than strict user numbers, however, was the engagement rate. Instagram users like, comment and re-gram at a rate of between 3.1% (Socialbakers research) to 4.2% (Forrester research). Comparably, Twitter and Facebook posts have engagement rates of .07% and below. Listen to this article: With population and engagement numbers like these, of course brands wanted to get access to Instagram audiences. For three years now, Facebook has been working on the correct advertising mix for Instagram. Until June 2015, businesses could only reach Instagram audiences by posting content, commenting, sharing and liking consumer posts. Instagram's few brand partners could place sponsored posts, much like Facebook's boosted posts. Strict ads, however, were not available. In June 2015, Instagram rolled out the call-to-action buttons Shop Now, Learn More and Install Now, which take users to mini-apps within Instagram, rather than brand websites. That way, users stay on Instagram once they've shopped, learned and installed. Now Instagram has provided advertising opportunities for all brands… provided you enter via one of their developer partners. These partners include Ampush, Brand Networks, 4C, Kenshoo, Nanigans, Salesforce Marketing Cloud, SocialCode and Unified. They require a minimum spend, so if you're a small business, you won't be able to take advantage of Instagram's new advertising opportunities until later in the year. Facebook's advertising followed the same path: It offered advertising to certain brands and then eventually made ads user-friendly enough that a developer intermediary was not needed. If you don't have the budget to utilize developer intermediaries, now is a good time to familiarize yourself with Instagram so that when the ads roll out to everyone, including small businesses, creating and posting an ad will be a simple task. On its blog, Instagram explains: Instagram ads will be available to advertisers of all types later this year. We are currently testing self-serve buying interfaces and APIs with a small group of partners, and we expect to make them more widely available over the coming months. With the context understood, small- and medium-sized businesses must evaluate whether Instagram is the right place for them. The following research will help with these decisions. #1: Instagram's Access to Facebook Data Offers a Significant Opportunity Lighting a fire under many marketers, Instagram currently doesn't have the pay-to-play platform that Facebook instituted in spring 2013. Before that point, companies that had built Facebook audiences had the luxury of getting each post to nearly every earned follower. Facebook then dropped organic reach to 6% and lower, forcing companies to pay to boost posts for as little as $1 per day if they wanted to reach more of their earned audience. Conversely, on Instagram, for the foreseeable future, each post will reach close to 100% of its earned audience… free! Well, free except for the time costs and any costs involved with Instagram's partners or other outside consulting. When Instagram will go to the Facebook-style pay-to-play platform is unclear. Until that time, you'll save significant marketing dollars experimenting with which content wins the most attention, engagement and likes. This said,

Bug herding, brackets and dealing with multimedia

Bug herding, brackets and dealing with multimedia

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week's show. A tool for bug reporting, an amazing new code editor and a news feed app that gets better over time. We also look at a couple of services which will help with the multimedia on your site.

Mobilizing Your Website: What You Need to Know

Mobilizing Your Website: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your website or blog mobile-ready? Are you wondering how to optimize it for mobile users? To learn about the opportunities available in the mobile marketing world, I interview Greg Hickman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Greg Hickman, the founder of Mobile Mixed, a website that specializes in training marketers in mobile marketing. He also hosts The Mobile Mixed Podcast. Greg advises big brands on mobile marketing, including AT&T, Electronic Arts, Cabelas and Sony Pictures. Greg shares what businesses should do to make their mobile experience more user-friendly. You'll learn about the best tools available to build your own mobile site and how to discover the kind of devices people are using to visit your site. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobilizing Your Website Why it's important for businesses to think about the unique needs of mobile users Greg shares why you have to think where your customer or audience is coming from. The way we consume content today—whether it be email, social, using search or listening to podcasts—is mainly through a mobile device. The first entry point to you, your business or brand is more likely to be a mobile phone. You want the customers' experience to be very friendly and optimized to whatever device they are on. Around 53% of the US population has a smartphone. You'll discover why Greg believes email is overlooked when it comes to mobile. Listen to the show to find out why Greg believes mobile email is an opportunity for marketers. How to find out if mobile users are coming to your website Greg recommends that the first thing you should do is look at analysis software such as Google Analytics. It will show you how many people in your current audience are coming to your site from a mobile device. It will also break out the numbers by specific device. You'll probably discover that 20-50% of the overall visits to your site are coming from a mobile device. Secondly, depending on your email service provider, some will offer insights into how many of the email opens are coming from mobile. You'll find out why this is a good indicator if you're a big emailer. Greg shares how you can look to see from a social perspective if people engage with you from a mobile device on Twitter or Facebook. You'll hear how many people visited Social Media Examiner over the last 30 days via a mobile device. Listen to the show to find out why MillerCoors launched Android-specific solutions for their audience. Why we need to think differently about tablet users versus mobile phone users There's a lot of misconception about how people use their smartphones. Greg recently read a study where 68% of smartphone usage is from home. Mobile doesn't necessarily mean on the go. You have to look at your own customers and brand and see where they are interacting with you to help determine how much it's going to affect you. Greg believes with the tablet experience, you will start to see more usage in the evening hours. People use them as a second screen experience while sitting on the couch in front of the TV. Google Analytics helps you see the time of day people are hitting your site with their specific devices. You might then correlate that to the likelihood of people sitting on the couch. Listen to the show to find out how the older generation is adopting tablet devices. Where marketers should start when it comes to making a site ...

4 Ways to Get More Out of Your B2B Marketing Automation

by Keren Stanley @ Salesforce Pardot

Connecting with customers. Staying on top of leads. Running nurture campaigns. Yep, B2B marketers wear a lot of hats these days. So, it’s no wonder you’re always on the lookout for new tools or tips to help you automate, simplify, and streamline whatever you can. We hear you. At Salesforce Pardot, we love coming up...

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business rely on email? Are you wondering how Gmail tabs will impact your marketing? If email is a part of your business, you’ll want to pay close attention. In this article I’ll provide a simple 5-step plan that any marketer can use in response to Gmail tabs. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn what the new Gmail tabs mean for your business. You'll also pick up some tips on what you can do and I'll talk about my concerns for the future. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why should marketers pay attention? Chances are that email plays some role in your marketing. Maybe you email your subscribers when you have a new blog post or newsletter. Perhaps you have some sort of online form (for lead generation or just a simple contact form). Email indeed plays an important role for most businesses. Gmail is auto-filtering all emails for all users. This means your marketing newsletters and emails will get stuck in a slightly hidden folder, no matter what you do. In that very same folder, Gmail is posting unsolicited ads that look like emails. The bottom line with regards to these new Gmail tabs is that you will likely see a drop in your email marketing effectiveness unless you take action. In 2012, there were 425 million Gmail users. That's a huge number! Social Media Examiner has 75,000+ Gmail users. Yes, 34% of our readers subscribe through a Gmail account! There's a pretty good likelihood you have more Gmail users than you realize. What are Gmail tabs? Gmail is rolling out tabs that organize your mail. There are three default tabs: Primary, Social and Promotions (shown below). If you haven't already received this update on Gmail, it will likely come soon. Your emails are likely going into the Promotions tab. Tabs default "on" for all Gmail users unless your subscribers change this setting. If your subscribers don't know how to change it, this is how they will be finding your emails. At the time of this post, not all subscribers have tabs, but it is rolling out very quickly. What are the marketing implications? Gmail is becoming like Facebook. If you use it, you use it by their rules. I'm also concerned by the possibility that other email providers may follow Google's lead. This may be the beginning of the end of email as the one platform you can at least get delivery into. With social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn, you can never be sure that your messages get in front of your audience. Email has always been the one way that you could be certain of getting in front of your audience, assuming subscribers gave you permission to send them emails. Will this change with Gmail tabs? I think so. The updates in the Promotions tab reset each time you visit Gmail, meaning it is very easy for a Gmail user to never realize there is mail waiting in the Promotions tab. Other email providers may follow suit. There could come a time when marketers will have to pay to play. Your 5-step plan for dealing with Gmail tabs Here are tips you can move on right now to help educate your Gmail readers. These are all proactive steps we have taken at Social Media Examiner. 1. Make a video educating your Gmail users. First, educate your subscribers by making a video like the one below I made for our audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5Elz_1KQnmA In this video, you'll learn how your readers can make sure your emails show up in their Primary box.

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a content sharing strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering ways to leverage great content to promote your business and drive sales? To learn how to build a following by sharing other people's content, I interview Guy Kawasaki. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Guy Kawasaki, the author of the book Enchantment and the chief evangelist at Canva. His newest book is called The Art of Social Media: Power Tips for Power Users. Guy explores how to build your social media following by sharing other people's content. You'll discover how to create a consistent brand image for your company, develop a strategy for consistently sharing great content with your audience and leverage that content to promote your products or services. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Sharing How Guy got started in social media  Depending on how you define social media, Guy was there at the very beginning with CompuServe forums. He says he was late to blogging, starting four or five years after it really took off, but gradually adopted social media much quicker over the years. Guy joined Twitter six or seven months after it started, but was on Google+ six days after it launched. Today, Guy considers social media as God's gift, especially for entrepreneurs, because it's fast, free and ubiquitous. It's a great equalizer and makes it possible to potentially reach millions of people with just one tweet, image or post. Listen to the show to discover why Guy says we're in the renaissance of marketing.  Have a consistent image and mantra across all of your social networks In Guy's new book he talks a lot about the importance of having a consistent brand image across all of your social media channels. Guy advises against adopting a different persona for each social media platform. It's much too difficult to manage and will make people question who you really are. You'll hear Guy explore the importance of having a mantra for your business and provides some great examples. Your mantra explains who you are and why your product, service or business exists in two or three simple words. It should go in the Bio or About Me sections of all of your social media profiles. Listen to the show to learn how your mantra is radically different than your company mission statement or slogan. The importance of the Incognito Window  Guy explains that the Incognito Window is a feature found on all browsers, which allows you to browse your pages and your social profiles anonymously. This mode lets you see how a new visitor to your website will see it. Many marketers will be amazed to discover that what they see on their own company's website on a day-to-day basis is not the same thing as most people see when they visit for the first time. The Incognito Window mirrors a different online experience that you or someone inside your company may not even realize exists because you've gotten past the sign-ins, cookies and gates, whereas other people have not. Listen to the show to learn why the Incognito Window matters to your business.  Guy's content-sharing philosophy Guy says there are two key components to his entire strategy. He believes the most important test of all of social media is what he calls the "reshare test," which is: "Are you sharing something that other people will share with their friends and followers?" You'll hear how he relates tipping in a restaurant to a +1 or a like, or something like a thumbs-up. Whereas with a share,

Stand Out: How to Build a Following That Matters

Stand Out: How to Build a Following That Matters

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how to stand out in the noisy online world? Want to build your status as a thought leader? To discover new ways how to stand out, I interview Dorie Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dorie Clark, author of Reinventing You and an adjunct professor at Duke University. She's also a consultant and speaker. Her clients include Google and Microsoft. Her latest book is called Stand Out: How to Find Your Breakthrough Idea and Build a Following Around It. In this episode Dorie will explore how to stand out in the noisy online world. You'll discover why creating breakthrough ideas and becoming an expert are essential today. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Stand Out Dorie's backstory Dorie started her marketing and strategy consulting business nine years ago, following a pretty eclectic career. After studying theology in graduate school, Dorie was a political reporter, a spokesperson for first a gubernatorial and then a presidential campaign, and ran a non-profit. Through her journey, Dorie noticed increasing numbers of people reinventing themselves, so she wrote Reinventing You to capture best practices for the process. She then realized the next challenge (after you find the place to make your mark) is to become a recognized expert. She wanted to learn from the best, so Dorie interviewed 50 top thought leaders, including Seth Godin, Daniel Pink and David Allen, to try to figure out how they came up with their breakthrough ideas and built their following. Dorie wanted to demolish the myth that famous people are perceived as having always been famous. There are certain replicable actions that anyone can do with the right strategy. One common thread is that all of the people she profiled are known for their ideas. The idea comes first, and then these people roll up their sleeves and work in the trenches in their profession to spread their ideas. Mindset is a key factor in whether someone will be successful. Dorie refers to Carol Dweck from Stanford University, who talks about a growth mindset versus a fixed mindset. If you have a growth mindset and you're not getting the results you want, you believe if you change what you're doing, you'll get those results. If you have a fixed mindset and you're not getting the results you want, you think it must be because you're not smart or talented enough, and there's nothing you can do to change it. Sharing ideas puts you in a position of vulnerability, because it's possible people won't like them. However, it's fundamentally an act of generosity if you have ideas you believe can help the world. People need to step up and be willing to share their ideas, because those who are doing it now are no different than anyone else. They are just willing to do something differently. Listen to the show to learn more about what stops most people from becoming successful. Why create a breakthrough idea? A breakthrough idea is something new and valuable that you (and often only you) can contribute, Dorie explains. This is more important than ever, because the world we live in today is so competitive and globalized. There is always going to be someone willing to do the work for less money than you. Ten years ago, if you needed a website designed, you went to the Chamber of Commerce mixer to see who does websites, and you picked a designer. Now, you go on Elance or Odesk and find someone who will do it for half the price around the world. As a result,

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest account working for you? Want to take your Pinterest marketing to the next level? Tailoring your profile, boards and pins to appeal to your target audience will grow your followers and increase engagement. In this article you'll discover six ways to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Page The best way to convince visitors to follow you is to optimize your Pinterest page. Here are some key areas to focus on. Profile For the business name, use your company's name or your name (if it's for your personal brand). Upload a relevant profile image, such as your company logo or an image with your company's name. You want to make it easy for people to recognize your brand page. If it's a personal page, add a photo of you smiling or laughing. Match your username with your business name. If the username is already taken or is too long, choose something similar to it or use an abbreviation. Write a convincing bio. In 160 characters, describe your business and let people know about the types of images and content you share on your Pinterest page. Add your town or city and other location details. This will help you attract local followers. Add your website and social media details. Don't forget to add your website and Twitter account. This information will be displayed right below your profile image. Add your Facebook account only if it's a personal page. (You don't have the option to add a Facebook business page yet.) Boards Make sure that your page has at least 10 boards. Place your most important or popular boards in the top row. That way they're displayed above the fold, and people will see them immediately when they visit your brand page. Optimize your boards by adding good board names, descriptions and cover images. Shake Up Learning's Pinterest boards have relevant cover images that contain the name of the board and their logo. For your cover image, you can use an existing pin from the board or create a unique image, pin it and choose it as the board's cover image. In the image you can include the name of the board and a call to action asking people to check out the board or follow it. Another option is to use a technique similar to pricing tables, where one option (usually the most popular) has a unique color so it stands out. To apply this tactic to your boards, use similar cover images for all of your boards but choose a unique image for your most popular board (or the one you want to drive followers to). Also create a few secret boards so you can save images to pin publicly later on. #2: Design Content to Support Goals Before you can determine what to pin, think about your goals. They might be to drive engagement and build an audience or to drive traffic. Most businesses choose a primary goal (such as driving traffic) and a secondary goal that complements the primary goal (like gaining more followers). Once you choose your goals, you can determine what to pin by reviewing your Pinterest analytics. To access this data, click the gear icon and choose Analytics from the drop-down menu. Your analytics page has three sections: Your Pinterest Profile, Your Audience and Activity from [Your Website]. In the Your Pinterest Profile section, find out how your pins are performing. Your pins are categorized depending on the impressions, clicks, repins and likes they've received. Depending on your goal, choose the category you want to view. If you want to drive engagement, for example, look for pins that have been repinned and liked most. If you want to drive more traffic, take a look at clicks. Scroll down the page to see your most popular boards. You can also adjust the date to see how your pins have performed during longer or shorter time periods. Next, visit the Your Audience section to look at your followers' demographics and interests. Browse the Demographics tab to look at the coun...

Could you make better use of digital distribution?

Could you make better use of digital distribution?

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

Project Owl, and Google’s Attempt to Hit Fake News Where it Hurts

by submit @ Submit Express

Google’s got a big problem, and it’s the same one that’s plaguing Facebook. How do you deal with fake news, when the truth is evolving in real time? A new update from the search engine, codenamed “Project Owl”, aims to try and curb the fake news epidemic. It’s also making some interesting changes to search, […]

Twitter Chats: How to Create a Successful Tweet Chat

Twitter Chats: How to Create a Successful Tweet Chat

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you familiar with Twitter chats? Wondering how Twitter chats can help market your business? To learn more about Twitter chats and what they can mean for your business, I interview Pam Moore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Pam Moore, founder of Marketing Nutz, an agency specializing in social media marketing. One of Pam's areas of expertise includes Twitter. Pam shares why businesses should host Twitter chats and the marketing benefits of running them. You'll discover how to get started, where to find participants and ways to promote your Twitter chats. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Chats What Is a Twitter Chat?  A Twitter chat is a way to get people together at a predetermined time and talk about a subject. Their purpose is to organize conversation and connect people. Pam says that if you're new to social media, and to Twitter specifically, then Twitter chats are a great way for you to learn how to use it. Twitter chats not only allow you to form a deep connection with a community, but Pam has also seen people empower their lives and businesses faster than they thought possible. When you plan a tweet chat, you can make them formal or informal. You'll find out why Pam recommends that you have a combination of both. You can also do tweet chats in a series, which can help with your brand's positioning. With this type of tweet chat, you need to put together a strategy over several months. One of Pam's clients, IBM, recently held an event called IBM Connect in Orlando, where they hosted tweet chats with some of the influencers and speakers for the event. The aim of these tweet chats was to generate awareness and excitement for the event, plus drive registration. This particular chat had over 40 million impressions over the course of a few days, and included 2500 tweets. Nearly 600 people took part in the conversation. You'll find out what comes after the tweet chat that is just as important as the chat itself and why you are left with a social asset. Listen to the show to find out what IBM added to the front and back ends of their tweet chat for IBM Connect. Why host a tweet chat? One of the marketing benefits when you host your own tweet chat is that you can start to a build a community around it. You can capture the mindshare of that audience for a specific time on a regular basis. This gives you an opportunity to communicate and support your marketing objectives. Your core goal is to focus on the needs of your audience. When you provide great content, which can bring good people to the community, then they'll begin to depend on you and want more. Pam has seen so many people—clients included—grow their businesses and make connections and partnerships. It easily puts you in a leadership role. Listen to the show to discover how a tweet chat can easily go viral. How to prepare for a tweet chat Pam says that the process includes both art and science. As the chat leader, you need to provide some framework, but you don't want it to look like you have planned everything that you say. You have to balance structure with flexibility and agility. In a structured-style tweet chat, you have a list of questions. Pam usually creates a list of questions and has a specific topic to talk about. Pam is the leader of the GetRealChat, which is held weekly to educate and help the audience. As the leader,

Selling Louis Vuitton Merchandise on eBay

by Danna Crawford @ Danna Crawford

If you are thinking about selling Louis Vuitton merchandise on eBay there’s much to do. There’s a lot more to the process than you might first imagine. You’ve got to make sure you take all the right steps needed to be successful with your Louis Vuitton sales. There’s more to selling a brand name product than

The post Selling Louis Vuitton Merchandise on eBay appeared first on Danna Crawford.

6 Google+ Features to Promote Your Business

6 Google+ Features to Promote Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ for your business? Wondering which features to invest your time and effort in? While there have been recent changes to Google+, the platform has a number of features many marketers love and will continue to use. In this article you'll discover six Google+ features you can use to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Google+ Business Listings for Visibility Google My Business is by far the most important Google+ feature, especially if your business has a local presence. Not only can a Google+ business listing increase your visibility on local and mobile search, but it also allows potential customers to call you, get directions to your business on Google Maps and check out your verified business website. Your listing also makes your photos and YouTube videos easily findable on your business page and lets customers leave reviews for your business right on your Google+ page. It's up to you to fill in your business information with as much detail as possible. Check out this business listing for a restaurant in Pune, India. As a result of verifying their website, it now ranks #1 in the organic search results for the business name. The listing clearly shows all of the restaurant's information, including their location on Google Maps and customer reviews. As mobile search grows in importance, having a Google+ business listing will become even more vital from a local SEO point of view. If your business is a retail store, restaurant, café or hotel, your Google+ business listing will be a crucial part of your online presence in the years to come. #2: Use Circles to Segment Connections Google+ Circles are an effective way to create subsets of people you're connected to and share content and updates selectively with them. You can create circles based on friends, customers, business partners, affiliates or influencers you follow. This helps you segment your updates to particular audiences and their interests. Some people even use circles to send updates to large groups to avoid the restrictions that come with Gmail. #3: Create and Join Communities to Network Google+ Communities enable you to organize groups of people around a topic of conversation or a cause. According to Google+ evangelist Guy Kawasaki, "Communities have transformed Google+ into a more deeply connected environment, people's favorite communities have become a starting point for their Google+ activity each day. Whether you're representing a brand or are an individual with a passion, communities are a way to connect with like-minded people." You can use communities to recruit and connect with passionate advocates of your products or your cause. Or you could create a community around a passion or topic of interest, like a football club or a movie franchise. It's no surprise that the Star Wars community is one of the most popular, with more than 4 million followers. You can also join other people's communities to network with like-minded people. Peg Fitzpatrick's advice is that you don't just replicate your Facebook or LinkedIn community on Google+. Make your Google+ community unique so that it provides real value to its members. One way to do this is to organize hangouts on air exclusively for your community members. #4: Start Collections to Categorize Content Google+ Collections are a unique way to group your posts by topic. This feature allows you to categorize the content you share on Google+. Lately Google seems to have been adding features to make it easier to add posts to a collection, and they seem to be expending some effort on adding other bells and whistles. According to Google, "Posts in collections you follow will appear in your Home stream, with a link to easily jump right into the collection so you can get to similar content from that author." Ever since I started creating collections, I've noticed that Google+ users have been finding and following them...

How to Use Twitter Buy Buttons and Pinterest Buy Buttons

How to Use Twitter Buy Buttons and Pinterest Buy Buttons

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products on Twitter and Pinterest? Have you considered using Buy buttons? Adding Buy buttons to your tweets and pins lets people purchase your products right from their social feeds. In this article I'll share how to add Twitter Buy buttons and Pinterest Buy buttons to your products. Listen to this article: Twitter Buy Now Buttons Although it was announced a year ago, Twitter finally made the Buy Now button available on the platform to businesses in the United States. Retailers of all sizes can add a Buy button to their tweets. The price of the product or service is also displayed, and consumers can make purchases without leaving Twitter. "The goal [is to] make it as easy as possible for businesses to connect directly with, and sell to, customers on Twitter," says Nathan Hubbard, Twitter’s head of commerce. "With Buy Now, businesses can drive more conversion and remove much of the friction in the mobile purchasing process." Implement Twitter Buy Now Buttons Twitter has made it easy to get started with their Buy button. If you use Bigcommerce, Demandware or Shopify, follow the appropriate link to discover how to integrate the Buy button with your platform. Here, I'll share how to set up the Twitter Buy button on your products using Stripe Relay. First, create a Stripe account, if you don't already have one. Now, connect your business Twitter account to your Stripe account. You can do that in your Stripe Relay settings, as shown below. Just go to Apps, sign in with Twitter and click Enable. The next step is to set your shipping and tax policies. Shipping can be free or a flat rate. Tax can be included or a percentage. Go to Relay Settings to put in your preferences. These costs will be automatically factored into purchases. Once all of the basics are complete, you're ready to create products. Go to your products page and simply click "Create your first product." Next, fill in all relevant information. Now that your product is set up, you'll see a tweetable URL for that product on your Stripe dashboard. Use that URL in a tweet and the "Buy Now" button is automatically added to your tweet. Twitter users will then be able to purchase your product right from the platform. Whenever an order is created, you will receive an email through your Stripe account that you can view in your Stripe dashboard. Twitter's Buy button is still in the beginning stages of use, so we can expect to see numerous changes in the near future. However, with major brands such as Best Buy, PacSun and Adidas all signing on, it's clear the impact on the social commerce space is just starting. Pinterest Buy It Buttons Over the summer, Pinterest introduced a blue Buy It button for pins. Since 93% of pinners have the intent to purchase, this is the ideal platform for a brand that wants to expand their online business. These buyable pins fit right into the news feed, and allow browsers to purchase from pins without leaving the platform. Buyable pins are currently only available on Apple devices in the United States with payments processed through Apple Pay or any major credit card. The good news for businesses wanting to try buyable pins is that Pinterest is not taking a portion of sales. Pinterest's hope is that they can monetize from an increase in promoted pins. Big brands such as Macy's, Nordstrom and Michael's have already jumped on board. Homemade goods shop Madesmith says that 7% of their sales are coming from buyable pins. "Pinterest has been the most effective discovery platform for Madesmith since we launched in 2013," explains co-founder Nadia Rasul. Implement Pinterest Buy It Buttons As of now, companies need to use Demandware, Bigcommerce, Magento, IBM Commerce or Shopify to implement the Pinterest Buy It button. Your ecommerce platform will walk you through the specific process of adding buyable pins through their site.

SUBMIT EXPRESS CEO PIERRE ZAROKIAN DISCUSSES CONTROVERSIAL YELP CASE

by Gevorg @ Submit Express

Imagine that your business is receiving phone calls from Yelp, unsolicited, trying to sell advertising space. How many times do you have to say “no thank you” until you finally reach the end of your patience? One business wants “no” to mean “no” in every aspect. In a recent interview with Search Engine Journal, Pierre […]

Veteran Search Marketing Expert Pierre Zarokian to Speak at Pubcon

by submit @ Submit Express

The world of reputation management is one that isn’t well-defined, and Yelp is one of the primary platforms that businesses are concerned with. Bad Yelp reviews, according to Harvard, have real impact on how consumers perceive a business. Pierre Zarokian, a veteran in the realm of search marketing and the CEO of Submit Express and […]

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast on Periscope? Want to use it to connect with and grow your audience? To discover how to use Periscope for your business, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, author of Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Her agency Boom! Social helps businesses understand the selling side of social media. Kim is also VERY active on Periscope. Kim will explore Periscope, the live video platform from Twitter, and how your business can benefit from it. You'll discover tools for analytics and saving your scopes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video Kim's journey to live video Kim says that as everyone was coming off of South by Southwest last year, all the talk was about Meerkat. The conversation suddenly changed while Kim was at Social Media Marketing World last March when Periscope was launched. She remembers thinking that since Periscope was from Twitter, she should check it out. So, while in a pedicab heading over to that night's Social Media Marketing World networking event, she did a quick scope with Donna Moritz. Kim's second Periscope came about a month later, when she was covering an event. One of the keynotes was Ashton Kutcher and she decided to open up her phone, broadcast the keynote, and see what happened. Although Kim had very little Periscope experience and a nearly nonexistent audience on the platform, a few people tuned in and left comments. Her third Periscope was the most eye-opening because that's when Kim realized she could use the platform for business. She had Syed Balkhi on a webinar and decided to live broadcast it to her Periscope audience by putting her phone on her computer screen and holding a mic up to the sound source. Kim shares that with no prep, she simply opened up her phone, typed in the webinar title, and invited people to tune in. More than 200 people watched the broadcast. Kim soon realized Periscope could be an amazing medium – not just to deliver content, but also to connect with people. Listen to the show to hear why Kim believes live-streaming is the beginning of Web 3.0. Periscope strategy Kim shares that one strategy she's capitalized on is leveraging Periscope to create multiple pieces of content. She comes up with one or two blog topics for the week, writes down bullet points and research she wants to reference, and then gets on Periscope and speaks her blog content. For example, if the topic is 10 Ways to Do X, she'll jot down the 10 ways and talk through them during the scope. When she's through, Kim sends the recording out for transcription. When the transcription comes back to her, she has a blog post. Kim then takes that same scope material and turns it into 50+ additional pieces of content. When asked to elaborate on how she does that, Kim explains that when people talk, certain nuggets of information they share are what she refers to as "tweetable moments." She pulls those nuggets out of her scopes and turns them into visual content, straight-up text tweets or Facebook page posts, or even a SlideShare. Kim stresses that there are tons of ways to create multiple pieces content from talking it through on Periscope. Kim shares the benefits of speaking her blog posts and how she uses the feedback people give her inside her scopes to see if she missed anything she needs to cover in the written post. Kim tries to keep her Periscopes short, sweet, and actionable,

Customer Advocacy: How to Get People to Talk About Your Company

Customer Advocacy: How to Get People to Talk About Your Company

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are your customers advocates for your brand or business? Want to improve customer satisfaction and advocacy? To find out how to turn customers into advocates, I interview Joey Coleman. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Joey Coleman joins us today. He's a customer advocacy consultant and coach who has worked with Hyatt Hotels, NASA, and Zappos. Joey's also a frequent keynote speaker and leads workshops on the customer experience and the customer journey. Joey explores what it takes to turn a customer into an advocate. You'll discover the phases that lead to advocacy. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Customer Advocacy Joey's Story Joey has had an eclectic career. After college and law school, he did business consulting before working as a criminal defense attorney in the courtroom for many years. Then he taught executive education courses and ran a division of a promotional products company. About 15 years ago, Joey started his own brand experience and design firm. This led him to speak on stages all over the world, talking about how to create remarkable experiences that take someone from being a one-time customer to a customer for life. In each of his careers, Joey says, success hinged on two things. First, an understanding of human psychology (why people believe what they believe and why they do the things they do). And second, an ability to use that understanding to persuade people to take a certain course of action, whether it's a sales pitch, brochure, website, infographic, piece of evidence introduced in the courtroom, or a closing argument. Looking back, his entire career has been all about the experience; meaning the experience someone is currently having and how to make it better. While marketing firms build ad campaigns, branding agencies design logos, and graphic design firms execute the visuals, Joey looks at brand experience and how all of the different elements of a business work together. Experience is the through-line that connects everything. Listen to the show to discover how the name of Joey's business, Design Symphony, represents brand experience. Why Customer Advocacy Matters Joey thinks customer advocacy is really the end goal for most organizations. It happens when you reach the point where your customers are such big believers in who you are and what you do that they become your external sales force. Customers drive new business and increase the amount of business they do with you because they've become such raving fans, they can't help themselves. They advocate zealously for you and your business. Joey shares a brief overview of the history of business. In the 1980s, he explains, a movement came out of Japan that became known as the Total Quality Management approach to business. It was all about reducing product defects to as close to zero as possible. Out of this came things like Six Sigma Black Belt, as well as a general belief that when you buy something, it's going to work. The 1990s were all about Just-in-Time manufacturing. For example, companies like Dell shortened the supply chain through building things on demand. As a result, the computer giant could dramatically control inventory, while at the same time push prices lower. Companies started to succeed based on being the lowest-priced player in the game, while at this higher level of quality. In the 2000s, it became all about the Internet era. Businesses built websites and could make everything available globally 24/7. Then in the 2010s, everything that happened over the past three decades came together.

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

How to Optimize Facebook Custom Tabs for More Conversions

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost conversions from your Facebook app? Have you thought about promoting it with Facebook ads? Supporting your Facebook custom tab with complementary Facebook ads will drive more views and deliver more conversions. In this article you'll discover how to combine Facebook custom tabs with Facebook ads to boost conversions. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on the Benefits You may have heard this saying before: Benefits sell, features don't. Focusing on the benefits for your target audience can make a big impact on conversions from your ads. Whether your Facebook custom tab app is a promotion, contest or newsletter sign-up form, your goal should be to get the people who come to the page to take the action you want them to. How do you do this? You focus your messaging on how filling out the form will benefit your customer. To figure out your most important benefits to promote, create a features and benefits chart and spend some time brainstorming. Start by filling in the features column of your chart. Next, think critically about each feature you've listed and the value that it provides to the audience you're targeting with your ads. Once you've filled in both sides of your features and benefits chart, pick the top two to three benefits. Promote these two or three benefits with your ads and emphasize them in your app copy. The bottom line is, to make a greater impact with your app's copy and drive up conversion rates, focus your copy on the solution that your product or service provides. In other words, focus on the incentive your brand is offering. If you keep your copy about your visitors' wants and needs, you'll see more success with your ads. #2: Define Your Goal After you've identified the key benefits you want to promote, the next step is to determine the most important goal of your Facebook ads and design a custom tab app to reflect it. Here are some goals you might have: Capture the email addresses of users who are interested in your product or service. Drive downloads of a lead-generating resource. Get people to take advantage of a special offer by downloading a coupon. Get sign-ups for an online marketing event you're hosting, like a webinar. Drive engagement (for example, voting and/or an image submission on a photo contest) on a marketing campaign you've built. Your Facebook ads should always direct people to an app that has a clear focus, rather than to your website. Why? Your website is full of distractions. The fewer distractions your ads' destination has, the more likely you'll accomplish your Facebook advertising goals. To optimize conversions from your ads, design your Facebook custom tab app without any of these design elements: a navigation bar; social icons; unnecessary links, tabs and buttons; and drop-down menus. Remove any information or clickable link or button that doesn't support the goal of your landing page. #3: Take Design Cues From Top-Performing Ads Split testing different versions of a Facebook custom tab app is tough for two reasons. First, if you don't have a large Facebook advertising budget, you may not get enough traffic to your app to make any valid assumptions. Second, there are too many variables. You could end up going in circles testing a million little things, everything from the color of your call-to-action button to the copy of your secondary headline. Instead of split testing your app, it's better to split test the three main components of your Facebook ads: the headline, body copy and image. Discover your best-performing Facebook ad, and then update your landing page's design to incorporate that ad's headline, copy and image. After a few days of running your Facebook ads, you'll be able to determine which ad is performing best. Based on what you discover, update your app's headline and primary image to match your highest-performing ad.

How to Promote Your eBook With Social Media

How to Promote Your eBook With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an ebook that needs exposure? Want tips to promote your ebooks via social media? Social media can help you build visibility and generate leads with ebooks. In this article you'll discover six ways to promote your ebook on social media. Listen to this article: Why eBooks? The purpose of an ebook is to capture leads. Turn highly valuable content that can't be found in a simple online search into an ebook, and your prospects are likely to give you their contact details in return for access to the ebook. While half of content marketing with ebooks is the creation stage, the other half is promoting your ebook to increase ROI. Here's how to promote your ebook on social media to generate valuable leads. #1: Create Social Teasers Understandably you'll want to promote your ebook across your social platforms. Tease your audience with snippets from the ebook, and you're much more likely to create buzz around the content you're promoting. Post an engaging image from the ebook, an interesting stat or a stand-out quote to attract your audience's attention so they want to click to your content. Publi.sh posted an attention-grabbing stat to generate interest in their ebook. Also, use a popular hashtag that is relevant to your ebook content in your posts. Explore hashtagify.me to discover suitable hashtags. #2: Pin a Tweet The Pin feature on Twitter is a little-known, yet effective, tactic that gives you the ability to pin a tweet to the top of your feed. Thus the pinned tweet will always be the first one a visitor sees. Find or create a tweet you want to pin that highlights your ebook. Then right-click on the Further Options icon and select to Pin to Your Profile Page. HubSpot pins tweets to promote their ebook content. Pinned tweets are free and perfect for promoting content like an ebook. #3: Design Social Banners Since social banners and covers instantly grab attention when someone visits your social pages, they can be especially helpful for promoting your ebook. For example, create a cover photo for Facebook and Twitter that promotes your ebook. Although there's no way to enable a clickable link back to the ebook content, it's still worth including the URL so your audience knows where to find it. The dimensions for a Facebook cover are 851 x 315 pixels. Twitter covers are 1500 x 421 pixels. #4: Leverage Influencers Social media influencers can really help accelerate your promotional strategy. Explore platforms such as BuzzSumo to find influencers within your industry. Then connect with them to see if they'll share your content. Influencers are always looking for valuable information to share with their audience. For example, Darren Rowse shared a link to an ebook in this tweet. If you're struggling to find influencers to share content from your site, ask if they're open to you writing a guest post for them on their site. Create a post that's topically related to your ebook, and link to it in your article. #5: Post in Communities Google+ and LinkedIn are both home to a variety of different communities where marketers discuss the latest trends within their niche. After you join a community, take some time to get to know other members before you start promoting your ebook. Take part in discussions, and like and comment on their posts to build long-lasting relationships. Take a look at the Groups Directory on LinkedIn to find relevant groups for your industry. Or, if you'd prefer, create your own group and talk about the content of your ebook to an interested audience. Also, on Google+ you'll find hundreds of communities to join. The Google+ platform makes it incredibly easy to promote content with the option to include links, images and videos within your post. #6: Pay to Promote Posts To guarantee your ebook will get in front of an audience that actually cares about your content, consider paying for a sponsored post. For example,

112. Jina

112. Jina

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On show 112: How to be more efficient using HTML snippets, Jina Bolton on women in web design and moving to a mac.

How to Grow Your Instagram Community Using 5 Simple Tactics

by seostaff @ Provaro Marketing

While many social media platforms have made it more difficult to organically reach followers, Instagram remains a platform where such interactions are simple. In fact, brands maintain regular engagement with around 4% of their followers on Instagram (which may not seem like much but is massive compared to the less than .1% of the followers […]

The post How to Grow Your Instagram Community Using 5 Simple Tactics appeared first on Provaro Marketing.

Medium: Why Bloggers Should Consider Publishing on Medium

Medium: Why Bloggers Should Consider Publishing on Medium

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to position yourself as an authority on a specific subject? Have you considered publishing your blog posts on Medium? To explore how Medium can benefit bloggers and marketers, I interview Dakota Shane. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dakota Shane, a social media columnist for Inc.com. He co-founded Arctiphi, a social media agency for breweries and restaurants. He's also a top writer in the social media category on Medium. Dakota shares how to maximize your content's reach using Medium. You'll discover tools and tactics for building your email list with Medium articles. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Medium Dakota's Story Right after Dakota graduated from college in 2015, he and his brother launched their agency. Dakota was learning all he could about marketing, social media marketing, and content marketing from podcasts, books, and client experience. Dakota comes from a family of creative people and grew up writing stories. In his career, this writing bug stayed with him and he wanted to write about what he was learning as a marketer. At the time, his two choices for housing content were the blogosphere and LinkedIn. Although the blogosphere was the gold standard, Dakota felt that the landscape was saturated and it would take too much time and effort to gain a following while also working a full-time job and running a business. The articles Dakota wrote on LinkedIn flopped, and the platform also seemed a little too formal for his voice. When Dakota found out about Medium, he was excited because it looked like a place where he could talk and write the way he wanted. Based on everything he'd learned since college, Dakota wrote an article titled 200+ Podcasts, 100+ Articles, and 20+ Books in 11 Bullet Points. Then he dug up the personal Twitter handle of the editor of his favorite Medium publication (The Mission) and sent him the link. The editor replied, saying the article looked great and would be published in the morning. The next day, Dakota woke up to a slew of notifications: hundreds of people shared and thousands of people had already read the article. He saw the power of Medium as a platform and realized his life and business were about to change for the better. Dakota has been seriously writing on Medium for the last year and a half, and his consistency on the platform has led to opportunities with niche social media blogs. To get those opportunities, he gathered links to his highest-performing works on Medium, wrote a pitch on why he would be a good fit for their publication, saved it as a draft, and kept sending it out. After landing spots on bigger social media blogs, Dakota used those credits as leverage to get his first speaking gigs and podcast interviews. On his third try pitching to Inc.com, he landed a column and has been writing for them for the past few months. Listen to the show to discover who shared Dakota's first Medium post. Why Write on Medium? There are four reasons to write on Medium. First, Medium provides a ready-made audience that most writers, creators, or marketers don't have and that would take years to build. Second, and most importantly, Medium presents an opportunity right now because it's at that sweet spot between an emerging platform (which could be a risk) and an established platform (which could be saturated). Since it's in this position, Medium can open doors for a creator, writer, or marketer to brand themselves as an authority on a specific subject. Although Medium has kept recent metrics to themselves, as of late 2016 there were 60 million monthly use...

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

4 Ways to Improve Engagement With Hashtags

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you include hashtags in your social media posts? Want more traction from your hashtag campaigns? Adding hashtags to your campaigns can drive engagement with fans and followers, as well as attract new and prospective customers. In this article I'll share four ways to improve reach and engagement with hashtags. Why Hashtags Matter Since social media is social, it's important to participate in conversations on a variety of topics. Listen to this article: However, the virtual world does not give us body language cues, and it may be difficult to keep track of everything that's going on. This is especially important when it comes to interacting with hundreds or even thousands of people on social media. Instead of pleasant and engaging conversation, all you hear is noise. Hashtags help cut through all the noise. They connect your business with your audience and put it at the heart of conversations on social networks like Twitter, Instagram, Google+ and Facebook. #1: Align Hashtags With Your Brand Use a hashtag that aligns with your brand to reinforce the message your social, digital and traditional marketing send to your customers. Kit-Kat, the company behind the popular chocolate snack, does this particularly well. They use the hashtag #mybreak, which is in concert with their wider branding message, "Have a break, have a Kit-Kat." Kit-Kat's social media team reinforces the use of #mybreak. They favorite and retweet the social media posts of customers who use the hashtag. This engagement not only helps develop the relationship between Kit-Kat and their customers, but also more broadly extends the reach of the hashtag and Kit-Kat's branding. #2: Choose Hashtags Carefully In social media and in life, there's always the chance things won't work out exactly as planned. Your hashtag could possibly be hijacked, either by another brand or by activists with an axe to grind. Kit-Kat's #mybreak hashtag is unlikely to get hijacked. It's on-brand, and there's not a lot of online activism aimed at chocolate-wrapped wafers. When airline Qantas launched the hashtag #QantasLuxury, they hoped their business and first-class flyers would post about their dream luxury experience. Instead, the hashtag was hijacked by the far larger group of disgruntled Qantas passengers who fly economy class. Give each hashtag strong consideration before deploying it in a tweet or a post. Reflect with your team and colleagues, and ask advice from friends active on social networks about potential hashtags. While you can consider best-case scenarios (like Qantas envisioned), also be sure to consider potential worst-case situations. Choose a hashtag with the least risk of hijacking, so you can avoid a potential social media crisis. #3: Take Your Hashtag Offline Don't limit your business hashtags to only social media. It's important to use them as part of a wider branding strategy that includes offline and traditional media. For Coca-Cola’s 2015 Super Bowl campaign, the company launched the related hashtag #MakeItHappy. The hashtag populated the company's social media feeds on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram and YouTube. Plus, it appeared in television and print advertising, as well as in earned media online. Increase traction for your hashtag by using it away from your social networks. Small businesses can make it easy for their customers to share positive reviews and social comments about their experiences by encouraging the use of a hashtag. If you have a brick-and-mortar location, make sure your hashtag is displayed prominently near the point of sale, on your promotional flyers, print ads and every receipt. Online businesses should create clickable hashtags, encourage visitors to 'click to tweet' text including the hashtag and prominently display the hashtag on the company home page. Whether it's a physical or a digital business, the advice is the same.

How to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Customer Reviews

How to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Customer Reviews

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook advertising? Have you considered incorporating customer reviews into your ads? Facebook ads that include customer reviews blend in with other news feed stories and are better received by people browsing Facebook. In this article I'll share how to improve your Facebook ads with customer reviews. Listen to this article: #1: Choose the Right Review In social advertising it's vital to target the right people with the right message at the right time. If you want to use positive online reviews from your customers in Facebook ads, the first step is to find the right ones. It's preferable to share a review where the customer tells a personal story. For example, personal reviews such as, "I bought this game for my daughter's birthday and she absolutely loves it," have a greater impact than generic ones like, "It's a great toy." The ecommerce store Pawstruck used customer reviews with great images and positive text in their Facebook ads. When choosing reviews or any other type of user-generated content (UGC) for Facebook ads, also consider which stage in the buying cycle your customers are in. First-time visitors will need to see a different type of ad than people who are familiar with your store. Ads that show top-selling products favorited by customers are great for attracting first-time customers, because they're lured in with a specific item. This approach gets them interested in your brand, even if they're not yet ready to buy. After they've seen an ad, retarget them with authentic user reviews that deal more with your brand or site as a whole. Site reviews emphasize the authenticity and strength of your brand, not a specific product, so the reviews will reinforce that. The bottom line is use product reviews to target first-time visitors and site reviews for people who already know your store. #2: Craft Compelling Copy Content from users is the most powerful part of the Facebook ad for building trust, instilling social proof and encouraging new visitors to come to your store, but you should also pay attention to the ad copy. Keep your brand voice consistent; don't alter it to match a user's review. Also, you don't want to refer to UGC directly. For instance, when your copy says, "Check out this awesome review from our customer" or "Look at this great photo from one of our fans," your copy seem salesy and forced. The keys are to keep your text short and don't refer to the review in your copy. For a great example of how the ad should look, Perfect Locks does a fantastic job of combining short, snappy, on-brand copy with a personal experience review. The result is a super-effective ad. Don't Overdo It Reviews are wonderful because they offer authentic, credible opinions from real people. However, using reviews that are too enthusiastic or overly positive can actually have the opposite effect. It takes away from the content's credibility. You'll want to use reviews with just one exclamation point rather than those with multiple exclamation points. For example, Life BEAM combines copy that reads authentically with personal experiences. Remember, UGC and reviews that refer to personal experiences have great impact. For the best results, find stories and reviews that use words like "I," "my" or "we." #3: Set Up Your Ad Once you pick the right review or other user-generated content and polish your copy, get your ad ready to launch. When setting up your ad, here are a few ways to get better results: Make sure your ads target the right audience. When setting up Facebook ad targeting, be specific rather than general. Target direct niche competitors, not big brands. Plus, avoid targeting Facebook's default interests. You want your UGC to closely relate to the exact audience you're targeting, not a general interest group, which is much too broad. Don't create more than two ads to target the same audience.

[Updated] New Invisible ReCAPTCHA Support in the Feedback Form Wizard

by @ thesitewizard.com

[Updated] The Free Feedback Form Wizard now supports the Invisible ReCAPTCHA test. With this facility, you can generate a contact form for your website with a test that only shows if Google cannot figure out if the sender of the message is a human or a spam computer program.

(Note that you can still generate a form without any CAPTCHA test, or one with the visible "I am not a robot" test. It's up to you. It's just a new option for those who want it. And they are all free.)

Find out more from my guide on adding a CAPTCHA test to your form.

Unveiling Our New Video Strategies at the AAJ Convention in Boston!

by Attorneys Online, Inc. @ Attorneys Online, Inc.

CEO Cheney Winslow will be attending the  Annual AAJ Convention this weekend in Boston. At the conference, Cheney is taking meetings with current and prospective clients regarding marketing and how to reach a broader audience. She is looking forward to unveiling our newest video production strategies, and she will be showing off this exciting and exclusive development at the AAJ convention! We are also happy to see some of our new and old clients while we are at the convention, including congratulating outgoing AAJ President Julie Braman Kane of Colson Hicks Eidson for a job well done! Cheney is also looking forward to seeing: Pat Regan, Sal Zambri, Jackie Colclough and Paul Cornoni of Regan Zambri Long Rusty Galloway and John Jefcoat of Galloway Jefcoat Tom Metier of the Metier Law Firm Mike Eidson of Colson Hicks Eidson Verne Paradie of Paradie, Sherman, Walker & Worden Bill Lightfoot of Koonz...
Read More »

The post Unveiling Our New Video Strategies at the AAJ Convention in Boston! appeared first on Attorneys Online, Inc..

A podcast present

A podcast present

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

As it is Christmas we thought it was a good time to announce the return of the Boagworld podcast. In this special episode we introduce the new format being used when the show returns in January.

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more engagement on your social channels? Have you considered using visual content? There are easy-to-use tools and tactics you can use to create visual content that attracts viewers and engages them. In this article you’ll discover how to use visual content to boost engagement. Listen to this article: #1: Create Animated GIFs From YouTube Video Millennials (people reaching young adulthood around the year 2000) are known as Generation GIF. If you check out publications like BuzzFeed, Gawker and Deadspin or browse the front pages of Reddit and Tumblr, you'll see animated GIFs are everywhere. Animated GIFs expand your marketing channels and increase the chances of your content going viral on Tumblr and Reddit. And from there, content is often picked up by major publications and blogs. There are tools that make it easy to create animated GIFs. Here are a couple you might want to try: MakeaGif is a free online tool that lets you create animated GIFs using photos, YouTube videos, uploaded videos and web camera videos. You can also use it to modify an existing GIF. GIFYT allows you to create high-quality GIFs from YouTube videos. With this free tool, you can select what portion of the video to turn into the GIF and add a caption. You can check out some of the GIFs created with GIFYT here. #2: Install On-Hover Sharing Buttons Sometimes readers are inclined to share an image, but they either don't know how or simply forget to do so. A mild mouseover call to action that encourages a share will prompt more visual shares from viewers. Use a plugin like WWM Social Share On Image Hover as an easy way to enable mouseover sharing (Here's how to securely install Wordpress plugins!) With this tool, you can automatically place buttons on all of your images so your viewers can share them in an instant. It's a surprisingly effective way to increase engagement. Here’s a page where you can see mouseover share buttons in action, and here are more plugins that add image-sharing options on mouseover. #3: Play on Emotion Connecting with your audience on an emotional level leaves a long-lasting impact. When something sparks an emotional response, the viewer is more likely to share, comment on and remember it. Visuals are great for this purpose. Humans respond to what they see, more so than any other form of stimulation. If you're connecting emotionally with users, they'll start to associate those feelings with your brand. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2K5trQS3JeA According to Fractl research, the two most engaging emotions (in terms of provoking shares) are positive feelings (such as joy, interest, anticipation and trust) and the element of surprise. #4: Celebrate Unusual Holidays From National Hamburger Day to National Book Lovers' Day, unusual holidays are hard to resist. They're also an awesome source of visual content inspiration. There's an idea for a cool image to create almost daily. Coca-Cola does a great job of using unusual holidays in their social media marketing. They published these images of cute animals to celebrate National Polar Bear Day. To find holidays and observances, you can check these useful lists of unusual holidays and days of the year for inspiration. #5: Ask Viewers to Contribute You don't have to use your own visuals to capture your viewers' attention. Flip the script and ask your viewers to contribute their images. People love seeing their work promoted by a brand, and it makes them feel appreciated and special. On your social channels, ask viewers to submit designs, logos, photographs, drawings or anything else uniquely suited to your product. Facebook, Instagram and Pinterest are fantastic platforms for this style of campaign. Here are two easy-to-implement visual contest ideas to engage your audience and create more visual context around your brand. Caption Contests Publish an interesting image and ask your reader...

How to Rank YouTube Videos in Google

by seostaff @ Provaro Marketing

Videos have become the most powerful way to reach customers online today. Unfortunately, these videos don’t have nearly as much power if they don’t rank on Google and other search engines. That’s the big question, right? How can we rank YouTube videos in Google? Luckily, there are six key tips on how to rank YouTube […]

The post How to Rank YouTube Videos in Google appeared first on Provaro Marketing.

10 Ways to Improve Search Engine Ranking (SEO)

10 Ways to Improve Search Engine Ranking (SEO)


US Digital Partners

There are many elements to search engine optimization, or SEO, so we've compiled an easy list of 10 tips for your website to improve search engine ranking.

Interview with Lori Johnson, VP of Marketing, Telcomm Credit Union

by globalwebdesign @ Global Web Design

Even though the New Year has not yet begun, we are beginning a new tradition here at Global Web Design.  This is the first client interview in what we hope will become a monthly occurrence! Our first interview is with Lori Johnson, Vice President of Marketing & Business Development for TelComm Credit Union.  We redesigned…

SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: AdWords AMP landing pages, Google & Apple tracking & SEO mistakes appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Top 10 tools for better understanding users

Top 10 tools for better understanding users

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On the first episode of season 10 we look at the top 10 tools for better understanding users. There really is no excuse not to test!

SEO for Idiots: The 10 Basics of Blogging Search Engine Optimization

SEO for Idiots: The 10 Basics of Blogging Search Engine Optimization


Blog Tyrant: Start a Successful Blog

Last Update May 30th, 2016 Recently Kelci asked me over on my Facebook Page about SEO for idiots. I decided to do a full post on it (isn't she lucky?) because it is such a cool and expansive topic. So what exactly was her question? Found your blog the other day and have learned MUCH more than the previous 100 blogs I had found combined. I see that you have an article about SEO secrets below but I was wondering if you can direct me to like an 'SEO for idiots' type of thing... I really need to understand the

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to target a segment of your Facebook audience? Have you considered dark Facebook posts? Dark (unpublished) posts are a great way to tailor different messages to various audiences without posting multiple messages to your page timeline. In this article you'll discover four ways to use dark Facebook posts for your business. Why Dark Posts Before getting into how to use dark Facebook posts, it's important to understand what dark posts really are, and just as importantly, what they are not. Dark posts (also known as unpublished posts) are not the same thing as targeted posts, but they do have much in common. They both allow you to promote posts to specific fans of your page. However, there are two main differences. Listen to this article: First, targeted posts allow you to target an audience based only on parameters such as gender, relationship status, educational status and so on. With targeted posts, you can base your targeting on a variety of parameters. Dark posts, on the other hand, allow you to use keywords (for example, specific job titles) for targeting. The second, and biggest, differentiator is that while both types of posts will show up in the targeted fans' news feeds, dark posts publish without showing up on your page's wall itself. How to Create Dark Posts in Power Editor 1. Log in to Power Editor, and choose Manage Pages from the drop-down menu in the top-left corner. 2. In the left column, select the page for which you're creating the post. 3. In the main area of Power Editor, click the Create Post button. Next, you'll see the Create Unpublished Page Post dialog box. 4. In the top right of the dialog box, choose the post type (Link, Photo, Video, Status or Offer), and then fill in the details for your post. Make sure to select This Post Will Only Be Used as an Ad (in the lower-left corner) so the post won't appear on your Facebook page. 5. Next, choose interest categories and/or add keywords for specific interests. Then click Create Post. The post is saved to your list of posts, and a half-moon symbol appears to the left of the saved post, indicating it hasn't been published yet. 6. When you're ready to publish your post, select it from the list and click Create Post. The key point to remember with dark posts is that you can target specific fans, but you aren't crowding your wall with multiple posts. Hence, these posts are "dark." Now that you understand what dark posts are and how to create them, here are some tips for making the most of them. #1: Reach Fan Segments by Targeting Interests There are distinct interest groups that your community members will fall into and with which they will identify. If you target these groups using text that highlights their interests, your community members will feel like you're speaking directly to them. Suppose that you manage a pizza parlor and you plan to introduce a brand-new pizza next month. Different aspects of that new pizza (for example, the price, the gluten-free crust, Thai seasonings, etc.) will appeal to different segments of your audience. In this case you might create several variations of a post to target different attributes. Because you don't want a bunch of similar posts showing up on your wall, your best option is to use dark posts to target segments of fans. Once the posts are out there, you're able to gather data on engagement rates. Use the data to decide which particular post is worth sharing. You can then promote it on your wall for all of your fans to see. #2: Run Micro-Campaigns A solid social strategy requires big-picture thinking and thoughtful adherence to the core values you want associated with your brand. But this strategy can sometimes be too restrictive if you want to promote specific products to targeted segments. Suppose that you own an online shoe store. You have four new product lines to launch that appeal to four different segments: women...

The Email and Anxiety episode

The Email and Anxiety episode

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on the Boagworld Show we talk about dealing with workplace anxiety and better handling email management.

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have products to sell? Have you tried using Facebook ads to promote your products? To find out how to market products via Facebook, I interview Steve Chou. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Steve Chou. Steve and his wife run an ecommerce site that sells handkerchiefs and linens at BumblebeeLinens.com. He's also host of the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast and the website MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, where he teaches people how to sell physical products online. Steve explains which Facebook ad types he uses to sell his physical products. You'll discover how Steve uses email and Facebook ads in tandem. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook to Market Physical Products Steve's Story As Steve and his wife were preparing for their wedding, his wife wanted a nice handkerchief because she expected to cry during the service. After shopping around, they imported a bunch of handkerchiefs from Asia. After using only a few, Steve and his wife listed the rest on eBay, where they sold like hotcakes. Later, when Steve's wife became pregnant with their first child, she wanted to quit her six-figure income job. They reconnected with the handkerchief vendor and opened their online store, Bumblebee Linens. At first, Steve worked as a microprocessor designer by day, and after the baby went to bed, Steve and his wife ran the business. It became such a success that they maintained their income even after his wife quit her job. Steve explains that soon afterward, their friends began wanting to have kids and quit their jobs, and they kept asking Steve how to launch an ecommerce store. Instead of answering the same questions over and over again, Steve began blogging about his experiences running the store. That's how MyWifeQuitHerJob.com got started in 2009. To generate sales in the early days, Steve used Google AdWords. His brother-in-law worked at Google in the AdWords division and showed Steve how to use it. Back in 2007, Steve generated a lot of sales via clicks that cost him about 10 to 15 cents. Steve says online content also helped generate sales. They wrote articles to help brides and provide craft ideas for their products. After three to six months, the articles started ranking in search engines and sent traffic to their store, too. Today, Bumblebee Linens sells handkerchiefs, linen napkins, linen towels, lace parasols, aprons, and more. Steve says the store has several target audiences. The handkerchief audience includes people planning weddings and an over-55 crowd. Event and wedding planners are the target audience for napkins and moms are the audience for Mommy & Me aprons. The company has in-house embroidery machines for personalizing their products. Listen to the show to learn more about the audience and the content on MyWifeQuitHerJob.com. Win-back Campaigns Steve explains that a win-back campaign targets people who have already purchased from your shop because those people are more likely to buy again. To run this type of campaign, you need to figure out who those people are, and if they haven't purchased within a certain timeframe, give them an incentive to come back. You can automate a win-back campaign with an online merchant system. For example, if someone hasn't purchased from Bumblebee Linens in 60 days, they automatically receive an email and a Facebook ad with a 10%-off coupon. To automate the Facebook component of the campaign, Steve says the ecommerce system Klaviyo allows Bumblebee Linens to export a specific segment (in this case people who haven...

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

How to Publish Content on Apple News: A Step-by-Step Guide

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your content? Have you considered publishing your content on Apple News? Apple News lets you deliver both visual and text-based content directly to a growing number of iOS mobile devices. In this article, you'll discover how to become an Apple News publisher. Listen to this article: What Is Apple News? Apple News is a preinstalled application on every iOS device (version iOS 9 or later). The app delivers traditional text-based content, videos, and photo galleries from a variety of sources, including magazines, websites, and newspapers. Anyone in the US, UK, and Australia can sign up as a publisher and produce content for Apple News. Once you publish an article, it's added to the Apple News app, and the content is automatically optimized for all iOS devices. This ensures that readers have a great experience, no matter which device they're using. Before you can publish content for Apple News, you need to sign up as a publisher. Here's how to get started. #1: Sign Into iCloud To start the sign-up process, go to http://www.icloud.com/newspublisher/ and then click Continue. Sign into your iCloud account with your Apple ID (which is your device's associated ID). You'll need to accept the end user license agreement to continue. #2: Provide Publisher and Channel Information On the next page, fill out your publisher information and then click Next. You'll also need to provide additional information to set up your channel. When you're finished, click Next. #3: Upload a Logo You now have the option to upload a channel logo. (Note: You can skip this step.) Make sure your logo is a PNG file with a minimum size of 256 pixels square. The file size limit is 2MB. Click here for more details about logo specifications. Note that after you complete your registration, Apple will review your logo, and if it doesn't satisfy the requirements, they won't accept your application, and you may have to start over again. #4: Choose a Publishing Format Next, you can choose from two different publishing methods: RSS feed (there's no change in user experience, which means you can't use Apple's article format) or the Apple News Format, which optimizes your content for iOS devices. Use the Apple News Format To use Apple's News Format for your content, all you have to do is to click Sign Up for Apple News Format. Once you click the button, your application will automatically be sent for review. Use the RSS Feed for Your Blog or Website To use the RSS feed for your website or blog, click on I'd Rather Use RSS for Now. This choice takes you to the next step where you have to provide the RSS feed of your website. It's easy to find your feed URL. Visit your website and right-click anywhere on the page. From the menu, select Inspect Element or Inspect. Once the window appears with the HTML code of your page, use the Find feature (press Ctrl+F on Windows, Command+F on a Mac) and search for "RSS." It will then be highlighted on the screen like this. Copy your feed link and then paste it into the form. When you're finished, click Next. After accepting the terms and conditions, you can submit your application. You're all set! Apple will review your application and get back to you within a few days. Note: Ads served by Apple are not available if you only present your content via RSS. #5: Submit Articles for Approval After you're approved as a publisher, you're required to submit some articles for review. To do that, you can either create an article in News Publisher or use your existing content management system (CMS). To create an article in News Publisher, sign in and select News Publisher from the menu. If you need further information about the features, check out the official guide. If you prefer to connect your CMS with News Publisher, you'll need to use a plugin or write the code yourself. Fortunately,

Social media doesn't just belong in marketing

Social media doesn't just belong in marketing

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

How to Master Analytics like Will Smith and Amazon

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Will Smith is not just a pretty face. Nor is he just a likeable, talented actor. He’s a businessman and a master marketer. The only Hollywood star that predictably gets over $20 million per flick. Even his movies that didn’t get good reviews, like Hancock and Suicide Squad, grossed over half a billion each worldwide. […]

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to expand the online visibility of your business? Have you thought about leveraging your personal social media profiles? Optimizing your personal profiles to highlight your business is a great way to raise awareness. In this article you'll discover how to use your personal LinkedIn, Twitter and Facebook profiles to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Showcase Your Business on LinkedIn Some people view LinkedIn only as the network to use when you're looking for a job. In reality, LinkedIn can provide a variety of benefits for your business, ranging from increased website traffic to new strategic opportunities. Your LinkedIn personal profile is a great way to develop new business and network with prospects. The two profile areas that you need to focus on are the Header and Experience. Header The Header is often the first thing that catches the attention of visitors. Many of the sections within the Header are brief facts and self-explanatory. However, the professional headline section is the most customizable. After visitors look at your name and profile photo, the headline is the next likely place they'll look when forming an impression about you and your company. To edit your LinkedIn Header, open your profile, hover over the Header section and click on the pen icon to the right of the information you want to edit. Here are some tips for writing your LinkedIn headline: Be concise. Summarize your industry, skill set and anything that sets you apart from the competition. LinkedIn limits the headline section to 120 characters. Use keywords. Think about the words that your ideal client or target market would likely be searching for on LinkedIn. Or include topics that come up often in conversations about your business. For example, when speaking with potential clients, you might frequently be asked about a certain aspect of your experience. Consider including it in your professional headline to spark a conversation with clients who have an interest in that area. Experiment with new headlines. After you've developed strong headline copy, don't be afraid to make adjustments if your business needs a change or you haven't found the results you were looking for. Consider testing different keywords as you learn more about what your ideal clients are interested in. Experience The other important profile section to focus on is Experience. You can use up to 2,000 characters in this section, so it can be much more detailed and highlight the benefits of your business. On your profile, scroll down to the Experience section and hover over the text. The editing options should appear immediately. At the top of the section, you'll find buttons to reorganize your work history, create a new position or add images, presentations, documents or videos. Consider adding two to three paragraphs explaining your company's objectives and include a list of how your contributions affect these goals. This way, you're branding your business and yourself simultaneously. Additionally, include visual elements such as SlideShare presentations, links to work samples or portfolios, branded video content or any other content that helps visitors learn more about your company. Visual content helps attract your visitors' attention to each section of your profile. #2: Brand Your Profile on Twitter Twitter is an excellent platform for adding a human element to your business, distributing relevant industry-related content and keeping an eye on social conversations about your brand. If you want to align your personal Twitter efforts with your business goals, focus on providing content that serves your clients' needs and represents your business in a positive way. Each profile affiliated with your business should look the part and follow company branding standards. Start by visiting your Twitter profile and clicking on the Edit Profile button.

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage a Facebook page for your business? Interested in ways to improve your marketing? In addition to the Facebook features you use for business every day, there are some handy ones you may have overlooked. In this article you'll discover five lesser known Facebook Page features for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Free Images for Ads When creating a Facebook ad, you can choose from a searchable database of thousands of free stock images from within the Facebook image library. This takes an extra step out of the ad creation process. This image library is powered by Shutterstock, but there's one important caveat: Not all of the images meet Facebook's advertising guidelines. For this reason, it's important to familiarize yourself with the guidelines and choose your images carefully. You don't want your ads getting rejected over some minor technicality such as the 20% text rule on ad images. #2: Ad Relevance Scores The ad relevance score is basically Facebook's answer to Google's quality score for AdWords. The relevance score guides how often your Facebook ad will be displayed and how much you'll pay for each ad engagement. Facebook considers a lot of different factors when calculating your relevance score, including positive and negative feedback via video views, clicks, comments, likes and other ad interactions. If people report your ad or tell Facebook they don't want to see it anymore, those actions count against you. Keeping an eye on your ad relevance score can help you determine if your ad needs work. Oddly enough, this setting is unchecked by default. To enable ad relevance scoring, open the ad or ad set in your Ads Manager and navigate to Customize Columns. From the list of available columns, find and select the Relevance Score check box. Enabling this option adds a Relevance Score column to your ads reports so you can keep an eye on this metric. #3: Email Contact Import A great way to grow your audience is to invite the people in your email address book to like your Facebook business page. To do that, go to your Facebook business page, click on the ellipsis (…) button (next to the Share button on your cover image) and then select Invite Email Contacts from the drop-down menu. Next, you see a pop-up box that lists all of the different integration options you can use to import your contacts. Identify the contact list you want to import and click the Invite Contacts link to the right. After you upload your list, a dialog box appears where you can select which contacts to invite. You have the option to select individual contacts or the group as a whole. After you select your contacts, click Preview Invitation. On the next page, review the invitation, select the check box that you're authorized to send invitations and click Send. There are a couple of points to keep in mind when sending invitations. You can upload up to 5,000 contacts per day, so if you have large customer or subscriber lists, you'll have to send invitations in batches. Remember, your page may already be suggested to your contacts who use Facebook, so you can decide whether to email them as well. If you're already showing up in their recommended pages, it's just free advertising for you. #4: Facebook Post Scheduling The ability to schedule Facebook posts is pretty handy, especially if you're using promoted posts. The good news is that you don't need Hootsuite or Buffer to do it. You can schedule future posts right in Facebook. You can even backdate posts so that they appear earlier in your timeline. To access this feature, go the Publishing Tools tab, select Scheduled Posts and click the Create button. Compose your post and then select Schedule from the Publish drop-down menu. Select the date and time to schedule your post. When you're finished, click Schedule. Scheduling posts can be especially useful for larger teams where you have different ...

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you involved with influencer marketing campaigns? Do you know how to meet disclosure and compliance requirements? By following a few simple guidelines, you can maintain transparency while producing brand-sponsored content that engages consumers. In this article you'll discover how to make sure your content meets Federal Trade Commission (FTC), Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Google requirements. What Compliance Means for You In September 2014 the FTC sent warning letters to more than 60 companies as part of what it called Operation Full Disclosure. While the warnings focused on print and broadcast advertisements, the move signaled that the commission may start regulating more companies on all media that it finds to be out of compliance with accepted standards and practices. Listen to this article: Take note of this positioning, especially when it comes to your digital advertising on social channels. The FTC issued updated guidance on .com Disclosures in March 2013, and gave its clearest direction yet in June 2015 for endorsement disclosures in its What People Are Asking FAQ page. Many see this as a necessary step of enforcement by the commission. While the FTC monitors compliance with truth-in-advertising laws, your company must also work to stay abreast of regulations from other agencies and organizations (such as the FDA and Google) when producing compensated content. Compliance with these regulations ultimately falls on the sponsor rather than the content producer. Consequently, if you're working with bloggers or YouTube video bloggers, you must have audit mechanisms in place to ensure those producing content on your behalf maintain compliance. Compliance, however, is not as difficult as it might seem. The following simple tips will help you keep your content compliant without making it stiff or unappealing to the consumer. #1: FTC: Disclose Clearly and Conspicuously The FTC really has only one guideline when it comes to disclosure: Disclose early, clearly and conspicuously. When you publish blog posts, you should include a simple, clear and easy-to-find disclosure near the top of the post right below the title, as seen in this Almost Supermom post. If you record or broadcast video content, it should at minimum have a clear and conspicuous disclosure right at the beginning. While not mandated, the FTC says disclosures that appear regularly throughout the video would be even better. While the FTC also does not mandate specific wording of disclosures, it still requires disclosures, even in the shortest form of media. On Twitter, for example, include #ad in a tweet or "Ad:" at the beginning of your tweet. It's the safest way to comply when using short-form content. While some companies worry that these disclosures will impact their content's authenticity, disclosure statements actually have the opposite effect. Used appropriately, disclosures note the influence that compensation may have on the person producing the content. However, savvy readers recognize that compensated content is an effective way for creators to fund the creation of content. And ethical bloggers will only accept compensation for content their readers want to consume in the first place. #2: Google: Use NoFollow Tags for Links in Sponsored Posts Google, the arbiter of all things search, has worked for years to keep compensated content from unduly affecting search rankings. To that end, you should ensure all of the links in a compensated blog post contain NoFollow tags. This designation tells Google's algorithm to ignore those links when calculating page rank for the links' target pages. You can insert this link manually by adding rel="nofollow" in the HTML code. The result looks like this: Many online publishing systems make this easier with plugins that manage the tagging process automatically. A search for "NoFollow" in the WordPress plugin library yielded 298 results.

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

Marketing You: How to Play to Your Unique Strengths

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle when it comes to marketing yourself? Are you wondering what your unique strengths are? To learn how to promote yourself based on these strengths, I interview Sally Hogshead for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Keep reading to discover more. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Sally Hogshead, author of Fascinate and How the World Sees You. She was an award-winning copywriter at the age of 23 and worked with brands such as Nike, Target and BMW. She's one of the few women in the Speaker Hall of Fame and a popular keynote speaker (Sally keynoted Social Media Marketing World) and a simply fascinating woman. Sally shares how you can be successful and fascinating in your work and your life. You'll discover how fascination can increase your value, put you at an advantage and enable you to get more satisfaction out of your work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing You The journey from Fascinate to How the World Sees You Sally explains that the hardest part for her when writing a book is when it goes into the print stage. When her last book Fascinate was ready to be shipped to stores, she felt at a loss and didn't know what to do with herself. She started to think about doing a personality assessment, which was based on the same system that she had created for brands. So instead of it being about how consumers see a brand, it's about how the world sees you. Once the test was ready, it was put out on social media for free and it became a huge part of her business. It surpassed Fascinate. Sally soon realized that people really wanted to know how to make themselves—not their brand—fascinating. She pivoted her entire company and started to study more about it and go deep into what makes one person perceived as valuable, and someone else perceived as a commodity. Once you have done the assessment, it becomes clear why certain people like, respect and admire you, and why you turn others off. The key here is that you don't have to change who you are; you have to become more of who you are. Listen to the show to find out why it helps to see the patterns among your work colleagues, and how it can help you communicate more effectively with them. How social media has played a part in the development of this entire concept Before the days of social media, our average attention span used to be 20 minutes. Now with social media, it's around 9 seconds. People can now form an opinion of you instantly on social media. With that in mind, you now have to find a way to front-load your value. It's your opportunity to make the most accurate and authentic first impression. You'll hear what Sally and her team discovered when they ran a one-year free beta test for about 30,000 people, and why it led them to turn it into a paid model. At present, the Fascination Advantage Assessment costs $37. However, you can get free access to an in-depth, custom report, which identifies your personality advantages. Check out the key takeaways at the end of this article to find out how to enter. Listen to the show to hear the two main things that people who took the initial assessment wanted to know. Fascination and the research behind it  Sally states that fascination is a state of intense focus. When you're fascinated by something, you are totally focused on that one particular thing. It can be a person, an idea, a movie, a book or a product. As part of the initial market research that Sally carried...

4 Ways Marketers Can Prepare Now For Voice Search

by Christie Huber @ DialogTech

As a fellow marketer, I’m sure you are as focused on your daily search ROI as we are. It can be hard to optimize for the present, much less consider what might impact your search ROI in the future. We all know that smartphones have already changed search forever, but there are also new and emerging trends in voice search […]

The post 4 Ways Marketers Can Prepare Now For Voice Search appeared first on DialogTech.

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook marketing plan? Are you wondering how to grow your business with Facebook? To learn about the important elements of a Facebook marketing plan, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She was also the very first Facebook community manager we ever had for Social Media Examiner. Amy shares what your Facebook marketing plan needs to succeed. You'll learn why you should create a Facebook business page and the best engagement techniques to grow your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Plan The benefits of a Facebook business page  Amy states that although a lot of people get good engagement on their personal Facebook profile, she strongly recommends that you set up a Facebook business page. It's only on rare occasions that she advises to stick with your personal profile. If you have a physical or online product, program or service, a Facebook business page can be extremely beneficial. This type of page gives you permission to talk about your business on a regular basis. Once you have the foundation in place and become that go-to authority in your niche, you can talk about your business freely. It's the main reason why you need to have a business page, as well as a personal profile. You'll hear about another benefit when it comes to Facebook ads. Listen to the show to discover the reason why Amy has taken all communication over to her business page but still keeps her personal profile.   Start with a Facebook marketing plan Amy teaches how to put a Facebook marketing plan together in three phases. Attraction Promotion Sales Listen to the show to learn more about these three phases. 1. Attraction First of all, you need to build a Facebook community. It's important to grow a solid fan base so you can generate some great engagement with people. You become the go-to source in your community. In the attraction phase, you need to find different ways to grow your fan base. You need to know your audience. You'll hear why Amy advises creating a persona of your typical Facebook fan. One of the easiest ways to get the word out about your page is to have a Facebook Like button on your website. Once someone clicks the Like button to become a fan, they will remain on your website. You'll get quality fans with the Like button, because these people are already visiting your site. You want them to become Facebook fans, so you can stay top of mind when they're on Facebook. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Amy advised Michael Hyatt to install the Like button on his website. How to use your website or blog to grow a following Amy explains that it doesn't matter if you have a massive email subscriber list, these are people who have taken the time to give you their name and email address. You'll learn about techniques you can use to encourage people to become fans. If you want to attract new people, then Graph Search is very valuable. Amy says it's a hidden treasure that not many people use. You'll hear some great examples of search terms that will help you gain valuable information about your audience. When it comes to promotion, you need to turn your fans into leads. You definitely want to check out this previous podcast with Amy that goes into...

Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101

Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101

by Scott Van Achte @ StepForth Web Marketing Inc.

Starting in the New Year, we learn about how John’s work setup is evolving into a new team increasing SEO team by close to 500%. Plus Google Blog highlights The Year in Search 2016, and Google teams with Gupshup to develop voice-activated Actions for Google Home. This January 5, 2017 SEO 101 podcast is available […]

The post Year in Search 2016 | SEO 101 appeared first on StepForth Web Marketing Inc..

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to grow your online influence? To learn how to best use Twitter for your business, I interview Joel Comm for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joel Comm, author of numerous books including Twitter Power 2.0 and So, What Do You Do? He's also the host of The Joel Comm Show, a business podcast. Joel shares how he uses Twitter to grow his platform. You'll learn how to grow a quality Twitter following, and which types of content work best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business So, "What do you do?" Joel explains how he asks questions and helps people discover what their core is. This can include passions, talents, skills, abilities and personality, which are used to bring value to the world around them. This is how you find ultimate fulfillment. Listen to the show to find out the importance of starting a conversation. Why marketers should pay close attention to Twitter Joel explains how Twitter is still relevant. They have 200 million active users every day, which is really impressive when up against Facebook's 1 billion–plus accounts. The thing that made Twitter cool in the first place is its simplicity. It remains relevant because it's where people gather. Joel calls it the virtual water cooler. Twitter is a place for short conversations, which can be extremely powerful and relevant. Joel says that the water cooler strategy is to engage. You'll find out the two different ways that Joel engages on Twitter and why significance is so important. The most essential part is to be authentic. You can connect in the moment, which can be greater than you might imagine. Joel describes how pictures are an excellent use of Twitter. He likes to tweet from Instagram and can post from his Instagram account to Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr and Foursquare, all at the same time. Twitter only allows 140 characters, so when you use pictures, it can be a lot of bonus words. Even mundane pictures can get a lot of interaction. Listen to the show to hear an example of a picture that Joel used that made him realize there's a lot of power in mundane tweets. How Joel uses Twitter today to grow his platform  Joel has started to check out more of what people on his stream have to say and then reshares their content. He does this more than tweeting his own original content. It's the giver mentality. A couple of Twitter's strengths are the retweet and the favorite. They're great opportunities to focus on the value that others bring. There are days when Joel doesn't tweet at all. Other days, he can get 5 or 6 tweets in. It all depends on what's happening that particular day. You should never just tweet for the sake of tweeting. When it comes to a tweeting strategy, you'll discover why it's important to be true to yourself and be aware of the types of businesses Twitter works best for. Listen to the show to find out why Joel generally uses the standard retweet over a customized retweet. How to grow a quality Twitter following Joel advises starting with absolutely nothing. If you are new on Twitter and don't know where to begin, Joel recommends you start with a hashtag that is in an area of interest. The next step is to discover people who are talking about your personal or business interests. As entrepreneurs, there is typically an overlap of the two. Once you start to follow people,

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to measure your social media return on investment (ROI)? Do you need to measure the social performance of your business? To learn how to determine the ROI for social media marketing, I interview Nichole Kelly for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nichole Kelly, author of How to Measure Social Media and the CEO of Social Media Explorer and SME Digital. Nichole shares why so many businesses struggle to determine the ROI of their social media activities and what's really important in your social media measurement. You'll learn the most important steps that all marketers should take when thinking about social ROI. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Return on Investment (ROI) Why so many marketers struggle with measuring social ROI Nichole believes one of the reasons social ROI is a challenge is because marketers have redefined the metrics used to measure social media. Words such as mentions and retweets are similar to what was measured before. But now people have decided that social media is special, and therefore needs to be measured in a special way. Nichole believes this has set us up for failure. When you try to 1) justify what you are doing and 2) measure the return, you can't compare these two things. It then becomes difficult to compare and optimize whatever the return is. People have played with the return on investment phrase in the social realm. For example, you've likely heard of return on influence, return on engagement and return on conversation. The problem with this approach is that at the end of the day, ROI is a financial return. And whether it is the best measure for success of social media doesn't really matter, because it's the measure of success for business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to translate social media into a positive ROI. The backstory that led Nichole to social media ROI Nichole explains how she spent most of her career in corporate marketing and grew up in the boardroom. In June 2011, there was a study that came out from the Fournaise Report that said 73% of CEOs think marketers lack business credibility. The #1 stated reason was because we talk about trends like social media. Whether you agree with this or not, Nichole noticed that marketers were caught in a trap of trying to measure social media differently. And measuring social media ROI isn't as hard as everyone was making it out to be. So she set out to provide how-to information with step-by-step instructions on translating social media into something that can be compared across channels. Nichole wrote ROI-related articles for Social Media Examiner and discovered there was a never-ending appetite for help figuring out social media ROI. Nichole thinks people are still trying to understand it completely, but they are actually ready to measure now. When Nichole first started, a lot of people were talking about measurement in philosophical terms. We are starting to see companies, and marketers in particular, understand that with social media, it doesn't matter how many fans or followers they have. At the end of the day, if you can compare social media to what you spend on pay-per-click advertising and start measuring it with something simple like cost per click on all of the web traffic you are sending to your site, you have something that justifies a budget. Listen to the show to find out why Nichole feels measuring social media...

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want long-term customers for your business? Have you used social media to increase customer loyalty? To build customer loyalty, you need to show your customers you care. In this article I'll share how to use social media to embrace and cultivate loyal customers for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize the Fan Experience The key to encouraging more customer loyalty on social media is to make your fans feel like they matter. Whether you have 1,000 or 10,000 fans, each one should feel special. A simple way to take a personal approach on a daily basis is to sign off on posts and comments with your name. Another method is to literally personalize your product or service for fans. Coca-Cola fans can personalize and share a virtual bottle of Coke and Heinz ran a promotion that gave their fans and customers the opportunity to add a friend's name to a soup can and send it to him or her. When you personalize your fans' experience, it boosts their trust and loyalty. It also gives them a chance to take full ownership of and share the experience with their network. #2: Offer Rewards Show your fans and customers you appreciate their input on your social channels by offering a reward. A lot of companies miss out on the opportunity to create more loyal customers, because they only reward customers who engage the most. While there's nothing wrong with rewarding regular engagement from fans, the key to appreciating your social media community as a whole is to reward fans based on the quality of the interaction, not the quantity. Remember, a fan who comments once, but leaves very detailed feedback (for example, a testimonial, suggestions or visual post), is just as valuable as someone who comments 40 times on posts. Involve and reward your entire social media community with offers, such as unique discounts, contests and bonus or sneak previews. GoEnnounce gave away exclusive "Welcome to College" gifts to the first 50 high school seniors who posted a photo with their college acceptance letters. When you reward all fans and customers, it gives everyone a reason to keep coming back to your page. It also shows your company appreciates both new and existing customers. #3: Surprise Fans and Customers Add to your customers' experience on social media by finding ways to create surprise and intrigue. One option is to surprise fans with a random act of kindness. For example, reward your community with a discount code when you reach 20,000 fans. Also, send fans who go above and beyond in adding value to your company, product or service a handwritten note and gift. When a young fan submitted a dragon drawing to Samsung to impress the brand, the company not only replied back with a great drawing of a kangaroo on a unicycle, but also took things one step further. Samsung sent the fan a Samsung phone, which included a case customized with the dragon drawing. Now that's what you call a surprise! Companies can also send fans a surprise on special occasions, such as after their first purchase, the one-year anniversary of their first purchase, their birthday or on seasonal holidays. Surprises are a great way to build word-of-mouth marketing. They also encourage brand advocacy, because fans who get a treat are likely to share the experience with their network. Remember, since social media conversations happen in real time, when you decide to surprise your fans, be sure to deliver the treat within a reasonable time frame. #4: Listen to Your Customers Build loyalty with your fans and customers and increase engagement by listening. Monitor daily what your customers and fans are saying about your company, whether it's a question, concern or problem, and then engage with your fans, respond and take action. Snapchat listened to their users, and as a result they created an update to make the app even easier to use. Listening is so important on social media because ...

5 Ways to Optimize Your Website for Higher Search Engine Rankings | Salesforce Pardot

5 Ways to Optimize Your Website for Higher Search Engine Rankings | Salesforce Pardot


Salesforce Pardot

Ask most business owners what the best way to generate website traffic is, and they will pretty much always talk about SEO. Sure, there are plenty of other channels available, such as referrals and social media, but nothing really compares to search engines. The problem is that, not only are business owners competing against every...

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

6 Tips to Clean Up Your Twitter Account

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter account unmanageable? Do you want to clean up your followers and profile? A well-managed Twitter account improves your branding and helps you engage with your audience. In this article you'll find six tips to clean up and revitalize your Twitter account. Listen to this article: #1: Unfollow Inactive Accounts First, tend to the users you're following. Let's start with your family members. You know the ones. They started using Twitter in 2007 and haven't been back since. They're inactive users, along with potentially hundreds of other users you followed a long time ago, and never heard from again. It's possible to go through your Twitter profile, analyze each profile and unfollow them. If you're following hundreds or thousands of people, that's a waste of your time. You can use any one of numerous tools like UnTweeps. UnTweeps scans all accounts you follow and provides a list of the inactive ones. Decide what you consider inactive (how many days since their last tweet) and fill in the number. Then check the boxes next to the accounts you want to unfollow. The idea is simple. Weed out all of the people you're following who aren't tweeting. If you're following inactive users, then you're wasting your follows. The maximum number of Twitter users you can follow is 2,000. Once you hit 2,000, you can't follow anyone else unless you gain more followers. How many more followers? We don't know. It’s a ratio, and Twitter keeps it a secret. Other tools to use to clean up inactive accounts include Tweepi, ManageFlitter, Follower Filter, Crowdfire and iUnfollow. #2: Unfollow Irrelevant Accounts After you've deleted some inactive users, take another look. You're likely still following too many users who are irrelevant. There are some options. If you unfollow almost everyone, it seems rude and you may tick some people off. It takes time to unfollow only select people. But if you keep it the same, Twitter stays messy. For example, blogger Michael Hyatt chose to unfollow all of his followers. Hyatt used to follow back everyone who followed him: all 108,698 of them. Michael realized the volume of inbox messages and irrelevant tweets he was getting was out of hand, so he took drastic measures. Chris Brogan also went this route. He unfollowed 131,000 users. Another approach is to sift through the people you follow, identify the ones who are irrelevant and unfollow them. If you want to curate your follows in this way, here's what to do. Go to your profile page, and click Following. Look at each profile and decide if it's worth following. To stop following a user, hover over the Following button. It should turn into a red Unfollow button. Click it. Just remember, if you're following a lot of people, purging like this could take a long time. Some of the tools mentioned previously can assist with the process. #3: Organize With Twitter Lists Twitter lists help you organize the different purposes you have for Twitter: work, family, influential people, etc. Create as many kind of lists as you like. There's no limit. To create a list, go to your profile page, click Lists, then Create a New List. To add someone to a list, click on Following from your profile. Then, click the settings icon next to the user, and select Add or Remove From List. Then, check the box next to the list or lists to add the user, or create a new list. Lists are an excellent way to filter through the different types of people you follow. If you follow a lot of people, you'll never see everything. This way, you can get the information you need from certain people whenever you want it. Depending on how you use lists, you may wish to keep your list private (for example, a list of competitors). Once your account is clean, get back into the Twitter swing of things. #4: Spruce Up Your Profile Another point for cleaning up your account is your Twitter profile.

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business respond to customers via social media? Are you prepared to deal with upset customers? To discover how to turn unhappy customers into happy fans, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer, the author of Youtility, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and founder of Convince & Convert, an agency and blog focused on digital marketing. His newest book is Hug Your Haters: How to Embrace Complaints and Keep Your Customers. Jay will explore how to convert social media haters into raving fans. You'll discover why it's important to hug your haters. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Dealing With Unhappy Customers The backstory of Hug Your Haters The idea of customer service and customer experience has been at the front of Jay's mind for a long time, he explains. His company Convince & Convert helps major brands with their social media and content marketing, and they increasingly get involved in issues with customers. It's not just about being proactive and doing marketing, Jay says. You have to be just as good, if not better, at reactive customer service. Jay found even organizations with a lot of resources were befuddled by everything related to digital customer service and experience in the modern world. Jay shares how conducting a tremendous amount of research with Tom Webster from Edison Research changed the focus of his book. Last year at Social Media Marketing World, Jay did his "Hug Your Haters" presentation for the first time. Although he has taken the Youtility concept all over the world, Jay says the Hug Your Haters book is the best thing he's ever done and the speech is the best speech he has ever given. Listen to the show to learn what Tom Webster said he liked about Hug Your Haters in the forward to the book. What are haters and why do people hate Jay refers to anybody who complains about a business either off stage or on stage as a hater. An off-stage hater is somebody who complains in private: on telephone and email. An on-stage hater is somebody who complains in public: social media, review sites, discussion boards and forums. He shares that historically and even currently, the majority of people complain off stage but that the pendulum is swinging the other way because it's much easier to reach out to a brand on Facebook, Twitter or beyond than it is to send an email or wait on hold. When people complain off stage, they almost always want an answer. They have a problem they want to be fixed, and 90% of the time they expect companies to respond. When people complain on stage, they don't necessarily want an answer; they want an audience. They want people to empathize and engage with them around their experience. If they actually hear back from the company, it's a bonus. Even though only 47% of the people who complain in public actually expect companies to get back to them, Jay says their research proved that if you actually answer the person who had a bad experience and left a review online, it has a meaningful and significant impact on your customer advocacy. Listen to the show to discover how content shock also applies to disgruntled customers. Why engage haters Jay says haters are not the problem, ignoring them is. He believes there are multiple benefits to answering every complaint in every channel every time, instead of what most businesses do today, which is answer some people some of the time in the channels they prefer. First, if you answer somebody, you at least have a chance to turn them around.

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog for your business? Are you ready to take your blogging to the next level? To explore how to build your blog readership, I interview Darren Rowse for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Darren Rowse, the world's leading authority on blogging. He authored the book ProBlogger and founded two popular blogs: Digital Photography School and ProBlogger. Darren has been blogging since 2002 and his work has inspired millions of people. Darren shares how he built a mega-blog with millions of monthly readers. You'll discover how to attract more readers, engage your audience and monetize your blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Blogging How Darren started blogging In 2002 Darren came across a blog for the first time and knew right away it was a medium he wanted to explore. Almost immediately, he started his first blog. Darren explains that he had no background in technology or writing, just a fascination with community and communication. He developed an audience for his personal blog over the next year and a half, writing about a variety of niche topics (photography, spirituality, movies, politics). When his audience "complained" that there was too much variety, Darren split the topics up into different blogs. From there, Darren began to experiment with making money from blogging. It evolved from a hobby into a part-time job, then grew into a full-time business. Listen to the show to hear how many blogs Darren launched over the years. Why it's never too late to start blogging When Darren first started blogging, he looked at the big bloggers and thought he was too late to start. At that point, the big names had only been blogging for a year or two. However, Darren says new bloggers are breaking through all the time. More blogs mean greater opportunities to network and the ability to grow faster, especially if you can get on the radar of an influencer in your niche. While there may be a ton of bloggers out there, Darren explains that there's nobody who has your exact set of experiences, opinions, stories, skills and perspectives, and that's what sets you apart. If you can harness your uniqueness, there's certainly a way to get noticed. Listen to the show to hear how blogging in your niche will serve you well now and in the future. Digital Photography School, then and now Darren started Digital Photography School in 2006. It evolved from one of his previous blogs—a digital camera review blog. It was quite profitable, Darren explains, but not particularly satisfying. He wanted a blog about photography that he enjoyed writing—where he could build a relationship with his readers and answer common photography questions. When the site launched, Darren wrote all of the blog content himself (two to three posts per week), focusing on evergreen content and throwing shareable content into the mix. It was on a free theme, boot strapped, and gradually began to rank in Google and develop a following. He monetized using AdSense and Amazon affiliate marketing. A photography enthusiast, Darren says he's the guy in your circle of friends who people ask to photograph parties because they can't afford a real photographer. He's also the one everyone comes to before they buy a camera. He started the site writing beginner-level content. As the site developed, he hired professional photographers to write for the more advanced audience. Now,

13 Best Practices for Improving Organic Search Rankings

13 Best Practices for Improving Organic Search Rankings


DialogTech

Want to improve your organic search rankings with Google? Follow these 13 best practices.

4 Ways Your Business Can Get Started on Instagram

4 Ways Your Business Can Get Started on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you wondering how to use Instagram for business? Have you looked at how others are using it? With the right tactics, Instagram can help you build awareness, boost engagement, and drive foot traffic to your business. In this article you'll discover four ways you can use Instagram to promote your products and services. Listen to this article: #1: Increase Web Traffic With an Instagram Contest Instagram contests let you showcase your products, attract leads, and grow your followers all at the same time. Plus, contests are just plain fun. Framebridge held an Instagram giveaway contest that offered a chance to win a floral painting by one of their spotlight artists. Framebridge used their contest to drive traffic back to the blog. You can adopt this tactic for your own business by announcing your contest on Instagram and sending Instagram users to your online store's blog for a chance to win. If you want to run an Instagram contest for your business, you can simply offer a free product to celebrate a particular company milestone. If the milestone is Instagram-related, all the better! You'll promote customer loyalty and gain free publicity when fans tag their friends. #2: Inform Your Story With Video Video can complement the photos in your Instagram account by telling stories through moving animation. According to a Vidyard report, 71% of marketers say video conversion rates outperform other types of marketing content. Instagram lets you record videos that are between 3 and 15 seconds long, which is more than enough time to grab the attention of your prospects and customers. Plus, adding a few videos to your Instagram stream will provide some variety in your imagery. http://www.instagram.com/p/BBsdIPNmUOV/ French retailer L'Occitane successfully complements their Instagram images with short videos. The video above shows a flower slowly opening until it presumably releases its wonderful fragrance, which ties in with the company's cosmetic products. You can record your own short Instagram video to complement the images you post. Simply tap the middle icon in the row of icons at the bottom of the Instagram app. This opens up your photo and video capabilities. Once open, tap on the Video tab and click the red button to begin recording your clip. #3: Jumpstart Interest With Instagram Ads You see sponsored ads from businesses all over Instagram. They allow you to put your products or services in front of the specific audience you want to reach. In other words, you can target a customer demographic beyond just your current Instagram followers. When you use Instagram ads to show your products in action, you help viewers understand how they can use your products. This is the same concept used by ecommerce stores when they show high-quality images of people using their products to give customers a sense of what they're buying. Notepad+, a productivity app optimized for the iPad Pro, uses Instagram sponsored ads to promote the app. The centerpiece of this ad is a photo of the app on an actual iPad Pro. This gives customers and prospects an immediate visual sense of the app's interface in use. The good news is that businesses of all sizes can now create and run Instagram ads. All you need to start is a Facebook page. Then during the ad setup process, you'll set a budget for your ad, select a target audience, and create the ad content. For a step-by-step walkthrough, check out this article about how to create an Instagram ad with Facebook Ads Manager. #4: Drive Foot Traffic With Appealing Photos Instagram users respond to beautiful, captivating, and creative photos. Strong images can help you boost engagement, and if you're a local business, they can drive customers to your location. On your Instagram account, you want to post photos that show your products in the best possible light. German restaurant Muse Berlin has grown its local customer base through Instagram by po...

5 helpful tips for inspiring colleagues to embrace change

5 helpful tips for inspiring colleagues to embrace change

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

We need colleagues to change. Whether creating a better experience or encouraging digital thinking. We need them to do things in a different way. But, change is hard and people are often reluctant.

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a blog or restarting your blog? Do you wonder if you have what it takes to attract a strong blog audience? To learn about what it takes to become a successful blogger, I interview Stanford Smith for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stanford Smith, co-author of Born to Blog. He is also the founder of the Pushing Social blog and host of the Pushing Social podcast. Stan shares how he started out with blogging and how Pushing Social became a blog-based business. You'll learn how to recognize your personal traits and how they can be built upon to grow a successful blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a Blog How Stan's blog has helped his business Stan explains that his business is about offering content marketing strategies for small- to medium-sized businesses. He helps people understand how social media can work for them. His blog has been the sole reason why he was able to leave his 9-5 job and work full-time on Pushing Social. The blog is the main way Stan attracts leads, talks to prospects and educates people about his services. Stan's advice for people in a 9-5 job right now is to build up your audience and understand where your next step is going to be. If you want to market yourself in a really effective, cost-efficient way, then blogging is a great place to start. He talks about how he knew he was ready to go out on his own and why he should have done it earlier. Listen to the show to find out how all of Stan's business comes from his blog without any advertising. Common traits for becoming a successful blogger Stan starts with the notion that there are five traits people have that are necessary for blogging, and the good news is that everyone has at least one. You'll learn in detail about each trait. The five traits are: Dreamer Good storyteller Teacher Persuader Curator The idea is to take that trait or role that you play, recognize it, build upon it and then use it to create a successful blog. Stan talks about his two traits and how he can weave them into a blog post. Some of the most popular bloggers have 3 or 4 traits. Listen to the show to find out how to discover which trait you have. Do you need to be a great writer to be a good blogger? Stan believes that you don't have to be a great writer to be a good blogger, in the classic sense. When people think of the word writer, they think of poets or prize-winners. However, this does not have to be the case for blogging. You'll hear what it takes to be a great conversational writer and what this means. You need to be able to communicate in a way that builds rapport and relationships. Stan explains the difference between a blog writer and an article writer. Blogging is not just about text. For example, take a look at Gary Vaynerchuk's story about his video blog. Blogging is the platform. If you feel you are better at speaking and doing audio, then put that out there and use the podcast platform. Video is also another platform. Remember, writing is just one way of expressing yourself on a blog. Listen to the show to hear the benefits of how you can talk it out, record it and then transcribe it back.  Do you have what it takes to become a blogger? Stan explains that there are three steps to becoming a successful blogger. Have a borderline obsession with a topic. To stop yourself from getting burnt out,

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to use multiple images in a single Facebook ad or post? Have you tried Facebook's Carousel feature? The Facebook Carousel feature allows you to publish multiple images and links in one post or ad. In this article you'll discover how to set up and use Facebook carousel posts and ads in your Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: Why Create Carousel Posts and Ads A Facebook carousel post or ad is a creative way to get more content into a smaller space. You can feature five unique images, each with different headlines, descriptions, and URLs all within the same story. Publish a carousel post or ad as an organic story on your page wall and/or an ad unit; either can easily be viewed on desktop and mobile. According to a report by Kinetic Social, carousel ads perform 10 times better than regular ads. Plus, since 90% of Facebook users access via mobile, that's a great use of a small amount of real estate. Advertisers should get much more for their dollars by doing a horizontal ad unit that can scroll back and forth. Carousel ads are also available on Instagram. There are a few options when it comes to carousel posts and ads. Create an organic carousel post, turn an organic carousel post into an ad, or create a carousel ad from scratch. #1: Create an Organic Carousel Post To create a carousel post directly on your page, type or paste a link on your wall. It automatically populates a preview, which should have at least one image. Remember, the more images in your blog post, the more will populate and the fewer you'll need to upload directly. Typically, Facebook's og:image tag on blog posts preselects the link preview image and most blogs only have one that populates when the link is shared on Facebook. So when creating carousel format wall posts, you'll need to get creative with sourcing additional images. Usually you can find more images on the blog post you're sharing. Most links you share on Facebook will automatically populate with that preview image, which is 1200 x 628 pixels, the standard dimensions for a link post or ad. However, since carousel images are square, Facebook will crop out the center of the image. If the original image gets cut off in a way that doesn't make sense, you may need to remove the image that populates, and upload a square one. It's recommended that you size carousel images at 600 x 600 pixels. Click the plus sign and then upload additional pictures (up to five total) to use for your post. Select high-quality images that contain less than 20% text. This is especially important if you plan to turn your carousel post into an ad. Use Facebook's Grid Tool to make sure your images will be approved, should you decide to turn the post into a carousel ad. Drag and drop your images to change the order. Hover over each image and click the link icon to edit each destination URL. You're also able to edit the headline. Click on the headline and then edit the text. Your other option is to build a carousel post from the photo upload section. Go to upload Photo/Video and select Create a Photo Carousel. Then add the link. It will populate the images and allow you to add more. Facebook will populate your images into the carousel post. Add new pictures if necessary, and then edit the links and headlines as above. Boost Your Carousel Post After your carousel post gets some organic reach and engagement, you can easily turn it into a carousel ad by boosting the post. I recommend doing this through Ads Manager, rather than the Boost button, because there are more targeting and placement options. Go to Ads Manager and click Create an Ad. Select Boost Your Posts, and choose the page and the post. Set your audience, budget, and schedule. Then preview your ad. Click the Place Order button when you're satisfied with the ad. Again, keep in mind the less than 20% text rule.

4 Successful Influencer Campaigns You Can Model

4 Successful Influencer Campaigns You Can Model

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve awareness for your business? Have you considered collaborating with influencers? Working with influencers to promote your product or service to their audience is an effective way to meet your marketing objectives. In this article, you'll find four influencer marketing examples and ways to connect with influencers. Listen to this article: #1: Boost Sales To encourage people to purchase your product, work with an influencer to promote a discount code to their audience. Swedish watchmaker Daniel Wellington collaborated with thousands of influencers on Instagram to post images along with a caption that included a discount code for 15% off Daniel Wellington watches. The watches are positioned in a setting that's natural for the influencer, as you can see in the image above from artist David Ambarzumjan, and below in the image posted by blogger Adriana Gastélum. This campaign helped Daniel Wellington evolve from a $150,000 startup into a brand that's worth $220 million in less than five years, and increase profits by 214% between 2014 and 2015. #2: Build Brand and Product Awareness If you want to build awareness for your brand or a new product, consider reaching out to engaged and dedicated audiences through influencers. To make the most of that outreach, ask your influencers to use a branded hashtag when they post. Top fashion brand Chanel made full use of branded hashtags to build anticipation and awareness for their new perfume Chanel No. 5 L'Eau. They invited influential Instagrammers like Jessica Mercedes Kirschner to their production facilities and flower fields located in Grasse, France, for an inside look at how Chanel makes their iconic perfumes. As each influencer shared interesting images from the tour with their audience, they included two branded hashtags: #newchanel5 and #chanelgrasse. Chanel even worked with top bloggers like Julie Sariñana from Sincerely Jules, whose original post generated more than 40,000 likes on Instagram. Within one month, the campaign generated more than 1,600 unique contents with the hashtag #newchanel5, garnering almost 1 million likes, and exposing the upcoming product to more than 9 million social media users. #3: Increase Foot Traffic People can easily see through fabricated content. That's why authenticity is key when you want to make a compelling case for people to experience what you have to offer. When you work with influencers to promote a destination, genuine reactions are more likely to encourage people to take action, rather than a post that's too heavy on scripted endorsement. The Hawaiian Tourism Authority focused on authenticity when they chose to work with top travel Instagrammers to showcase Hawaiian experiences that made people feel they could have the same experience. They collaborated with several top Instagrammers including Jordan Hershel, who's known for visiting some of the most scenic locations across the globe. He posted beautiful images that communicated an alluring picture of Hawaii, reinforcing the islands' reputation of being a traveler's paradise. Each image was accompanied by the hashtag #LetHawaiiHappen. The campaign generated almost 100,000 posts using the hashtag, and the Hawaiian Tourism Department managed to reach 54% of travelers across the U.S. using social media marketing and paid advertising. What's more, 65% of users who saw the campaign intend to visit Hawaii within the next two years. #4: Improve ROI Marketing can be expensive. Especially if you're a startup or small businesses, it's important to look for cost-effective methods to market your business and products. To launch an effective influencer marketing campaign without exceeding your marketing budget, you can partner with mid-level influencers. Try The World wanted to raise awareness for their range of food subscription boxes. Instead of hiring a top-tier celebrity,

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

Word of Mouth: Getting Others to Talk About Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want more people to talk about your brand or business? Want to discover how to get the ball rolling? To learn about word-of-mouth marketing, I interview Ted Wright. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview word-of-mouth marketer Ted Wright, author of the book, Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth. He's also the founder of Fizz, an agency that specializes in word-of-mouth marketing. His clients include Intuit, Pabst Blue Ribbon, Verizon, Intel and many others. In this episode Ted will explore word-of-mouth marketing. You'll discover why word-of-mouth marketing is important in the age of social media, as well as things you can do to get people talking. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Word of Mouth How Ted became interested in word-of-mouth marketing Ted talks about when he attended the University of Chicago School of Business in 1999. At that time the computer lab was basically a windowless cave with 20 rows of 20 computers each, Ted recalls. Early one morning working in the lab, he noticed the ambient light was blue. It was because the Netscape screen was mostly blue, and that's the site everyone used. After 20 minutes or so of searching fruitlessly and getting frustrated with Netscape, somebody leaned over and suggested Ted try Google, which he did. Ted's test search term was his mother's name, Dr. Lynette Wright, a fairly famous medical geneticist. However, since they share the same last name as the guys who invented airplanes, most search engines easily got confused. "Google returned my mother as the second search term, instead of eight pages deep, which was the norm for other sites," Ted shares. He kept working and 20 minutes later, Ted noticed the guy next to him getting frustrated. So Ted leaned over and explained Google to him. About four or five hours later, Ted finished working, stood up, looked around and noticed the light in the room changed from the ambient blue of Netscape to the ambient white of the Google screen. Ted, who's always trying to figure out how things work, found that very interesting. So during his second year at the University of Chicago, he blew apart the history, math, psychology and epidemiology of word-of-mouth marketing. After graduation, Ted decided to start his own business. That company, which he started 15 years ago, is now called Fizz. Listen to the show to discover the unique way in which Ted watched TiVo and Google get adopted. The importance of word-of-mouth marketing Ted defines word-of-mouth marketing as "identifying your influencers and coming up with a story that is interesting, relevant and authentic that ladders back to qualities of your brand and then sharing that story as much as possible." That's the first part. The second part, Ted says, is "creating for your influencers as many opportunities as you can as a brand or a company for them if they feel like it to share your brand's story with as many people as they would like to do so." Ted shares the word-of-mouth marketing campaign he ran for Pabst Blue Ribbon (P.B.R.) with the brand manager at the time, Neal Stewart. The goal was to get more people in America to drink P.B.R. Ted identifies the three critical components of a story being shared: Is the story interesting to influencers so they will pick it up, study it and really understand it? Is it relevant to influencers' audiences? Is it authentic the way they currently understand the brand and the category in general?

Elements of Good Website Design (Part 1)

by globalwebdesign @ Global Web Design

With the millions of websites available to your customers, it’s extremely difficult to create a website that will not only stand out, but offer a valuable service as well. But what makes a well-designed web site? What is the most important factor that differentiates successful from unsuccessful websites? The criteria for effective website development varies…

New Research Reveals Paid Social Media Effectiveness

New Research Reveals Paid Social Media Effectiveness

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you know where to spend your social media marketing dollars? Wondering what works for other businesses? In this article you’ll discover recent insights on the effectiveness of paid social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Majority of B2C Marketers Find Promoted Social Posts and Ads Effective In fall 2015, the Content Marketing Institute (with MarketingProfs) surveyed 3,714 marketers from around the world about content and other digital marketing successes. While just 263 identified as B2C marketers and business owners, their insights are still instructive. As revealed in the chart below (from eMarketer), 76% of B2C respondents use promoted posts (for example, boosted Facebook posts and promoted tweets and pins). Sixty-one percent of these users found promoted posts effective, rating them either 4 or 5 on a 5-point effectiveness scale (3 is neutral). As for LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter, and other ads (as opposed to the more editorial-style posts), 59% of respondents rate these 4 or 5 on the 5-point effectiveness scale (74% of those surveyed report using them). More interesting is the jump in marketers’ perception of effectiveness from Q4 2014 to Q4 2015. Perceived effectiveness stayed mostly even for offline promotion, online banner ads, and native advertising. Conversely, the number of marketers viewing social ads and promoted posts as effective leapt by 20% and 30% respectively for each tactic. Still, given the small sample size, smart marketers must explore the experience of B2B marketers and others when considering paid social ads. B2C marketers surveyed by the CMI also put Facebook at the top of the heap in terms of effectiveness, with YouTube coming in second. Key Takeaway: That only 263 of the CMI’s 3,714 survey respondents identified as B2C suggests that B2C lags behind B2B in adopting the more sophisticated social marketing tactics of promoted posts and social ads. These early adopters find them effective (worth 4 or 5 on the scale) at rates of 64% and 59%. A satisfaction rate 10% to 15% higher than what B2B companies report (see below) could reflect that the B2C space for these two marketing tactics is not as saturated. B2C is getting better results because with less competition, each campaign draws more eyeballs. #2: Fewer Than Half of B2B Marketers Find Promoted Social Posts and Ads Effective The CMI data came from one survey, but it divided the numbers into two reports. With the majority of its respondents in the B2B space (1,521), the Content Marketing Institute had a robust sample from which to draw insights for this vertical. Of the 93% of B2B marketers and business owners using paid social media, 52% use promoted posts and 51% use sponsored ads. Forty-eight percent of promoted post users and 45% of sponsored ad users rate these tactics 4 or 5 on the 5-point effectiveness scale (again, 3 is neutral). To compare tactics, B2B marketers pinpoint search engine marketing tactics like PPC or paid search advertising as the most effective paid marketing tactics, with 55% rating them 4 or 5. At the other end of the scale, traditional online banner ads disappoint with only 29% of respondents finding them somewhat or very effective. Breaking it down further, B2B marketers do have favorite social media platforms. A darling of the B2B world for years, LinkedIn has become the salesperson’s hunting ground. The platform has always enjoyed a more serious reputation than Facebook with its memes and fun apps that appeal to a diverse audience. Key Takeaway: When using social media channels, keep in mind that consumers go to Facebook and LinkedIn with different goals and mindsets. Facebook provides a fun and entertaining diversion from work. Marketers and companies that provide lighthearted content there generate goodwill with engagement following from that. B2B marketers, on the other hand, must recognize that LinkedIn users’ goals have more to ...

Why honesty is the best policy online

Why honesty is the best policy online

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

New post by Boagworld

SEO: The Beginner's Guide to Search Engine Optimization from Moz

SEO: The Beginner's Guide to Search Engine Optimization from Moz


Moz

New to SEO? Need to polish up your knowledge? The Beginner's Guide to SEO has been read over 3 million times and provides the information you need to get on the road to professional quality SEO.

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you host live-streaming video? Want to hear about the latest live-casting technology? To discover more about Blab, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, the author of many books, including Twitter Power 3.0. He also is host of The Joel Comm Show and he's all in on Blab! Joel will explore Blab live casting and why your business might want to consider using it. You'll discover the difference between Blab.im and other live-streaming platforms, as well as some tips to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blab.im How Joel got started with video Joel shares how he signed up for his first YouTube account in 2006. The next year, he decided that video online needed to be kicked up a notch. Inspired by the rise of YouTube and the reality show The Apprentice, in 2007 Joel produced and hosted the world's first competitive Internet reality show, called The Next Internet Millionaire, which received an honorary Webby award for reality TV. In 2008 UStream.tv became one of the first tools for streaming live video from a desktop, so he started doing The Joel Comm Show from his offices with co-host Dan Nickerson. They did a weekly interactive show that was usually about an hour long. Sometimes they would have a guest in his studio office, and other times they would just engage with the people who were commenting. It's very similar to how people comment on Blab. Joel believes streaming video is a great way to communicate, broadcast, share and deliver content, and build community. Listen to the show to learn what was involved with filming The Next Internet Millionaire. Joel and Blab Joel, who has been using Meerkat, Periscope and Live for Facebook Mentions for several months, thinks it was Mia Voss who first told him about Blab. She mentioned it at the beginning of August, and he started using Blab a couple of weeks later. He has been immersed in the platform ever since. He hosts two different shows and then logs on at other random times, either to do a Blab that's not really a show, to hang out and talk with people or to be interviewed on somebody else's show. Joel explains that Blab, in its simplest form, is a video conferencing tool that allows up to four people to be on screen at once. It's integrated with a chat room, and whoever wants to watch a blab can do so. Viewers are also able to interact with each other and the hosts. Blab is integrated with Twitter (your login is your Twitter account), and you're able to easily tweet from the Blab interface. There's a mobile app available for iOS devices and an Android app is on the way. What's so cool about Blab is that it works, Joel says. While Google hangouts sometimes require a whole tutorial, Blab is so simple that most people get it intuitively. Audience members click to request to join a seat. When the host approves you, you're on the show. People ask Joel what's better: Periscope or Blab. He believes that's not the right question, because it's comparing apples to oranges. Periscope, Meerkat and Facebook Live Mentions are all one-to-many broadcasting apps. They allow one person to instantly reach and talk at their audience. It's only a conversation in that those watching can comment, and whoever is hosting can refer to those questions and comments on video. Unless you have somebody right next to you on the screen, it's just one person. Blab puts the "social" component into social media in the most profound and effective way. Blab allows people to be face to face in real time with...

YouTube Growth: How to Grow Your YouTube Channel

YouTube Growth: How to Grow Your YouTube Channel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on YouTube? Are you looking for ways to increase your traffic and subscribers? To explore how to grow your YouTube audience, I interview Steve Dotto for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Steve Dotto, who produces Dotto Tech, a YouTube show designed to help you "discover your inner geek," by focusing on productivity, apps and more. In his former life, Steve hosted Canada's largest syndicated technology show of the same name where he entertained and informed millions of Canadians on all things tech. Steve's also been involved with theater and comedy at Second City. Steve shares how he transitioned from hosting a tech TV show to a popular YouTube channel. You'll discover how to grow your YouTube channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Growth How Steve transitioned from television to new media For 15 years, Steve had a popular TV series in Canada that focused on tech. According to Steve, toward the end of the run, the Internet was becoming more relevant and the show was becoming less relevant. So about four years ago, he pulled the plug on the TV show and then took some time to figure out his next step. He started to teach, dabbled on YouTube and did a radio show. Then at a conference two years ago in Victoria, he met Mari Smith, who introduced him to the world of Internet marketing and showed him how to build a community. Steve took her advice and added his own approach. About a year ago, he really started focusing on YouTube. Listen to the show to hear how last year's YouTube/Google+ changes were key for community development. Steve's show format Steve's how-to series shows his viewers how to use tech tools—from Google functions to iPhone apps—more effectively. Steve says if you watch an episode and say, "I didn't know I could do that," "I'd like to do that" or "I should be doing that," then he's done his job. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ePVkSfKeEfI Most of Steve's videos are between 5 and 12 minutes long, which is a little long by conventional YouTube wisdom. His goal is to take on a topic and teach his viewers something they probably didn't know. Bottom line, he explains, is edutainment value. Listen to the show to hear an example of something Steve teaches during an episode. Why you should start a YouTube show Steve feels that for many different topics it's easier to convey a concept with inflection through video than on other platforms. It's also a relaxing environment to browse through and discover information. Steve says most people will binge-watch YouTube. They'll watch several videos in a row on the same topic to learn something. A video is easier to follow than a blog, it's more engaging than a podcast and you can bring all of the media types together, Steve believes. Listen to the show to discover how Steve feels about writing. What tech Steve uses for his show and why Steve sets his broadcasts up as screencasts, but uses an app so viewers can also see his face as he explains the tech. The why: Content creates a connection between the presenter and viewer. Whether it's a blog, podcast or YouTube video, there is an intimate relationship between you, the speaker, and the audience. With the vastness of the Internet, Steve believes we often lose that personal engagement that happens when someone consumes our content. So we need to make every effort to develop that relationship.

To Like or Not to Like on Facebook, That is the Question…

by Attorneys Online, Inc. @ Attorneys Online, Inc.

Social media is a valuable tool for any business and not simply for promotional aspects. It is a tool that helps to develop genuine connections with audiences and engage with them. Though, that connection is difficult to maintain when your audience is confused or turned off by how you are engaging with them. Social media is an aspect of digital marketing that is constantly evolving and reshaping itself, so it can be hard to keep up with trends and etiquette (and yes, there is definitely such a thing as social media etiquette). And the craziest part is that etiquette changes depending on who your audience is. What works well with one audience can offend or be criticized by another. To help you out, we’ve compiled a list of the “Do’s and Don’ts” of social media engagement. DON’T post content that is all doom and gloom. Audiences don’t want to log...
Read More »

The post To Like or Not to Like on Facebook, That is the Question… appeared first on Attorneys Online, Inc..

What Will You Sell if You Give Away Your Best Blog Content for Free?

by Ramsay @ Blog Tyrant: Start a Successful Blog

If you give away your best blogging content then what’s left to sell? It’s a very interesting question that a lot of bloggers worry about when it comes to deciding how they are going to make money from their blog in the short and long term. Many of us get concerned that if they post...

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to connect with fans on a deeper level? Have you thought about using psychology in your marketing? Implementing basic psychological marketing principles in your social media activities can help you attract, engage, and form emotional bonds with your target audience. In this article, you'll discover three ways to use psychology in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Give Gifts to Encourage Responses If you give people something they find valuable, they'll typically feel indebted to you. To incorporate this neuromarketing tactic in your social media marketing, you can offer a small gift like a discount, free trial, or free resource guide to your fans. Whatever you decide to offer, the goal is to answer the question: "What's in it for me?" On their Facebook page, Spanish soccer club Real Madrid recently offered free shorts with the purchase of a kid's shirt from the team's official store. In just an hour, the post received over 16,000 reactions and 63 shares. Although Real Madrid's massive Facebook following played a role in the success of their offer, this tactic can help drive engagement for businesses of all sizes. If you don't have the luxury of spending money on giveaways, you can drive engagement using free gifts. Anytime Fitness offered their Facebook followers a free downloadable calendar to plan their activity in and out of the gym and track progress toward their fitness goals. To use the reciprocity tactic on your social channels, take a closer look at your audience to better understand what they like and expect. Figure out what compels them to engage and come up with an offer that they're likely to share with friends. Offer something that's valuable to your audience while ensuring that they give you something in return. For example, give a 5% discount or a free trial of your product to anyone who shares and comments on your post. Or host a giveaway contest in which followers with the most shares and social media engagement receive a free product. In the tweet below, users are offered a free design course in exchange for being a beta tester and providing feedback on the course. Users can reciprocate by clicking on the link to apply. They might also want to share the good news with their Twitter followers, which is a form of engagement. The idea behind the reciprocity tactic is to compel the action of engaging with your brand by making people feel obligated to you. While you can't offer a giveaway every day, you can always post useful, shareworthy information related to your business. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, share articles and tips about exercise and healthy eating. #2: Use Emotional Triggers to Create Authentic Connections Connecting with your audience is one of the most basic ways to increase your social media engagement. This neuromarketing tactic makes use of the emotional reaction that's triggered when people feel connected to you. When people feel close to you and can relate to you, there's a great chance they'll engage with your company. To form an emotional connection, you need to start interacting with followers in a meaningful way. Laughter is one of the most effective tools for forming a strong emotional bond with people. Like Chipotle does here, you can use wit and humor to connect with your Twitter followers. The Mexican grill has a deep understanding of their target audience and the kind of humor they'll likely appreciate. This helps them avoid using humor that their followers might find offensive or lame. Chipotle also posts humorous replies to tweets from their fans. Your tweets can show enthusiasm toward your products with the right mix of humor. This works well for driving social media engagement. Here's how you can pull off this neuromarketing tactic to connect with your fans: Study your audience to see what kind of humor they like.

How The Hummingbird Google Algorithm Update Will Affect SEO

by Alex Karlson @ WebFly

On Sept. 26, Google revamped its system of guiding searchers to the content they seek. According to Search Engine Land, the introduction of a new algorithm, called “Hummingbird,” marks Google’s biggest modification in 12 years. Before you begin devising a brand-new SEO scheme to make the most of the changes, bear in mind that Hummingbird […]

Teaching Sells: How to Gain Trust and the Sale by Teaching

Teaching Sells: How to Gain Trust and the Sale by Teaching

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a way to grow your influence while making more sales? Do you ever wonder if teaching is right for your business? To learn how you can sell with teaching, I interview John Jantsch for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Jantsch, who's written four books, including Duct Tape Marketing. His newest book is Duct Tape Selling. John helps small- and mid-sized businesses enhance their sales and marketing efforts. John shares how teaching and sales connect. You'll discover different ways to teach, businesses that do it well and the value of newsletter content. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Teaching Sells How John got into sales John explains that he was exposed to sales at a very young age, when his dad was a representative for a traditional manufacturer. Not only was he exposed to it as a profession, but John's dad was also a great mentor to him. His dad always obsessed about trying to deliver value to his customers and to make sure he kept his word. The way people sell today has changed because of all of the different tools that are available. Back then, people knew what they wanted to buy, but now it's something different. Listen to the show to find out what John's first job was when he left college. How teaching and selling connect First of all, you don't want to be pushy with your product. Most people are turned off by this and build a wall straight away, even if they're interested. Instead, you need to tell stories, share examples of other people's success and start to paint a picture of how you can solve the customer's problem. John feels that with this approach, the trust barrier is removed. It's a great way for other people to relate to you as someone who delivers value, without the exchange of money. Some of the best ways to attract people to you is to teach through workshops, seminars or articles. A lot of people want to be taught and led by someone else. When you develop a reputation for being someone who can teach people, then you get invited to places where you have the opportunity to sell. A lot of people still believe that if you give too much away, you won't be hired. However, from John's experience (and mine), it's the total opposite. The more you give and demonstrate your expertise for free, the more likely you are to attract that ideal customer. People see you as someone who is willing to give before they ask. Listen to the show to discover the percentage of business that John receives from people who are not customers or he doesn't have direct interaction with. An example of a business that is winning by teaching One of the first companies that comes to mind is HubSpot, which makes a profit from teaching. They produce great ebooks and run live webinars with different experts. Another company that John personally uses is REI, which sells quality outdoor gear. They do a tremendous amount of teaching on their website. The information they provide supports the products they sell. It's great for the outdoor enthusiast who wants to be part of that community, as well as buy a product from them. You'll hear a great example of how a small software company stood out from their competitors in the way they market their product and why John believes it's the key to success. Listen to the show to hear other examples of companies and individuals who sell through teaching. What is the "Total Content System"?

Disrupt your sector through a better user experience

Disrupt your sector through a better user experience

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

Do you want to undermine your competitors and disrupt your sector? Then use digital to enhance the user experience.

Elements of Good Website Design (Part 3)

by globalwebdesign @ Global Web Design

A Picture can tell a Thousand Words Although you want to make your Website informative and helpful to your consumer you do not want to overwhelm them with copy. People are generally coming to your Website to find information-not read a novel. In most cases, infographics or pictures will do the job just as, if…

Stop thinking of your site as a marketing tool

Stop thinking of your site as a marketing tool

by Paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ Digital Insights

There is no doubt that our website is a powerful marketing tool. But if we approach it with that attitude in mind we can do more harm than good.

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Welcome to our weekly edition of what's hot in social media news. To help you stay up to date with social media, here are some of the news items that caught our attention. What's New This Week? We've got exciting news this week! The Social Media Examiner Show: Subscribe now (for free) and discover quick tips for marketing your business in our 10-minute daily podcast. Consume snack-sized social media content each day. The result: this daily dose of marketing know-how will equip you to take your social media to an entirely new level. Watch this quick video from our founder AND to discover how to subscribe via an iPhone. Subscribe via iTunes, Stitcher or RSS. Click here to help us spread the word about this new show. Other News Worth Noting Facebook Unveils Facebook at Work: Facebook at Work is "only available to people who have set up a work account through their employer" and is currently in beta only on iOS. Google Lets You Specify Your Social Profiles: Are you a website developer? This new feature allows you to "use markup on your official website to add your social profile information to the Google Knowledge panel in some searches. Knowledge panels can prominently display your social profile information."   Weekly Video Tip // Post by Social Media Examiner. . Studies Worth Examining Q4 Social Login Report: Facebook Losing Ground to Google: Janrain's Q4 2014 social login report shows that while Facebook is still the dominant way people log into websites, Google is closing the gap among music and consumer brand sites. Facebook lost 3% of its social login market share while Google gained 6% in 2014, going from 34% in Q3 to 40% in Q4. REPORT: Messenger Cuts Into Facebook App's Reach: According to November 2014 data from comScore, the Facebook Messenger app is boosting its share of overall reach among U.S. users, at the expense of the social network's flagship app. Messenger rose to fifth place in rankings of reach among smartphone apps at 43.1%. The main Facebook app still overwhelmingly topped the list at 69%. Facebook-owned photo- and video-sharing network, Instagram, took ninth-place position on the list at 30.7%. Social Media Update 2014: A September 2014 survey conducted by the Pew Research Center finds that Facebook has the highest concentration of users, capturing 71% of American adult Internet users and 58% of the entire adult population. However, its overall growth has slowed, while other sites continue to see increases in users. The study also broke down key demographic trends and frequency of use for each of the five major social networks: Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest and LinkedIn. Data Driven and Digitally Savvy: The Rise of the New Marketing Organization: Forbes Insights and advertising technology company, Turn, surveyed 331 senior executives from a range of industries. Of those executives surveyed, 7 in 10 believe their reliance on data analytics for decision-making will either increase significantly (24%) or somewhat (47%) over the next 3 years. Data-driven marketing is credited with creating competitive advantages in customer loyalty (47%), gaining new customers (43%) and customer satisfaction (42%). Sixty-one percent note a measurable increase in ROI from data-driven marketing campaigns. Instagram 2015 Study: The Most Valuable Instagram Study for Your Business: Iconosquare released the largest Instagram study ever conducted, surveying 16,000 Instagram users, tracking 250 million media, and analyzing 39 billion interactions. The published results include 200+ pages of exclusive analyses, case studies and best practices. Their goal is to help marketers better promote their brand, understand best practices, analyze user engagement and recruit and retain users. How Long Does It Take to Plan Facebook, Twitter Content?: Research by Percolate reveals how long companies plan ahead for their content distribution on Twitter and Facebook...

Podcast to Book Deal: How to Turn Your Passion Into Profit

Podcast to Book Deal: How to Turn Your Passion Into Profit

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you host a podcast or write a blog? Want to know what it takes to get a book deal? To discover how to turn your content into a book deal, I interview Lewis Howes. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Lewis Howes, co-author of LinkedWorking (a book focused on LinkedIn) and Ultimate Webinar Marketing Guide. His podcast is called The School of Greatness (a top 100 podcast in iTunes). He also has a brand-new book by the same title: The School of Greatness. Lewis will explore how he went from podcasting to a book deal. You'll discover how Lewis pivoted the focus of his business into something he loves. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcast to Book Deal Lewis's journey Lewis says when he thinks of musicians or performers, the ones who are really successful endure for decades by reinventing themselves every three to five years. They do this by following their own dreams and desires, while staying in tune with their audience. Lewis relates this to his own experience with building a couple of different businesses. While one of those businesses served him and other people for a while, Lewis explains there came a time when he was no longer inspired by teaching people about how to maximize LinkedIn. Lewis shares why he transitioned into webinars and ultimately began The School of Greatness podcast three years ago. Lewis explains that a lot of people connected with The School of Greatness podcast. They started asking for more programs, online courses, coaching, events and now a book. Listen to the show to discover how Lewis and I met, and what he said to me. When and why Lewis started a podcast In 2012, Lewis asked Pat Flynn and Derek Halpern what was working in their businesses to drive traffic, get leads and build their audience. Both of them said their podcast. Find out why he was surprised by their answers. In January 2013, Lewis started podcasting once a week. At the three-and-a-half- to four-month mark, he got an email from iTunes saying they loved what he was doing (the inspiration and guests) and wanted to feature him on their home page. This exposed Lewis to a whole new audience beyond the online marketing audience he'd been building. Now he was reaching people from all over the world who wanted to live a better life. Lewis shares how The School of Greatness started as an interview show and turned into a mixture of interviews and solo episodes. Listen to the show to hear how Lewis came up with the title for his podcast. Lewis's podcast audience and guests Lewis thought his audience was going to be young entrepreneurs, men and women, probably mid 20s to late 30s. He since discovered it serves a much broader audience range: college kids, moms who play it for their kids in the car, the 50-year-old guy who wants to leave his corporate job to build a business, world-class athletes, former athletes and people from all walks of life. Lewis shares how he chooses guests for his podcast and how his delivery has evolved from one podcast a week to two shows a week (Monday and Wednesday), plus a 5-minute inspirational segment on Friday. Lewis also talks about the three things he believes factored into his success: getting featured on iTunes, interviewing Tony Robbins and having people share the first episode he did on video. httpv://youtu.be/kSoO2KjVVG4 Listen to the show to discover how many downloads The School of Greatness gets each month. The book deal In 2007, Lewis read The 4-Hour Workweek by Timothy Ferriss.

How to Get Started on the Most Popular Social Media Networks

How to Get Started on the Most Popular Social Media Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you starting a new social media presence? Do you know what to share on each platform? In this article, you'll discover tips to guide your posting on six social media networks. Listen to this article: #1: Start a Conversation on Facebook People typically use Facebook to catch up on news and chat with friends. If you want to connect with your audience, you can't just copy a headline and call it a day. Instead, ask a question or tease what makes your post interesting. Picture someone sharing the post with their friends. Encourage that with your tone. Your posts will get more engagement on Facebook if you include an image. Share a link and choose a bold image to catch the attention of your fans. You can upload a photo or video directly to the platform. Facebook's algorithm favors native videos uploaded directly. Keep your photos in the 1200 x 630 pixel range. Remember, if you want to boost the post or use it as an ad, the image must include less than 20% text. Facebook users are most active in the afternoon. A general rule is when people are bored at work, they're probably browsing Facebook. One study found that Facebook posts at 3 pm receive the most clicks. Thursday and Friday tend to be the busiest days. Keep an eye on your Facebook analytics to see which posts get the most engagement and adjust your posting schedule accordingly. #2: Inspire and Educate on Pinterest People come to Pinterest on a mission. They want to learn a new skill, buy a new product, or find a new project. For these reasons, valuable and informative posts get the most engagement. Pinterest favors information-rich captions, which can be up to 500 characters long. Tell your audience what inspired you about the pin, give an overview of what they'll find if they click through, and include a call to action like "Click for more" or "Comment with your thoughts." Resize your photos to fit the vertical pin standard. The recommended size is 600 x 1200 pixels. To add more interest, you may want to combine a few photos or add a text overlay. Pinners are more active in the evening and especially on Saturday. Schedule your pins in the evening and make sure you spread them out. If you upload a group of pins at the same time, you'll likely miss out on some engagement. #3: Join the Conversation on Twitter People typically go to Twitter to have a conversation or follow news at a specific moment in time. It's a great place for you to share product updates and news or answer questions from your users or community. Your space and time are limited on Twitter, of course. You have 140 characters to share your take on your link or ask a question. Add one or two relevant hashtags to connect your post to a conversation or community. If you add photos or other images to your tweet, you can boost your retweets by as much as 150%. Horizontal images perform best on Twitter. Keep your images around 440 x 220 pixels. Twitter generally sees the most activity between 1 and 3 pm on weekdays. But because a tweet's half-life is just a few hours, it's good practice to share your content more than once, perhaps in prime time and in the evening or early morning. #4: Keep It Professional on LinkedIn LinkedIn is the professional social network, so people come to the platform with a work mindset. Joining the conversation on LinkedIn is like making a presentation in your office or at an industry conference. Share your industry updates or thoughts on strategy as you would speak to peers or potential clients. This is the place to use the industry lingo you often avoid on other social networks. Like other social networks, visuals will help boost engagement with your content. Horizontal images typically work best. In terms of size, keep your images around 646 x 220 pixels. People spend the most time on LinkedIn mid-week. Post early in the morning or late in the afternoon on Tuesday or Wednesday for bes...

Facebook Instant Articles: How to Get Started

Facebook Instant Articles: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you seen Facebook Instant Articles? Are you curious about how to publish them? To discover how to get started using Facebook Instant Articles, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Leslie Samuel, a blogging expert who runs BecomeABlogger.com. He's also the host of the Learning With Leslie podcast and the head of training for the Social Media Marketing Society. Leslie explores the benefits and challenges of Facebook Instant Articles. You'll discover what you need to know to get started with this new feature. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Instant Articles What Are Instant Articles? A relatively new feature, Facebook Instant Articles offers publishers content-hosting directly on Facebook, so users get a better mobile experience. If you're on the Facebook mobile app and you see an article with a lightning bolt at the top right of the open graph image, it's the Facebook Instant Articles version. When you click through to read that content, it loads very quickly because you're not leaving Facebook to go to another website. Listen to the show to learn about some special features you can add to Facebook's Instant Articles. Benefits for Bloggers Facebook has more than 1.65 billion users. Chances are, if you're trying to reach someone, they're on Facebook. One problem Facebook solves with Instant Articles is eliminating slow page-load times. According to a study by Kissmetrics, if a website takes longer than 3 seconds to load, more than 40% of those users will abandon it. Instant Articles makes content available very quickly. Other benefits include great user experience. Leslie adds that some of the interactive elements help the articles really stand out. Since Facebook seems to reward those producers whose content keeps people on Facebook longer, such as live broadcasting, I ask Leslie about Facebook's monetary benefits for those who choose to advertise. Leslie explains that if you use Facebook's Audience Network, you can do a revenue share. You keep 70% of the revenue generated from ad clicks. It's kind of like AdSense within your instant articles. Leslie doesn't see it as a huge benefit, because you can do that on your website with AdSense or other networks. However, Facebook makes it easy to use ads within your instant articles. According to Facebook, as of right now, they're not giving instant articles preferential treatment. However, the Facebook algorithm strives to show people the best content quickly. So, if more people click through to instant articles, Leslie can see the algorithm naturally giving preferential treatment to this content. Plus, Facebook will show content that gets a lot of engagement to more of the people who like your page. Facebook's desire to get users to spend more time on their platform gives content creators a unique opportunity. Leslie says that in the past, if people put up engaging images or videos and others shared them like crazy, they would get additional reach. With this control over content, ads, and links, a business could use that reach to benefit their brand and business, grow an email list, promote products, and more. For instance, put a link to an email opt-in form at the end of an instant article. Leslie believes that smart marketers using Facebook as a primary marketing platform will figure out how to take advantage of the benefits of instant articles to get users into their system. Leslie discusses the difference between Facebook Notes and Instant Articles,

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your audience? Are you curious about what works on YouTube? To discover more about YouTube video strategy, I interview Owen Hemsath. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Owen Hemsath, a YouTube consultant and president of Videospot, a YouTube consultancy that helps authors and brands succeed on YouTube. Owen also writes on YouTube strategy for ReelSEO. Owen will explore how to put together a smart YouTube plan and how to monetize your YouTube videos. You'll discover the importance of video today, as well as the biggest mistakes marketers make with YouTube. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Strategy Owen's story Owen explains how he decided to pursue his dream of doing video. When Owen began making videos for his ecommerce website and started making money, he realized he could be more successful helping other business owners leverage YouTube than he could doing his own product demos. Owen is now a YouTube specialist and has a YouTube course that teaches the process of building a YouTube channel for business. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KgbwS4kfwyY He currently spends 60% of his time working with clients in a group setting and 40% of his time acting as manager for bigger channels that are looking to connect with brands and monetize. Listen to the show to learn about Owen's early experience making videos. The importance of video today Owen believes that because relationships can be formed through digital communication and social media these days, the value we place on face-to-face interaction has been minimized. Video brings that face-to-face interaction to everyone, since people can use video to develop a one-way relationship with their viewers. He shares that this type of interaction can take place on YouTube, Snapchat, Facebook video, the live-streaming apps (Meerkat, Periscope and Blab), Twitter and Instagram video. Owen explains the relationship between Google and YouTube, and why you're more likely to be found on search if you're leveraging a video content strategy in your overall marketing plan. Listen to the show to hear Owen's thoughts on why people are turning to video, movie comparisons to YouTube and predictions for the future. Mistakes marketers make with YouTube The first thing Owen cautions against is using YouTube as a compilation channel, a holding ground for every video you've ever made. For instance, you may have a couple of Q&A videos with your staff, an old commercial and some home video of the company picnic. All of these videos have low views, and there's no real cohesive strategy. The second thing Owen calls out is violations of what he refers to as the 3 Ps: Platform, Purpose and People. Marketers often violate the Platform when they repurpose their non-YouTube video content (Google hangouts, Meerkat videos or portrait videos) for YouTube. Repurposing leads to a violation against People. YouTubers want to engage with your content, comment and be a part of your community. He says that when marketers repurpose, such as putting their Meerkat videos on YouTube, they're telling their audience they don't care enough to create content for them. The third violation involves Purpose. Marketers need to have a purpose for their videos. They must figure out what they're trying to communicate with their video and the business objective of that video, whether it's to build subscribers, get more shares, grow a list or sell a product. Marketers who don't consider purpose when developing their content strateg...

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready for a social media crisis? Are you wondering what you should do if you or a colleague makes an embarrassing public mistake? To learn how to handle a social media crisis, I interview Gini Dietrich for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Gini Dietrich, author of the brand-new book, Spin Sucks: Communication and Reputation Management in the Digital Age, and founder of the blog Spin Sucks. She runs Arment Dietrich, a PR agency. Gini shares common mistakes businesses make when facing a crisis, and the best ways to deal with these situations when they happen. You'll discover the first steps you need to take, how to handle the situation throughout and when to seek legal advice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crisis Management What happened with Applebee's and the challenges they faced Gini explains how approximately 2 years ago, a waitress at an Applebee's in St. Louis left a check at a table that included an automatic gratuity of 18%. When she returned to collect the check, the customer had crossed out the 18% and had written, "I give God 10%, why do you get 18%?" The customer left a 10% tip instead. One of the waitress' friends took a photo of the receipt, which included the customer's name, and posted it on Reddit. This led to it going viral and the whole world saw it. Applebee's response was that they were going to fire the waitress and her friend, because it was against their policy to show pictures or talk about customers. Especially when a name is included. What happened next on Applebee's Facebook page added fuel to the fire. Applebee's replied to every person's comment on Facebook with a canned PR response. You'll hear what the response included. People didn't take kindly to the way Applebee's handled the situation, and started to dig deep on the Internet. Pictures were discovered that had been posted with good customer feedback on their Facebook page. Although these pictures included the customer's name, nobody got fired for it. A Facebook page was then started to try to get the waitress' job back. You'll hear what Gini's gut instinct was on the person who was handling the corporate Facebook page for Applebee's, and why it contributed to the crisis. Gini advises you never to use a canned PR message on social media, because it's about being social. You need to engage, be transparent and remain human. This means you need to show sympathy and empathy toward what's happening. Always take time to think about the statement before you put it out there. Listen to the show to find out how the way you handle a social media crisis can affect your sales. The first thing you should do once you're aware of an issue Gini says that the first thing you should do is understand what has happened. This means communicating with both sides to get the bigger picture. In Applebee's case, they should have listened to the customer, the waitress and her friend before they did anything else—whether they had a policy in place or not. You have to remember that we live in a world of instant gratification, where people tend to react before they think the situation through. This is when trouble starts and the problem spirals out of control. As a company, you need to step back and figure out your plan of action and your strategy before you can move forward. You'll hear why it's important to acknowledge that you are aware of the situation,

Cut Your Workweek in Half

by Alex Karlson @ WebFly

I work in an office where technological efficiency and speed are vital. As such, I am always on the lookout for new ways to make my day more productive. Two strategies in particular have substantially reduced the amount of time that it takes me to perform almost every task: 1. Keyboard shortcuts 2. Simple, yet […]

How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers

How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you seen as an expert in your industry? Want to develop relationships with the media to become a go-to expert? To explore what marketers need to know to connect with traditional media influencers, I interview Josh Elledge. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Josh Elledge, a consumer advocate and founder of SavingsAngel.com, a site dedicated to consumer savings. He's a weekly syndicated newspaper columnist and has made more than 1,000 TV and radio appearances. Josh is also the founder of UpendPR.com and host of the Savings Angel Show. Josh explores how to connect with traditional media influencers. You'll discover how to develop and build relationships with media via Twitter. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Connect With Traditional Media Influencers Josh's Story Out of high school, Josh joined the United States Navy and became a journalist. He says it was a great way for an 18-year-old to participate in producing video news stories for the Navy and Marine Corps. About 9 1/2 years ago, Josh started a membership-based website called SavingsAngel. SavingsAngel pursues their mission to end hunger, lack, and need in communities by helping consumers cut their grocery bills in half; Josh's company charges customers $3.99/week. Since he had no money for advertising, he was forced to look for other ways to get exposure. Josh shared the mission of SavingsAngel with every media influencer he could get to pay attention to him. His outreach wasn't about promoting SavingsAngel to make a lot of money, it was about finding a way to work with others to achieve what he wanted to do in his area. With print publications, Josh knew to ask for remnant space, or the unsold ad space publications typically fill by running ads for themselves. Josh suggested an alternative to 20 media outlets; they could do a revenue share based on a 1/4- or 1/8-page ad. Several of those outlets made suggestions and he quickly learned what was possible. For radio, Josh developed a segment in which he shares the best 3 to 5 grocery deals in the area (he currently lives in Orlando, Florida). This segment has now become his syndicated newspaper column. He's also been doing a TV segment for the last 5 1/2 years. It's a very popular segment. He gets great feedback on it, and his local FOX affiliate absolutely loves the content he provides each week. Listen to the show to hear what Josh did after the Navy and before he started SavingsAngel. What Marketers Need to Understand About Traditional Media Josh explains that it's very important to understand that you're asking the media to give you publicity and to take a chance on you. You have to pitch them with a great concept for education or entertainment content as part of a segment or in a news story. PR is all about the long game. It's incredibly important not to use any kind of sales language. This opportunity is not about you selling your thing. Josh says the media will be sensitive to you trying to sell to their audience. If you try, you won't be invited back, or worse yet you could be blacklisted. Trust that the influencer will credit you, and give them the space to do that. It's okay for you to mention your brand in passing, but it's absolutely not okay to give calls to action. What is the long game with PR? Become the reliable source and subject-matter expert that the media contact can go back to time and again. Josh says he has been quoted in the Chicago Tribune close to a dozen times and has done his TV segment on FOX 35 close to 300 times.

Underperforming Mobile Pages are Sabotaging Your Revenue. Here’s How to Fix Them.

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Your site gets more traffic from mobile devices than desktops. So… why are your mobile conversions so low? That’s what matters most after all. Right? Right. The typical reason? Your site sucks. Plain and simple. It’s hard to use. The organization is a mess. And it’s slow as a snail. But there’s good news and […]

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you considered creating Facebook ads from your top-performing organic posts? To explore how to identify and boost your best Facebook content, I interview Larry Kim. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Larry Kim, the founder and chief technology officer for WordStream. He's a frequent blogger, pay-per-click expert, and social advertising ninja. Larry explains how to improve the performance of your best content with Facebook advertising. You'll discover how to budget for Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content Larry's Backstory Larry's company, WordStream, does search engine and social media advertising, and Larry believes that it's important for businesses to do both types. For instance, B2B software companies build new features, functions, and solutions that nobody is searching for yet. However, with social ads, these businesses can target people who are likely to buy their software based on demographics, interests, or behaviors. Unlike an individual advertiser who has data about only one business, Larry is able to spot trends and patterns in online advertising because WordStream manages approximately $1 billion of ad spending across Facebook, Bing, and Google and runs thousands of campaigns for different clients. WordStream analyzes all of these campaigns to figure out data such as the typical cost per click and typical engagement rates. Listen to the show to discover the percentage of WordStream's clients using Facebook advertising. How Algorithms Work To understand the algorithms, Larry says it's important to think about the context in which your ad appears. (Our conversation focuses on Facebook, but Larry says the same is true for ads on Twitter and other social media platforms.) When you sponsor or promote a post, you're one of thousands or even millions of companies going after the same audience. Larry explains that the Facebook algorithm is designed to handle that volume in a way that keeps Facebook engaging for users so they come back. To determine which posts to show users and how much to charge the advertiser, Larry believes that the algorithm looks at many different factors, but the main one is engagement (clicks, likes, comments, or shares). A post with low engagement has an engagement rate of 1% to 2%. (Only 1 or 2 people out of 100 engage with the post.) A high-engagement post has a rate of 10% to 15%, and the average is around 2.5% to 3%. Larry emphasizes that Facebook doesn't want users' news feeds filled with ridiculous updates that no one cares about. A company trying to promote garbage content with low engagement rates will be dinged with very few ad impressions. The ad might not even be shown. If the ad does show, the click-through rate will be expensive (a few dollars per click versus a few cents). The reverse is also true. Facebook rewards companies that promote interesting content by showing their ads and charging only pennies per click. Listen to the show to hear Larry's thoughts about how engaging ad content needs to be compared to organic content. Unicorns Because algorithms reward engaging content, Larry believes that the winning advertising strategy is simple: promote your unicorns. These outlier posts do spectacularly well. They get three to five times more traffic than the average post and are among the top 1% to 3% of your most engaging content. For instance, a unicorn post might have a 20% engagement rate,

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is the Pinterest algorithm burying your pins? Looking for tips to get better exposure in the Pinterest Smart Feed? Pinning more isn't always the answer to increasing your visibility on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover four ways to improve the quality of your pins and boards on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Clean Up Your Account Every Month For Pinterest's algorithm to view your account as high-quality, you'll want to focus on curating the best of the best. In turn, Pinterest will be more likely to recommend your pins to others. Not all popular pins are created equal and many of your account's pins won't get substantial repins from your followers. To make sure your account is up to date, set aside time once a month to go through your boards and delete all of the pins that have fewer than five repins. Here's an easy way to delete underperforming pins from a board: Click on the board and then click on the Move Pins button at the top right corner of the board. Next, click on the red Move button. Now you're able to scroll down and view all of the pins on your board and note the number of repins each one has generated. Select the checkmark on each pin that has fewer than five repins. When you're done, click the red Delete button. Currently you can delete only 50 pins at a time, and be careful to stay below 100 daily pin deletions or Pinterest may block you. You should also wait at least seven days before you delete a new pin. Deleting pins is a lot of work, but if you want to build a valuable Pinterest presence, it's a tactic you can't ignore. #2: Pin and Repin Based on Popularity It's very tempting to repin every amazing image, but if you pin indiscriminately, you'll end up with a collection of great images that offer little value to your audience. To curate a popular account with boards that give value to your followers, look a bit further to see how many repins each image actually has before you share it to one of your own boards. Joy Cho / Oh Joy! has an impressive 12.8M followers on Pinterest, and her account is a great example of what happens when you only repin popular pins to your account. Pro tip: It's good practice to check the link of each image before you repin to make sure you're not directing people to a broken link or dodgy website. Check your Pinterest stats to see which of your boards are most popular. This information isn't limited only to your owned boards, but also extends to any group boards you pin to. When you want to share a new original pin from your website or blog, pin it to one of your popular boards and make sure the pin is related to the theme of the board you choose. #3: Combine Pinterest Analytics With Google Analytics to Identify Traffic-Driving Pins It's important to have your website verified on Pinterest. Not only does this reinforce your credibility, but it also allows you to view your website stats. This makes it possible to see which of your original pins from your website or blog are the most popular on Pinterest. You'll want to cross-check this information with Google Analytics and use the combined stats to verify which of your popular pins are driving traffic to your website. To find out, sign into your Google Analytics account and then go to Acquisition > Referrals > Pinterest. Look at the Visits column to detect high-performing pins. Create similar pins to deliver more of what your audience likes, which will improve your pinning strategy. #4: Adjust Board Elements for Visibility in Search If you have a board that isn't getting the visibility you expect or isn't generating the repins you want, you can change your board title to see if the board's performance improves. First, click on the board you want to change and then click on the Edit Board button. Next, you'll see an edit screen where you can change a number of elements for your board, such as the name (or title), description,

209. Uncontrolled ranting

209. Uncontrolled ranting

by paul@boagworld.com (Paul Boag) @ The Boagworld UX Show

This week on Boagworld: Don't obsess over Google ranking, why mission statements must die and the decline of the homepage.

94. Flickr Features

94. Flickr Features

by paul@boagworld.com (paul@boagworld.com) @ The Boagworld UX Show

On this week's show: Paul uses flickr as an example of best practice, Marcus discusses the use of client references and Patrick McNeil from Design Meltdown examines emerging design trends.

Social Customer Care: Apps and Processes for Success

Social Customer Care: Apps and Processes for Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

How does your business respond to customer concerns and inquiries? Do you have a social customer care plan in place? To explore how to improve customer care for your business, I interview Dan Gingiss. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dan Gingiss, author of Winning at Social Customer Care, head of global social media at McDonald's, and host of the Focus on Customer Service podcast. Dan explores the most important qualities of social care representatives. You'll discover tools to make providing social customer care easier. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Customer Care Why Social Customer Care Is Important Offline experiences don't stay offline for long, Dan explains, particularly when they're bad. They get discussed online and things can get out of control. (Just watch the news!) Marketers need to care because they're the ones at the helm of social media handles. Plus, whenever you do social media marketing (organic or paid, but especially paid), people ask customer service questions. When people see your brand in their feeds, they remember their questions or problems. Your marketing is their reminder. More marketing leads to more people talking back. And that can be a good thing. Listen to the show to discover what marketers should never say. Who Should Do Social Customer Care The ideal people for social customer service are those who are naturally empathetic, want to talk to customers and solve their problems, and can remain calm when an angry customer is yelling at them. You don't need to involve everyone, and the people who are involved should like talking to people. These days, social customer care agents are doing work that blurs the line with community management. Which role deals with someone commenting on your really cool sponsorship with the NFL versus someone asking a question about your product or service versus a customer who is really angry because you screwed up? That line may not always be clear. When the marketing department owned all of social media, they were okay with the first two. They loved talking about football and could answer questions. However, when they started getting complaints or complicated questions, they had to call customer service for backup. Customer service's job was to know about the products and services, how to fix things when they went wrong, and most importantly, how to talk to other people. A social customer care agent could be a phone rep, an email rep, or a chat rep. Depending on the size of your organization, the social person may need to have phone skills as well as writing skills. In a large company, people in customer service may work only on the phone, chat, or social. But in a smaller business, one person might handle phone calls and Twitter. However your organization divides up the work of customer service, Dan emphasizes that everyone involved should have the same customer service training. Customers should have a consistent experience, no matter which customer service channel they choose. You've probably seen examples of people calling a company, talking to an agent, and not liking the answer. So they go to Twitter to get a different answer. The biggest mistake the company can make is to give a different answer on Twitter because then you teach everybody to just go to Twitter. Listen to the show to hear Dan discuss what skills customer care agents might need in the near future. Customer Support Bots Although bots have a role in customer support, they still have a ways to go. For instance, Dan tried using a bot to buy flowers and when he needed...

How to Improve Your Pinterest Boards and Gain More Followers

How to Improve Your Pinterest Boards and Gain More Followers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to grow your Pinterest following? Are your Pinterest boards performing? Adding the right types of boards to your Pinterest profile will help increase your visibility and followers. In this article you'll discover how to create Pinterest boards people want to follow. Listen to this article: #1: Stay Relevant With Evergreen Content Boards with evergreen content are important for attracting Pinterest users, and they remain both relevant and interesting to people year-round. Having a Christmas board during the holiday season is normally a good strategy. Ideas for gifts, decorations and food will likely go over well in those few weeks. Come December 26, however, that board will lose a lot of allure for most users. While you'll occasionally get a stray pinner who is interested and saves the board for next year, most users won't be too invested after the holiday has passed. Ideally, it's best to have a large number of boards featuring content that will perform well for longer periods of time. This content will stay relevant, and you can anchor your boards and followers through Halloween jack-o-lantern patterns and stocking stuffer recommendations in December. For example, Food and Wine's evergreen boards Best Brunch Recipes and Grilling drastically outnumber Halloween Party Ideas in the number of pins. Long-term, you'll want both new users and current followers to engage with your pins and follow your boards so they'll continue to be exposed to your content and share it. Evergreen boards are ideal for this purpose. They allow you to push out new content to boards with plenty of followers, getting increased exposure and staying relevant and active. If you curate boards that offer value for longer periods of time, you'll consistently gain more followers. #2: Appeal to Pinners With Current Trends Though it's important to have a solid base of evergreen boards on Pinterest, it can also be hugely beneficial to have a few boards focused on current trends. Whether you dedicate a new board to gifts under $30 for the holiday season or create a board for your best-selling items throughout the year, having at least one immediately relevant board can help catch users' interest. Create a current trends board to promote your most popular or newest items. Sephora uses this tactic with their Trending Now board, which showcases their most popular and talked-about products. They also have Makeup of the Day and Today's Obsession boards that capitalize on this same idea, promoting relevant content that users would be interested in right now. Plenty of Pinterest users want to keep up with the latest trends, so if you have a current trends board that you update regularly, you can grab a lot of followers. Every time you update this board, you're distributing pins of your most popular or newest items for followers to see, increasing the chance that they'll repin and share them with their own followers and the rest of the Pinterest world. Thanks largely to the sense of urgency, current trends boards are a great way to feature your products and drive sales on Pinterest. The only struggle with this type of board is that you need to update it consistently. If you don't, your "trending now" theme will become outdated, and you'll lose user interest and followers quickly. Stay on top of your current trends board to increase followers with content that is important and timely now. #3: Feature How-To Ideas to Draw In DIYers As a site full of recipes, home décor and style recommendations, Pinterest hosts a large amount of DIY content. You can learn how to wear a pashmina 20 different ways, make an apple pie from scratch and update your kitchen with nothing more than spray paint and super glue (though, for the record, not all ideas are necessarily advisable). It's no secret that Pinterest and many of its pinners love the DIY and how-to ideas that show up all over the ...

6 tips for making a logo part of your email campaigns

by Contributing Author @ Vertical Response Blog

Don't embark on a logo design project without considering how a new logo will work with your email marketing efforts

The post 6 tips for making a logo part of your email campaigns appeared first on Vertical Response Blog.

The Future: How Shared Experiences Are Reshaping Business

The Future: How Shared Experiences Are Reshaping Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering where the future of business is heading? Do you want to know how shared consumer experiences are impacting business? To learn about where the business world is headed and what you need to know, I interview Brian Solis for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brian Solis, digital analyst at the Altimeter Group and author of multiple books, including Engage and The End of Business as Usual. His latest book is What's the Future of Business? Brian shares the ideas behind his new book and how the changing social landscape is impacting business. You'll learn about the "four moments of truth" and what steps as a marketer you need to take to prepare for the coming changes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Future of Business What prompted you to write a book called What's the Future of Business? The last book Brian wrote was called The End of Business as Usual and when he thought about what was next in terms of the future of business, he realized that the natural progression would be a book that actually tells us what the future is and what we need to do about it. Business can no longer operate as it had been because things are different now. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SL2HskcJkos#! The subtitle of the book is "Changing the Way Businesses Create Experiences." Customers have become increasingly connected and informed, no longer relying as much on traditional sources such as Google or websites. Now when they begin a discovery process or look to make an informed decision, they are using networks, friends and apps for help or direction. It's the shared experiences that define what they do next. You'll find out why these moments are critical to businesses. The book explores what these four moments of truth are, what they look like and how businesses need to activate them. Below in chronological order are the four moments of truth. Zero moment of truth First moment of truth Second moment of truth Ultimate moment of truth You'll discover what they mean to businesses in this podcast. As a business, you have to look at the people who are sharing their experiences about your business, product or service and why you should intentionally design those experiences. You'll hear how Procter and Gamble created a division around the first moment of truth and why your business would benefit from having that type of person or group in each division that handles each moment of truth. Listen to the show to hear what happens when customer experiences go into blog posts, tweets, status updates, YouTube videos and become the collective consciousness.  How the social landscape has made an impact on businesses Brian explains how advertisers and marketers have known about these moments of truth for a long time. The first and second moment of truth especially. People are thinking this way because Google made a tremendous push around the zero moment of truth. There is a lot of journey-mapping going on right now. When it comes to writing, Brian normally takes an academic approach, but this time he didn't. He made the book an experience in itself, so it could be a proof point to show the reader what he is talking about. Brian worked with the guys at Mekanism to reimagine what a book experience could be. It's a visually rich book. It simplifies a complex subject to the point where you know what to do. Many businesses today are using social media in very expe...

Fine Tuning Your Keywords – Digging Into the Data

by Level343 Team @ Level343

  At the center of every good SEO campaign is a set of keywords. Sure, there’s technical optimization, where you make sure the website is running smoothly, but that’s a minor exception. Many people know that key terms are important, but most who optimize for themselves immediately go for the jugular with short, generic keywords. [...]

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video in your marketing? Want to make sure your copyright is protected? There are simple steps you can take to brand your videos so you're protected if people upload them to Facebook as their own. In this article you'll discover how to protect your video content from freebooting on Facebook. Listen to this article: What Is Freebooting? Freebooting (also known as video piracy) is the act of downloading someone else's copyrighted video (usually from YouTube) and uploading it to Facebook as your own. You need to protect your content and make sure you don't unknowingly propagate the work of pirates. Joe Hanson of It’s Okay to Be Smart explains that freebooting "is not the same as sharing or linking or embedding [online media] from its original source. Freebooting means downloading it without permission from the creator or copyright holder and redistributing it for your own use, often for your own monetary gain. When it comes to video piracy in 2015, Facebook is ground zero." http://i.imgur.com/oqvxxMB.jpg Of the videos on Facebook, 72.5% are pirated. "According to a recent report from Ogilvy and Tubular Labs, of the 1,000 most popular Facebook videos of Q1 2015, 725 were stolen reuploads," says Hank Green. "Just these 725 'freebooted' videos were responsible for around 17 BILLION views last quarter." A recent trend I'm seeing on Facebook is scraped YouTube videos that have been lightly edited and compiled into a montage with large captions or subtitles on the video itself. Given that Facebook has the Autoplay feature on both desktop and mobile, users are more likely to feel drawn in to watch a video and click/tap for the audio if they read the caption. Freebooting hurts people who work hard to create their video identity. For instance, if you're monetizing your YouTube channel, you'll miss out on ad revenues if someone is scraping and reusing your videos. Facebook is just starting to dig into revenue sharing for their ads, but it's only available to a select few advertisers so far. Granted, if there's a call to action or watermark on an illegally uploaded video, it could potentially help increase the visibility of the original creator. But still… Here's how to protect your content, deal with piracy when it happens and avoid sharing pirated videos. #1: Understand Facebook and YouTube Video Piracy Policies YouTube is stringent with their copyright links, so they'll take infringed content down immediately if a complaint is filed. Unlike YouTube, Facebook won't automatically take down pirated content. Facebook is clearly on a mission to ramp up their own video consumption. Native Facebook video posts have the most organic reach, which is probably what has spawned this trend among users. Under pressure to do something about freebooting, Facebook came up with video matching technology to make life a lot harder for pirates. It lets the creator know when a duplicate video is being shared on Facebook. "Videos uploaded to Facebook are run through the Audible Magic system, which uses audio fingerprinting technology to help identify and prevent unauthorized videos from making their way onto the platform," Facebook states. #2: Report Freebooted Videos Destin Sandlin of Smarter Every Day created the following video (which you can share on Facebook) to simplify what freebooting is and the impact it has for content creators. He talks about a German DJ who created a YouTube video that got over 5 million views in four years. A verified Facebook page then downloaded the video from YouTube, uploaded it as a native Facebook video and got 5 million views in four days. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L6A1Lt0kvMA Destin shares three tips for what to do when you come across freebooted videos anywhere on the Internet. He says to capture the freebooted content (with a screenshot or video screen capture), comment (state that it's stolen and direct people back to the original vid...

#lifeatdialogtech Roundup: July 2017

by Caroline Fronczak @ DialogTech

It’s that time again! This month, the DialogTech family had a lot to celebrate, from product launches, to a milestone birthday, to in-office events with community partners and thought leaders. Here’s a snapshot of #lifeatdialogtech in July: Happy 10th Birthday, DialogTech! As we enter a new decade, we have so much to celebrate. From growing the size of our company […]

The post #lifeatdialogtech Roundup: July 2017 appeared first on DialogTech.

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest to build relationships with your audience? Do you want to strengthen ties with your local community? Including a strong geographic focus in your Pinterest marketing can help you create more visibility with people who live or are interested in your locale. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to connect with a local audience. Listen to this article: #1: Add Geographic Information to Your Profile Along with your keyword-rich explanation of what your business does and what you pin, be sure to mention what areas you serve or where your business is located. This helps you show up in Pinterest search results for your area, and lets people know if you're close enough for them to visit or engage your services. If your local business profile is missing this crucial bit of information, click the Edit Profile button to go to your profile. Make sure to enter your location and add more geographic cues in the About You section (think "Serving the Lakes Region of Southern North Carolina") and consider whether your followers might appreciate the extra hint. This is especially helpful if you're a franchisee. Don't limit yourself too much, though. Granite Ridge Estate, a wedding barn, lists their small-town location of Norway, Maine, but also uses "New England" so people searching a broader area have a good chance of discovering them. Adding geographic information may seem like an obvious step, but you'd be surprised how many local businesses leave it out. Suppose you're a photographer looking to attract new business. How will people know if you're close enough to hire if you don't tell them where you are and how far you'll travel? Make it easy for people to find you and buy from you. #2: Optimize Your Boards and Pins for Local Searches Adding your location to the descriptions of individual pins can help people find you when they do a search on Pinterest or Google. That's right, pins (as well as boards and profiles) can be indexed by Google. Include your town or state name in a board or two, as well as any applicable pins. If you serve several areas or your area is known by several names, have a board for any location that people might search for. It's perfectly fine to have more than one board with similar pins. Here's a Granite Ridge Estate pin that pops up in a Google Search for "Maine wedding venue Norway." The exact number of searches performed annually on Pinterest is unclear, but with 100 million users, you can be sure it's significant. VentureBeat reports that the number of Pinterest searches has been increasing by about 81% per year, so it's in your best interest to optimize for search. If you search for "barn wedding new England" on Pinterest, you'll see one of Granite Ridge Estate's boards. The combination of the board title, description, and pins on the board helped the business show up for this search. How can you use this tactic for your business? Wherever appropriate, add your location to your boards, board descriptions, and pin descriptions. If you want people from out of town to find you, think about how people would look for your area. They may not search for Norway, Maine (it's tiny), but they might search for "Southern Maine," "New England," "Maine," or "Southern New England." Using keywords strategically can help ensure your business shows up in location-centered searches. Go through your account and make sure you've used a location wherever it makes sense. For example, if you're a photographer and you pin your work, add the location to the photos in each shoot. Did you take those amazing bridal photos at Scarborough Beach, Maine? Tell people that! #3: Repin and Engage With Fellow Local Businesses Pinterest is more of a search and discovery platform than a true social network. However, there are social elements that allow you to stand out from the crowd of solitary shoppers and pin collectors.

Relationship Marketing: How to Secure Guests Who Become Allies

Relationship Marketing: How to Secure Guests Who Become Allies

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow better relationships with market influencers? Are you wondering if interviewing people can help your business? To learn how interviewing people can help build power relationships for your business, I interview John Lee Dumas for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Lee Dumas, author of the book Podcast Launch and host of the EntrepreneurOnFire podcast—a top-ranked business podcast. John's podcast is a daily show and he has interviewed more than 600 business owners! John shares how he got started with his podcast, how he attracts so many top guests and why he chose his format and niche. You'll discover the benefits that come from the relationships you build through podcasts before, during and after the show is released. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing John's interview technique when he first started out John explains that he had to work at his interview technique every single day. The very first interviews he ever did were for the EntrepreneurOnFire podcast. He says that if you listen to his first 50 episodes, it's obvious that he was new to it. Before John started his own podcast, he loved listening to the likes of Andrew Warner of Mixergy, Pat Flynn of Smart Passive Income and David Siteman Garland of Rise To The Top. He noticed that nobody was doing a 7-day-a-week show, and decided to give it a go. Although he knew he wouldn't be great in the beginning, he knew he had to start somewhere. So he reached out to people in the space to see if they would talk to him. You'll hear why John batch-processes his interviews for the week ahead, and how many episodes he did before he felt like he had settled in. John is now around the 608th episode mark. When you host a podcast, you need to come across as authentic. John advises anyone who is hesitant to host a show to just start talking into a microphone and have some fun. Listen to the show to find out why you don't have to edit out every imperfection when you first start out. The underlying premise to the strategy for EntrepreneurOnFire John says that he truly wanted to build a lifestyle business that he could be passionate about. To be able to do this, he knew he had to grow an audience. He had to become a leader in a particular area, industry and niche. When John listened to podcasts, he connected with them straightaway. He felt like he was having close relationships with the hosts and their guests—people he had never met. He says it's like being the third person in a conversation when you listen to these shows. For John to be able to do a show, he knew he had to be a little bit different and come up with a unique selling proposition. This is when he had his "Ah-ha" moment for a 7-day-a-week podcast. He realized that if he could interview the likes of Amy Porterfield and Adam Baker, and get them to share their journey on his platform, then he could potentially build his audience. You'll hear what John did to help him overcome his fear of rejection so he could build his platform from day one. Listen to the show to hear the story behind how John and I first connected. How interviewing the pros has helped John's business John's goal from the very beginning has been to interview people who not only talk about what they are successful with right now, but also share their failings along the way. John really wanted to break it down so it would connect with his lis...

SEO Title Tags: Best Practices and Examples

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Title tags in SEO are like the title of your book for the demographics of your two most important types of readers; people and robots. The people need to know what they can expect to find on your page when they click the link. The robots (crawlers) prioritize your page and its content through a […]

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you interview people for your blog or podcast? Want to discover different ways to repurpose those interviews? To explore how he built his business through expert interviews, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Nathan Chan, the founder, CEO, and publisher of Foundr Magazine, a paid digital magazine that profiles well-known entrepreneurs. He's built a huge following of almost 1 million Instagram fans and 300,000 email subscribers. He's also launched a new book, Foundr V1.0: Everything you need to know about starting and building a successful business, from the world's most influential entrepreneurs. Nathan shares his interviewing process. You'll discover how Nathan used expert interviews to build his business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building a Business on the Back of Interviews The Start of Foundr In 2013, Nathan was working in IT support at a travel company. He loved the company culture, but the work wasn't a fit. As he searched for something more fulfilling to do, he noticed that the major business magazines, of which he was a fan, were difficult for him to relate to. His life wasn't like the lives of the people on a Forbes billionaire list. Nathan started his magazine with about $3,000 and a goal of filling the gap between major business magazine content and entrepreneurs like himself. He wanted to speak to aspiring young entrepreneurs (he was 26 years old at the time) and provide in-depth content about what it takes to build a successful business. Nathan says that podcasts inspired this vision for his magazine, too. Podcasts were becoming increasingly popular, featured stories about relatable people, and could cover a topic in depth. Four months into producing the magazine, Nathan and his startup magazine faced a major roadblock. A large business magazine sued Nathan's startup magazine for trademark infringement. Luckily, Nathan says, the rebranding of the magazine resulted in the name Foundr, which is a better fit. Listen to the show to learn more about how Nathan responded to the lawsuit by improving the magazine's branding. The Business Model Foundr has three main sources of revenue: magazine subscriptions, the membership site, and courses. The magazine subscription is $2.99/month or $21.99/year and is available through the iTunes and Google Play stores. Across monthly and yearly subscriptions, Foundr has 20,000 monthly readers. On the Foundr membership site, subscribers have access to premium content, an online community, and exclusive training. In addition to the main revenue sources, Foundr includes a bit of sponsorship and advertising. Listen to the show to discover the similarities between what Nathan and I do. Nathan's Interviewing Process Nathan has interviewed successful entrepreneurs including Richard Branson, founder of Virgin; Steve Case, founder of AOL; Arianna Huffington, founder of Huffington Post; Gary Vaynerchuk; Barbara Corcoran; Tim Ferriss; Robert Herjavec; Jessica Livingston, founder of Y Combinator; and others. Much of Nathan's interview preparation involves his day-to-day reading about and listening to the topics, brands, and people Foundr covers. He regularly looks at Facebook, reads what's happening in TechCrunch and Mashable, and follows podcasts to see what they're doing and whom they're interviewing. To help find guests, he looks for people who have books coming out or otherwise need press. By consuming a lot of content, Nathan is aware of what's happening in his space and how to guide the i...

What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago

by adminDdddjc @ Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm

What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago  If you have been trying to get your site ranked higher on search engines, particularly on Google, you know that 10 years ago, it was a much easier undertaking to do so than it is today. Here are some things you should unlearn from 10 years […]

The post What to Unlearn About SEO from 10 Years Ago appeared first on Search Engine Placement | Search Engine Optimization Firm.

Convincing clients to be strategic

Convincing clients to be strategic

by Paul@boagworld.com (Boagworld) @ Digital Insights

As web professionals we know that getting the best from the web involves thinking strategically about the sites long-term management. But how do we convince clients of that?

3 Ways to Use Social Media to Increase Your Search Visibility

3 Ways to Use Social Media to Increase Your Search Visibility

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your search ranking? Wondering how your social activities can support your SEO? In this article you'll discover three ways social media can improve your visibility in search results. Listen to this article: #1: Dominate Your SERP You probably see SERPs every day without giving them a second thought. Simply put, SERP stands for "search engine results page." Every time you search for a keyword or phrase, the search engine displays a SERP. If you claim your business name on the top social media profiles, it's more likely that you'll "own" the first page of results when people search for you. For example, the SERP from a search for the name "KlientBoost" shows the company's website followed immediately by their profiles on Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, and YouTube. KlientBoost owns the search engine results page for their business. To start owning the SERP for your business or brand name, use a service like KnowEm to check for the availability of your business name across popular social media platforms. This makes it easy to reserve your name on as many platforms as possible in a short amount of time. As you claim your social media profiles, you'll need to populate those profiles with your business information, branded images, and links back to your blog or website. While it's true that the links in most social media profiles are "no-follow" (meaning they don't actually pass on authority to your website), these links can help you build trust and credibility in your website's backlink profile with search engines, so make sure to include them. #2: Stand Out Visually With YouTube Video Because most search results are full of text, results that include a video stand out on the page. This means they're likely to gain more clicks even if they place lower on the page. To take advantage of this, create high-quality YouTube videos that answer questions your customers and prospects are likely to ask. Lawn care company LawnStarter posts videos on their YouTube channel that answer common questions people have about maintaining their lawns. The videos are entertaining and stand out in the search results like the one below for the search "how to mow wet grass." #3: Reach Influencers to Support Quality Backlinks When it comes to getting your website or blog to show up in search results for non-branded terms (such as a service you provide), the most influential metric to track is external links to your site. Backlinko analyzed 1 million search results and found that there's a significant correlation between organic search ranking and the number of quality external backlinks. By leveraging social media, you can extend the reach of your content to a larger audience, which will also likely increase the number of clicks and shares it receives. In basic terms, More Shares = More Backlinks = Higher Search Placement. Keep these points in mind to get more visibility and shares for your content: Long-form